Rolls-Royce Icon (TM) Dynamic Positioning System Class 2 User Manual

User Manual
Introduction
Safety
System Description
Delivery Specification
Technical Data
Operating Instruction
Maintenance Instructions
Trouble Shooting
Contact List
Rolls-Royce Icon(TM)
Dynamic Positioning System Class 2
Project id
Vessel
Project name
Yard/Hull
Order no.
Document no.
Revision
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
110735
PSV/UT755LC
Simek, 115 (+repeats)
10 Spare parts
11 Tools
CAA-110735-01MU
A
12 Design drawings
Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and
may not be copied or communicated to a third party, or used for any
purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written
consent of Rolls-Royce Marine plc.
This information is given in good faith based upon the latest information
available to Rolls-Royce plc, no warranty or representation is given
concerning such information, which must not be taken as establishing any
contractual or other commitment binding upon Rolls-Royce plc or any of
its subsidiary or associated companies.
13 Revision
14 Subsuppliers manuals
[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
1
Introduction
1
Purpose .....................................................................................................1-3
Contents ....................................................................................................1-3
Target Groups ...........................................................................................1-3
Terms and Abbreviations ........................................................................1-4
References ................................................................................................1-5

The content of this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be redistributed in whole or in part thereof without
express written consent of Rolls-Royce plc.
Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU

Revision: C

Revision: C
Introduction
1 Purpose
The purpose of the Icon User Manual is to provide the necessary information to plan and
perform a safe and correct operation of the installed system, as well as under-standing
the basic functionality of the equipment. The User Manual covers both operational and
technical aspects of the system.
The personnel involved in using the system must have relevant experience and training
with regards to the use of such systems.
2 Contents
This manual contains the following chapters:
Chapter
Contents
1. Introduction
This chapter specifies the purpose and target groups for the
manual. It also contains list of used abbreviations and a
specification of the document conventions.
2. Safety
This chapter specifies safety instructions to follow when

operating and maintaining system.
3. System Description
This chapter briefly describes the system components, the

system design and the functionality.
4. Delivery Specification
This chapter specifies the delivered equipment.
5. Technical Data
This chapter contains technical specifications and

performance data.
6. Operating Instructions
This chapter describes how to use the Icon system.
7. Maintenance Instructions
This chapter describes how to maintain the Icon system,

including both preventive and corrective actions.
8. Trouble Shooting
This chapter describes how to act when a malfunction occur

in the Icon system.
9. Contact List
This chapter contains contact information for Rolls-Royce

Marine, Dept. Control Aalesund and Rolls-Royce World Wide
Support Organization.
10. Spare Parts
This chapter specifies recommended spare parts for the Icon

system.
11. Tools
This chapter describes required and recommended tools for

the maintenance of the system.
12. Design Drawings
This chapter consists of design drawings that serve as an

information source about the installed system.
13. Revision
This chapter contains the revision history for the total binder,
including a listing of contained documents.
14. Subsuppliers Manuals
This chapter contains documentation from other suppliers

than Rolls-Royce, if such has been delivered by RRM.
3 Target Groups
The User Manual is primarily intended for the user of the system. The user must be
properly trained in using and maintaining the system.

Revision: C
Page 1-3 of 6
Introduction
4 Terms and Abbreviations

Abbreviation or term
Page 1-4 of 6
Description
AC, DC
Alternating Current, Direct Current
AI, AO
Analogue Input, Analogue Output
Az
Azimuth
BASE-T
Basic twisted pair
CAA
Control - Aalesund
CAN-bus
Controller Area Network Bus
CB
Circuit Breaker
NC
Normally Closed
CPP
Controllable Pitch Propeller
CTE
Cross Track Error
CW, CCW
Clockwise, Counter-clockwise
DGPS
Differential Global Positioning System
DI, DO
Digital Input, Digital Output
DP
Dynamic Positioning
DPC
DP Controller (Marine Controller used for DP calculations)
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
FAT
Factory Acceptance Test
FWD, BWD
Forward, Backward
GNSS
Global Navigation Satellite System
GSN
Global Support Network
GUI
Graphical User Interface
HAT
Harbour Acceptance Test
HDG
Heading
HDOP
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
Heave
Vertical motion of the entire ship
H/W, S/W
Hardware, Software
HUD
Head-up Display
IBS
Integrated Bridge System
I/O
Input/Output
IMO
International Maritime Organization
IOC
I/O Controller (Marine Controller used for I/O calculations)
JS
Joystick System
LAN
Local Area Network
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MultiMode, MM
Fibre-optic cable which allows multiple modes (light rays) to pass

through it
NMEA
National Marine Electronics Association
MP
Main Propeller
N/A
Not Applicable
NO
Normally Open

Revision: C
Introduction
Abbreviation or term
Description
Outstation
An outstation provides the interface necessary for the interconnection between the control system and the equipment to be
controlled/monitored (i.e. thruster or switchboard/PMS)
Pitch
The motion of a ship about her transverse axis. This causes the
forward and aft ends of the ship to rise and fall repeatedly.
Pitch is also used as denomination for the angle of the propeller
blades.
PMS
Power Management System
RPM
Revolutions Per Minute
Roll
The motion of a ship about her longitudinal axis. This causes the
ship to rock from side to side.
RRM
Rolls-Royce Marine
RRMC
Rolls-Royce Marine Controller
RSG
Rudder Steering Gear
SAT
Sea Acceptance Test
SB, SWBD
Switchboard
Stbd, Pt
Starboard, Port
S-FTP
Braid and foil screened twisted pair
SP
Setpoint
ST
Straight Tip (a fibre-optic connector used with multimode fiber)
STP
Shielded Twisted Pair
Surge
Alongship movement
Sway
Athwartship movement
THR
Thruster system
VRU
Vertical Reference Unit (also called VRS)
WP
Waypoint
XTE
Cross Track Deviation
Yaw
Rotation about the centre of selected rotation
5 References
References to delivery specific documents are only shown as suffixes in this document.
The document ID syntax is:
CAA-<Project Number>- <Suffix>
See front page of this manual for the delivery specific project number. It is also specified
on the attached lists and drawings to this manual.
Type
Suffix
Description
Drawings
01DC
Cable Diagram
0xDW
Wiring Diagram
01DM
Mechanical Drawing
01DL
Layout Drawing
01LI
Main Item List
01LC
Cable List
01LF
Fuse List
Listings

Revision: C
Page 1-5 of 6
Introduction
Type
Documents
Suffix
Description
01LN
Network List
01TS
Sea Trial Acceptance Test (SAT)
01TF
Factory Acceptance Test Procedure
nnMI
Installation Manual *)
nnMU
User Manual *)
nnMX
Common document for Installation and User Manual *)
For Installation and User Manuals, the initial two digits specifies the Chapter No.
Page 1-6 of 6

Revision: C
Safety
Introduction ...............................................................................................2-3
Disclaimer .................................................................................................2-3
Safety Instructions ...................................................................................2-4
Safety Messages .......................................................................................2-4

The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce plc and may not be copied or communicated to a third party, or
used for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of Rolls-Royce Marine plc.
This information is given in good faith based upon the latest information available to Rolls-Royce plc, no warranty or representation
is given concerning such information, which must not be taken as establishing any contractual or other commitment binding upon
Rolls-Royce plc or any of its subsidiary or associated companies.
Doc. No.: CAA-000001-02MX

Revision: A

Revision: A

Safety
1 Introduction
This chapter provides information regarding safety measures that must be taken to
prevent injury to people and damage of equipment.
Whoever is responsible for the installation, operation or maintenance of this RollsRoyce system, is obliged to read this chapter and fully understand its content before any
installation, operation or maintenance of the system may take place.
2 Disclaimer
Undertaking any work envisaged by this document may either directly or indirectly
create risks to the safety and health of the person undertaking the work or the product
and/or its components while the work is being performed.
It is the responsibility of the user to protect the health and safety of the persons
undertaking the work as well as risk to the product and/or its components. Therefore the
user must ensure that appropriate controls and precautions are identified and taken in
relation to the work envisaged by this document in accordance with the relevant
statutory and legal and industrial requirements.
Neither this document, nor its use, in any way absolves the user from the responsibility
to ensure that the controls and precautions referred to above are implemented.
If any Rolls-Royce product design related features which could create risks to persons,
the product and/or its components are identified, Rolls-Royce should be contacted
immediately.
It is the user's responsibility to make all relevant hazard identifications and risk
assessments of all the activities associated with the use of this document.
It is the user's responsibility to design and implement safe systems of work and to supply
safe equipment (including, without limitation, safety equipment) and training
(including, without limitation, health and safety training) to anyone using this document
to work on products to which it relates.
A user without relevant experience of working in accordance with this document, or
with products to which it relates, should seek appropriate advice to identify the health
and safety controls and precautions that need to be taken while working.
Technical assistance can be sought from Rolls-Royce and will be subject to RollsRoyce's terms and conditions.

Revision: A
Page 2-3 of 4
Safety
3 Safety Instructions
This Rolls-Royce system is a heading/position control system connected to the
propeller, rudder and thruster control systems on board a vessel. By operating the
system, thrust force will be generated at the different propulsion units.
The operator must at all times be aware of:
Consequences of operating the system to prevent injury to people, damage of
equipment, damage to the vessel operated and damage to the surroundings.
That the system will set out an order signal to the propulsion unit if any position sensor
signal differs from the position set in the system.
Such an event will cause the propulsion units to generate thrust force. Special
consideration must be taken when the operator of the system is involved in other
activities, such as communication, operation of other systems or any other activities that
might take the focus away from the operation of the vessel.
4 Safety Messages
Safety messages in this manual are always accompanied by a safety alert symbol and a
signal word. The safety alert symbol is used to alert the reader about a potential risk of
personal injury or damage to the equipment.
The following types of safety messages are used within this manual:
Warning: Risk of... Indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in death or
personal injury.
Caution: Indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in damage to

equipment or property and seriously impact the function of the equipment.
Note:
Page 2-4 of 4
Alerts the reader to relevant factors and conditions which may impact the
function of the equipment.

Revision: A
System Description
1
General ......................................................................................................... 3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
System Overview ......................................................................................... 3

Main Components ......................................................................................... 3
Thrust Allocation ............................................................................................ 7
Signal Processing .......................................................................................... 7
Vessel Model (Filtering and Estimation) ........................................................ 7
Trajectory Generator ..................................................................................... 7
Feedback and Feedforward Control .............................................................. 7
3
Design .......................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch .............................................................. 9
3.2 Operator Station ............................................................................................ 9
3.2.1 Graphical Display(s) ......................................................................... 10
3.2.2 Operator Station Computer .............................................................. 10
3.2.3 Joystick Device ................................................................................. 11
3.2.4 Positioning Device ............................................................................ 12
3.3 Printer .......................................................................................................... 12
3.4 Additional Operator Station (Optional) ......................................................... 12
3.5 Control Cabinets .......................................................................................... 13
3.6 UPS ............................................................................................................. 14
3.7 Thrust Devices ............................................................................................. 15
3.7.1 Status and Settings .......................................................................... 15
3.7.2 Failure Detection and Failure Handling ............................................ 16
3.8 Sensors and Position Reference System .................................................... 17
3.8.1 Multi Sensor System Handling ......................................................... 17
4
Function ..................................................................................................... 18
4.1 Operation Principles .................................................................................... 18
4.2 Graphical User Interface .............................................................................. 19
4.2.1 GUI Philosophy and Interaction ........................................................ 19
4.2.2 Main Layout and Components ......................................................... 20
4.3 System Operation ........................................................................................ 22
4.3.1 Basic Operational Modes ................................................................. 22
4.3.2 Basic System Functions ................................................................... 25
4.3.3 Optional Functions ........................................................................... 27
4.4 Signal Processing Functions ....................................................................... 28
5
Location of Manufacturing Number ......................................................... 33
5.1 Marking Locations ....................................................................................... 33
5.1.1 Product Identification ........................................................................ 33
5.1.2 Company Identification ..................................................................... 33


Revision: C

Revision: C
System Description
1 General
This chapter provides an overview of the Icon system and a technical description of the
main components that give the required knowledge about the system.
The figures, drawings and text in this chapter are general and may not comply to the
actual installation on the vessel. For details on the delivered equipment, see chapter
4 Delivery Specification.
2 System Overview
2.1
Main Components
The redundant Icon DP 2 system is based on a triple controller solution with a redundant
fibre-optic network. Interface to sensors and position reference systems, power system
and thruster system are split into logical groups, based on class requirements and system
segregation.
The triple redundant controller solution features a two-out-of-three voting principle. In
case of controller failure and voting rejection, the operator does not have to intervene.
The remaining two controllers are unaffected and continue the operation. The redundant
network solution handles network failures locally on network level. The connected
nodes do not need special functionality to handle network redundancy. With the DP
system integrity preserved, the DP network is separated from networks of other
applications. The DP cabinets, operator stations, sensors and position reference systems
are dual powered from the redundant UPS system.
A typical Icon DP 2 system configuration is illustrated in figure 1. It shows how the
system parts communicate with each other. A typical system may consists of the
following:
Three control cabinets (triple redundant controllers), alternatively a large single
cabinet. See chapter 12 Design Drawings for delivery specific details.
Redundant fibre-optic network
Two or more Icon operator stations with:
- high-resolution colour LCD with touch-screen interface
- Joystick device
- Positioning device
- Remote display controller (located in the operators chair)
Printer(s):
- for printing of alarms, trendings etc.
Manoeuvring mode selector switch
Sensors and position reference systems (of different types)
Two UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
Interfaces to thruster devices (I/O modules or Rolls-Royce HeliconX3).

Revision: C
Page 3-3 of 34
System Description
DP Operator Stations
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch
Sensor and Position

Reference System
Groups
Control Cabinets
Uninterruptible
Power Supplies
DP Network
Thrust Devices
Figure 1
Page 3-4 of 34
Illustration of an Icon DP System Class 2 Configuration

Revision: C
System Description
From the UPS, 220 VAC power is distributed to the control cabinet(s), the operator
station(s) and positioning reference systems.
Figure 2 shows how power (220 VAC) is distributed to the system parts.
Operator Station 1
Operator Station 2
Control
Cabinets
UPS 1
Figure 2
Main
Main
Main
Main
Sensors and Position

Reference Systems
Main
Sensors and Position

Reference Systems
UPS 2
Illustration of an RR Icon DP System Class 2 220 VAC Power Distribution
The system can consist of one or three control cabinets, depending on the customer
requirements. For systems with only one control cabinet, the cabinet is divided into three
logical sections with separate power supplies. An addtional I/O cabinet will be installed
when using only one control cabinet.
Addtional UPSs may also be added to the system.

Revision: C
Page 3-5 of 34
System Description
The Icon system acquire measurements from the propulsion system, power system,
sensor and position reference systems, and apply thrust setpoints to the propulsion
system, satisfying the commanded surge and sway forces and yawing moment.
The control loop of the Icon system is illustrated in Figure 3.
Thrust Device
Setpoints
Measurements
Power
Limits
Thrust Allocation
Signal Processing
Commanded
Thruster
Forces
Feedback and
Feedforward
Controller
Control System
Estimated Vessel Motion
References
Vessel Model
(Filtering & Estimation)
Trajectory Generator
Operator Input
Figure 3
Page 3-6 of 34
Icon System Control Loop

Revision: C
System Description
2.2
Note:
Thrust Allocation
A thrust device can be any propeller, thruster or rudder.
3
The force demands in surge and sway and moment demand in yaw from the controller
have to be distributed to each thruster as pitch and/or rpm setpoints and (if applicable)
directional setpoints.
The thrust allocation in the Icon system takes into account:
Available power on each bus bar. The Icon system will not enforce thruster action that
exceeds the available power.
Optimal thruster utilisation in normal operations.
Turning rate of thrusters, pitch and rpm response. The direction of azimuthing thrusters
can either be variable (auto direction) or fixed in a set of pre-defined configurations.
Grouping of thrusters. Two or more thrusters can be arranged to be working as a group.
The purpose is often to reduce changes in thruster direction. In cases where thrusters
cannot produce negative thruster force (reverse direction), this ensures that the thrust
demand is fulfilled without unnecessary turning of thruster direction.
Fixed thruster direction configurations or variable thruster direction.
Forbidden sectors for thruster direction.
2.3
Signal Processing
All measurements to the Icon system have to pass several levels of testing and
processing before being used in the control of the vessel. The type of testing and
processing functions used, is dependant on the signal source, see section 4.4 Signal
Processing Functions.
2.4
Vessel Model (Filtering and Estimation)

Oscillatory motion caused by waves will not be compensated by the thrusters, main
propellers and rudders in auto heading and auto position control. Advanced adaptive
wave-filtering and estimation techniques in combination with the internal vessel model
are used to generate estimates of the low-frequency motion of the vessel that
automatically adjusts to the varying sea-states and operational conditions. The estimated
motion (vessel speed, rate-of-turn, position and heading) is used in the feedback control
of the vessel.
2.5 Trajectory Generator

During automatic change heading and change position operations, the internal trajectory
generator ensures a smooth change of the vessel heading and position. The vessel
motion is according to the operator defined motion settings (maximum surge and sway
speed and rate-of-turn). The start-up and end phase of the movement are automatically
adjusted according to the capacity of the propulsion equipment installed.
2.6 Feedback and Feedforward Control

The feedback controller computes the required surge and sway forces and yawing
Revision: C
Page 3-7 of 34
System Description
moment to keep the vessel on the desired position, heading or track in automatic control
modes of operation. The individual position and heading control gain settings influence
how aggressive the system will respond to deviations in position and heading.
Automatic control modes also use reference feedforward control action, based on the
trajectory generator to speed up the response of the system in change position and
change heading operations. Wind measurements are used for wind compensation. I.e.
the wind force and moment acting on the vessel is derived from wind speed and
direction, wind drag coefficients and wind areas scaled by draught measurements. The
corresponding wind feedforward counter force and moment are commanded.
Page 3-8 of 34

Revision: C
System Description
3 Design
3.1 Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch
The manoeuvring mode selector switch (DP selector switch) is used for the selection
of operational mode (independent Joystick control/Manual/Icon control). The switch is
located on the bridge.
Figure 4
Example of a Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch
The manoeuvring mode selector switch can also be used for a fast disconnection of the
Icon system, in case of an emergency situation.
A fast disconnection will cause the separate thruster/rudder control systems to be
enabled instead of the Icon system.
3.2
Operator Station
The operator station or stations have a display with a touch-screen interface, a
positioning device and a joystick device.
The operator stations can be of different versions:
Fixed mounted
Integrated in the operator chair.
The Icon may be equipped with several operator stations.
The main components of an operator station are:
Graphical display for advanced system operation and status monitoring
Computer
Joystick device, including dedicated push-buttons and indicators.
Positioning device, including dedicated push-buttons and indicators
Trackball or mouse (optional).

Revision: C
Page 3-9 of 34
System Description
Figure 5
3.2.1
Example of Icon Operator Station
Graphical Display(s)
A graphical display for the Icon system is a high-resolution colour display with a touchscreen interface. The touch-screen is operated with buttons on the display. A button can
have different colours, indicating the current status of the system.
Remote Control Display (Optional)

For Icon operator stations integrated in the Rolls-Royce operators chair, a remote
control graphical display with a touch-screen interface can be mounted directly on the
chair. The main display is mounted in the close vicinity of the operator station.
3.2.2
Operator Station Computer

The computer contains all application software needed for running the Icon GUI
software. It works independently of the control cabinet(s). It communicates via Ethernet
link.
Page 3-10 of 34

Revision: C
System Description
3.2.3
Joystick Device
The joystick device is used for the mode changes and joystick control operations. Main
parts of the joystick device are:
Three-axes joystick device for manoeuvring (surge, sway and yaw)
Illuminated push-buttons for

- System on/off
- Command transfer
- Auto/manual heading
- Heading setpoint increment/decrement
- Alarm silence
- Dimmer.
Figure 6
Joystick Device

Revision: C
Page 3-11 of 34
System Description
3.2.4
Positioning Device
The positioning device is used for the manoeuvering of the vessel during DP control
mode operations. Main parts of the positioning device are:
Two-axes lever for positioning control with an integrated turning wheel for heading
setpoint control
Illuminated push-buttons for
- DP/joystick control mode (auto/manual position, auto/manual surge and sway)
- Increment/decrement of setting values
- Pause/restore of operation
- Enter/apply.
Figure 7
Positioning Device
3.3 Printer
The Icon system is normally equipped with one plain dot matrix monochrome line
printer, used for alarm printouts.
The system can be equipped with an additional network hardcopy colour printer, used
for printing of trendings, screen-shots, etc.
3.4
Additional Operator Station (Optional)

Depending on the class notation and class society there will always be one or more
required main operator stations. Additional operator stations can also be delivered.
These operator stations are delivered as fully or more limited equipped versions.
A fully equipped operator station will have the same hardware components as a main
operator station.
A limited operator station will have a smaller display and will not be able to present
information to the same extent as a fully equipped operator station.
Note:
Additional operator stations may not confirm with class requirements.

Which operator station to use for a given operation, should be chosen
based on type of operation, area of operation and the risk involved.
Page 3-12 of 34

Revision: C
System Description
3.5
Control Cabinets
For DP class 2 systems, three (or alternatively one large) cabinets are required. All
cabinets are based on the same Rolls-Royce Common Platform design.
Each control cabinet have four Rolls-Royce Marine Controllers with interfaces to
operator stations, thruster devices, power systems, position reference systems (GNSS,
laser, radar, hydro acoustics etc.) and different sensors (gyro compasses, VRUs, wind
sensors etc.).
For the alternative DP2 configuration, the control cabinet contains six Rolls-Royce
Marine Controllers.
Figure 8 shows examples of the location of the main components of the control cabinet.
9
3
10
2
1
Figure 8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Example of an Icon Control Cabinets Layout
Main AC/DC power supply

Circuit breaker for the AC/DC power supply/supplies
Backup AC/DC power supply (if installed)
CAN modules
Rolls-Royce Marine Controller including flash memory (system) (if installed)
Rolls-Royce Marine Controller including flash memory (simulator) (if installed)
Rolls-Royce Marine Controller including flash memory (I/O) (if installed)
System specific I/O modules
System specific network switch
Thruster specific I/O modules
Figure 9 shows examples of the location of the main components of the alternative large
DP2 control cabinet.

Revision: C
Page 3-13 of 34
System Description
DP-A
DP-C
DP-B
1
2
3
4
5
4
10
Figure 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
3.6
Examples of the alternative large DP2 Control Cabinets Layout
Rolls-Royce Marine Controller including flash memory

CAN modules
Network switches
I/O modules
DP-A Main AC/DC power supply
DP-A Backup AC/DC power supply (if installed)
DP-C Main AC/DC power supply
DP-C Backup AC/DC power supply (if installed)
DP-B Main AC/DC power supply
DP-B Backup AC/DC power supply (if installed)
UPS
The uninterruptable power supply, UPS, delivers filtered and stabilized uninterrupted
power for the Icon system. In case of loss of main supply, the UPS can provide power
for the system for at least 30 minutes. The status of the UPS is monitored by the Icon
system.
The connectors for power supply and interfaces are located at the rear of the UPS.
See Figure 10 for the location of the main components of the UPS.
Page 3-14 of 34

Revision: C
System Description
3
4
Figure 10 Example of an Uninterruptable Power Supply Layout, Front and Rear View
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.7
Note:
Circuit breakers
UPS Marine filter
UPS Power module
UPS Battery module
Main switch
Thrust Devices
The Icon system is controlling the thrust devices via a corresponding
remote control system.
3.7.1 Status and Settings

Rudders
The operator can set the maximum permitted rudder angle for manoeuvre operations.
In addition, it is possible to fix a rudder in neutral position (zero angle) such that the
rudder is not actively used.
Azimuth Thrusters
To achieve the optimal system performance, the Icon system will normally actively use
the steering of azimuth thrusters (auto direction) to obtain the best overall utilisation of
the thrust devices. However, it is possible to fix a single azimuth thruster to a set of predefined, fixed directions (typically towards port, starboard, aft, forward). Similarly, a
group of azimuth thrusters will be defined to take a set of fixed directions (typically two
azimuth thrusters aft).
Pitch/Rpm Combinator
The Icon system is configured for combinator run in cases where the thrust device can
actively control both rpm and pitch of the propeller. The combinator curves are
optimised for each propeller with respect to:
Fast thruster force generation
Noise and vibration
Fuel consumption.
Revision: C
Page 3-15 of 34
System Description
Transfer to Lever Control
During operation, the operator can transfer a thrust device to manual lever control. This
functionality depends on the type of remote control system for the specific thrust device.
The command transfer to lever control is by the give-then-take principle. First, the thrust
device is disabled from the Icon system. Secondly the operator must take command on
the lever unit and then control the thrust device manually.
From the Icon system the operator can re-enable the thrust device for Icon operation at
any time.
Some examples where such functionality might be useful are:
Transfer of main propellers (and rudders) to lever control and use the remaining
thrusters for heading control only
Transfer of a swing-up thruster to lever control and keep the remaining thrust devices
for positioning and heading control by the Icon system.
3.7.2 Failure Detection and Failure Handling

Communication and Signal Monitoring
The Icon system continuously monitors and compares the thrust device feedback and
order signals by the setpoint-feedback monitoring function. Any significant steady-state
deviations will result in an alarm.
When thrust device signals are hardwired between the Icon system and the thrust device,
the signals out of range (typically an effect of a broken wire) will issue an alarm.
Communication errors between the Icon system and the thrust device will automatically
be detected.
Insufficient Thrust Configuration

The Icon monitors the system's ability to perform the requested operation based on the
present thrust configuration. The thrust configuration depends on:
Number of active thrust devices
Fixed or automatic direction on azimuth thrusters and rudders
Power system configuration and loads.
When the system is no longer able to generate force in surge or sway or moment in yaw,
insufficient thrust configuration alarms will be issued.
Example 1
If the system is operating with active sway control and a thruster is lost such that sway
force no longer can be generated without also introducing a large moment, the system
will not be able to keep a safe operation. An insufficient sway configuration alarm is
then issued and also clearly indicated on the graphical display.
Example 2
A vessel with two azimuth thrusters aft in a fixed direction configuration. If one of the
thrusters is lost and the other remains fixed in a certain direction, the Icon system cannot
necessarily generate thrust in all three axes. An insufficient configuration alarm is then
issued and also clearly indicated on the graphical display.
Page 3-16 of 34

Revision: C
System Description
Note:
If azimuth thrusters or rudders are set to fixed direction and insufficient

thrust configuration occurs, the system will, if necessary, automatically
disable fixed directions and set the direction control to auto.
3
Note:
If the operator (on purpose) would like to reduce the number of active
thrust devices such that an insufficient thrust configuration situation will
occur, it is recommended to disable surge and/or sway from active control
in order to avoid the alarm situation.
3.8 Sensors and Position Reference System

Note:
For detailed information about sensors that are part of the Icon delivery,
see chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals.
Information about sensors that are not part of the Icon delivery, see
sensor system suppliers manuals.
A number of sensors provide the interfaces for various operator devices monitored by
the Icon system via the control cabinet. In addition to gyro compass, such devices can
be hydro acoustic, laser based, radar based, VRUs, wind sensors, GNSS etc.
Class rules regulate minimum system requirement. The Icon system requires interface
to accurate position measurement systems (typically differential GNSS reference
system). The Icon system also will have interface to at least a wind sensor (relative wind
speed and direction) and a vertical reference unit (VRU) for measurement of roll and
pitch angle of the vessel.
3.8.1
Multi Sensor System Handling

The Icon system can be connected to more than one sensor of the same type. When
multiple sensors are used the system will do a weighting between the signals based on
the signal quality, see section 4.4 Signal Processing Functions.
The Icon system will automatically detect unacceptable deviations between sensors of
same type and an alarm will be issued. If an error is detected in a sensor, the weighting
function automatically decrease the weight factor of that sensor to a minimum. Instead,
the factor from the other sensors of the same type is increased. The operator can also
disable a sensor and thereby stop it from being used.

Revision: C
Page 3-17 of 34
System Description
4 Function
4.1 Operation Principles
The operation of the Icon system is related to the fundamental axes of horizontal motion
surge (alongship), sway (athwartships) and yaw (rotation about the centre of selected
rotation), see figure 11.
surge
sway
yaw
Figure 11 Fundamental Axes of Horizontal Motion
By automatic control of the propulsion system, thruster forces in surge and sway and
thruster moment in yaw will be applied in order to achieve the desired vessel motion,
position, heading or path.
Page 3-18 of 34

Revision: C
System Description
4.2
4.2.1

GUI Philosophy and Interaction
The Icon system operations are performed via the operator devices and the graphical
user interface (GUI). The most common operations can be performed by using dedicated
push-buttons on the operator devices. For details, please refer to the User Manual
chapter 6 Operating Instructions.
The graphical user interface is designed to be a tool for monitoring and actively
controlling the system through intuitive presentation and touch-screen principles. The
amount of information presented on the display is restricted to the basics necessary for
the operation of the system. This helps the operator to focus on the most vital
information.
To achieve the best visibility of the graphical interface, the system can be set to different
colour schemes:
Day-colour scheme with light background colour
Night-colour scheme with the darkest background colour.
A change of the colour scheme will have effect on all operator stations simultaneously.
Status Indications and Colour Codes

In the GUI, different colours are used for the visualisation of:
Selected and active status of thruster device, sensor or position reference system
Online standby state
Alarm status
Feedback signals
Setpoints, orders and other operator inputs
Negative measurements.
Figure 12 GUI Main View (example)

Revision: C
Page 3-19 of 34
System Description
4.2.2
Main Layout and Components

The GUI is specially designed for Icon system operations and touch-screen based user
interaction. The display unit is divided into areas, each representing the different
operational aspects of the Icon system. Depending on the system configuration, the
logical areas can be placed on two different screens. It is also possible to some extent to
control which logical areas to display in each screen.
Figure 13, 14 and 15 show the GUI layout for, respectively:
Splitscreen mode displays the toolbar (5), statusbar (7) and most functions and
settings available in the system, including two stack of panels (1) for main operations
and user defined settings.
Remote control display displays the statusbar (7), toolbar (5) and two stack of
panels (1) for main operations and user defined settings.
Fullscreen mode displays the toolbar (5), statusbar (7) and mostly view only
information.
For detailed information about the different areas and system modes, please refer to the
User Manual chapter 6 Operating Instructions.
3
4
1
6
7
Figure 13 GUI Splitscreen Mode

Pos
Designation
Function
Stack of panels
The stack of panels contains operational functions and user

defined settings.
User HUD
User head-up display, the information presented in these two

areas contain speed indicator, position coordinates indicator,
DP Class monitor, thrust power indicator etc.
Main HUD
Main head-up display, presents vital information about the

vessel movement (i.e. heading, position and order).
World
Area for the visualisation of the vessel position, heading and

motion, and the thruster and rudder usage.
Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons to alter the appearance of the

GUI, change the operational settings of the system and shortcuts to some vital system functions.
Alarm & Message Area Information area, displaying alarm messages and other vital
information.
Statusbar
Page 3-20 of 34
Information area, displaying current system mode and status.


Revision: C
System Description
Figure 14 GUI Remote Control Display
3
4
5
2
6
7
Figure 15 GUI Fullscreen Mode
Note:
For a detailed description of the GUI and its different areas, please refer to
the User Manual chapter 6 Operating Instructions.
Stack of Panels
The stack of panels are displayed, two at the time, on the remote control display and on
the main DP operator station display when set to split-screen view.
The different panels are:
Change used for changing position/heading and tracking operations.
PosRef used for changing the settings for positioning devices.
Sensors used for changing the different sensors settings.

Revision: C
Page 3-21 of 34
System Description
Thrust used for monitoring and enabling/disabling of thrust devices.
Control used for changing of operational functions and modes.
Settings used for changing of different system (operational) settings.
Operation used for changing the settings in different vessel operations.
Performance (available on the remote control display) shows information related to
heading control, speed and rate-of-turn, thruster force and moment order.
4.3
System Operation
The Icon operator stations have a high resolution colour display with a touch-screen
interface. Any operation of the system can be performed through the graphical interface.
In addition, the most common operations can be performed by means of dedicated pushbuttons on the operator devices.
For details, please refer to the User Manual chapter 6 Operating Instructions.
4.3.1 Basic Operational Modes

The Icon system comprise the following basic operational modes:
Standby
Joystick
Positioning.
Standby
Standby is a monitoring mode where the Icon system will not generate any control
outputs (such as thruster action). If sensors and position reference systems are available,
all signals can be monitored on the operator station(s). Feedback and status signals from
thrust devices and power system can be monitored as well. Entering standby from any
other Icon function will immediately stop any thruster action on thrusters actively used
for Icon operations.
Start-up Function
When the system is activated (out of standby), the default start-up function is the
Joystick function with manual position and manual heading control modes. However, it
is possible to define other start-up functions such as yaw control fore.
Start-up heading control function (Manual/Auto) can also be preset in such way that the
Icon system automatically enters fixed heading function when activated. The selected
start-up function will activate only thrust devices needed for the selected function, e.g.
yaw control fore will activate only thrust devices located fore of midship.
Page 3-22 of 34

Revision: C
System Description
Joystick Functions
The Joystick mode comprises all operational functions in surge, sway and yaw for
operating the vessel by means of the joystick device and manual/automatic heading
control. The following operational functions are available as standard for the Joystick
mode:
Manual position and manual heading
In manual position and manual heading, the operator manoeuvres the vessel by using
the three-axes lever. The lever is used for direct generation of surge and sway forces
and yawing moment demands by the thrust devices.
Auto heading (fixed or change heading)
Reliable and accurate heading measurement (usually a gyrocompass) is required for
activating this function. In auto heading, the heading of the vessel is kept automatically
at the present heading setpoint value (fixed heading). Heading deviation is monitored
and an alarm will be issued when moving outside the boundaries.
In auto heading, the heading of the vessel can be automatically controlled from the
present heading towards a new heading setpoint by a change heading operation. A
reference heading signal is generated to ensure a smooth and controlled heading
change operation. In change heading, the system takes into account the maximum
rotation speed setting.
Yaw control (fore/aft)
If surge and sway axes are disabled (no control), the system will control the yawing
moment of the vessel only. This function can be used in cases where few thrust devices
are enabled for active use, e.g. only one tunnel thruster fore and the other thrust devices
are operated by manual levers. The heading function can then be either in manual
heading or auto heading (fixed or change).
Rotation point
When the selected rotation point is Fore or Aft, the system will generate an additional
sway force when the joystick lever is rotated. This sway compensation force is
generated to keep a pure rotation of the vessel around the rotation point.
There is no feedback command involved for positioning the vessel in this operation.
The additional sway force is generated from the yawing moment generated by the
rotation of the joystick lever.
The operator can generate a new heading setpoint in many ways, such as:
Position device Heading wheel
A new heading setpoint is easily generated by rotating the heading wheel in the desired
direction, in increments relative to the present heading setpoint.
Joystick device Push-buttons
Dedicated push-buttons are available for the increment or decrement of the heading
setpoint relative to the present heading setpoint
GUI
When using the graphical user interface, a new heading setpoint can be generated by:
Numeric input of a new heading setpoint
Increment/decrement of the heading setpoint relative to the present heading setpoint.
Whenever a new heading setpoint is defined, the new proposed heading is clearly
displayed on the graphical user interface together with a numeric presentation. The
change heading operation starts when the new heading setpoint is acknowledged by the
operator (by the Accept soft-button on the graphical user interface, or by the Accept
push-button on the joystick or positioning device).

Revision: C
Page 3-23 of 34
System Description
Joystick Settings
The following settings are available for the Joystick mode:
Joystick sensitivity
Heading control gain
Maximum rotational speed (used in change heading operations)
Heading deviation warning and alarm limits
Thrust allocation settings, depending on the thrust configuration of the vessel (e.g. bias
settings, thrust device combinator settings, maximum rudder angle, fixed direction on
azimuthing thrusters).
Positioning Functions
The positioning mode comprises all joystick functions. In addition, the following
operational functions are available:
Auto position (fixed or change position)
The surge and sway axes are controlled automatically. Reliable and accurate position
measurements (e.g. satellite-based systems, laser-based systems, radar-based systems,
hydro-acoustic systems) are required for these operations. The environmental
conditions, the system control gain settings and the number of thrusters active,
determine the performance of the automatic positioning.
In fixed position, the vessel is kept automatically on the operator selected position
setpoint. Position deviation is monitored and an alarm will be issued when moving
outside the boundaries. A change position operation can be initiated for automatic
moving of the vessel from present position towards the new position setpoint.
Reference position signals are generated to ensure a smooth and controlled position
change operation. The surge and sway speed settings determine the response and time
to achieve the new vessel position. Change position operations requires the auto
heading control to be active. A change position operation can be combined with a
change heading operation at any time, either stepwise or in a coupled operation.
Mixed surge and sway control
The operator can select combinations of surge and sway axes control (No control,
Manual or Auto).
Manual/auto heading control
Automatic heading control (fixed or change heading) is in most cases required in
combination with any auto position mode.
Rotation point
The operator can set the rotation (pivot) point, either by means of a set of pre-defined
rotation points, or by a user-defined rotation point. The actual vessel position, the
position setpoint and the position deviation monitoring, are always related to the
selected rotation point.
When the selected rotation point is Fore or Aft, the system will generate an additional
sway force when the joystick lever is rotated. This sway compensation force is
generated to keep a pure rotation of the vessel around the rotation point.
There is no feedback command involved for positioning the vessel in this operation.
The additional sway force is generated from the yawing moment generated by the
rotation of the joystick lever.
Page 3-24 of 34

Revision: C
System Description
Additional Positioning Functions
When in positioning mode, the following additional functions are available:
Wind compensation
If wind speed and direction measurements are available, the resulting wind loads acting
on the vessel can be automatically compensated by the Icon system. This function is
for rapid compensation of variations in wind loads acting on the vessel. In most cases,
the wind compensation feature will enhance the positioning performance.
Positioning Settings
The following settings are available for the Positioning function:

Position control gain (low/medium/high)
Maximum surge and sway speed (used in change position operations)
Position deviation warning and alarm limits
4.3.2 Basic System Functions

Command Transfer
The Icon system provides means for transfer of command control between the different
operator stations. Only one logical operator station (operator devices with
corresponding operator station display(s)) can be in command at a given time.
Command transfer between Icon operator stations can be set-up to require a Give-thantake functionality.
Class Monitoring
In the Icon system, the operator can select the IMO DP class, which the system is
supposed to be in compliance with. Based on this input, the class monitoring function
will provide a complete overview of the system configuration regarding:
Sufficient sensors systems active
Sufficient position reference systems active
The power system and its configuration
Sufficient thrust devices active
DP system hardware components and data network status
Result of the online consequence monitoring function.
Online Consequence Monitoring

The DP online consequence monitoring is a class requirement for IMO DP2 and DP3
operations. Based on the prevailing conditions, this function evaluates online the DP
systems ability to keep the vessel on the desired position, heading or track in a worstcase failure scenario, typically loss of one of the main power bus bars or equivalent.
The DP consequence monitoring function status is presented on the graphical user
interface, and an alarm will be issued when appropriate. For DP class 1 operations, this
function can be disabled.
Power Limitation
The Icon system includes power limitation. When activated, the power limitation
function computes the available power for Icon operation and limits the thrust device
action to avoid power system overload.
Revision: C
Page 3-25 of 34
System Description
Power system measurements, thrust device feedback and internal power models are used
to estimate available power on each power bus for thrust devices controlled by the Icon
system. In cases with power limitation, i.e. insufficient available power to satisfy the
commanded thrust, the thrust orders are equally reduced.
Hence, the thrust reduction ratio is equal for all thrusters on the bus(es) with insufficient
power. Power limitation alarms are submitted for the limited thrust devices, and
limitation status is clearly indicated on the Icon graphical display.
Note:
If desired, the Icon system can be configured not to utilise all the available
power, to avoid an automatic start of the generators by the power
management system.
Power Interface Failure Detection and Failure Handling

The Icon system performs error checks on the power interface. Alarms are issued when
failures on the power system interface are detected. These are I/O link failures, I/O unit
failures or other communication failures.
The value of estimated available power for Icon thrust devices will not be updated
(freeze) when a power interface failure is detected, and the power limitation function
will continue in a non-feedback manner.
Thrust Configuration
When the Icon system is activated (from standby), all available thrust devices are
enabled for active use. During operation, a thrust device can be set to idle state. This
means that the system keeps command of the thrust device, but the thrust order is neutral
(e.g. zero pitch).
When a thrust device is in idle state, the operator have the ability to take command of
the thrust device on the dedicated lever, and operate it in combination with the remaining
thrust devices actively used by the Icon system.
The Icon system will automatically adjust to the actual number of active thrust devices.
If the requested mode of operation cannot be fulfilled due to reduced number of thrust
devices, an alarm will be issued. However, if an axis is set to No control, this alarm
will not be issued.
Note:
When the start-up function is defined to be other than default (Joystick

mode with manual position and manual heading), the system will activate
only the thrust devices required for the selected start-up mode.
Example: If the start-up function is defined to be yaw control fore, only fore
thrust devices are activated.
Built-in Trainer
The purpose of the built-in trainer is to provide operator training and system
familiarisation as an integral part of the Icon system. The built-in trainer comprises a
vessel simulator and a dedicated graphical user interface for set-up of the simulated
operational conditions. The simulator generates realistic dynamic behavior of
environmental conditions, thrust devices, power system, and resulting vessel motion.
Page 3-26 of 34

Revision: C
System Description
The simulator sends artificial measurements and feedback signals to the Icon system that
in real operations are received from the sensor systems, position reference systems,
power systems and thrust devices. Based on these inputs, the Icon system computes
thrust device order signals. In training, these signals are sent back to the vessel
simulator, not the real thrust devices.
3
Note:
4.3.3
The built-in trainer can only be started when the Icon system is in standby
mode. When operating the system with the trainer, this is clearly indicated
on the graphical user interface.
Optional Functions
An Icon system can be delivered with the following optional operational functions:
Waypoint tracking
Target tracking
Towing.
An Icon system can be delivered with the following optional system functions:
Capability analysis.
Waypoint Tracking
Waypoint Tracking is a low speed tracking function that permits the vessel to
automatically move along a track defined by a list of pre-defined waypoints. During the
tracking operation, all three axes (surge, sway and yaw) are controlled automatically.
Each waypoint is defined by the following characteristics:
Latitude/longitude
Radius about the waypoint that defines when to change to the next waypoint
Vessel speed on the leg towards the waypoint.
During a Waypoint Tracking operation, the automatic heading control can be governed
in several ways:
Heading setpoint automatically set by track course (tangentially on track). A side-slip
angle can be defined as additional input to the track course
Operator defined heading setpoint (as in any normal auto heading operation)
During waypoint tracking, the cross-track deviation is monitored. An alarm is issued if
the vessel moves outside the boundaries. The waypoint tracking function can be paused
and resumed at any time by the operator (by the Pause soft-button on the graphical user
interface, or by the Pause push-button on the positioning device).
Waypoints can be transferred from electronic chart systems to the Icon system (if such
an interface exist and is available on the electronic chart system).
Waypoint Tracking Settings
The following additional settings are available in waypoint tracking:
Cross-track deviation warning and alarm limits
Heading setpoint option (operator set/track course/from waypoint list)
Side-slip angle (offset to tangential heading setpoint)
Revision: C
Page 3-27 of 34
System Description
Target Tracking
Target tracking is a function that permits the Icon vessel to track another object - remote
operated vehicle or another vessel - in a fixed distance (range) and direction (bearing).
Accurate and reliable measurements of distance and direction between the DP vessel
and the target are required for target tracking. During the target tracking operation, all
three axes (surge, sway and yaw) are controlled automatically.
A reaction radius about the tracked object is defined whenever target tracking is entered.
Similarly, the present distance and bearing are taken to be the setpoints for distance and
bearing. When the object moves outside the reaction radius, the reaction radius is moved
correspondingly, and thus the vessel starts to track the object.
During target tracking operations, the heading control is governed by operator defined
heading setpoints (as in any normal auto heading operation).
The reaction radius and the distance and the bearing to the tracked object can be adjusted
anytime during the target tracking operation.
Target Tracking Settings
The following additional settings are available in Target Tracking:
Target identification (which target to track)
Reaction radius
Towing
During a towing operation, the operator can add a bias force in the forward direction to
compensate a near constant load. A constant bias force can only be added when the surge
axis control mode is set to Joystick. The bias force will automatically be set to zero by
the system if the Joystick mode is exited.
The joystick lever can be used in combination with the constant bias force to adjust the
total surge force order, i.e. the constant bias force can be neutralized by moving the
joystick in negative surge position.
Towing Settings
The bias surge force can be entered numerically or incrementally up and down from the
GUI.
4.4
Signal Processing Functions

All measurements to the Icon system have to pass several levels of testing and
processing before being utilised in the control of the vessel, see following table. Alarms
will be issued if the Icon system detects any errors in the input signals at any level.
Function\Device
Power
System
Propulsion
System
Interface check
Wind
Sensors
VRUs
Gyro
Compasses
Posrefs
Device specific checks Consistency SP/FB

checks
monitoring
Wind speed
scaling
Output
smoothing
Info quality
evaluation
Range check
Frozen signal check
Wildpoint check
Step check
Signal Processing Functions per Device (X = Applied, = Not Applied)

Page 3-28 of 34

Revision: C
System Description
Function\Device
Power
System
Propulsion
System
High variance check
High dynamics
Position
standardisation
Wind
Sensors
VRUs
Gyro
Compasses
Posrefs
Position alignment
Differ and voting reject
Weighting
Manual scaling
Signal Processing Functions per Device (X = Applied, = Not Applied)

Revision: C
Page 3-29 of 34
System Description
The signal processing functions available is described in more detail in the following
table:
Function
Desciption
Interface check
This function checks that the interface to all sub-systems and devices are working
correctly.
Loop and range checks on signals are performed, as well as hardware and protocol
checks for serial lines and network communication. Possible interface errors will
result in Unavailable status for the specific device in the GUI.
Device specific checks
This function device specific checks on sub-systems and devices.
Range check
t
Out of range
Frozen signal
This function checks if all input signals to the system are within the system specified
range.
Out of range status will result in auto disabling of sensors and position reference
systems.
Out of range status on power signals will cause the signal to be limited on max/min
limit.
Frozen signal check
This function checks that the signals from sensors and position reference devices
are not frozen.
If a signal is unchanged or changes very slowly for an abnormal long period of time,
a signal freeze alarm is issued.
Wildpoint check
t
Wild point &
replacement
Step
High dynamics High variance
This function checks the signals for wildpoints, i.e. single values that are
unexpected and does not follow the curve for the other values.
Signal wild points are replaced, and alarms issued in the GUI.
Step check
Page 3-30 of 34
This function checks the signals from the devices for unacceptable steps.
If unacceptable steps are found, the device will be disapproved until the signal
becomes normal again. For large signal steps the device will be automatically
disabled.

Revision: C
System Description
Function
Desciption
High variance check
This function checks if there are high variances in the output values from sensors
and position reference devices. If there are high variances, the device will be
disapproved until the signal becomes normal again.
High dynamics
This function checks the signals for high dynamics.

For abnormal signal dynamics the device will be disapproved until the signal
becomes normal again. For extreme signal dynamics the device will be
automatically disabled.
Position standardisation This function performs checks on raw measurements, standardized measurements
and aligned measurements for position reference systems.
Out of range and Frozen signal checks are performed on the raw measurements.
The raw measurements are mapped to the standardized vessel position.
The Wildpoint, Step, High variance and High dynamics checks are performed
on standardized positions.
Position alignment
t
Aligning dashed line with continuous
This function is used for alignment of the position reference systems to provide
position measurements that are referred to a common zero frame.
Basically, each GNSS define their own zero point, and the local position references
are aligned with the GNSS zero frame. A GNSS can also be aligned if the position
deviates from another more reliable GNSS.
The position references can be re-aligned from the GUI when required.
If there are no GNSS available one of the local position reference systems will
define the zero frame.

Revision: C
Page 3-31 of 34
System Description
Function
Desciption
Differ and voting reject
Voting rejected
Weighted
Differ rejected
These functions performs divergence checks.

Differ check is performed when two devices of the same type are enabled. If the
difference between the signals of the two devices exceed a predefined limit, a
Differ alarm is issued. If one of the signals clearly moves away from the other, that
device will be Differ Rejected.
Voting Reject is performed when three or more devices of the same type are
enabled. If the difference between the signals of one device compared with the
others exceed a predefined limit, the device is rejected / disapproved until the
signals becomes normal again.
Divergence checks are also performed on disabled devices. The disabled devices
are compared with the enabled devices.
Weighting
This function automatically makes the output values from functional and enabled
sensors and position reference devices affect the system in relation to the quality of
the output signal.
Weighted signals will only be calculated for multiple devices of the same type.
Manual scaling
Page 3-32 of 34
This functions is used to manually control how much specific sensors and position
reference devices affects the system

Revision: C
System Description
5 Location of Manufacturing Number

5.1 Marking Locations
Electrical cabinets and junction boxes are physically marked with a unique tag, and also
on all applicable drawings. The I/O cabinets are marked with the Rolls-Royce logotype
in the upper left corner.
The Rolls-Royce logotype is imprinted in remote control panels, alarm panels and cabin
panels.
Cables are marked with a cable tag at both ends.
5.1.1 Product Identification

Each unit of the Icon system is marked with a unique product identification label, stating
system name and type, unit name and function, and tag number, see example in Figure
16.
Rolls-Royce IconTM
DP System Class 2
MAIN CONTROL CABINET A
+C101
Figure 16 Product Identification Label
5.1.2
Company Identification
The Rolls-Royce Company Identification sticker shows where the product has been
produced and is found on discrete places on all delivered items, e.g. on the inside of the
cabinet doors.
TYPE NO
INST.NO
SERIAL NO
Q.A.- DATE
3
4
MADE IN NORWAY
Rolls-Royce Marine AS
dep.: Automation - Longva
N-6293 Longva,Norway
Figure 17 Company Identification Sticker

Pos
Denomination
Meaning
TYPE NO
Corresponding drawing number with the revision letter

in closed brackets
SERIAL NO
Production order number
INST. NO
MPS number (part number)
Q.A. DATE
Date and signature by test responsible

Revision: C
Page 3-33 of 34
System Description
Page 3-34 of 34

Revision: C
1
General ......................................................................................................4-3
Main Item List ............................................................................................4-3


Revision: B

Revision: B
1 General
This chapter contains a delivery specification of all separately packaged items in the
Rolls-Royce delivery.
Note:
Upon reception of the Rolls-Royce equipment, the receiver must compare

the shipping documents with the physical items received. If any
discrepancy is found, Rolls-Royce must be informed immediately.
2 Main Item List

If the delivery comprise a complete system (Poscon or Icon), the delivery specification
is found in the Main Item List (01LI), see chapter 12 Design Drawings.

Revision: B
Page 4-3 of 4
Page 4-4 of 4

Revision: B
Technical Data
1
General ......................................................................................................5-3
Environmental Data ..................................................................................5-3
Electrical Data ...........................................................................................5-3
4
Hardware Data ..........................................................................................5-4
4.1 Operator Stations .......................................................................................5-4
4.1.1 Main Display ....................................................................................5-4
4.1.2 Display Controller ............................................................................5-4
4.1.3 Input Device ....................................................................................5-4
4.1.4 AC/DC Power Supply ......................................................................5-5
4.1.5 Diode Bridge ....................................................................................5-5
4.1.6 Printers ............................................................................................5-5
4.1.7 Remote Control Display (Operators Chair Only) ............................5-5
4.2 Control Cabinet(s) ......................................................................................5-5
4.2.1 Main Components in the Control Cabinet(s) ...................................5-5
4.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ..........................................................5-7
4.3.1 Main Components in the UPS .........................................................5-7
5
Interfaces ..................................................................................................5-8
5.1 Manoeuvering Mode Selector Switch .........................................................5-8
5.2 Thruster System .........................................................................................5-8
5.2.1 Manoeuvring Mode Selection Signals ...........................................5-10
5.2.2 Manoeuvring Mode Selection Sequence .......................................5-11
5.3 Sensors / Positioning Reference Systems ...............................................5-12
5.4 Power System ..........................................................................................5-12
6
Additional Interfaces ..............................................................................5-12


Revision: B

Revision: B
Technical Data
1 General
This section provides the technical data of the Icon system, with focus on the main
hardware components. Detailed drawings and interface descriptions are found in the
delivery specific drawings, see chapter 12 Design Drawings.
The Icon system is designed to meet the type approval requirements stated by EU
standards and the following classification societies:
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)
Bureau Veritas (BV)
China Classification Society (CCS)
Det Norske Veritas (DNV)
Germanischer Lloyds (GL)
Korean Register of Shipping (KR)
Lloyds Register (LR)

Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (NK)
Registro Italiano Navale (RINA)
Russian Maritime Register of Shipping (RS)
Croatian Register of Shipping (Hrvatski Register Brodova) (CRS)
Indian Register of Shipping (IRS).
2 Environmental Data
Temperature:
055 C
(Engine room)
055 C (Control room, Accomodation and Bridge)
Humidity:
97 %
Vibration:
Restrictions in the 3100 Hz frequency range

313.2 Hz, displacement limited to 1.0
mm
13.2100 Hz, acceleration limited to 0.7 g

EMC:
According to the rules of the Classification Societies, and the

IEC945 standard for Electromagnetic Compatibility
Enclosure:
IP22 (Control room, Accomodation and Bridge)

IP44 (Engine room)
3 Electrical Data
DC power supply
24 VDC
AC power supply
220230 VAC, 5060 Hz*)
*) See chapter 12 Design Drawings for required power details.

All sub-components of the system are powered via the main control cabinets, or directly
from a system UPS (Uninterruptiple Power Supply).

Revision: B
Page 5-3 of 12
Technical Data
4 Hardware Data
This section describes each of the Icon system unit types. Some units in this description
may not be a part of the specific delivery. See the Main Item List (01LI) in chapter
12 Design Drawings, for a detailed listing of the specific system delivery.
Details about the hardware can be subject to change without further notice.
4.1
Operator Stations
The operator stations provide the operator interaction units. The system may be
equipped with several operator stations. The operator station can be divided into several
units. Hence, the sub-panel units can be arranged according to the user requirements and
the requirements to ergonomics at the different bridge arrangement (desk, chair,
integrated bridge system etc.).
Each operator station is interfaced to the control cabinet(s) by means of Ethernet and
CAN bus communication links.
All operations can be performed and monitored either from any main operator station,
integrated in the operators chair or from a desk mounted operator station.
The vessel can also be equipeed with additional, limited operator stations that will have
a smaller display and will not be able to present information to the same extent as a fully
equipped operator station.
In general, the operator stations consists of the following main items:
Display unit (including display controller)
Operator devices
- Joystick device (including a 3-axes joystick lever, push-buttons and indicators)
- Positioning device (including a 2-axes joystick lever, push-buttons and indicators).
4.1.1
Main Display
High-resolution colour LCD with resistive touch-screen interface
24 VDC power supply.
4.1.2
Display Controller
CPU with VGA and 10/100Base-Tx Ethernet
Serial channels (RS-232/RS-485/RS-422)
Compact flash reader
4.1.3
Input Device
CAN bus interface
Page 5-4 of 12

Revision: B
Technical Data
4.1.4
AC/DC Power Supply

Input voltage range: 85264 VAC (4565 Hz)
Nominal output voltage tolerance: 24 VDC 1 %
Setting range for the output voltage: 22.528.5 VDC
Max. output current (continuous): 1020 A @ 24 VDC.
4.1.5
Diode Bridge
Input: 2x24 V/20 A
Output: 1x24 V/20 A.
4.1.6
Printers
Line printer (no graphics, only alarms)
- Impact dot matrix printer with roll paper stand.
- 230 VAC power supply
Hardcopy printer
- High resolution color printer
- 230 VAC power supply.
4.1.7
Remote Control Display (Operators Chair Only)

High-resolution colour LCD with resistive touch-screen
Integrated display controller.
4.2
Control Cabinet(s)
The control cabinet(s) provide the interfaces necessary for the interconnection between
the operator stations, thrust devices, switchboard, sensors and position reference
systems. The number of control cabinets depends on the DP class and customer
requirements of the delivered system.
Each cabinet contains controllers, both for DP calculations (DPC) and I/O calculations
(IOC) such as communicating with thrust devices, switchboard, sensors, position
reference systems and auxiliary systems.
4.2.1
Main Components in the Control Cabinet(s)

I/O modules (digital input/output, analogue input/output and serial line interfaces)
Fused distribution to the control system units (24 VDC to sensors and position
reference systems)
Marine Controllers
AC/DC Power Supply
Diode Bridge
Ethernet Switch
Interface Modules

Revision: B
Page 5-5 of 12
Technical Data
Marine Controllers (DPC and IOC)

CPU (with VGA/DVI) and dual 100Base-Tx Ethernet
5 serial channels (RS-232/RS-485/RS-422)
4 CAN bus channels
Digital outputs.
AC/DC Power Supply

Input voltage range: 85264 VAC (4565 Hz)
Nominal output voltage tolerance: 24 VDC 1 %
Setting range for the output voltage: 22.528.5 VDC
Max. output current (continuous): 10 A20 A @ 24 VDC
Diode Bridge
Input: 2x24 V/20 A
Output: 1x24 V/20 A
Ethernet Switch
Managed switch
10/100 MBit/s twisted pair ports
Fibre-optic ports
Ring network support.
Interface Modules
A control cabinet may be equipped in different ways, dependant of which subsystem to
be interfaced with. In case thrusters or other devices are already equipped with Ethernet
interfaces, there will be less need for digital/analogue I/O. In such case, the cabinet may
be equipped with a separate Ethernet switch connected to the I/O Controller (IOC) in
addition to the CAN I/O modules.
CAN I/O modules
- RRAIO for analogue and digital I/O signals
- RRDIO for digital I/O signals
Signal Isolation Amplifier
- Output current: 0(4)20 mA
- Maximum input current: 25 mA
- Load impedance, current: <= 600 ohm
- Galvanic isolation: 3-way disconnector
Ethernet Switch
- Managed switch
- 10/100 MBit/s twisted pair ports.
Page 5-6 of 12

Revision: B
Technical Data
4.3
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

The UPS delivers filtered and stabilized uninterrupted power for the Icon system. In case
of loss of main supply, the UPS can provide power for the system for at least 30 minutes.
The status of the UPS is monitored by the Icon system.
4.3.1
Main Components in the UPS

Power module
Battery module
EMC filter
Fuses for AC power distribution.
Power Module
On-line double conversion with PFC (Power Factor Correction) system
10/100 MBit/s twisted pair ports (10/100Base-Tx, RJ45 connectors)
Single phase input
Battery Module
Maintenance-free sealed lead acid
20 pcs 12 V/7 Ah batteries in series per module.

Revision: B
Page 5-7 of 12
Technical Data
5 Interfaces
The Icon system can acquire measurements from the power system, the truster system,
sensors and position reference systems, and applies thrust setpoints to the thruster
system. This section provides an overview of the different types of interfaces.
For detailed description of interfaces, refer to the delivery specific interface list. See
chapter 12 Design Drawings.
5.1
Manoeuvering Mode Selector Switch

The control cabinet(s) comprises an interface to the manouvering mode switch system
to be enabled for the Icon system operation. The manoeuvring mode selector switch has
the following states:
Manual (manual manoeuvring, Icon system disabled)
Joystick (Icon system enabled) closed contact when active.
DP control (Icon system enabled) closed contact when active.
5.2
Thruster System
The thruster systems are interface by means of a set of signals. The signals are
communicated to the different other thruster systems in one of two ways:
Ethernet (i.e. Helicon X3)
The interface to the thruster control system is based on network communication. The
thruster system interface is a dedicated network channel from an I/O controller, located
in a control cabinet.
Discrete signals
Each signal has its dedicated pair of wires. They are galvanically isolated at the
transmitting end.
Page 5-8 of 12

Revision: B
Technical Data
The signals are set/received with I/O:s located in the thrusters controller cabinet of the
thruster control system, which again are interfaced towards switchboard, steering gear,
variable speed drive and auxiliaries. For each thruster system, the interface may consist
of the signals listed in the following table.
Signal 1)
Type 2)
Direction
Description
Order Pitch
420 mA or 10 V
THR < Icon
Setpoint pitch: -100 % 100 %
Feedback Pitch
420 mA or 10 V
THR > Icon
Feedback pitch: -100 % 100 %
Order Direction
420 mA or 10 V
THR < Icon
Setpoint azimuth angle:

-180 +180
Feedback Direction
420 mA or 10 V
THR > Icon
Feedback azimuth angle:

-180 +180
Signal is only relevant for azimuth thrusters
Signal is only relevant for azimuth thrusters

Order RPM
420 mA or 10 V
THR < Icon
Feedback RPM
420 mA or 10 V
THR > Icon
Feedback RPM:0 100%
Order Rudder
420 mA or 10 V
THR < Icon
Setpoint angle:35, 45 70
Feedback Rudder
420 mA or 10 V
THR > Icon
Feedback angle:35, 45 70
Thruster Avaliable
Pot. free
THR > Icon
Thruster ready for Icon

system
Thruster Request
Pot. free
THR < Icon
Thruster call from Icon

system
Thruster
Acknowledge
Pot. free
THR > Icon
Thruster has accepted DP

control
Pitch Reduced
Pot. free
THR > Icon
Pitch is reduced due to protection or PMS

power limitation
Setpoint RPM:0 100%
1)
Other status signals may apply, e.g. clutches signal (closed = clutch engaged).
For Ethernet interfaces (outstations omitted), ignore the Type column.
For analogue signals 10 V is available if required, 4-20 mA is preferred.
Calibration: 6 mA = -180 (CCW), 12 mA = 0, 18 mA = +180 (CW).
For a detailed description of each thruster interface, refer to the delivery specific system
drawings. See chapter 12 Design Drawings.
2)

Revision: B
Page 5-9 of 12
Technical Data
5.2.1
Manoeuvring Mode Selection Signals
Joystick
Request
RUN PUMP 1
RUN PUMP 2
Rudder 1 (2 similar)
Request
Rudder request (Separate contacts

operate simultaneously)
Not recommended to select only
one rudder (in or out).
Select both or none!
Acknowledge
DP Mode
Joystick Mode
Enable request
Enable request
DP
Enable request
Manual
Enable request
Enable request
Enable request
Joystick Mode
Joystick
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch
DP
RUN PUMP 1
RUN PUMP 2
Acknowledge
Propulsion / Thruster
Request
Request
Available
Available
Acknowledge
Request
INFO
Not a part decision.
Information for
DP/JS only.
Acknowledge
Propulsion / Thruster
Request
Available
Available
Acknowledge
Acknowledge
INFO
Not a part decision.
Information for
DP/JS only.
Enable Request
Request signal enabled for DP/Joystick operation.
Available
The thruster system is available for DP/Joystick operation and will accept
a request signal.
Request
The DP/Joystick request to take control.
Acknowledge
The thruster/steering gear system is operated from DP/Joystick.
RUN PUMP 1
Pump 1 running (steering gear).
RUN PUMP 2
Pump 2 running (steering gear).
Joystick Mode
Status Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch.
Manual Mode
Status Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch
DP Mode
Status Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch
Page 5-10 of 12

Revision: B
Technical Data
5.2.2
Manoeuvring Mode Selection Sequence

Joystick / DP - Thruster
Enable Request
activated from
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch
Joystick / DP - Steering Gear Interface
No
Enable Request
activated from
Manoeuvring Mode
Selector Switch
Yes
Available
activated from
thruster
Yes
No
RUN PUMP 1
(and/or) RUN PUMP 2 (from)
Yes
Request
from Joystick / DP
Request
from Joystick / DP
No
Acknowledge
activated from
Steering Gear
Yes
Thruster operated
from Joystick / DP

Revision: B
No
Steering Gear
Yes
Acknowledge
activated from
thruster
No
No
Yes
Steering gear operated
from Joystick / DP
Page 5-11 of 12
Technical Data
5.3
Sensors / Positioning Reference Systems

The Icon system may be interfaced to various sensors and positioning reference systems.
This can be done by means of serial or Ethernet connections.
If nothing else is specified in the delivery specific drawings, the sensors and position
reference systems interface protocol is NMEA 0183 on a serial line RS422 9600/8/N/1.
See chapter 12 Design Drawings for delivery specific drawings.
See chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals for details on delivered sensors and position
reference systems.
The Icon system can be connected (point-to-point) to all types of sensors and positioning
reference systems with a standard type of interface.
Types of sensors and position reference systems can be:
GNSS (Global Navigation Satellite System)
Radar based sensor
Laser based sensor
Hydroacoustic based sensor
Taut wire.
Types of external sensors can be:
Gyrocompass
Wind sensor
VRU sensor
Draft sensor
Winch interface
5.4
Power System
The power system interface monitors the status of the applicable circuit breakers, bus tie
and generator load. Interface signal specifications are found in the Wiring Diagram, see
Signal
Type
Direction
Description
Generator load
420 mA
SB > Icon
Generator power load measurement
Generator breaker
Pot. free
SB > Icon
Closed/open = Generator available/

unavailable
Bus tie
Pot. free
SB > Icon
Closed = buses are connected

Open = separate buses
Thruster breaker
Pot. free
SB > Icon
Closed/open = Thruster available/

unavailable
6 Additional Interfaces
Possible additional interfaces may be implemented with the Icon system. In such cases,
details will be found in chapter 12 Design Drawings.
Page 5-12 of 12

Revision: B
Operating Instructions
1
General ......................................................................................................6-3
1.1 Operation Principles ...................................................................................6-3
1.2 Basic Operational Modes ...........................................................................6-3
2
Operation ...................................................................................................6-4
2.1 Joystick Device ...........................................................................................6-4
2.1.1 Push-buttons and Indicators ............................................................6-4
2.2 Positioning Device ......................................................................................6-6
2.2.1 Push-buttons and Indicators ............................................................6-6
2.3 Graphical User Interface .............................................................................6-7
2.3.1 GUI Philosophy and Interaction .......................................................6-7
2.3.2 Main Layout and Components ........................................................6-8
2.4 Activating the Icon System .......................................................................6-10
2.5 Deactivating the Icon System ...................................................................6-10
2.6 Standby ....................................................................................................6-11
2.7 Transfer of Command Between Operator Stations ..................................6-11
2.8 Joystick Operations ..................................................................................6-12
2.8.1 Manual Heading ............................................................................6-12
2.8.2 Auto Heading .................................................................................6-12
2.8.3 Heading Control Settings ..............................................................6-14
2.8.4 Control Presets ..............................................................................6-15
2.8.5 Rotation Point (Pivot) ....................................................................6-15
2.9 Positioning Functions ...............................................................................6-17
2.9.1 Automatic Positioning ....................................................................6-17
2.9.2 Mixed Surge and Sway Control .....................................................6-19
2.9.3 Position Control Settings ...............................................................6-19
2.9.4 Wind Compensation ......................................................................6-20
2.10 Basic System Functions ...........................................................................6-21
2.10.1 Class Monitoring ............................................................................6-21
2.10.2 Online Consequence Monitoring ...................................................6-21
2.10.3 Power Limitation ............................................................................6-21
2.10.4 Thrust Configuration ......................................................................6-21
2.10.5 Built-in Trainer ...............................................................................6-22
2.11 Optional Functions ....................................................................................6-23
2.11.1 Waypoint Tracking .........................................................................6-23
2.11.2 Target Tracking .............................................................................6-24
2.11.3 Towing ...........................................................................................6-24
3
GUI ...........................................................................................................6-25
3.1 Main View .................................................................................................6-25


Revision: B
3.2 Indicators ................................................................................................. 6-26

3.2.1 Heading Indicator .......................................................................... 6-26
3.2.2 Order Indicator .............................................................................. 6-27
3.2.3 Position Indicator .......................................................................... 6-29
3.2.4 Class Monitor Indicator ................................................................. 6-30
3.2.5 Power ........................................................................................... 6-30
3.2.6 Speed Indicator ............................................................................ 6-31
3.2.7 Vessel Position Indicator .............................................................. 6-32
3.2.8 Wind/Resulting Force Indicator ..................................................... 6-32
3.3 Statusbar ................................................................................................. 6-33
3.3.1 System Status ............................................................................... 6-33
3.3.2 In Command/Give Command ....................................................... 6-33
3.3.3 Axes Control ................................................................................. 6-34
3.3.4 Position Reference System .......................................................... 6-34
3.3.5 Wind Compensation ..................................................................... 6-35
3.3.6 Current Camera View ................................................................... 6-35
3.4 Stack of Panels ........................................................................................ 6-36
3.4.1 Working with Panels ..................................................................... 6-36
3.4.2 The Change Panel ........................................................................ 6-37
3.4.3 The PosRef Panel ......................................................................... 6-38
3.4.4 The Sensor Panel ......................................................................... 6-40
3.4.5 The Thrust Panel .......................................................................... 6-41
3.4.6 The Control Panel ......................................................................... 6-43
3.4.7 The Settings Panel ....................................................................... 6-45
3.4.8 The Operation Panel ..................................................................... 6-48
3.4.9 The Performace Panel (Remote Control Display) ........................ 6-52
3.5 Toolbar ..................................................................................................... 6-53
3.5.1 Views ............................................................................................ 6-54
3.5.2 Zoom ............................................................................................ 6-54
3.5.3 Camera Control ............................................................................ 6-54
3.5.4 Alarms ........................................................................................... 6-54
3.5.5 DP System .................................................................................... 6-55
3.5.6 Monitoring ..................................................................................... 6-56
3.5.7 Operation ...................................................................................... 6-56
3.5.8 Print .............................................................................................. 6-57
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Status Symbols and Alarm Handling ................................................... 6-58

Basic Status Symbols .............................................................................. 6-58
Align Status Symbols ............................................................................... 6-58
Additional Status Symbols ....................................................................... 6-59
Alarm Status Symbols ............................................................................. 6-60
Alarm Handling ........................................................................................ 6-61

Revision: B
1 General
This chapter gives a brief overview on how to operate the Icon system. For practical
reasons, it is not possible to go into particulars about all available functions. Instead, the
graphical user interface (GUI) is designed to be as self-explanatory as possible. In the
following sections, the most common functions are described in detail.
1.1
Operation Principles
The operation of the Icon system is related to the fundamental axes of horizontal motion
surge (alongship), sway (athwartship) and yaw (rotation around the selected rotation
point), see figure 1.
surge
sway
yaw
Figure 1
Fundamental Axes of Horizontal Motion
By automatic control of the propulsion system, thruster forces in surge and sway as well
as thruster moment in yaw will be applied in order to achieve the desired vessel motion,
position, heading or path.
1.2
Basic Operational Modes

The main operational modes in the system are:
Standby
The Standby is a monitoring function where the Icon system will not generate any
control outputs (such as thruster action). If sensors and position reference systems are
available, all signals can be monitored on the operator station(s).
Joystick
The Joystick comprises all operational modes in surge, sway and yaw for operating
the vessel by means of the joystick lever and manual/automatic heading control.
Positioning
The Positioning comprises all joystick functionality. In addition, the vessel can be
kept in a fixed position utilising inputs from one or more positioning reference systems.

Revision: B
Page 6-3 of 62
2 Operation
2.1 Joystick Device
2.1.1
Push-buttons and Indicators

Push-buttons
Some push-buttons have two dots on them, indicating that they need to be pressed twice
(double press) to activate the designated function.
Lamp Control
The Lamp control push-button with indicators, used to adjust the light of the indicators
in steps. One long push (2 s.) activates the Lamp Test function.
LED Indication
The LED indicator on the Alarm button (5) flashes red together with the alarm buzzer.
When the Alarm button is pressed to mute the alarm, the LED is lit constantly as long
as there are active alarms.
When the LED below the Give command symbol (right hand symbol) on the
Command transfer button (2) flashes on an operator station, this indicates that the
operator station is ready to take the command.
10
5
4
2
Figure 2
Page 6-4 of 62
Joystick Device

Revision: B
Pos.
Symbol
Function
System activation: Push-button with System On lamp.
Command transfer: Push-button with indicators, used for the transfer

of command between different operator stations. The Give command
(right hand) must normally be activated on the operator station in
command, before command can be obtained by another station.
Manual heading: Push-button with indicator, used to enter the

Manual heading function.
Auto heading: Push-button with indicator, used to enter the Auto

heading function.
Alarm silence: Push-button with indicators, used to mute the alarm

buzzer. The indicators show when an alarm is active.
Decrement: Push-button with indicator, used to decrease the heading

setpoint in pre-defined incremental steps (0.1 or 1 degree).
Increment: Push-button with indicator, used to increase the heading

setpoint in pre-defined incremental steps (0.1 or 1 degree).
Apply: Push-button on top of the joystick lever, used to confirm a new

heading and position setpoint.
Lamp control: Push-button with indicators, used to adjust the light of

the indicators in steps.
10
Joystick lever: 3-axes lever for manual heading and positioning

control.
The lever position generates a force order in surge and sway.
The rotation of the lever generates a yawing moment.

Revision: B
Page 6-5 of 62
2.2
2.2.1
Positioning Device
Push-buttons and Indicators
Some push-buttons have two dots on them, indicating that they need to be pressed twice
(double press) to activate the designated function.
1
8
9
4
3
Figure 3
Pos.
Page 6-6 of 62
2
Positioning Device
Symbol
Function
Auto position: Push-button with indicator, used to enter the

Auto position function.
Manual position: Push-button used to enter the Manual

position function. Indicators for manual surge (left) and manual
sway (right).
Auto surge: Push-button with indicator, used to enter the Auto

surge function.
Auto sway: Push-button with indicator, used to enter the Auto

sway function.
Pause/Restore: Push-button with indicator, used to pause an

operation. With another press on the push-button, the
operation will continue from where it was paused.
Decrement: Push-button with indicator, used to decrease a

value of a setting (optional).
Position lever: 2-axes lever for position setpoint changes with

integrated heading wheel for heading setpoint changes.
Increment: Push-button with indicator, used to increase a

value of a setting (optional).
Apply: Push-button with indicator, used to confirm a new

heading and position setpoint.

Revision: B
2.3
2.3.1

GUI Philosophy and Interaction
The Icon system operations are performed via the operator devices and the graphical
user interface (GUI). The most common operations can be performed by using dedicated
push-buttons on the operator devices. For details, please refer to section 3 GUI.
The graphical user interface is designed to be a tool for monitoring and actively
controlling the system through intuitive presentation and touch-screen principles. The
amount of information presented on the display is restricted to the basics necessary for
the operation of the system. This helps the operator to focus on the most vital
information.
To achieve the best visibility of the graphical interface, the system can be set to different
colour schemes:
Day-colour scheme with light background colour
Night-colour scheme with the darkest background colour.
A change of the colour scheme will have effect on all operator stations simultaneously.
Status Indications and Colour Codes

In the GUI, different colours are used for the visualisation of:
Selected and active status of thruster device, sensor or position reference system
Online standby state
Alarm status
Feedback signals
Setpoints, orders and other operator inputs
Negative measurements.
Figure 4
GUI Main View (example)

Revision: B
Page 6-7 of 62
2.3.2
Main Layout and Components

The GUI is specially designed for Icon system operations and touch-screen based user
interaction. The display unit is divided into areas, each representing the different
operational aspects of the Icon system. Depending on the system configuration, the
logical areas can be placed on two different screens. It is also possible to some extent to
control which logical areas to display in each screen.
Figure 5, 6 and 7 show the GUI layout for:
Splitscreen mode displays the toolbar (5), statusbar (7) and most functions and
settings available in the system, including two stack of panels (1) for main operations
and user defined settings.
Remote control display displays the statusbar (7), toolbar (5) and two stack of
panels (1) for main operations and user defined settings.
Fullscreen mode displays the toolbar (5), statusbar (7) and mostly view only
information.
For detailed information about the different areas and system modes, please refer to
section 3 GUI.
3
4
1
6
7
Figure 5
Page 6-8 of 62
GUI Splitscreen Mode
Pos
Designation
Function
Stack of panels
The stack of panels contains operational functions and user

defined settings.
User HUD
User head-up display, the information presented in these two

areas contain speed indicator, position coordinates indicator,
DP Class monitor, thrust power indicator etc.
Main HUD
Main head-up display, presents vital information about the

vessel movement (i.e. heading, position and order).
World
Area for the visualisation of the vessel position and motion,

and the thruster and rudder usage.
Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons to alter the appearance of the

GUI, change the operational settings of the system and shortcuts to some vital system functions.
Alarm & Message Area Information area, displaying alarm messages and other vital
information.
Statusbar
Information area, displaying current system mode and status.


Revision: B
1
Figure 6
GUI Remote Control Display
3
4
5
2
6
7
Figure 7
Note:
GUI Fullscreen Mode
For a detailed description of the GUI and its different areas, please refer to
section 3 GUI.
Stack of Panels
The stack of panels are displayed, two at the time, on the remote control display and on
the main DP operator station display when set to split-screen view.
The different panels are:
Change used for changing position/heading and tracking operations.
PosRef used for changing the settings for positioning devices.
Sensors used for changing the different sensors settings.

Revision: B
Page 6-9 of 62
Thrust used for monitoring and enabling/disabling of thrust devices.
Control used for changing of operational functions and modes.
Settings used for changing of different system (operational) settings.
Operation used for changing the settings in different vessel operations.
Performance (available on the remote control display) shows information related to
heading control, speed and rate-of-turn, thruster force and moment order.
2.4
Note:
Activating the Icon System

The manoeuvring mode selector switch must be set to DP Control in
order to be able to activate the Icon system, see chapter 3 System
Description for details.
1.
Press the System activation push-button on the joystick device twice.

The System active indicator is lit.
Manual heading mode is automatically set and its indicator is lit.
2.5
Note:
Deactivating the Icon System

A serious error in the Icon system will automatically deactivate the
system.
In such cases, set the manoeuvring mode selector switch to Manual
mode and transfer control of the thrusters and rudders to corresponding
remote control system.
On the operator station that is in command:

1.
Note:
Press the System activation push-button on the joystick device twice.
The manoeuvring mode selector switch can also be used for a fast transfer
of thrust devices to manual lever control.
Page 6-10 of 62

Revision: B
2.6
Standby
In standby (not active) mode, the Icon system is continuously running and processing
input data. However, the system has no control of the thrusters, main propellers or
rudders. The operator can monitor input signals, alarms and system status on the
operator station. The system remains in standby mode until it is activated, see section 2.4
Activating the Icon System.
Note:
2.7
Note:
When the Icon system is in standby mode, audible alarms are

automatically muted.
Transfer of Command Between Operator Stations

The operator station defined as master (e.g. the operator station mounted
in the operators chair) does not require the Give command to acquire
command. Command is obtained by pressing the Command transfer
button twice.
The Icon system has a Give-then-Take command transfer functionality.

1.
Press the Command transfer push-button twice on the Joystick device on the
operator station that currently is in command.
The Give command indicator is lit on all operator stations.
2.
Press the Command transfer push-button twice on the Joystick device for the
operator station to be in command.
The Give command indicator is turned off.
The In command indicator is lit, indicating that the operator station is now in
command.
If no other operator station has taken command within a certain time, the Give
command will time-out.
Note:
It is not necessary for the system to be activated in order to transfer

commands between operator stations.
It is also possible to change system settings on the operator stations
when it is not activated.
Note:
If a failure occurs in the operator station that is in command, the Give

command indicator will automatically be lit on all operator stations.

Revision: B
Page 6-11 of 62
2.8
2.8.1
Note:
Joystick Operations
Manual Heading
Whenever the Icon system is activated the manual heading is the default
operating mode.
1.
Press the Manual heading push-button on the joystick device twice to activate the
manual heading operation function.
In manual heading operation mode, the rotation of the joystick generates a yawing
moment.
The manual heading function is clearly indicated by a symbol in the statusbar on the
graphical display.
Rotation Point
rotation points, or by a user-defined rotation point.
How to change the rotation point is described in section 2.8.5 Rotation Point (Pivot).
2.8.2
Auto Heading
There are three states of automatic heading control:
Fixed heading the vessel is kept at the present heading setpoint automatically.
Change heading the vessel rotates from the present heading towards the new heading
setpoint automatically.
Track In advanced functions, such as target tracking and waypoint tracking, the
heading setpoint can be automatically changed (either in steps or continously changed)
by the Icon system.
The auto heading function is clearly indicated by a symbol in the statusbar on the
graphical display and in the heading indicator.
Note:
In fixed heading operations, the Icon system will issue an alarm if the
heading deviation exceeds the operator defined alarm limit.
In normal operation, the warning limit must be less than the alarm limit.
A warning limit can, however, be set to avoid warnings and only issue
alarms, by setting the warning limit equal to the alarm limit.
See section 2.8.3 Heading Control Settings on how to change the alarm
and warning limits.
Page 6-12 of 62

Revision: B
Fixed Heading
Fixed heading is activated in one of the following ways:
By pressing the Auto heading push-button on the joystick device twice.
From the Control panel (see the following instruction).
These methods can also be used to update the heading setpoint.
When fixed heading is entered, the heading setpoint is assigned to be the actual vessel
heading.
1.
Select the Control panel.
2. Press the Preset mode button, select Normal in the sub-menu.

The fixed heading state can be terminated in two ways:
By selecting Manual heading, see section 2.8.1 Manual Heading.
By deactivating the Icon system, see section 2.5 Deactivating the Icon System.
Change Heading
Note:
Change heading can only be initiated when the system already is

operating in auto heading.
A change heading operation can be initiated in the following ways:

By turning the heading wheel on the positioning device, followed by a press on the
Apply push-button.
By using the Increment/Decrement push-buttons on the joystick device.
Tap the Apply button on screen or push the Apply button on top of the joystick lever
to set the new heading setpoint.
By entering the new heading setpoint in the Change panel:
1.
Select the Change panel, sub-view Standard.
2.
Select the row: Hdg.
3.
Press the calculator button.
4. Enter the new heading setpoint followed by Apply.

Example:
Present setpoint
Input on the calculator
New setpoint
30 degrees
8 and Apply
22 degrees
10 degrees
+ 12 and Apply
22 degrees
10 degrees
22 and Apply
22 degrees
The new heading setpoint is clearly indicated together with the heading measurements
in the heading display area on the graphical display.
The change heading operation can be paused by pressing the Pause push-button, this
makes the vessel stay at heading until pause is released. When it is released the vessel
will continue to the original setpoint.
The change heading operation can be terminated in three ways:
By selecting Manual heading mode, see section 2.8.1 Manual Heading.
By selecting Auto heading mode, see section 2.8.2 Auto Heading.
Revision: B
Page 6-13 of 62
Rotation Point
rotation points, or by a user-defined rotation point.
How to change the rotation point is described in section 2.8.5 Rotation Point (Pivot).
Failure Handling
If heading measurements are lost or disabled during auto heading operations, the internal
vessel model will predict the rotation of the vessel (dead reckoning).
In dead reckoning, an auto heading operation will continue where the command action
is based on the predicted heading and rotational speed signals from the internal vessel
model.
Should this failure situation occur during change heading operations, the internal
reference model will automatically slow down towards zero speed in a controlled
manner to stop the vessel motion.
If the gyro is lost, but the measurements are availbable again, the gyro must be reenabled. This is done from the Measurements panel on the display.
Recovery Handling
If the actual heading differ with more than 3 degrees from the set point, a pop-up menu
appears on the display, and the operator must make one of the following decisions:
Stay - Remain fixed in the present heading (setpoint will then be updated to present
heading)
To setpoint - Move back to the original heading setpoint (or continue the change
heading operation to the new heading setpoint).
Tap Stay or To setpoint followed by Apply in the pop-up menu.
2.8.3
Heading Control Settings

The operator can influence the time needed for the automatic heading change operation
by the maximum turn rate value, defined in degrees per minute. In addition, the system
takes into account the present capacity of the thrusters, main propellers and rudders
when starting and stopping the automatic rotation.
In the Settings panel, sub-view Heading, the following settings are available for the
heading mode operations:
Heading gain (low/medium/high).
Wind compensation (block/unblock).
Maximum acceleration factor (used in change heading operations).
Maximum rotational speed (used in change heading operations).
Heading deviation warning limit and alarm limit.
To change a heading setting:
1.
Select the Settings panel, sub-view Heading.
2.
Select a row where a value shall be changed.
3.
Press the Menu button.
4.
Enter the new value followed by Apply.
Page 6-14 of 62

Revision: B
Note:
In manoeuvring operations, the Icon system always turns the vessel in the
direction that makes the shortest turn.
Note:
The Joystick sensitivity and Thrust bias can be changed in the Allocation
sub-view of the Settings panel.
2.8.4
Control Presets
The control preset is clearly indicated by a symbol in the status area on the graphical
display.
In Normal mode, the joystick lever position generates a force order in surge and sway.
There are different ways of managing the control functions:
By pressing the Manual position push-button on the positioning device twice.
From the Control panel (see the following instruction).
1.
2.
Select a axis row, followed by pressing the Menu button.
3.
Select Joystick from the sub-menu.
Auto Heading Fore (HDG)

If surge and sway axes are disabled (no control), the system will control the yawing
moment of the vessel only. This function can be used in cases where few thrust devices
are enabled for active use, e.g. only one tunnel thruster fore and the other thrust devices
are operated by manual levers.
The heading function can then be either in manual heading, see section 2.8.1 Manual
Heading, or in auto heading (fixed or change), see section 2.8.2 Auto Heading.
To disable the surge and sway axes:
2.8.5
1.
2.
Select the Surge row and press the Menu button to open the axis control submenu.
3.
Press the No control button.
4.
Repeat step 2 and 3 for the sway axis.
5.
Select Normal to terminate Auto Heading Fore, or set the system in Standby.
Rotation Point (Pivot)

The operator can set the rotation point, either by choosing from a list of predefined
rotation points or by entering a user-defined rotation point.
To set the vessel rotation point:
1.
Select the Settings panel on the graphical display, sub-view Pivot.
2.
Select the rotation point (Free select, Fore, Midship, Aft) from the drop-down

Revision: B
Page 6-15 of 62
menu.
Note:
3.
For rotation point Free select there is two extra drop-down calculator menus for
setting Fwd/aft Rotpoint [m] and Stb/Port Rotpoint [m].
4.
For the changes to take place press the Apply button.
Rotation point can not be changed in change heading state.
Page 6-16 of 62

Revision: B
2.9
2.9.1
Positioning Functions
Automatic Positioning
There are three functions for automatic control of positioning:
Fixed position the vessel is kept at the present position setpoint automatically.
Change position the vessel rotates from the present position towards the new position
setpoint automatically.
Track In advanced functions, such as target tracking and waypoint tracking, the
position setpoint can be automatically changed (either in steps or continously changed)
by the Icon system.
Note:
Fixed position can only be activated when heading is controlled

automatically.
In fixed position, surge and sway axes are controlled automatically.

The fixed position function is clearly indicated by a symbol in the status area on the
graphical display.
Note:
In fixed position operations, the Icon system will issue an alarm when
moving outside of the operator defined boundaries.
See section 2.9.3 Position Control Settings on how to change the alarm
limit.
Fixed Position
Fixed position can be activated in different ways:
By pressing the Auto position push-button on the position device twice.
By pressing the Auto surge and Auto sway push-buttons on the position device
twice.
From the Control panel (see the following step-by-step description).
1.
2.
Press the Preset mode button, followed by Normal in the sub-menu. The same
effect can be achieved by directly in the list set surge and sway control to auto.
When auto position is entered, the position setpoint is assigned to be the actual vessel
position.
These methods can also be used to update the position setpoint.
The auto position mode can be terminated in two ways:
By selecting Manual position mode, see section 2.8.4 Control Presets.

Revision: B
Page 6-17 of 62
Change Position
Note:
A change position operation can only be initiated when the system already
is operating in auto position.
A change position operation can be combined with a change heading operation at any
time, either stepwise or in a coupled operation.
There are two ways to initiate a change position operation:
By moving the position lever on the positioning device in the desired direction,
followed by a press on the Apply push-button. The new position is always generated
relative to the vessel alongship (forward/aft) and athwartship (port/starboard) axes.
By entering a new position setpoint in the Change panel. When using the graphical
user interface, a new position setpoint can be defined as:
- Relative position change; North/South and East/West directions.
- Relative position change; alongship (Fwd/Aft) and athwartship (Port/Stbd)
directions.
- Relative position change; distance and course.
- Absolute position in Latitude/Longitude.
- Absolute position in UTM-coordinates (Northing/Easting/UTM zone).
Whenever a new position setpoint is defined, the new proposed position is clearly
visualised in the graphical user interface together with numeric position coordinates
(relative and absolute).
The change position operation starts when the new position setpoint is acknowledged by
the operator (by the Apply button in the graphical user interface, or by the Apply
push-button on the positioning device).
To enter a new position setpoint:
1.
Select the Change panel, sub-view Standard.
2.
Select the row corresponding to the definition to be used.
3.
4.
Enter the new position setpoint followed by Apply.
The system automatically calculates the other position setpoint definitions.

The change position operation can be paused by pressing the Pause push-button on the
position device, this makes the vessel stay at heading until pause is released. When
released the vessel will continue to original position setpoint.
The change position operation can be terminated in three ways:
By selecting Manual position mode, see section 2.8.4 Control Presets.
By pressing the Auto position push-button on the positioning device twice, see
section 2.8.2 Auto Heading.
Page 6-18 of 62

Revision: B
2.9.2
Mixed Surge and Sway Control

The operator can select different combinations of surge and sway axes control (No cntrl/
Joystick/Auto). This is done from the Control panel, or by pressing the Auto surge
and/or Auto sway push-buttons on the positioning device. To change the axes control
from the GUI:
1.
2.
Select the axis where the control shall be changed.
3.
Press the Menu button to open the axis control .
4. Select mode for the axis.

The operator can also chose from different predefined modes (Normal/HDG/HDG &
Sway). This i done in the Control panel.
1.
Press the Preset mode button.
2.
Select mode from the sub-menu, the following selections are available:
Normal - This is the default selection, where all three horizontal axes are controlled
by the joystick lever. The joystick lever position generates a force order in surge and
sway.
HDG - With this selection, manual position of the vessel is disabled in the Icon
system, only the yawing moment (heading) can be controlled.
HDG and Sway - This selection activates manual position in sway, but not in surge.
The yawing moment is also controlled.
2.9.3
Position Control Settings

In the Settings panel, sub-view Position, the following settings are available for the
positioning mode operations:
Position control gain (low/medium/high).
Wind compensation (block/unblock)
Maximum surge and sway acceleration factor (used in change position operations).
Maximum surge and sway speed (used in change position operations).
Position deviation warning limit and alarm limit.
The operator can influence the time needed for the automatic position change operation
by the maximum surge and sway speed settings.
To change a position setting:
1.
Select the Settings panel, sub-view Position.
2.
3.
4. Enter the new value followed by Apply.

Some settings are displayed in the GUI main view:
Position gain indicator, see section 3.2.3 Position Indicator.
Wind compensation is indicated in the status bar, see section 3.3 Statusbar.

Revision: B
Page 6-19 of 62
2.9.4
Wind Compensation
The wind compensation can be individually enabled for the three axes of horizontal
motion (surge, sway and yaw).
To activate the wind compensation feature:
1.
2.
Select an axis to enable the wind compensation for.
3.
Press the Windcomp button.
4. Press the Windcomp On (or Windcomp Off) in the sub-menu.

It is also possible to block (and unblock) the wind compensation for Heading and
Positioning from the Settings panel:
1.
Select the Settings panel.
2.
Select Position or Heading in the drop-down menu.
3.
Select the Wind comp row.
4.
Press the Menu button and select block (or unblock) from the sub-menu.
Page 6-20 of 62

Revision: B
2.10 Basic System Functions

2.10.1 Class Monitoring
The class monitor indicator is displayed in the main view.
The class monitoring function comprise the possibility to select which DP class the
system is assumed to comply with. This is accessed from the Settings panel:
Note:
1.
Select the Settings panel, sub-view System.
2.
Select the DP Class row.
3.
4.
Select DP-class in the sub-menu.
If the system does not comply with the selected class, an alarm will be
issued.
2.10.2 Online Consequence Monitoring

The online consequence monitoring status is presented on the graphical user interface,
and an alarm will be issued when appropriate.
The online consequence monitoring function is viewed in the class monitor indicator
area in the main display area.
This functions is mandatory for DP class 2 and 3 systems, but can be disabled in DP class
1 operations.
2.10.3 Power Limitation

When the power limitation function is activated , it computes the available power for DP
operation and limits the thrust device action to avoid power system overload.
The power limitation function is accessed from the Settings panel:
2.10.4
1.
2.
Select System in the drop-down menu.
3.
Select the Power Lim row and press the Menu button.
4.
Select enabled (or disabled) in the sub-menu
Thrust Configuration
It is possible to enable or disable any specific thrust device in the system.
1.
Select the Thrust panel, sub-view List
2.
Select the preferred truster row and press the Menu button.
3.
Select Enable (or Disable) in the sub-menu.

Revision: B
Page 6-21 of 62
Note:
2.10.5
The Icon system will automatically adjust to the actual number of active
thrust devices. If the requested mode of operations cannot be fulfilled due
to reduced number of thrust devices, an alarm will be issued. However, if
an axis is set to No control, this alarm will not be issued.
Built-in Trainer
The built-in trainer comprises a vessel simulator and a dedicated graphical user interface
for set-up of the simulated operational conditions. The simulator generates realistic
dynamic behavior of environmental conditions, thrust devices, power system, and
resulting vessel motion.
Note:
The built-in trainer can only be started when the Icon system is in standby
mode. When operating the system with the trainer, this is clearly indicated
on the graphical user interface.
The built-in trainer can be set up to simulate a specific environment or fault.

The trainer is accessed from a sub-view in the Operation page on the toolbar.
Operation
From this tab it is possible to start and stop the trainer function and monitor the function
availability.
Note:
When the trainer function is on, it is clearly indicated with the

in the statusbar.
symbol
Settings
From this tab system input signals are set according to the following sub-views:
Environment (wind, current and wave speed and direction)
Target (speed, direction, acceleration, turn rate etc.)
Position reference systems (standard deviation, signal noise, differential limits etc.)
Reflectors
From this tab it is possible to set up laser reflectors used by the vessel. For each reflector,
the following parameters can be set:
Which laser it is being used by
Fixed or mobile (i.e. if it is placed on a vessel or not)
Position (north, east, height)
Active or inactive.
Page 6-22 of 62

Revision: B
Trends
From this tab it is possible to monitor graphs for:
Simulated environment conditions (wind, current and wave speed and direction)
Target object values (speed and direction).
2.11 Optional Functions

2.11.1
Waypoint Tracking
Waypoint tracking is a low speed tracking function that permits the vessel to
automatically move along a track defined by a list of pre-defined waypoints.
During a waypoint tracking operation, the automatic heading control can be governed in
several ways:
Heading setpoint automatically set by track course (tangentially on track). A side-slip
angle can be defined as additional input to the track course.
Operator defined heading setpoint (as in any normal auto heading operation, see
section 2.8 Joystick Operations for details).
Waypoint tracking is enabled from the Control panel:
1.
Select the Control panel, sub-view Waypoint.
2.
Press the Run button, followed by Apply.
Managing Waypoints
The waypoint list is managed from the Change panel, sub-view Waypoint. From
here, the operator can add/delete waypoints or change the settings of a specific
waypoint. Each waypoint is defined by the following characteristics:
The waypoint position, relative and absolute.
A radius about the waypoint, defining when to change to the next waypoint.
Vessel speed and heading on the leg towards the waypoint.
To change the definitions of a waypoint:
1.
Select the Change panel, sub-view Waypoint.
2.
Select a waypoint in the waypoint list (scroll up/down in the list by means of the
scroll bar to the right).
3.
Press the WP Details button to open the waypoint details window.
4.
Select a parameter to change and press the Menu.
5.
Enter the new value, followed by Apply.
Waypoint Tracking Settings

In the Settings panel, Waypoint sub-view, the following additional settings are
available for the waypoint tracking operation:
Heading setpoint option (operator set/track course/from waypoint list).
Maximum heading setpoint offset (side-slip angle, offset to tangential heading
setpoint).

Revision: B
Page 6-23 of 62
Cross-track deviation warning limit and alarm limit.
To change a waypoint tracking setting:
2.11.2
1.
Select the Settings panel, sub-view Waypoint.
2.
3.
Press the calculator button.
4.
Enter the new value followed by Apply.
Target Tracking
Target tracking is a function that permits the DP vessel to track another object - remote
operated vehicle or another vessel - in a fixed distance (range) and direction (bearing).
During target tracking operations, the heading control can be governed by:
Operator defined heading setpoint (as in any normal auto heading operation).
The reaction radius and the distance and the bearing to the tracked object can be adjusted
anytime during the target tracking operation.
1.
Select the Change panel, sub-view Target Tracking.
2.
Select the row where the value shall be changed.
3.
4. Enter the new value followed by Enter.

The following additional settings are available in Target Tracking:
Target identification (which target to track)
Reaction radius
2.11.3
Towing
During a towing operation, the operator can add a bias force in the forward direction to
compensate a near constant load. The joystick lever can be used in combination with the
constant bias force to adjust the total surge force order, i.e. the constant bias force can
then be neutralized by moving the joystick in negative surge position.
In the 'Settings' panel, 'Towing' sub-view, the settings available for towing operations
are:
A bias force can be entered either numerically (reached from the 'Menu' button), or
incrementally up and down from the GUI.
Note:
It is only possible to set a bias surge force when the surge control mode
is set to 'Joystick', see section 2.9.2 Mixed Surge and Sway Control. The
bias force will automatically be set to zero by the system if the 'Joystick'
mode is exited.
Page 6-24 of 62

Revision: B
3 GUI
From the graphical user interface, most of the settings and operating procedures for the
Icon system can be initiated.
3.1
Main View
5
6
7
6
3
10
11
12
1
Figure 8
GUI Main View, Split-Screen View
Pos.
Description
Wind direction and resulting force
Current position
Stack of Panels
Current speed
Order indicator
Heading indicator
Position indicator
Class monitoring visualisation
Power visualisation
10
Toolbar
11
Alarm message area
12
Statusbar

Revision: B
Page 6-25 of 62
3.2
Indicators
3.2.1
Heading Indicator
The heading indicator presents:
Actual vessel heading and heading setpoint (numerically and visualised)
Heading deviation and heading deviation alarm limit
Setting symbols
Figure 9 shows the heading indicator area.
Figure 9
Heading Indicator
Pos
Indication
Actual vessel heading (symbol)
Vessel is turning towards a new heading setpoint
Heading setpoint (degrees)
Heading control gain indication (symbol) (low/medium/high)
Heading deviation
Page 6-26 of 62

Revision: B
Pos
Indication
Actual vessel heading (degrees)
Heading deviation alarm limit
Heading setpoint (symbol)
The colours of the heading indicator (see figure 9) symbolizes the heading deviation as
follows:
Grey
New heading setpoint. Vessel is

turning automatically towards a
new heading setpoint.
Green
Vessel heading is within alarm

and warning limits.
Yellow
Vessel heading is within alarm

limit, but is exceeding warning
limit.
Red
Vessel is out of heading.
By selecting the Setting panel from the Stack of panels, a sub-menu will open where the
operator can change settings and options for the heading operation.
3.2.2
Order Indicator
The order indicator presents:
Visualisation of thruster force order and feedback (magnitude and direction relative to
midship)
Visualisation of thruster moment order and feedback (magnitude relative to midship)
Settings symbols.
Figure 10 shows the order indicator.

Revision: B
Page 6-27 of 62
6
5
1
Figure 10 Order Indicator
Pos
Indication
Joystick lever order (in %)
Force order (outlined) and feedback (solid) visualisation
Surge force in ton/kN (user defined)
Sway force in ton/kN (user defined)
Joystick lever sensitivity indication (low, medium, high)
Moment order (outlined) and feedback (solid) visualisation
Page 6-28 of 62

Revision: B
3.2.3
Position Indicator
The position indicator shows the vessel position in relation to position setpoints,
estimated time of arrival to setpoint, and some setting status regarding positioning.
6
6
1
7
Figure 11 Position Indicator(during change position)
Pos
Indication
Direction of vessels bow
Pivot centre, position relative to setpoint.
Deviation distance between actual position and position setpoint.
CTE, Cross Track Error, closest distance to the calculated bearing to

the new position setpoint.
Position deviation alarm limit
Position gain indicator (low, medium, high)
ETA, Estimated Time of Arrival, time left until new position setpoint is
reached. (Visible only in automatic change position operations.)

Revision: B
Page 6-29 of 62
3.2.4
Class Monitor Indicator

The class monitor shows how the system complies with selected DP class. Status symbol
are shown for:
Thrusters
Power
Capability (A result of the online consequence monitoring function.)
Position reference systems
Sensors
System.
Note:
If any sub-system does not comply with the class, DP operations for the
selected class may not be carried out. Demands on different class types
vary, depending on the classification society.
Figure 12 Class Monitor (example)
3.2.5
Selected DP class.
List of sub-system compliance with the selected class. See section 4.1
Basic Status Symbols for symbol descriptions.
Power
This indicator shows the used thrust power, divided on starboard and port power buses.
For further information on power distribution, see section 3.5.5 DP System.
Page 6-30 of 62

Revision: B
Figure 13 Power Indicator
3.2.6
Power output (numerical value)
Power output visualisation
Speed Indicator
This indicator shows the vessel speed in all horizontal axes. The speed is also visualised
by the size of the symbol.
2
3
Figure 14 Speed Indicator

1
Surge speed forward (positive values, green colour) and

aft (negative values, orange colour).
Sway speed towards starboard (positive values, green colour) and

towards port (negative values, orange colour).
Rotational speed CW (positive values, green colour) and

CCW (negative values, orange colour).

Revision: B
Page 6-31 of 62
3.2.7
Vessel Position Indicator

This indicator shows the midship position of the vessel in latitudes and longitudes.
1
2
Figure 15 Current Pos
3.2.8
Vessel latitude position
Vessel longitude position
Wind/Resulting Force Indicator

This indicator shows the wind speed and direction and the resulting force and its
direction needed to compensate the wind and current forces that affects the vessels
position.
Figure 16 Wind/Resulting Force Indicator

1
Wind speed and visualisation of direction.
Wind direction.
Resulting force direction (in degrees).
Resulting force and visualisation of direction.
Page 6-32 of 62

Revision: B
3.3
Statusbar
The statusbar displays some vital information about current settings and status of the
Icon system. It also contains a couple of buttons.
FIX
1 2
7 8
10
LOW
11 12 13 14 15
Figure 17 The GUI Statusbar (example)
3.3.1
Pos.
Description
System Active/Inactive status
In command/Give command status
Axes control visualisation surge, sway and yaw.
Position reference systems and sensor status visualisation.
Rotation point indication.
Wind compensation visualisation surge, sway and yaw.
Current camera view
Current operational function active
Vessel draft (draught).
10
Manual weighting of sensors and positioning reference systems enabled,

otherwise blank.
11
Power limitation is off, otherwise blank.
12
Fixed thruster direction on azimuthing thrusters enabled, otherwise blank.
13
Low rpm setting, otherwise blank.
14
Number of active alarms.
15
Alarm indicator short-cut to access the alarm page.
System Status
The statusbar displays the Icon system status (1). The following table shows the possible
system states.
Symbol
Meaning
System active
System inactive
3.3.2
In Command/Give Command
The Icon system provides means for transfer of command control between the different
operator stations. Only one operator station can be in command at a given time.

Revision: B
Page 6-33 of 62
Indicator (2) shows the operator station status.
Symbol
Meaning
Operator station In command
Operator station not in command/give command
3.3.3
Axes Control
Indicator (3) shows the way the axes of horizontal movement of the vessel are
controlled, see 2.9 Positioning Functions for details about how to change the settings.
The following table shows control symbols. In general, manual control applies when the
arrows point outwards, automatic control when the arrows point inwards and no control
when arrowheads are missing.
Symbol
Note:
3.3.4
Meaning (control mode)

Surge
Sway
Yaw
Joystick
Joystick
Joystick
Joystick
Joystick
Auto
Auto
Joystick
Auto
Joystick
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
No ctrl
No ctrl
Auto
The table shows just one of the possible control mode combinations
including No cntrl, but No cntrl can occur in various combinations with
Joystick and Auto.
Position Reference System

Indicators (4) shows the status of the sensors in the position reference system, they are
Page 6-34 of 62

Revision: B
displayed as groups:
GPS, one symbol for each sensor.
Rel, relative position reference system status, i.e. radar and laser based.
Gyro compass status, one symbol for each gyro.
For more details about the sensors status symbols see 4.1 Basic Status Symbols.
3.3.5
Wind Compensation
Indicator (6) shows for which axes wind compensation is activated, see 3.3.5 Wind
Compensation for more details.
Symbol
Meaning (Wind compensation)

blocked/off
in all axes
in Yaw and Surge axes
in Yaw and Sway axes
in Surge and Sway axes
in Yaw axis only
3.3.6
Current Camera View

Indicator (7) shows the settings of how the vessel orientation in the grid net is visualised
in the main view. See 3.5.3 Camera Control for details about changing the settings.
Below are different examples of camera settings.
Symbol
Setting
Hdg:Vessel
Pos:Vessel
Centre of view is fixed to the the centre of the vessel and the
orientation is fixed to the vessel's heading. The bow or stern is
up, depending on the physical operator station orientation on
the bridge.
Hdg: North
Pos: Vessel
Centre of view is fixed to the the centre of the vessel and the
orientation is fixed to earth (North up).
Hdg: Vessel
Pos: Setpoint
Centre of view is fixed to the position setpoint and the

orientation is fixed to the vessel's heading. The bow or stern is
up, depending on the physical operator station orientation on
the bridge.
Hdg: North
Pos: Setpoint
Centre of view is fixed to the position setpoint and the

orientation is fixed to earth (North up).

Revision: B
Page 6-35 of 62
3.4
Stack of Panels
The stack of panels are, together with the joystick device and the positioning device, the
main tools for the operation of the Icon system. They are displayed, two at the time, on
the remote control display and on the main DP operator station display when set to splitscreen view.
All panels are built-up in the same way, with access to different sub-views. The subviews are tailored to the operational mode by enabling buttons for the most common/
important operations for the specific mode.
3.4.1
Working with Panels

The procedure for changing an operational function is logically the same in all panels.
The interface is intuitive, straight-forward, and easy to understand.
Two examples of panels (Sensor and Settings) are shown in Figure 18.
5
4
Figure 18 Sensor and Settings Panel, Overview Presentation

Pos.
Description
Weight button, applicable for the Sensor and PosRef panels. Adjusts manual weight
for selected row incrementally.
List of available selections, different for each sub-view. Double-tap on a row or

command to change the parameter for that row. By tapping once and sliding finger
over a number of rows, it is possible to select multiple rows.
Name list.
Drop-down menu, for the selection of another sub-view.
Drop-down menu, for the selection of another panel.
Scrollbar
Button, in most cases a short-cut to a sub-menu. If the current setting requires a

numerical input, this button will open a calculator instead. Effects selected row(s)
By double tapping on a row in the list, the operator gets access to a sub-menu (specific
for each panels) where a specific value or setting can be changed. Multiple row
selections for changes can be done by a tap-and-slide with the finger over the desired
rows.
Page 6-36 of 62

Revision: B
3.4.2
The Change Panel

The Change panel is used for changing of position/heading and tracking operations.
3
2
6
4
Figure 19 Change Panel (example)

Pos
Function
Position setpoint values
Heading setpoint value
List for change between standard and optional operational functions (e.g.target
tracking)
Button for editing setpoint(s) for selected value(s)
Sub-view
Parameter
Description
Standard
Hdg
New heading setpoint.
North/East
New position (North/East).
Target
Tracking

Revision: B
Fwd/Stbd
New position (Forward/Starboard).
Dist/Crse
New position (Distance/Course).
Lat/Long
New position (Latitude/Longitude).
Nrts/Ests
New position (Norths/Easts).
Hdg
New heading setpoint.
North/East
New position (North/East)
Fwd/Stbd
New position (Forward/Starboard).
Dist/Crse
New position (Distance/Course).
Page 6-37 of 62
Sub-view
Waypoint
3.4.3
Parameter
Description
Range
Range to tracked object
Bearing
Bearing to tracked object
Add/Delete/Change
Any waypoint
The PosRef Panel

The PosRef panel is used for monitoring, enabling/disabling, blocking/unblocking,
aligning and zeroing of sensors and positioning reference systems. The list shows Status,
Sensor (name), Weight and Manual weight for each sensor. The graphic output in the
panel are the signals from the sensors, the scales on the axes in the graph can be changed
by double-tapping on the graph.
1
Figure 20 PosRef Panel (example)
Pos
Function
Button for manual weighting of selected position reference system.
Graph displaying the trended measurements of the different position reference

systems.
List of installed and connected position reference systems.
Button with submenu for handling of selected position reference system.
Page 6-38 of 62

Revision: B
Sensors
Parameter
Description
All Position
Reference
Systems
Enable/Disable
Enables/disables the selected position

reference system.
Block/Unblock
Block/Unblock the signal from the selected

position reference system.
Align
Aligns the signal values to the weighted

signal of all position reference systems, see
section 4.2 Align Status Symbols.
Weight
Adjusts manual weight for selected row

incrementally
Zero
Resets the signal of the selected signal to its

default state.
Absolute
Position (e.g.
DGPS)
Fixed
Relative
Position (e.g.
Cyscan/Radar)
Mobile

Revision: B
Sets the selected position reference system

to be fixed, i.e. its absolute position does not
differ.
Sets the selected position reference system
to be mobile, i.e. placed on a vessel.
Page 6-39 of 62
3.4.4
The Sensor Panel

The Sensor panel is used for monitoring, enabling/disabling and blocking/unblocking
of sensors. The list shows Status, Sensor (name), Weight and Manual weight for each
sensor.
Figure 21 Sensor Panel (example)

Pos
Function
Button for manual weighting of selected sensor.
Button for enabling/disabling or blocking/unblocking of selected sensor
The following parameters are possible to adjust for each sensor.

Parameter
Description
Enable/Disable
Enables/disables the selected position

reference system.
Block/Unblock
Block/Unblock the signal from the selected

position reference system.
Weight
Adjusts manual weight for selected row

incrementally
Page 6-40 of 62

Revision: B
3.4.5
The Thrust Panel

The Thrust panel is used for monitoring and enabling/disabling of thrust devices.
There are two types of visualisation, list and graphical view.
2
1
6
Figure 22 Trust Panel (example List View)
Pos
Indication
Thrust device
Toggle between List and graphical view
Toggle between Overview/Pitch/Rpm/View
Thrust feedback visualisation (green bar)
Direction order (degrees)
Button for enabling/disabling selected thrust device

Revision: B
Page 6-41 of 62
5
4
1
2
Figure 23 Thrust Panel (example)

Pos
Function
Thrust feedback (calculated) (in ton or kN)
Thrust force order visualisation (blue line)
Thrust feedback visualisation (green bar)
Direction order (blue triangle) visualisation
Toggle between List and graphical view
By selecting List view on the screen, a sub-menu will open where the operator can
change settings and options for each thrust device..
Sub-view
Parameter
Description
Overview
Enable/Disable
Enables/disables selected thruster device.

Shows the numerical thrust power and
direction, and also a visualisation of it.
Pitch
Enable/Disable

Shows percentage values for pitch order and
feedback.
Rpm
Enable/Disable

Shows percentage values of thruster rpm
(both order and feedback).
Dir
Enable/Disable

Shows numerical values of the thruster power
direction (both order and feedback).
List
Page 6-42 of 62
Any thrust device.

Revision: B
Sub-view
Parameter
View
3.4.6
Description
A graphical visualisation of all thrust devices
showing Order, Direction and Feedback for
each device.
The Control Panel

The Control panel is used for changing of operational functions and modes. The list
shows control mode for horizontal axis, and also if wind compensation is enabled.
1
5
Figure 24 Control Panel (example)

Pos
Function
Button for wind compensation function.
Button for preset control modes.
List of control modes for the three horizontal axes.
Menu button for display of options for selected list item.
Pause button.
The following table shows the parameter descriptions for the Control panel.
Axis
Parameter
Description
Surge
No cntrl/Joystick/Auto
Control in surge axis.
Sway
Control in sway axis.
Yaw
Control in yaw axis.

Revision: B
Page 6-43 of 62
Axis
Parameter
Description
Preset mode
Normal/HDG/HDG & Sway
Predefined control combinations.

Normal: Means that control (Joystick or
Auto) is enabled for all three axes.
HDG: Means that control (Joystick or Auto)
is enabled only for the yaw axis.
HDG & Sway: Means that control (Joystick
or Auto) is enabled for the yaw and sway
axes.
Wind comp
Windcomp On/Windcomp Off Enables/Disables wind compensation for the

selected axis.
Pause
Pause Off/Pause On
Page 6-44 of 62
Pause wind compensation

Revision: B
3.4.7
The Settings Panel

The Settings panel is used for changing of different system (operational) settings. The
list shows Symbol, Name, Value and Unit when applicable.
The example below shows the settings panel with the drop-down sub-menu open.
1
2
Figure 25 Settings Panel (example)

Pos
Function
Drop-down sub menu
Function/Setting names and values
Menu button with the options/values for the selected function/setting
The following table shows parameter descriptions for each sub-view.

Sub-view
Parameter
Description
Position
Pos gain
Position control gain.
Wind comp
Enable wind compensation.
Surge Acc Factor
Surge Acceleration Factor.
Sway Acc Factor
Sway Acceleration Factor.
Heading

Revision: B
Surge spd
Maximum surge speed of the vessel.
Sway spd
Maximum sway speed of the vessel.
Warn limit
Position deviation warning limit.
Alarm limit
Position deviation alarm limit.
Hdg gain
Heading control gain.
Wind comp
Enable wind compensation.
Page 6-45 of 62
Sub-view
Allocation
Target
(optional)
Waypoint
(optional)
System
Display
Units &
Formats
Pivot
Page 6-46 of 62
Parameter
Description
Acc Factor
Acceleration factor.
Max rot spd
Maximum rotational speed of the vessel.
Warn limit
Heading deviation warning limit.
Alarm limit
Heading deviation alarm limit.
Joystick (High/Medium/Low)
Joystick sensitivity.
Rudder usage (when applicable)
High/Medium/Low
Max Rudder (when applicable)
Maximum rudder angle.
Thrust bias (when applicable)
High/Medium/Low
Bow Az angle (when applicable)
Auto /
Aft Az angle (when applicable)
Auto /
Max vessel spd
Maximum vessel speed.
Hdg SP opt
Heading setpoint option.
Hdg SP offset
Heading setpoint offset.
Reaction radius
Reaction radius.
Meas timeout lim
Measurement timeout limit.
Max vessel spd
Maximum vessel speed.
Wp Radius
Minimum turning radius
Hdg SP opt
Heading setpoint option.
Hdg SP offset
Heading setpoint offset.
XTE warning lim
Cross-track deviation warning limit.
XTE alarm lim
Cross-track deviation alarm limit.
Manual Draft
Vessel draught.
Power Lim
Power limitation
DP Class
DP system class.
Theme
Display theme options.
Show trackplot
If the vessel track shall be plotted in the

grid
Trackplot freq
Plot density
Trackplot duration
How long the plotting function is enabled
Show flag - posrefs
View flags in the grid
Show flag - TP/REF
View flags in the grid
Autozoom, new SP
Autozoom when panning for a new pos.

setpoint
Default speed unit
Knots (kt) or meters per second (m/s)
Default force unit
ton or kilo newton (kN)
Default lat/long format
DDDMMSS,S or DDDMM,MMM
D=Degree, M=Minute, S=Seconds
Free select/Fore/Midship/Aft
Rotation centre point

Revision: B
Sub-view
Parameter
Description
Fwd/aft Rotpoint [m]
Range to rotation point
Stbd/Port Rotpoint [m]
Range to rotation point
Change Display Theme

By default, the display theme settings are set to day, which means that light colors will
be used in the GUI. But when operating in darkness, this setting can be too bright. To
change display theme, proceed as follows:
1.
2.
Select the sub-menu Display and then double-tap on the Theme row.
A pop-up dialogue appears.
3.
Select Day or Night depending on the time of day.

A change in display theme applies to all operator stations of the system.

Revision: B
Page 6-47 of 62
3.4.8
The Operation Panel

The Operation panel is used for changing settings for operational functions. There can
be several views of operation panels:
Sub-view
Parameter
Description
Target
Windcomp On/Off
Enable wind compensation
Target Start/Exit
Start/Exit target operation
Pause off/on
Pause target operation
Waypoint
Towing
Page 6-48 of 62
Radius
Radius to target
Range
Range to target
Target
External target
Windcomp On/Off
Track Start/Exit
Start/Exit track operation
Pause off/on
Windcomp On/Off
Alongforce On/Off
Towing operation On/Off
Pause off/on
Pause towing operation
Alongforce
Bias force

Revision: B
Target Tracking Operation
6
1
Figure 26 Operation Panel, Target tracking view (example)

Pos
Function
List of available targets
Range to target.
Target range radius tolerance.
Wind compensation for selected operational function.
Operational function
Start/Stop target operation

Revision: B
Page 6-49 of 62
Waypoint Tracking Operation
3
2
4
Figure 27 Operation Panel, Waypoint tracking view (example)

Pos
Function
Start/Stop waypoint operation
Pause waypoint operation
Page 6-50 of 62

Revision: B
Towing Operation
Figure 28 Operation Panel, Towing view (example)

Pos
Function
Alongforce, adjustable constant bias force.
Start/Stop towing operation
Pause towing operation

Revision: B
Page 6-51 of 62
3.4.9
The Performace Panel (Remote Control Display)

The Performance panel shows information related to heading control, speed and rateof-turn, thruster force and moment order.
3
Figure 29 Performance Panel (example)
Pos.
Description
Heading indicator
Speed indicator
Order indicator
Page 6-52 of 62

Revision: B
3.5
Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons for the operator to alter the look of the GUI, choose which
sub-menus to be shown and change the operational settings of the system.
From the toolbar it is possible to reach all Icon functions and settings. The toolbar also
consists of buttons for short-cuts to frequently used functions of the Icon system.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 30 Toolbar (example)
Pos
Function
System active / inactive status
In command / Give command status
Toggles between splitscreen and fullscreen
Camera zoom out
Camera zoom in
Opens the Cam cntrl page, from where it is possible to control the
camera view of the vessel relative to the surroundings. It is possible to
pan, rotate and zoom the vessel in the grid. It is also possible to tilt the
grid to achieve a 3D visualisation effect.
Opens the Alarms tab of the Monitoring page
Opens the DP System page
Opens the Monitoring page
10
Opens the Operation page
11
Prints a screenshot of the current display screen
12
Current system time

Revision: B
Page 6-53 of 62
3.5.1
Views
The Split button, toggles between the following views:
Splitscreen view all main areas of the GUI is displayed on the same screen.
Fullscreen view the panels are not displayed in the main view. (But on a remote
display.)
3.5.2
Zoom
With the zoom (4,5) buttons, the operator can zoom the visualisation in the main area of
the screen in or out respectively.
3.5.3
Camera Control
By means of the Cam cntrl (6) setting, the operator have full control on how the vessel
position in the grid net is visualised in the main area of the display.
There are two main ways to manage the camera control, Auto and Manual control.
Auto: Hdg the visualisation in the main area is from either vessel or from a north
view.
Auto: Pos the visualisation in the main area is from either vessel or from a setpoint
view.
Auto: Top, Tilt1, 2, 3,4 the visualisation in the main area can be tilted in predefined
3D-views.
Manual: the visualisation in the main area can be tilted in a 3D-view, it is also
possible to pan the vessel on the grid, as well as to rotate it. See Figure 31 Camera
Control.
om
Zo
Pan
Tilt
Rotate
Figure 31 Camera Control
3.5.4
Alarms
In the alarms page (7), all active alarms are listed chronologically with the latest alarm
on top. The operator has the ability to acknowledge one alarm at the time, or all alarms
on the page simultaneously. There is also a separate Alarm history page, containing all
(old) alarms, see 4.4 Alarm Status Symbols and 4.5 Alarm Handling.
Page 6-54 of 62

Revision: B
3.5.5
DP System
The DP System pages presents an overview of the status of:
The Icon system itself
Sensors The operator has the ability to enable/disable any sensor. (This can also be
done from the Sensor panel.)
Position reference systems The operator has the ability to enable/disable any position
reference system. (This can also be done from the PosRef panel.)
Thruster devices The operator has the ability to enable/disable any thruster device.
(This can also be done from the Thrust panel.)
Power system The operator can view the available and consumed power as well as
the bus tie.
By tapping the DPSystem (8) button in the toolbar on the screen, the DP System
display appears. From this page, the operator can:
View the system status
View the machine power distribution status
View measurements values for sensors, position reference systems and thrusters
Enable/Disable sensors, position reference systems and thrusters.
4
5
6
Figure 32 DP System Page (example, DP2 system)

Pos
Part of system
DP system B
DP system C
DP system A
Icon operator stations
Controllers

Revision: B
Page 6-55 of 62
Pos
Part of system
Sensors and positioning reference systems
Thrust devices
For more information about DP system configuration, see chapter 3 System Description.
3.5.6
Monitoring
The monitoring pages presents an overview of all monitored items with respect to the
chosen DP class.
By tapping the Monitoring (9) button in the toolbar on the screen, the system
monitoring display appears. From this page, the operator can:
View the alarm list and the event log
Acknowledge alarms
View trends for sensors, position reference systems, thrust devices and available/
consumed power
Download system log files to a USB memory for further analysis, see chapter
8 Trouble Shooting.
Figure 33 Monitoring Display, Trends page
3.5.7
Operation
The operation pages present detailed information about the current settings of the Icon
system.
By tapping the Operation (10)
button in the toolbar on the screen, the Operation display appears. From this page, the
operator can perform the exact same operation as from the Control, Change and
Page 6-56 of 62

Revision: B
Settings panels.
In addition to this, the operator can also use the built-in trainer, which comprises a vessel
simulator and a dedicated graphical user interface for set-up of the simulated operational
conditions.
Figure 34 Operation Page
3.5.8
Print
The Icon system is equipped with two printers:
One impact dot matrix printer with roll paper stand, for printing of alarms. This printer
continuously prints all alarms as they get active, are being acknowledged and reset.
One high-resolution hardcopy color printer, for printing of trendings and screen-shots
of the GUI. The operator can configure the look of the GUI and then press the
Print (11) button.

Revision: B
Page 6-57 of 62
4 Status Symbols and Alarm Handling

4.1 Basic Status Symbols
The following common status symbols (for thrust devices, sensors, position reference
systems, etc.) are used by the Icon system.
Symbol
!
?
Colour
Meaning
White
Not available by system.
Grey
Available, but disabled by operator.
Green
Available and enabled.
Yellow
Warning
Red
Error
Red
No data connection lost.
Grey
Blocked
4.2 Align Status Symbols

The following symbols are used by the Icon system when aligning any position
reference system.
Symbol
Page 6-58 of 62
Colour
Meaning
Red
Not valid data
Yellow
Not aligned.
Yellow
Aligning.
Yellow
Aligning to estimate.
Green
Zero reference
Green
Aligned.
Red
Cannot align.
Yellow
Aligned to estimate.

Revision: B
4.3
Additional Status Symbols

Symbol
Color
Meaning
Grey
No posrefs and sensors are manual

weighted
Yellow
One or more posrefs or sensors is

manual weighted
Yellow
Towing is enabled
Yellow
Thrusters are in fixed angles mode
Yellow
Low RPM is enabled
Yellow
Power limitation is off
White
Trainer is on
FIX
LOW

Revision: B
Page 6-59 of 62
4.4
Alarm Status Symbols

Any failures detected on operator stations, or loss of communication between the control
cabinets and the operator stations, will result in an alarm. In addition, a special status
menu will appear on the display informing the operator on the type of failure (loss of
communication or internal operator station failure).
Note:
If a failure occurs in the operator station that is in command, the system

will automatically set the command transfer to Give Command (cf.
section 2.7 Transfer of Command Between Operator Stations).
If there is no other operator station ready to take command, the Icon
system will automatically terminate its operation (standby) and command
of the thrust devices are released to manual lever command.
The following alarm status symbols are used by the Icon system.
Symbol
Colour
Meaning
Red
Unacknowledged alarm (UA) is in alarm state but has not

been acknowledged by the operator.
Red
Acknowledged alarm (AA) is in alarm state and has been

acknowledged by the operator.
Blue
Cleared alarm (CA) an alarm was present but is no longer in

alarm state, was not acknowledged by the operator.
Yellow
Unacknowledged warning is in warning state but has not

been acknowledged by the operator.
Yellow
Acknowledged warning is in warning state and has been

acknowledged by the operator.
Blue
Cleared warning a warning was present but is no longer in

warning state, was not acknowledged by the operator.
Alarms:
Warnings:
Page 6-60 of 62

Revision: B
4.5
Alarm Handling
When an alarm appears, the alarm indicator is flashing and an alarm text is clearly
displayed on the screen.
The alarms page is accessed from the statusbar in the main display area:
Note:
Note:
1.
Tap the Alarm button or the Menu button in the statusbar to open the alarms
page. If using the Menu button, the Alarm button in the appearing Monitoring
window may be needed to tap.
2.
Select an alarm in the alarms list and press the Ack button to acknowledge the
alarm (or the Ack all button to acknowledge all alarms on the page
simultaneously).
Alarms can only be acknowledged from the operator station in command.
3.
Refer to chapter 8 Trouble Shooting for a detailed description of the alarm text.
4.
If possible, refer to chapter 7 Maintenance Instructions and fix the problem.
It is also possible to view an alarm and warning history, by selecting the

Alarm history tab in the Monitoring window.

Revision: B
Page 6-61 of 62
Page 6-62 of 62

Revision: B
1
Safety and Precautions ............................................................................7-3
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) .................................................................7-3
3
Routine Maintenance ...............................................................................7-4
3.1 Operator Stations .......................................................................................7-4
3.1.1 Lamp Test .......................................................................................7-4
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Periodic Maintenance ...............................................................................7-4

General .......................................................................................................7-4
Cabinets .....................................................................................................7-4
Operator Stations .......................................................................................7-4
Sensors / Positioning Reference Systems .................................................7-5
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................7-5
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
Corrective Maintenance ...........................................................................7-5

General .......................................................................................................7-5
Operator Devices ........................................................................................7-5
10,4 Display ...............................................................................................7-6
6.3.1 Fan Filter .........................................................................................7-6
19 Display ..................................................................................................7-7
DC Power Supply .......................................................................................7-8
Fuses ..........................................................................................................7-8
Printer .........................................................................................................7-9
UPS ............................................................................................................7-9
Switch .........................................................................................................7-9
Marine Controller ........................................................................................7-9
Operator Station Computer ......................................................................7-10
CAN I/O Module .......................................................................................7-11
Signal Isolation Amplifier ..........................................................................7-12
Sensors ....................................................................................................7-12
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14


Revision: C

Revision: C
1 Safety and Precautions

Warning: Risk of personal injury.
Changes or modifications to the system not expressly approved by the
Rolls-Royce department responsible for compliance, could void the
warranty or the user's ability to operate the equipment.
The following warnings and cautions are for your safety, for the prevention of injury
from electric shock and for a safe operation of the equipment. Also see chapter 2 Safety.
While performing maintenance tasks, always position the equipment (and yourself) on
a stable and safe surface.
Ensure that all accessible cables cannot be walked on, tripped over or damaged by
transportable items.
If a device is damaged or fails to function correctly, disconnect it from the power
source. Refer to the system drawings to locate the nearest fuse/circuit breaker, see
Do not attempt to repair any sub-component yourself consult a qualified Rolls-Royce
service technician.
A serious electrical shock hazard exists within the covers of some components (i.e.
displays) and on marked locations inside the cabinets (marked with 220 VAC or
24 VDC).
2 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

Caution: It is very important that you are connected to ground before touching any
electronic components or printed circuit boards.
The life span of electronics can be affected by damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
This can happen if a charged tool or person touches a component. Therefore it is very
important that all tools and personnel are discharged by touching a grounded point
before the printed circuit board or any of the components are touched. It is equally
important to discharge the package with the new component before opening it.
A person walking on a carpet can be charged with up to fifteen thousand volt (15000 V).
In worst case, some sensitive components can be destroyed when discharged with about
100 V.

Revision: C
Page 7-3 of 12
3 Routine Maintenance
3.1
3.1.1
Note:
Operator Stations
Lamp Test
The lamp test function is not available when the operator station is in
command.
1.
Press the Lamp control

2 seconds.
push-button on the joystick device for approximately
All indicators on the joystick device should lit and the alarm buzzer should sound
for 10 seconds.
4 Periodic Maintenance
4.1
General
Check connectors on installed connection points, carefully clean as necessary.
Check for any loose terminals due to vibration, fasten as necessary.
4.2
Cabinets
Ensure that the cabinet is properly fastened.
Keep the exterior of the cabinet clean. If needed, carefully clean with a soft anti static
cloth and a non-abrasive cleaning agent.
Keep the interior of the cabinet clean.
If needed, carefully clean the inside the cabinet using a soft anti static cloth and a nonabrasive cleaning agent.
When necessary, carefully vacuum-clean the inside of the cabinet avoiding to touch
any components.
Cabinets can be equipped with a fan. When necesary, carefully vacum-clean the fan
filter.
Ensure that the cabinet doors are closed.
4.3
Operator Stations
Ensure that the operator station is properly fastened.
Check connectors on installed connection points, carefully clean as necessary.
Page 7-4 of 12

Revision: C
Keep the exterior of the operator station clean. If needed, carefully clean with a soft
cloth and a non-abrasive cleaning agent.
4.4
Sensors / Positioning Reference Systems

Please refer to the corresponding subsuppliers manual for details, see chapter
14 Subsuppliers Manuals.
5 Troubleshooting
The diagnostics of errors are given by the issued alarms. The troubleshooting is based
on the proposed error tracing and corrective actions given in the alarm list and
description. For details, see chapter 8 Trouble Shooting.
6 Corrective Maintenance
6.1
General
The main tasks of corrective maintenance to be covered in this manual, are replacing
parts/units inside cabinets or on operator stations and, if applicable, tuning and set-up of
a new unit.
6.2
Operator Devices
4
Figure 1
Operator Device
To change an operator device, proceed as follows:

1.
Remove the rubber protection plugs (1) that cover the screw heads on the top side

Revision: C
Page 7-5 of 12
of the operator device.
6.3
2.
Loosen the screws.
3.
Carefully pull the operator device straight up from the top of where it is mounted.
4.
Unplug the CAN and power connector (2) from the bottom of the operator device.
5.
Set the addresses on the node address switches (4) on the new operator device
identical to the device, being replaced.
6.
Verify that the terminal resistors (3) are identical on the device being replaced.
7.
Mount the new operator device in reverse order.
8.
Calibrate all operator devices on the operator station where the operator device has
been changed, see chapter 6 Operating Instructions for details.
10,4 Display
4
1
2
Figure 2
10,4 Display
To change display, proceed as follows:

1.
Disconnect the power supply to the display, by removing the fuse for the operator
station.
2.
Remove the CompactFlash memory from the display. It is hidden behind a

cover (1) on the left side of the display.
3.
Unplug the following:

Ethernet cable(s) (2)
24 VDC power supply connector (3)
6.3.1
4.
Loosen the 4 screws that hold the display in place, and remove the display.
5.
Insert the CompactFlash memory in the new display.
6.
Fit and connect the new display in reverse order.
Fan Filter
When necessary, clean display fan filter (4) with vacuum cleaner.
Page 7-6 of 12

Revision: C
If necessary, change fan filter for 10,4 display by ripping the old filter off. It is fitted
with velcro. Fit a new fan filter in place.
6.4
19 Display
Back side
Bottom side
Figure 3
19 Display
To change display, proceed as follows:

1.
Disconnect the power supply to the display by removing the fuse on the operator
station.
2.
Disconnect the following:

24 VDC power supply (2)
serial cable (9-pins D-SUB) (1)
DVI (3) or VGA (4) cable
3.
Loosen the screws that hold the display in place, and remove the display.
4.
Fit and connect the new display in reverse order.

Revision: C
Page 7-7 of 12
6.5
DC Power Supply
DC
OK
Output DC
Adjust
DC OK
powerb
ox
Figure 4
DC Power Supply
To change a DC Power Supply, proceed as follows:
6.6
1.
Release the fuse for the DC Power Supply, see chapter 12 Design Drawings for
details.
2.
Unplug the power connections to the unit. 220 VAC (bottom) 24 VDC (top).
3.
Remove the unit from the rail. It is locked with a clip at the bottom of the unit
4.
Fit a new unit in reverse order.
5.
Adjust the output voltage to 26 VDC for the primary unit and to 25 VDC for the
secondary unit (if installed).
Fuses
There are two general types of fuses, automatic and glass cartridge fuses.
Automatic fuses are reset by pulling the fuse switch to open (lower) position, and then
pulling it up to closed (upper) position again. A red LED is lit on the blown automatic
fuse.
Glass cartridge fuses are changed by means of a plier or the protective cover around
the fuse. A lit green LED indicates that the glass cartridge fuse is OK. An extinguished
LED indicates that the fuse is blown.
Study the appropriate design drawings to find the fuse to reset or change, see chapter
12 Design Drawings for details.
Replaceable fuses are according to the fuse list (see inside door on corresponding
cabinet).
Page 7-8 of 12

Revision: C
6.7
Printer
To change toner, ink cartridges, toner tapes, or a complete printer, see chapter
14 Subsuppliers Manuals for instructions.
6.8
UPS
The fan filter on the UPS must be changed periodically. For instructions on when and
how to change UPS fan filters, see chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals.
6.9
Note:
Switch
The new switch must be readily configured.
To change the switch, proceed as follows:

1.
Disconnect the power by removing the corresponding fuse.
2.
Remove the power supply connector (top).
3.
Remove the Ethernet cables and optical fiber cables (if applicable).
4.
Remove the switch from the rail.
5.
Fit and connect a new switch in reverse order.
6.10 Marine Controller

6
4
Figure 5
Marine Controller

Revision: C
Page 7-9 of 12
To replace the controller (Rolls-Royce Marine Controller), proceed as follows:
1.
Disconnect the power supply cable (1).
2.
Remove the CompactFlash memory (2).
3.
Disconnect the alarm connector (3).
4.
Disconnect the following connectors:

CAN (4)
Ethernet (5)
RS 422 (6)
5.
Loosen the 6 screws that hold the controller in place, and remove the controller.
6.
Insert the CompactFlash memory in the new controller unit.
7.
Fit and connect the new controller in reverse order.
6.11 Operator Station Computer
1
Front side
3
4
Back side
6
Figure 6
Operator Station Computer
To change the operator station, proceed as follows:

1.
Turn off the power on the computer (switch at the front).
2.
Disconnect the power supply to the computer by removing the fuse on the operator
station.
Page 7-10 of 12

Revision: C
See chapter 12 Design Drawings for details.
3.
Remove the 24 VDC power supply connector (2).
4.
Remove connectors to:

display (VGA) (5) or DVI (6)
touch control (7)
mouse (1)
keyboard (3)
Ethernet (4).
Possible other serial port connected devices (7)
5.
Loosen the 4 screws that hold the computer in place and remove the unit.
6.
Fit and connect the new computer in reverse order.
6.12 CAN I/O Module

1
Front
1
2
Circuit Board
5
Figure 7
CAN I/O Module
The CAN I/O module is located in the Control Cabinet. To change the internal circuit
board, proceed as follows:
1.
Disconnect the power and CAN connector (2), which is located in the front.

Revision: C
Page 7-11 of 12
2.
Disconnect the I/O connector (3).
3.
Loosen the 3 screws (1) that hold the top cover of the CAN I/O module in place
and remove the top cover.
4.
Remove the circuit board from the CAN I/O module by pulling it staight out from
the housing.
5.
Set the address (4) and jumpers (5) on the new CAN I/O module circuit board
identical to the one being replaced.
6.
Fit and connect the CAN I/O module in reverse order.
6.13 Signal Isolation Amplifier

When replacing a galvanic insulated amplifier, the DIP-switch must be correctly set.
Compare with the DIP-switch on the replaced amplifier and adjust as necessary.
All other I/O-modules can be replaced as is and do not need further measures.
6.14 Sensors
Please refer to the corresponding subsuppliers manual for details, see chapter
14 Subsuppliers Manuals.
Page 7-12 of 12

Revision: C
Trouble Shooting
1
General ......................................................................................................8-3
System Log Download .............................................................................8-3
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Alarms .......................................................................................................8-5
General .......................................................................................................8-5
Cabinet Alarms ...........................................................................................8-5
Consequence Analysis Alarms ...................................................................8-6
Control System Alarms ...............................................................................8-6
Operator Station Alarms .............................................................................8-8
Power System Alarms ..............................................................................8-10
Sensor and Position Reference System Alarms .......................................8-11
Thruster System Alarms ...........................................................................8-15
UPS Alarms ..............................................................................................8-18


Revision: B

Revision: B
Trouble Shooting
1 General
The aim for the troubleshooting chapter is to be of assistance to the operator during fault
tracing of the Icon system. The main parts of the chapter are:
System Log Download - this section describes how the operator can, after fault tracing
using the the alarm list, download the system log to a USB memory, and send it for
further analysis to Rolls-Royce.
Alarms - this section contains a list with all typical alarms of the Icon system,
including alarm text, and possible cause, effect and proposed action for each alarm.
2 System Log Download

When regular trouble shooting (managing issued alarms and taking appropriate
measures, phone support etc.) does not fix the problem, it is possible transfer system
health log files to a USB memory. These files can then be sent to Rolls-Royce for further
analysis.
This section consists of an instruction on how to download the system health log files to
a USB memory.
1.
Insert the USB memory to the USB port of the operator station computer or the
remote control display.
2.
Tap the Monitoring button on the toolbar in the main view to open the
Monitoring page.
3.
To download a complete set of system health log files:

3.1. Select Util in the Monitoring page.
Figure 1
Monitoring Page (Health View)
3.2. Tap on the Health tab.

3.3. Tap on the Download log button.
Revision: B
Page 8-3 of 18
Trouble Shooting
The complete system health log consists of the following files:
One health log file for each main operator station. (This information is used
for the GUI software. Contains data for the last 24 hours or since the last
reboot.)
One status log file for each controller in the control cabinet(s). (Contains
data for the last 24 hours or since the last reboot.)
An alarm log file from the display where the log is being downloaded.
A playback log file for the last hour.
Note:
There is a maximum file size for the log files. If there has been a substantial
activity/many alarms, the history may be shortened.
4.
To download a playback log for a specific single hour during the last four weeks:
4.1. Select Util in the Monitoring page.
4.2. Tap on the HourLog tab.
Figure 2
Monitoring Page (HourLog View)
4.3. Select a specific hour from the list.

4.4. Tap on the Download button.
Page 8-4 of 18

Revision: B
Trouble Shooting
3 Alarms
3.1 General
The diagnostics of errors are given by the issued alarms. The troubleshooting is based
on the proposed fault tracing and corrective actions given in the alarm descriptions.
See chapter 12 Design Drawings for wiring diagrams for the Icon system and applicable
cabinets.
3.2 Cabinet Alarms

The following alarms will be issued for control cabinet related faults. The term inside
the angle brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual item, see the following
complete and specific alarm text examples:
Cabinet: Failure in IO module A
IO controller B1: Lost connection
No.
Alarm Text
Cause, Effect and Action
Cabinet: Failure in IO bus

<I/O bus name>
Cause:
A failure has occurred on the I/O bus.
Effect:
Connected equipment to the I/O bus will not be available to the system.
Action:
Check the I/O bus cables/wiring. Ensure that all connectors are in place
for each connected module. Verify that the CAN-bus termination (60
Ohm between the data signals).
Cabinet: Failure in IO module

<I/O module name>
Cause:
An failure or malfunction is detected on the I/O module.
Effect:
Dependant of failure the system may be disabled for operation until the
failure is fixed.
Action:
Check module, connectors/wires and internal I/O Modules.
Cabinet: HW failure in
<Equipment name>
Cause:
A hardware signal indicates a failure in the unit.
Effect:
Dependant of failure the unit may be disabled for operation until the
failure is fixed.
Action:
Check status on the unit, connectors/wires and mains power supply.
<I/O controller name>: Lost

connection
Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the communication is
lost).
Effect:
The unit will not be available, and operations may be limited.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O.

Revision: B
Page 8-5 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
Cabinet: Lost connection to

<I/O module>
Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the communication is
lost).
Effect:
Action:
3.3 Consequence Analysis Alarms

No.
Alarm Text
CQA: Insufficient capabillity for

worst failure
Cause:
There are not enough capability for the system to perform safely in
case of a worst case failure.
Effect:
The system performance may not be sufficient with respect to the
operational requirement. In case of a single worst case failure,
e.g. blackout on one side, the vessel will most likely drift off.
Action:
If available, consider to enable more power (thrust or effect) into
the system. Otherwise the system is operating outside the normal
limits and must be watched carefully.
CQA:Too few thrusters available

for worst failure
Cause:
There are not enough thrusters available for the system to perform
safely in case of a worst case failure.
Effect:
In case of a single worst case failure (e.g. blackout of one side) the
vessel will most likely drift off.
Action:
If available, consider enabling more thrusters. If not, the system is
operating outside the normal limits and must be watched carefully.
3.4 Control System Alarms

The following alarms will be issued for control system related faults. The term inside
the angle brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual item or movement, see the
following complete and specific alarm text examples:
DP controller A Timed out
Insufficient thruster configuration in Yaw
No.
Alarm Text
Different readings from DP switch Cause:

The Manoeuvring Mode Selector Switch status signals is different
on system A and B.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal.
Action:
Check signal, wires and connections. Most likely a wire is not
properly connected.
Page 8-6 of 18

Revision: B
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
DP controller <Name> Timed out
Cause:
The controller (DPC) has stopped or lost its network
communication with the other controllers (DPC).
Effect:
The DPC is not a part of the control system until the system is
restarted.
Action:
Reset the system to enable all controllers , Check network
connection.
10
DP controller <Name> Voted out
Cause:
The controller (DPC) is out of synchronisation with respect to the
other controllers.
Effect:
The DPC is not a part of the control system until the system is
restarted.
Action:
Reset the system to enable synchronisation of all controllers.
11
Insufficient thruster configuration Cause:

in <Axis of horizontal movement> There are not enough thrusters available for the system to perform
the desired action.
Effect:
The desired action will be terminated.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on the remote control
systems. Change parameters for the desired action. If possible,
enable more thrusters.
12
Large cross track error
Cause:
In waypoint tracking function, the vessel has a large deviation from
the desired track.
Effect:
No effect - the system will attempt to decrease the cross track
deviation.
Action:
Increase the limits, adjust the operation parameters.
13
Lost target
Cause:
In target tracking function, measurement giving the relative
position of the target is lost (e.g. HPR, laser).
Effect:
Tracking of the target will no longer be possible, and the vessel will
calm down.
Action:
Dependant of operating or weather conditions. Establish contact
with the target (e.g. reflectors/transponders).
14
Out of heading
Cause:
Heading deviation exceeds alarm limits, i.e. the difference
between actual heading and set point heading is larger than the
operator defined alarm limit.
Effect:
No effect - the system will attempt to decrease the heading
deviation.
Action:
Increase the limits and adjust the operation parameters.

Revision: B
Page 8-7 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
15
Out of position
Cause:
Position deviation exceeds alarm limits, i.e. the difference between
actual position and set point position is larger than the operator
defined alarm limit.
Effect:
No effect - the system will attempt to decrease the position
deviation.
Action:
Increase the limits, adjust the operation parameters.
16
System was disabled while active Cause:

The system has detected a OFF signal from the Manoeuvring
Mode Selector Switch during operation.
Effect:
If the readings are correct, all thrusters will be lost for DP and the
vessel will drift off. Thruster control will be transferred to the levers.
Action:
If the operation was not desired, check the I/O modules in the
Outstations (if Outstations are used).
17
System: Buzzer disabled
Cause:
The alarm buzzer is disabled by the operator.
Effect:
No audible alarm will be presented to the operator in case of a
system alarm.
Action:
Enable the Buzzer in the system settings menu.
18
Warning: Close to deviation limit
Cause:
The measurements indicates that the status is close to the
deviation limit.
Effect:
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and general I/O. Verify appplicable
settings.
3.5 Operator Station Alarms

The following alarms will be issued for operator station related faults. The term inside
the angle brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual item, see the following
complete and specific alarm text examples:
OS 2: HW failure in Main Power Supply
OS 1: Lost connection to Joystick Device
No.
Alarm Text
19
<Station name>: Alarm printer is

not connected
Cause:
The printer is not available to the system.
Effect:
No alarms will be printed, the alarms will be buffered by the
computer.
Action:
Verify power to printer. Enable the Printer ("Online"/"Select") ,
Check cable to printer.
Page 8-8 of 18

Revision: B
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
20
<Station name>: Alarm printer is

not ready
Cause:
The printer is not available to the system.
Effect:
computer.
Action:
Enable the Printer ("Online"/"Select").
21
<Station name>: Alarm printer out Cause:

of paper
The printer reports out of paper.
Effect:
computer.
Action:
Check printer status, refill paper if empty.
22
<Station name>: HW failure in

<Power supply name>
Cause:
Effect:
Dependant of the failure the unit may be disabled for operation
until the failure is fixed.
Action:
Check status on the unit, connectors/wires and main power supply.
23
<Station name>: Lost connection
Cause:
The system has lost connection with the unit (i.e. the
communication is lost).
Effect:
Action:
24
<Station name>: Lost connection

to <Device name>
Cause:
Effect:
Action:
25
<Station name>: <Device name>

order out of range
Cause:
The received order is outside the expected range.
Effect:
The device will not available for operation.
Action:
Check device, connectors/wires and internal I/O Modules.
26
Failure on all OS
Cause:
All of the Operator Stations reports one or several failures.
Effect:
Proper operator interaction with the system may be difficult.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and communication I/O.

Revision: B
Page 8-9 of 18
Trouble Shooting
3.6 Power System Alarms

The following alarms will be issued for power system related faults. The term inside the
angle brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual item, see the following complete
and specific alarm text examples:
MainBus2Stbd: Power out of range
Generator3Stbd: Inconsistent measurements
No.
Alarm Text
27
<Equipment name>: Inconsistent

measurements
Cause:
The received measurements are not consistent with respect to the
vessels capabilities.
Effect:
Action:
settings.
28
<Equipment name>: Limitation

frozen due to signal errors
Cause:
An error is detected on one or more feedbacks from the power
system.
Effect:
The power limitation function will estimate the power consumption.
The power limitation function will be degraded.
Action:
settings.
29
<Equipment name>: Load out of

range
Cause:
The received measurements are outside the expected range for
this kind of equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. The Load signal will not
be used by the system.
Action:
settings.
30
<Equipment name>: Power out of Cause:

range
Unexpected high load measurement measured by the power
management system.
Effect:
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on one of the remote
control systems or the power management system. Check the I/O
modules in the Outstations (if Outstations are used).
Page 8-10 of 18

Revision: B
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
31
Power limitation: frozen due to

signal errors
Cause:
system.
Effect:
Action:
settings.
32
Power signals error: consider

disabling power limitation
Cause:
system.
Effect:
Erronous signals will be estimated. The power limitation function
might be degraded.
Action:
settings.
3.7 Sensor and Position Reference System Alarms

The following alarms will be issued for sensor and position reference system related
faults. The terms inside the angle brackets < > are replaced by the name of the actual
item or the signal type, see the following complete and specific alarm text examples:
Gyro 1: Wild point in Rotation measurement
Wind sensor 2: Wind speed measurement voting rejected
No.
Alarm Text
33
<Sensor name>: Disabled

automatically
Cause:
The data received from the equipment indicates a malfunction,
and the equipment is disabled by the system.
Effect:
The connected sub-system is not available to the system, and a
reduced performance may be the result.
Action:
Consider to adjust the unit settings, or revise the selected
operational selections.
34
<Sensor name>: High dynamics

in <Signal type> measurement
Cause:
Based on a linear regression (a straight line through the received
measurements in the last approx. 15 seconds) the measurement
differ from the expected range.
Effect:
Action:

Revision: B
Page 8-11 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
35
<Sensor name>: High HDOP
Cause:
The horizontal dilution of precision is high, which indicates a poor
satellite configuration for the GNSS system.
Effect:
Action:
36
<Sensor name>: High variation in Cause:

<Signal type> measurement
The measurements from the unit shows a higher standard
deviation than expected. It might be a unit malfunction.
Effect:
Action:
37
<Sensor name>: Invalid data

received in NMEA telegram
Cause:
Failure detected in the received NMEA telegram. Indicates a
malfunction in connected equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. Data will not be used
by the system.
Action:
Verify the unit setup, power and cabling.
38
<Sensor name>: Large <Signal

type> measurement differ
Cause:
The measurement difference between two sensors is critically
high.
Effect:
The sensor will be Auto Disabled, and not longer used by the
system.
Action:
Check unit. Verify appplicable settings.
39
<Sensor name>: Large step in

Cause:
The measurements from the sensor has changed in a large step,
and then been stabilized. This indicates that a failure has occurred
in the sensor.
Effect:
The sensor will be Auto Disabled, and not longer be used by the
system.
Action:
settings.
40
<Sensor name>: Lost connection
Cause:
Effect:
Action:
Page 8-12 of 18

Revision: B
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
41
<Sensor name>: Measurement

<Signal type> differ
Cause:
The measurement difference between two sensors is higher than
expected.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced.
Action:
Check unit.
42

<Signal type> frozen
Cause:
The measurements indicates that the sensor has frozen (i.e.
measurements is frozen for a period of time). Readings from
sensor / position reference system have not changed for a period
of time.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. Measurement from the
affected sensor / position reference system will be weighted down.
Action:
Check unit.
43

<Signal type> out of range
Cause:
this kind of equipment. Indicates a malfunction in the connected
equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. Unit will be auto
disabled.
Action:
Check unit.
44

<Signal type> voting pre-warning
Cause:
More than two sensors/position reference systems in use. The
difference between this measurement average and the average
between the other sensor measurements is high.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. The unit will be
weighted down by the system.
Action:
Check unit.
45

<Signal type> voting rejected
Cause:
More than two sensors/position reference systems in use. The
difference between this measurement average and the average
between the other sensor measurements is too high.
Effect:
Followed by Auto Disabled - and the unit is not available to the
system.
Action:
Check unit.
46
<Sensor name>: No Differential

signal available
Cause:
The GNSS system has no correction signals.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. DPGS system will be
weighted down by the system.
Action:
Change correction signal base, or enable the backup correction
signal system.

Revision: B
Page 8-13 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
47
<Sensor name>: No fix available
Cause:
The GNSS system does not have enough satellites to give position
measurement.
Effect:
No positon measurement will be available from the affected unit.
Action:
If problem persists, check unit, cabling, antenna.
48
<Sensor name>: Old Differential

signal
Cause:
The differential signal available to the GNSS system is old.
Effect:
The accuracy of affected unit might be degraded. Unit will
gradually be weighted down by system.
Action:
Change correction signal base, or enable the backup correction
signal system.
49
<Sensor name>: Step in <Signal

type> measurement
Cause:
The measurements from the sensor has changed in a step, and
then been stabilized. This may indicate that a failure has occurred
in the sensor.
Effect:
The system will continue as normal. Unit will be weighted down by
the system.
Action:
settings.
50
<Sensor name>: Very high

dynamics in <Signal type>
measurement
Cause:
Based on a linear regression (a straight line through the received
measurements in the last approx. 15 seconds) the measurement
differ from the expected values. This alarm is followed by "Auto
Disable".
Effect:
The sensor will be Auto Disabled, and not longer be used by the
system.
Action:
settings.
51
<Sensor name>: Wild point in

Cause:
Some wild points in the measurements are detected.
Effect:
A quality error on the unit signal is detected. The wild points will
not be used.
Action:
settings.
52
No <Signal type> measurement Dead reckoning
Cause:
There are no valid measurements and these signals are lost
during automatic control.
Effect:
The system will use the internal vessel model and thrust estimates
to predict the actual value.
Action:
If possible, enable more position reference systems to the system.
Page 8-14 of 18

Revision: B
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
53
No time signal available from any

GPS
Cause:
No time signal is available from and GNSS system.
Effect:
If problem persists, system time will drift away from correct time.
Action:
Check GNSS units.
3.8 Thruster System Alarms

The following alarms will be issued for thruster system related faults. The terms inside
the angle brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual item or the signal type, see
the following complete and specific alarm text examples:
Port rudder: Broken wire or overflow in Direction order
PortAz: Pitch setpoint / feedback deviation
No.
Alarm Text
54
<Thruster device name>: Became Cause:

unavailable
An unexpected release of the Available signal from the remote
control system.
Effect:
The remote control system will not be available for control.
Action:
system. Check the I/O modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are
used).
55
<Thruster device name>: Broken

wire or overflow in <Signal type>
Cause:
A broken wire failure or a signal overflow is detected.
Effect:
Wrong data may have been received, and data will not be used.
Action:
properly connected.
56
<Thruster device name>:

Disabled automatically
Cause:
The data received from the equipment indicates an malfunction,
and the equipment is disabled by the system.
Effect:
The connected sub-system is not available to the system, and a
reduced performance may be the result.
Action:
57
<Thruster device name>: <Signal

type> feedback out of range
Cause:
The reported feedback value is out of range (i.e. the received
value is not possible according to the system setup).
Effect:
The measurement will not be used, the system will use the order
signals vessel model and estimates to predict the actual value.
Action:
Check unit, connectors/wires and serial I/O. If applicable, check if
there are any failures reported on the remote control system.

Revision: B
Page 8-15 of 18
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
58
<Thruster device name>: Got

ACK without request
Cause:
Status signal is received in a wrong sequence (i.e. an error is
detected in signal from remote control system).
Effect:
The remote control system is not be available for control.
Action:
used).
59
<Thruster device name>:

Inconsistent breaker status
Cause:
The reported breaker status is inconsistent with respect to the
system setup.
Effect:
Action:
Check connections and possible open circuits.
60
<Thruster device name>: IO

module Failure
Cause:
The I/O Module reports a malfunction.
Effect:
The I/O Module status will not be available to the system.
Action:
Verify the unit setup, power and cabling.
61
<Generator>: Load out of range
Cause:
this kind of equipment.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced. The Load signal will not
be used by the system.
Action:
settings.
62
<Thruster device name>: Lost

connection
Cause:
Effect:
Action:
63
<Thruster device name>: Lost for

DP
Cause:
The thruster is no longer available for the system (Acknowledge
signal is lost).
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced and will not consider the
actual thruster.
Action:
systems. Change parameters for the desired action.
Page 8-16 of 18

Revision: B
Trouble Shooting
No.
Alarm Text
64
<Thruster device name>: Power

limitation
Cause:
The commanded thrust cannot be obtained due to insufficient
available power on the power bus that the thruster is connected to.
Effect:
The system performance may be reduced.
Action:
Start more generators or reduce other loads.
65
<Thruster device name>: <Signal

type> setpoint / feedback
deviation
Cause:
The feedback signal does not follow the commanded set point.
Effect:
The thruster will not give force as commanded. Performance might
be degraded.
Action:
used). Consider disabling thruster.
66
<Thruster device name>: System

internal logic error
Cause:
Logical signals from the remote thruster control have behaved in
an unexpected way.
Effect:
The thruster could be lost for DP. The system will continue as
normal.
Action:
Check if there are any failures reported on one of the remote
control systems or the power management system. Check the I/O
modules in the Outstation (if Outstations are used).
67
<Thruster device name>: Timed

out waiting for ACK
Cause:
The system has not received an expected activation of the
Acknowledge signal from the remote control system.
Effect:
The remote control system will not be available for control.
Action:
used).
68
<Thruster device name>: Timed

out waiting for ACK to drop
Cause:
A release of the Acknowledge signal is missing from the remote
control system.
Effect:
The remote control system will not be controlled by DP System.
Status is set to Idle.
Action:
used).
69
<Thruster device name>: Broken

Wire or overflow in <Signal type>
Cause:
A broken wire failure or a signal overflow is detected.
Effect:
Wrong data may have been received, and data will not be used.
Action:
properly connected.

Revision: B
Page 8-17 of 18
Trouble Shooting
3.9 UPS Alarms

The following alarm will be issued for UPS related faults. The term inside the angle
brackets < > is replaced by the name of the actual power supply.
No.
Alarm Text
70
HW failure in <Power supply

name>
Cause:
Effect:
Dependant of failure the unit may be disabled for operation until
the failure is fixed.
Action:
Check status on the unit, connectors/wires and mains power
supply.
Page 8-18 of 18

Revision: B
Contact Information
1
Contact Information .................................................................................9-3
1.1 Rolls-Royce Marine, Control Aalesund ....................................................9-3
1.2 World-Wide Support Organisation ..............................................................9-3


Revision: B

Revision: B
Contact List
1 Contact Information
1.1
Rolls-Royce Marine, Control Aalesund

For technical support or questions regarding the Rolls-Royce system, please contact:
1.2
E-mail:
dpsupport@rolls-royce.com
Postal address:
Control Aalesund
Service Box 22
N-6025 lesund
Norway
Visiting address:
Control Aalesund
Parkgata 3
3rd floor
lesund, Norway
Tel:
+47 81 52 00 70
Fax:
+47 70 10 37 01
After market service support:
+47 81 52 00 75
24 hrs service phone:
+47 90 01 09 97
World-Wide Support Organisation

NORTHERN EUROPE
DENMARK
Aalborg (Service)
Tel: +45 99 30 36 00
Fax: +45 99 30 36 01
Tel: +35 82 83 791
Fax: +35 82 83 79 48 04
Tel: +33 14 68 62 811
Fax: +33 14 68 79 398
Tel: +49 40 52 87 360
Fax: +49 40 52 31 580
Tel: +31 10 40 90 920
Fax: +31 10 40 90 921
Aalesund (Ship design)
Tel: +47 81 52 00 70
Fax: +47 70 10 37 01
Longva (Automation)
Tel: +47 81 52 00 70
Fax: +47 70 20 83 51
FINLAND
Rauma (Propulsion/Deck
machinery)
FRANCE
Rungis (Service)
GERMANY
Norderstedt (Service)
THE NETHERLANDS
Rotterdam, Pernis
NORWAY
Oslo (Repr. office)
Tel: +47 81 52 00 70
Fax: +47 23 31 04 99
Ulsteinvik (Ship design)
Tel: +47 81 52 00 70
Fax: +47 70 01 40 13
Ulsteinvik (Propulsion)
Tel: +47 81 52 00 70
Fax: +47 70 01 40 14
Tel: +46 55 08 40 00
Fax: +46 55 01 81 90
Tel: +44 13 83 82 31 88
Fax: +44 13 83 82 40 38
SWEDEN
Kristinehamn (Propulsion)
UNITED KINGDOM
Dunfermline (Motion Control)

Revision: B
Page 9-3 of 6
Contact List
NORTHERN EUROPE
Portsmouth (Marine Electrical
Systems)
Tel: +44 23 92 31 00 00
Fax: +44 23 92 31 00 01
Tel: +39 01 05 72 191
Fax: +39 01 05 72 19 50
Tel: +38 55 15 00 100
Fax: +38 55 15 00 101
Tel: +30 21 04 59 96 88
Fax: +30 21 04 59 96 87
Madrid
Tel: +34 91 73 50 010
Fax: +34 91 73 50 728
Tarragona
Tel: +34 97 72 96 444
Fax: +34 97 72 96 450
Tel: +67 14 88 33 881
Fax: +67 14 88 33 882
Melbourne
Tel: +61 39 87 30 988
Fax: +61 39 87 30 866
Perth
Tel: +61 89 33 67 910
Fax: +61 89 33 67 920
Beijing (Merchant)
Tel: +86 41 18 23 05 198
Fax: +86 41 18 23 08 448
Shanghai
Tel: +86 21 63 87 88 08
Fax: +86 21 53 82 57 93
Tel: +91 22 56 40 38 38
Fax: +91 22 56 40 38 18
Tel: +65 68 62 19 01
Fax: +65 68 63 21 65
Tel: +64 39 62 12 30
Fax: +64 39 62 12 31
SOUTHERN EUROPE
ITALY
Genova
CROATIA
Rijeka
GREECE
Piraeus
SPAIN
MIDDLE EAST
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Dubai
ASIA PACIFIC
AUSTRALIA
CHINA
INDIA
Mumbai
SINGAPORE
Singapore
NEW ZEALAND
Christchurch
NORTHEAST ASIA
JAPAN
Tokyo
Tel: +81 33 23 76 861
Fax: +81 33 23 76 846
Tel: +82 51 83 14 100
Fax: +82 51 83 14 101
Tel: +55 21 38 60 87 87
Fax: +55 21 38 60 44 10
REPUBLIC OF KOREA
Busan
AMERICAS
BRAZIL
Rio de Janeiro
CANADA
Page 9-4 of 6

Revision: B
Contact List
AMERICAS
Halifax
Tel: +1 90 24 68 28 83
Fax: +1 90 24 68 27 59
Vancouver (Propulsion)
Tel: +1 60 49 42 11 00
Fax: +1 60 49 42 11 25
Houston
Tel: +1 71 32 73 77 00
Fax: +1 71 32 73 77 76
Miramar
Tel: +1 95 44 36 71 00
Fax: +1 95 44 36 71 01
New Orleans
Tel: +1 50 44 64 45 61
Fax: +1 50 44 64 45 65
Seattle
Tel: +1 20 67 82 91 90
Fax: +1 20 67 82 01 76
USA

Revision: B
Page 9-5 of 6
Contact List
Page 9-6 of 6

Revision: B
Spare Parts
1
Ordering Spare Parts .............................................................................10-3
1.1 Ordering Spare Parts Separately .............................................................10-3
1.2 Ordering Spare Parts Kit ..........................................................................10-4
1.2.1 Parts Included in Spare Parts Kit ..................................................10-4
2
Supplied Spare Parts .............................................................................10-4
3
Preservation and Handling ....................................................................10-5
3.1 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................10-5
3.2 Delivery Check .........................................................................................10-5
10


Revision: B

Revision: B
Spare Parts
1 Ordering Spare Parts

For ordering of spare parts, please contact:
Dept. Propulsion, Ulsteinvik
After Market Offshore
E-mail:
spares.ulstein@rolls-royce.com
Phone:
+47 81 52 00 75
Fax:
+47 70 01 40 12
24 hrs service phone:
+47 90 01 09 97
There are two ways of ordering spare parts for the Icon system:
components ordered separately
spare parts kits put together to match the various system configuration.
1.1
Ordering Spare Parts Separately

To ensure that correct components are shipped, it is essential that each part is correctly
specified in the order. For part identification, please refer to the parts ID in the design
drawing documentation in chapter 12 of this manual.
The part ID is identified as follows:
<CAA Project ID><Unit No><Item No>
The CAA Project ID is found on the front page of the manual.
Example: CAA-110xxx (i.e. CAA-110xxx-MU is the User Manual).
To identify the Unit No. refer to the cable diagram for the specific project.
Example: +T001 (Main Control Cabinet).
To identify the Item No. refer to the internal wiring diagram for the corresponding unit.
Example: CAA-321xxx-01DW is the wiring diagram for the Main Control Cabinet.
Item No: -U11 is the CPU Controller.
Following the example above, the part number for the CPU Controller unit of this
specific project should read: CAA-110xxx +T001 -U11.
For parts in sensors and positioning reference systems, please check the corresponding
manual in chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals.

Revision: B
Page 10-3 of 6
10
Spare Parts
1.2
Ordering Spare Parts Kit

Apart from some types of reference systems, the Icon system does not have any parts
that are subject to wear due to normal operation. The spare parts kit comprises essential
parts, that in case of a failure may put the system out of operation until the faulty part is
replaced.
The Icon spare parts kit is recommended to be carried onboard vessels that are offshore
for long periods of time.
1.2.1
Parts Included in Spare Parts Kit

Spare part
Qty
Marine Controller
AC/DC power supply
Fibre-optic Network switch
Fuse kit
Joystick device
Positioning device
Serial line converter RS232/422
I/O Module RRAIO16
I/O Module RRDIO15
Isolation amplifier, programmable
Relay
For operator stations integrated in Operators Chair or for additional operator station of
limited equipped type:
10.4 Remote control display
Note:
Some of the listed parts may need a special configuration/set-up

procedure, depending on where the part is beeing used. This must be
taken care of by a certified maintenance engineer (AMS).
2 Supplied Spare Parts

A fuse kit, with 10 pcs of 5x20 mm 6.3 A fuses is included an a standard Icon delivery.
Page 10-4 of 6

Revision: B
Spare Parts
3 Preservation and Handling

3.1
Electrostatic Discharge
The life span of electronics can be affected by damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
This can happen if a charged tool or person touches a component. Therefore it is very
important that all tools and personnel are discharged by touching ground before the
printed circuit board or any of the components are touched. It is equally important to
discharge the package with the new component before opening it.
A person walking on a carpet can be charged with up to fifteen thousand volt (15000 V).
In worst case, some sensitive components can be destroyed when discharged with about
100 V.
Note:
3.2
It is very important that you are connected to ground before touching any
electronic components or printed circuit boards.
Delivery Check
Upon arrival of spare parts at the destination, all items must be inspected. The following
steps are to be taken:
Compare the shipment to the list of contents attached to the shipment and/or the
packing list. If there is any discrepancy, Rolls-Royce must be informed immediately.
Inspect for damage caused during transportation.
A visual check must be performed on all parts of the shipment; pallets, cardboard boxes
and wooden boxes. If there is any damage (i.e. signs of water immersion, dropping or
other mishandling), the crates must be opened for inspection.
Note:
A representative for the vessel should be present during the inspection. If

any damage is found the vessel representative must, if not present at the
inspection, be informed.
A damage report, listing damages found and possibly including pictures of the damaged
parts, should be produced. The report must then be sent to Rolls-Royce immediately.

Revision: B
Page 10-5 of 6
10
Spare Parts
Page 10-6 of 6

Revision: B
Tools
1
General ....................................................................................................11-3
2
Tools ........................................................................................................11-3
2.1 Recommended Tools ...............................................................................11-3
2.2 Special Tools ............................................................................................11-3
11


Revision: C

Revision: C
Tools
1 General
This chapter lists required and recommended tools for installation and maintenance
purposes.
Note:
Tools required for maintaining subsuppliers equipment are not listed in

this chapter. Please refer to chapter 14 Subsuppliers Manuals for details.
For maintenance and/or replacement of the sensors and position reference systems, the
separate manual from each manufacturer must be used.
Note:
For maintenance on electronic equipment, the use of electrostatic

discharge protection such as a wrist-band connected to a grounding point
is mandatory. A grounded surface is also recommended for such tasks.
2 Tools
2.1 Recommended Tools
The following tools are recommended for the installation and maintenance of a Poscon
or an Icon system:
Standard network technician tools
Standard electrician tools
Optic fibre termination tools (if applicable).
Caution: Always use appropriate tools for all maintenance tasks. Use of
inappropriate tools can lead to system malfunction.
2.2 Special Tools

No special tools are required for the installation and maintenance of a Poscon or an Icon
system.

Revision: C
Page 11-3 of 4
11
Tools
Page 11-4 of 4

Revision: C
Design Drawings
1
General ....................................................................................................12-3
12


Revision: B

Revision: B
Design Drawings
1 General
This chapter comprises the following types of design drawings (see the Main Item List
for a complete listing):
Suffix
Name
Description
01LI
Main Item List
The part list consists of material used in the delivery.
01LC
Cable List
Cable list to be used as guidelines for connecting the

different parts of the delivered system, and to connect the
system to any external system.
All analogue signal cables are to be galvanically insulated
in the transmitting end, and all discrete signal cables are to
be of potentially-free contact types, if not otherwise stated
in the drawings.
01LN
Network List
List to be used as guidelines for connecting the different

parts of the delivered system to the internal Ethernet
network.
01DC
Cable Diagram
System drawing gives an overview of the specific system

installation.
0xDW
Wiring Diagram
Drawings consisting of wiring details and, if applicable, a

table of contents.
01DM
Mechanical Drawing
Drawing consists of mechanical details (usually not

attached as a part of this manual).
01DL
Layout Drawing
The drawing shows the physical size of the different

components in the delivery.
12

Revision: B
Page 12-3 of 4
Design Drawings
Page 12-4 of 4

Revision: B
PDF-FILE GENERATED BY RRM-CAA (06/06/05)
Revision
1
Revision History .....................................................................................13-3
13

Revision: A
13
Revision: A

Revision
1 Revision History
This chapter specifies the complete compilation of documents and their revision for this
manual. It also contains the document number and revision of the complete manual. This
information is also found on the first page of this manual.
An Installation Manual comprise the following type of documents:
Suffix
Title
01MI
Introduction
02MX
Safety
03MX
System Description
04MX
05MX
Technical Data
06MI
Handling and Preservation
07MI
Installation
08MI
Commissioning
09MX
Contact List
10MI
Final Inspection
11MX
Tools
12MX
Design Drawings
13MX
Revision
14MX
Subsuppliers Manuals
A User Manual comprise the following type of documents:

Suffix
Title
01MU
Introduction
02MX
Safety
03MX
System Description
04MX
05MX
Technical Data
06MU
07MU
08MU
Trouble Shooting
09MX
Contact List
10MU
Spare Parts
11MX
Tools
12MX
Design Drawings
13MX
Revision
14MX
For descriptions of this manuals contents, see chapter 1 Introduction.
13
Revision: A
Page 13-3 of 4
Revision
13
Page 13-4 of 4

Revision: A
Revisions
Document Revisions
User Manual
Chapter/Title
Document ID
01
Introduction
CAA-021001-01MU
Curr.Rev Prev.Rev Comments
02
Safety
CAA-000001-02MX
03
System Description
CAA-022001-03MX
04
CAA-000001-04MX
05
Technical Data
CAA-021001-05MX
06
Operating Instruction
CAA-021001-06MU
07
CAA-021001-07MU
08
Trouble Shooting
CAA-021001-08MU
09
Contact List
CAA-000001-09MX
10
Spare parts
CAA-021001-10MU
11
Tools
CAA-000001-11MX
12
Design drawings
CAA-000001-12MX
- System Drawings
Main Item List
CAA-110734-01LI
Cable Diagram
CAA-110734-01DC
07-05-11
B
Cable List
CAA-110734-01LC
07-05-11
Wiring Diagram
CAA-110734-00DW
07-04-17
Wiring Diagram
CAA-110734-01DW
Layout Drawing
CAA-110734-01DL
PartNo
Description
75683
DP2 CABINET, TRIPLE COMPUTER CAA-321007-01DL
- Equipment Drawings
CAA-321007-01DW
75992
74092
COMPUTER DP UNIT
CAA-324002-01DL
CAA-324002-01DW
CAA-492003-01DL
CAA-492003-01DW
74496
TFT 19i/TOUCH/VBUF/24VDC
CAA-414006-01DL
75687
DP Console (2xIPD,TRB)
CAA-452012-01DL
75688
DP Swingframe (2xIPD,TRB)
CAA-452012-01DW
CAA-452013-01DL
CAA-452013-01DW
A
A
75218
DESKJET 2360
CAA-416003-01DL
61910
OKI ML280
CAA-416001-01DL
74483
12WDU25+4X12 WDK25
CAA-391003-01DL
75940
GIL, BOW UP
CAA-652003-01DL
75943
MRU-D COMPLETE
CAA-651002-01DL
75957
VERIPOS GNSS SUITE, L1/L12
CAA-610011-01DL
75094
CYSCAN
CAA-613001-01DL
74093
230VAC DISTR.
CAA-391004-01DL
74119
UPS, 7 KVA
74129
13
TRAINER, DUAL PMS/RSG
JS -MAN -DP SWITCH
Revision
Document Revision
Rolls Royce Marine AS

Control-Aalesund
CAA-381001-01DL
CAA-381001-01DW
CAA-482001-01DL
CAA-000001-13MX
CAA-110735-13MU
CAA-110735-13MU
Issue: A
14
Subsuppliers manuals
CAA-000001-14MX
74496
TFT 19i/TOUCH/VBUF/24VDC
CAA-414006-01MU
71462
TFT 15i/220VAC
CAA-414006-01MU
75218
DESKJET 2360
CAA-416003-01MU
61910
OKI ML280
CAA-416001-01MU
75940
GIL, BOW UP
CAA-652003-01MU
CAA-652003-01MU
75943
MRU-D COMPLETE
CAA-651002-01MU
75942
MRU-5 COMPLETE
CAA-651002-01MU
75957
VERIPOS GNSS SUITE, L1/L12
CAA-610011-01MU
72312
TFT 19i/220VAC
75094
74119
CYSCAN
UPS, 7 KVA
Rolls Royce Marine AS

Control-Aalesund
CAA-414006-01MU
CAA-414006-01MU
CAA-613001-01MU
CAA-414006-01MU
CAA-381001-01MU
CAA-381001-01MU
CAA-110735-13MU
Issue: A
1
General ....................................................................................................14-3


Revision: A
14

Revision: A
14

1 General
This chapter contains customer documentation for equipment that is part of the RollsRoyce system installation, but not covered by the Installation Manual or the User
Manual.
Each document consists of excerpts from the subsuppliers original documentation. This
has been made by Rolls-Royce with the expressed consent of each subsupplier.

Revision: A
Page 14-3 of 4
14
Page 14-4 of 4
14

Revision: A
User Manual
for
JHD DISPLAYS
This document contains the complete manual:

INB100005-1 - JHD User Manual: Maritime Multi Displays / Industrial TFT Displays
Document No.
Security Classification:
Issue No.
Page
CAA-414006-01MU
Unrestricted
2006 Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund

The information in this document is the property of Rolls-Royce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund and may not be copied, or
communicated to a third party, or used, for any purpose other than that for which it is supplied without the express written consent of RollsRoyce Marine AS, Dept. Control - Aalesund.
Blank page
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-414006-01MU
Unrestricted

User Manual
Maritime Multi Display Models

JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
JH
10T06
15T05
19T02
20T03
20T06
23T02
MMD
MMD
MMD
MMD
MMD
MMD
10.4
15.0
19.0
20.1
20.1
23.1
inch
inch
inch
inch
inch
inch
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Maritime
Multi
Multi
Multi
Multi
Multi
Multi
Display
Display
Display
Display
Display
Display
Industrial TFT Display Models

JH 10T06 STD - 10.4 inch Industrial TFT Display
JH 15T05 STD - 15.0 inch Industrial TFT Display
Jakob Hatteland Display AS
msosen, N-5578 Nedre Vats, Norway
Phone: +47 5276 3700, Fax: +47 5276 5444
www.hatteland.com
User Manual MMD/TFT Series

Updated: 18 Nov 2005
Doc Id: INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
For models: (and some variations)

-A1, -A2, -C1, -C2, -C3, -C4
Copyright 2005 Jakob Hatteland Display AS

Aamsosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats, Norway
Information in this manual are copyrighted to the respective owners. All rights are reserved by Jakob
Hatteland Display AS. This information may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced,
translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without the prior written consent
of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
The products described, or referenced, herein are copyrighted to the respective owners.
The products may not be copied or duplicated in any way. This documentation contains proprietary
information that is not to be disclosed to persons outside the users company without prior written consent
of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
The copyright notice appearing above is included to provide statutory protection in the event of
unauthorized or unintentional public disclosure.
All other product names or trademarks are properties of their respective owners !
Contents
Contents........................................................................................ 3
Contents of package
General .......................................................................................... 9
Introduction to Jakob Hatteland Display AS
About this manual
Basic Construction - Maritime Multi Display
Product Labels (Example)
Serial Number Label
Warranty Label
Capacitive Touchscreen
Resistive Touchscreen
9
10
11
12
12
12
13
14
General Installation Recommendations................................... 15

Installation and mounting
Brightness knob precaution
Ergonomics
Cables
Cable Entries & Connectors (Marked area) - Illustration only
Maximum Cable Length
Standard Bracket
Rotary Bracket
Physical Connections - MMD/STD Models
Pin Assignments - Common Connectors
15
15
16
17
17
18
18
18
19
21
User Controls ............................................................................. 24

Operation
OSD Menu Overview
OSD Menu Functions
Preset Signal Timings SXGA displays (NON-DVI)
Preset Signal Timings SXGA displays (DVI)
Preset Signal Timings UXGA displays (NON-DVI)
Preset Signal Timings UXGA displays (DVI)
24
26
28
33
35
37
39
User Controls - STD ................................................................... 42

Operation
User Controls / OSD Menu
OSD Menu Functions
Preset Signal Timing XGA Displays
42
43
44
49
3
IND100130-1
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Contents
Specifications ............................................................................. 51
Specifications - JH 10T06 STD
Specifications - JH 10T06 MMD (DVI)
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Technical Drawings.................................................................... 61
Technical Drawings - JH 10T06 STD
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Technical Drawings - JH 10T06 MMD (DVI)
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
Standard Version
Standard Version
Bracket(s) Version
4
IND100130-1
62
62
63
64
64
65
66
66
67
68
68
69
70
70
71
72
72
73
74
74
75
75
76
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Contents
Technical Drawings - Accessories ........................................... 77
10 Inch Sun Visor
17 >> 23 Rotary Bracket
17 Inch > 20 Inch Bracket
15 TFT to 19 TFT adapter
19 TFT to 21 CRT adapter
19 Inch Sun Visor
VESA Bracket
Water Cover
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
General - Appendix .................................................................... 87

Basic Trouble-shooting
Testing & Approvals Overview
Declaration of Conformity
Return Of Goods Information
Terms
Notes
Notes
Revision History
88
89
91
92
93
96
97
98
Contact Information ................................................................. 100
5
IND100130-1
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Contents of package
This product is shipped with:
Item
Description
4 pcs of PAN M6X25 black bolts with M6 plastic washer.

These should only be used to secure the display into a
console.
Illustration
Note: If you prefer your own bolts, make sure they are minimum
M6 and 25mm in length for security reasons.
1 pcs of Standard Signal Cable and/or DVI cable.

DSUB 15P Male to DSUB 15P Male - Length approx: 2m
DVI-D 24P Male to DVI-D 24P Male - Length approx: 2m
Note: DVI cable only included on products that supports DVI.

1 pcs of Standard Power Cable.
(European or US standard) - Length approx: 1.9m
Note: Power cable not included in the DC version.
1 pcs of User Manual
Optional Accessories:
Item
Description
4 pcs of M6X12 Unbraco bolts (Included with bracket)

These should only be used to secure the bracket on the
display.
Illustration
If you prefer your own bolts, make sure they do not exceed 12mm
in length. Use any longer will do serious damage to components
inside the product!
1 pcs of Standard Serial Cable

DSUB 9p Male to DSUB 9p Male - Length approx: 1.5m
This cable is only included if you purchased a product with
touchscreen or remote control serial interface installed.
6
IND100131-1
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
General
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

KNOWLEDGE - QUALITY - ECONOMY
Introduction to Jakob Hatteland Display AS
Founded in 1987, Jakob Hatteland Display (JHD), based in Norway, offers the widest range of
type approved marine monitors, panel computers and type approved marine computers for the
worldwide commercial, naval, yacht and cruise market.
Today the group develops and manufactures a complete range of IEC 60945 tested marine
monitors, panel computers and IEC 60945 tested marine computers.
Approved Marine Displays (MMD/STD)
Hatteland Displays marine monitors are based on high quality and state-of-the-art components
with the highest specifications, and meet all requirements for harsh maritime use. The displays
are easily integrated into your system, due to standardized products and features.
The MMD (Maritime Multi Display) series consists of sizes ranging from 10in to 23in.
Specifically designed for navigation and automation systems on ships, these certified LCD
monitors comply to IP66 described in IEC 60925, are tested according to IEC 60945 and are
approved by major classification societies such as ABS, BV, ClassNK, DNV, GL and LR.
Further to this marine standard, the 19in MMD, the 20in MMD and the 23in MMD
marine monitors are also available as ECDIS and ARPA radar-compliant units.
Approved Marine Panel Computers (MMC)
The combination of the reliable design of the marine TFT-LCD modules, together with industrial
computer boards, allows Hatteland Display to offer a product range for customer applications
where space is critical and full function is desired in a single unit. In particular, the standardized
ETX-board form factor allows full flexibility when it comes to processor choice. Because of
multiple useful standard components we can offer a highly attractive commercial package
The MMC (Maritime Multi Computer) series consist of sizes ranging from 10in to 23in.
These products have also been designed for typical marine applications in navigation,
automation and other systems. Following Hattelands philosophy, these marine panel computers
are fully tested according to IEC 60945 and are designed for type approval.
Approved stand-alone and rack-mounted marine computers
Two concepts are followed to offer variation in size, function and expansion slots for customers:
approved black-box computers for limited space and approved computers for standard
19in racks, which offer a high degree of expansion. Configurations according to customer
wishes are implicit, such as the operating system, CD-burner, RAM, graphic card, HD, add-on
cards, factory installed software and many, many more.
General
IND100077-1
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

The approved computers are tested according to IEC 60945 and IACS E10 and meet the
requirements for IEC 61174 (ECDIS). Several approvals by major classification societies such as
ABS, BV, ClassNK, DNV, GL and LR are available or pending.
Flexible display solutions and night vision facilities
All the type-approved displays, panel computers and marine computers offer maximum flexibility
for customers applications. Hatteland Display offers all products with AC or DC power supply,
and marine displays and marine panel computers have a fully linear dimmable function for night
vision.
Upon the customers request, specific colour, mechanical or electrical function designs are
possible. Many more options are also available, including factory mounted touch screens, sun
visors for marine monitors, different Windows or Linux operating systems and brackets
Design and Production
All products are designed and controlled by Hatteland Display in Nedre Vats, Norway.
The production and configuration of all products is taking place within Hattelands production
plant#1 (opened in September 2003) in Nedre Vats, Norway. Here an extensive manufacturing
capacity is available for all products, and can be expanded in the future.
The chosen materials for the production of the products are specifically industrial components
and can fulfill form-fit-and-function requests.
About this manual
The manual contains electrical, mechanical and input/output signal specifications. All specifications
in this manual, due to manufacturing, new revisions and approvals, are subject to change without
notice. However, the last update and revision of this manual are shown both on the frontpage
and also in the Revision History chapter. Please use that as a reference.
Furthermore, for third party datasheet and user manuals, please see dedicated interactive CD
delivered with the product or contact our sales personnel for support.
General
IND100077-1
10
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Basic Construction - Maritime Multi Display
Basic Construction,
Hatteland Display Concept
Backcover/cabinet
Touchscreen option
Bracket
Rotation bracket
LCD Panel
Sun Visor
Controller Hatch
Front frame w/glass
General Display Variations/Models Overview:
A1
A2
A3
A4
C1/C3
C2/C4
E1
E2
Hx
MMD
MMC
MIL
MEX
STD/VGA
= AC Power 115-230 VAC

= DC Power 12-24 VDC (Some have 10-36 VDC)
= AC Power 115-230 VAC including videobuffer
= DC Power 12-24 VDC including videobuffer
= Touchscreen + AC Power 115-230 VAC
= Touchscreen + DC Power 12-24 VDC
= ECDIS Compliant + AC Power 115-230 VAC
= ECDIS Compliant + DC Power 12-24 VDC
= Same as all above, but with handles on front frame.
= Dual Input (RGB + VIDEO) Display
= Complete Maritime Multi Computer + Display Solution
= Naval Military Dual Input (RGB + VIDEO) Display
= Multi Display - Explosion protection EEx nA II T5
= Single Input RGB Signal
General
IND100077-5
11
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Product Labels (Example)

Serial Number Label
Manufacturer & Country
Product & Serial Number
Product Information
Manufacture:
Jakob Hatteland Display
NORWAY
Description
Power rating
100W
Product:
19 Inch
TFT
Product type: #
JH 19T01MMD-A1-831
Serial Number
115VAC/60Hz
230VAC/50Hz
Input Voltage
Product Type and Serial Number

JH XXAXX AAA-AX-XXX
JH 19T01 MMD-A1-831
NOMENCLATURE
Example
Serial Number
Sub Version (AC-Odd / DC-Even number)
Version (Number & Product Name)
TFT (Thin Film Transistor)
Display Size (inch)
Jakob Hatteland (manufacturer)
Warranty Label
If you are to perform service on a unit still under warranty, any warranty will
be void if this label is damaged or removed. This label is usually located on the
back of the product and near the serial number label. This is to help our service
department to better determine if there has been any unauthorized service on a
product still under warranty.
General
IND100077-23
12
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Introduction to Jakob Hatteland Display products with touchscreen
JHD uses both Resistive and Capacitive touchscreen solutions for their products. Please visit our
website to verify what product and touchscreen solution your product have.
Capacitive touchscreens operate using oscillator circuits
that are located in each corner of the glass overlay and
measure the capacitance of the area to be touched.
Depending on where the user touches the overlay, the
oscillators will vary in frequency. A touchscreen controller
then measures the frequency variations to ascertain the
coordinates of the persons touch. This glass overlay has
a coating that stores the charge deposited over its surface
electrically. It will not operate with either a gloved hand
or with a mechanical stylus.
Brief Specifications
Subject
Construction
Positional Accurancy
Touch Contact
Requirements
Enduarance Tested
Cleaning
Liquid Resistance
Light Transmission
Details
Top: ClearTek protective overcoat protects the sensors and increase durability.
Inside: Electrode X/Y grid pattern and conductive coating.
Bottom: Glass and conductive coating.
Small amount of voltage is applied to the four corners for measuring X and Y
coordinates of the touch point.
Reported touch coordinates are within 1.0% of true position.
(Based on viewing area dimensions)
3 ms for finger input.
More than 225 million touches in one location without noticable degradation to
the surface.
Water, isopropyl, alcohol, and similar non-abrasive cleaners.
Liquids on screen does not impede touchscreen performance.
Up to 88% at 550 nm; dependant on specific surface finish chosen.
Updated touchscreen drivers and documentation for your operating system:

Please visit our website www.hatteland.com for 3rd party software, drivers and complete
documentation for touchscreens. In case of problems, please contact our sales department.
Before using the touchscreen, it may need to be calibrated for the operating system.
Please install the 3rd party software and use the Calibrate function from there.
Touchscreen
IND100110-1
13
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
It generally uses a display overlay composed of layers,
each with a conductive coating on the interior surface.
Special separator dots are distributed evenly across the
active area and separate the conductive interior layers.
The pressure from using either a mechanical stylus or
finger produces an internal electrical contact at the
action point which supplies the controller with vertical
and horizontal analog voltages for data input. The resistive
touchscreens are anti-glare to reduce reflective shine
intensity, which will slightly diffuse the light output
throughout the screen. Resistive technology activation can
be initiated by; a gloved hand, fingernail, mechanical stylus
or an ungloved finger.
Brief Specifications
Subject
Construction
Details
Top: Polyester with outside hard-surface coating with clear or anti-glare finish.
Inside: Transparent conductive coating.
Bottom: Glass substrate with uniform conductive coating.
Top and bottom layers separated by separator dots.
Positional Accurancy
Standard deviation of error is less than +- 0.080-inch (2mm).
Touch Activation Force Typically 57 to 133 g
Expected Life
More than 35 million touches in one location without failure, using a stylus similar
Performance
to a finger.
Chemical Resistance
Acetone, Ammonia-based glass cleaners, Common food and beverages,
(Exposed for one hour) Hexane, Isopropyl alcohol, Methylene chloride, Methyl ethyl ketone,
Mineral spirits, Turpentine
Light Transmission
Typically 75% over visible light spectrum.
Updated touchscreen drivers and documentation for your operating system:

Please visit our website www.hatteland.com for 3rd party software, drivers and complete
documentation for touchscreens. In case of problems, please contact our sales department.
Before using the touchscreen, it may need to be calibrated for the operating system.
Please install the 3rd party software and use the Calibrate function from there.
Touchscreen
IND100110-1
14
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
General Installation Recommendations

Installation and mounting
1. Most of our products are intended for various methods of installation or mounting
(panel mounting, bracket mounting, ceiling/wall mounting etc.); for details, please see the relevant
mechanical drawings.
2. Adequate ventilation is a necessary prerequisite for the life of the product. The air inlet and outlet
openings must definitely be kept clear; coverings which restrict ventilation are not permissible.
3. Do not install the unit in a horizontal position (laying down), as this will cause heat to build up
inside the display which will damage the LCD Panel. To prevent this problem we recommend
installing the unit in a vertical position (30 degrees) to improve the airflow through the unit.
4. Exposure to direct sunlight can cause a considerable increase in the temperature of the unit, and
might under certain circumstances lead to overtemperature. This point should already be taken
into consideration when the bridge equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the
windows, ventilation, etc.)
5. Space necessary for ventilation, for cable inlets, for the operating procedures and for
maintenance, must be provided.
6. To further improve the cooling of the unit we recommend installing Cooling Fans underneath
blowing upwards into the unit air inlet. This may be required in high temperature applications
and also when there is reason to expect temperature problems due to non-optimal way of
mounting(Ref.2-5).
7. If the push buttons of the product are not illuminated, an external, dimmable illumination
(IEC 60945, 6.5.c, e.g. Goose neck light is required for navigational use.
8. Information about necessary pull-relievers for cables is given in the installation drawings.
Attention must be paid to this information so that cable breaks will not occur, e.g. during service
work.
Brightness knob precaution
Please be aware of the risk of breaking or bending the brightness knob. The brightness knob
should be free of any obstruction.
Installation
IND100078-1
15
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Ergonomics
1. Adjust the unit height so that the top of the screen is at or below eye level. Your eyes should
look slightly downwards when viewing the middle of the screen.
2. Adjust screen inclination to remain gaze angle to the centre of the screen approximately
perpendicular to the line of gaze.
3. When products are to be operated both from a sitting position and from a standing position, a
screen inclination of about 30 to 40 (from a vertical plane) has turned out to be favourable.
4. The brightness of displays is limited. Sunlight passing directly through the bridge windows - or its
reflection - which falls upon the screen workplaces must be reduced by suitable means
(negatively inclined window surfaces, Venetian blinds, distance from the windows, dark colouring
of the deckhead)
5. Units in the bridge wing area must be installed or mounted by suitable alignment or
bulkhead/ deckhead mounting in such a way that reflections of light from the front pane of the
display are not directed into the observers viewing direction.
6. The use of ordinary commercial filter plates or filter films is not permitted for items of equipment
that require approval (by optical effects, aids of that kind can suppress small radar targets, for
example).
General mounting instructions
- The useful life of the components of all Electronics Units generally decreases with increasing
ambient temperature; it is therefore advisable to install such units in air-conditioned rooms. If there
are no such facilities these rooms must at least be dry, adequately ventilated and kept at a suitable
temperature in order to prevent the formation of condensation inside the display unit.
- With most Electronic Units, cooling takes place via the surface of the casing. The cooling must not
be impaired by partial covering of the unit or by installation of the unit in a confined cabinet.
- In the area of the wheel house, the distance of each electronics unit from the magnetic standard
compass or the magnetic steering compass must not be less than the permitted magnetic
protection distance.
This distance is measured from the centre of the magnetic system of the compass to the nearest
point on the corresponding unit concerned.
- Units which are to be used on the bridge wing must be installed inside the wing control console
protected against the weather. In order to avoid misting of the viewing screen, a 25 ... 50 W
console-heating (power depending on the volume) is recommended.
- When selecting the site of a display unit, the maximum cable lengths have to be considered.
Installation
IND100078-1
16
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

- The impairment of read-out from a display screen by direct light from lamps or the sun must be
avoided. Rear windows must be blacked out by means of roller blinds or Venetian blinds.
- Disturbing reflections on the screen of a display caused by pilot lamps and illuminated signs must
be prevented by suitable measures (screening or relocating).
- When a product is being installed, the surface base or bulkhead must be checked to ensure that it
is flat in order to avoid twisting of the unit when the fixing screws are tightened, because such
twisting would impair mechanical functions. Any unevenness should be compensated for by
means of spacing-washers.
- The grounding screws of the units must be connected to the body of the ship (ground); the wire
used should have a cross sectional area of at least 6 mm2.
- Transportation damage, even if apparently insignificant at first glance, must immediately be
examined and be reported to the freight carrier. The moment of setting-to-work of the equipment
is too late, not only for reporting the damage but also for the supply of replacements.
Cables
Use only high quality shielded signal cables. For RGB/DVI cables use only cables with separate
coax for Red, Green and Blue. Jakob Hatteland Display can supply a varity of high quality RGB/
DVI, RS232, PARALLEL, LAN and USB cables intended for this use.
Cable Entries & Connectors (Marked area) - Illustration only
Bottom View
Back View
Installation
IND100078-1
17
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Maximum Cable Length
The RGB/DVI cable should generally be kept as short as possible to provide a high quality output
on the display. The maximum cable length will depend on the signal resolution and frequency, but
also on the quality of the signal output from the computer. We recommend using 60Hz vertical
frequency for our displays.
Cables up to 10 meters generally provides good picture quality even with a 1600x1200 (UXGA)
60Hz signal. In most cases (especially with lower resolutions) even longer cables will provide a
satisfactory result. This should however be tested in advance before making the decision on how
far the unit can be placed from the signal source.
Standard Bracket
When mounting the bracket on the MMD/STD products, the length of the bolts should not exceed
12mm. Using any longer bolts will do serious damage to components inside the product, and will
void warranty!
Mount bolts on both sides of the bracket/display.
You make any adjustments before securing the bolts.
Adjust the tilting angle and secure the bolts.
Note: MMC bracket may vary in placement and design, but length of bolts should not
exceed 12mm.
Rotary Bracket
This can only be mounted if your product is equipped with a Standard Bracket.
Use the provided bolts to secure it. You may choose your own bolts to secure it to a table or
desktop, recommended size are: M10 and minimum 30mm in length. The rotary bracket can be
rotated 180
Installation
IND100078-1
18
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Connection area of display (illustration)
RGB Out or Touch

(Optional)
Composite In
Led Adjust (older models)
Power Input
RGB IN
Serial Interface(opt)
DVI-D IN (newer models)

S-Video In
NOTE: Available connectors/locations may vary depending on model !
TOUCHSCREEN / VGA OUT: (optional)
Connect the RS-232 cable to the D-SUB 9P Connector (female) on the rear side of the TFT display.
Connect the other end to your COM port of your computer. Install the nesscessary software to operate it.
- Note that the connector is only installed upon customer request. VGA OUT connector is then removed.
- By factory standards the product have been mounted with a VGA OUT 15PIN DSUB connector, this signal
is a clone of the incoming signal.
COMPOSITE IN (PAL/NTSC/SECAM VIDEO):
Connect your composite video signal cable into the RCA jack plug. To activate the Picture In Picture
function, the TFT display must be configured via the OSD menus.
- Note that Composite Video must be selected as the incoming video source in the OSD menu.
S-VIDEO IN:
Connect your S-Video (SVHS) video signal cable into the mini 4-way din plug. It can only be inserted
one way and make sure you dont bend any of the pins inside your cable. To activate the Picture In Picture
function, the TFT display must be configured via the OSD menus.
- Note that S-Video must be selected as the incoming video source in the OSD menu.
RGB IN:
Connect the VGA cable to the D-SUB 15P Connector (female) on the rear side of the TFT display.
If possible, screw the VGA cable to the D-SUB connector and make sure you dont bend any of the pins
inside the VGA cable connector. To reduce tension of the VGA cable, secure it to the base mounted cable
tie clamp. Connect the other end of the cable to the VGA output of your computer, and fasten it there also.
19
IND100133-1
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

DVI-D IN:
Connect the DVI cable to the DVI-D 24P Connector (female) on the rear side of the TFT display.
If possible, screw the DVI cable to the DVI-D connector and make sure you dont bend any of the pins
inside the DVI cable connector. To reduce tension of the DVI cable, secure it to the base mounted cable tie
clamp. Connect the other end of the cable to the DVI-D output of your computer, and fasten it there also.
POWER INPUT: (AC Version)
The internal AC power module supports both 115VAC/60Hz and 230VAC/50Hz power input. You may
secure the cable further by mounting it to the base mounted cable tie clamp.
POWER INPUT: (DC Version)
Secure the cables (check polarity!) to the screw terminal, you may secure the cable further by mounting it
to the base mounted cable tie clamp. The internal DC power module supports voltage from 12 to 24 VDC.
SERIAL INTERFACE: (optional)
The two serial remote control connectors are used for displays with the JHSCOM-A1 or JHSCOM-B1.
It features a RS232/RS422/RS485 interface for controlling all parameters, including brightness, for the
display. For further information, see the Control Interface under support - www.hatteland.com
LED ADJUST: (Only on older versions)
The led adjust is only present in displays described in the chapter automatic power light dimming. With the
led adjust knob, you can manually adjust the intensity of the power light indicator which is located in the
front of the display. The power light indicator is controlled by the Auto Power LED Dimming function which
automatically adjusts the intensity of the power light based on your environment lightning. You could also
turn it off if that is necessary.
Note:
If you have optional accessories beyond these standard connectors described here, please visit our
website at www.hatteland.com for separate documentation/specifications regarding accessories (when
made available).
20
IND100133-1
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Note: Not all connectors may be available on your specific product. This depends on the amount of additional
hardware installed from factory, or customized solutions. These pin assignments are for the common connectors used.
Pin Assignments - RJ45 10/100 LAN
Pin Assignments - RJ45 10/100/1000 GBLAN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pin 01 - TDP
Pin 02 - TDN
Pin 03 - RDP
Pin 04 - NC
Pin 05 - NC
Pin 06 - RDN
Pin 07 - NC
Pin 08 - NC
Transmit Differential Pair (Positive)

Transmit Differential Pair (Negative)
Receive Differential Pair (Positive)
Not Connected
Not Connected
Receive Differential Pair (Negative)
Not Connected
Not Connected
Pin 01 - D0P
Pin 02 - D0N
Pin 03 - D1P
Pin 04 - D2P
Pin 05 - D2N
Pin 06 - D1N
Pin 07 - D3P
Pin 08 - D3N
Differential Pair 0 (Positive)

Differential Pair 0 (Negative)
Use category 5 - twisted pair cable
Pin Assignments - 9P Serial COM RS232

5
Pin Assignments - 15P HD RGB VGA

5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6
4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Pin 01 - DCD
Pin 02 - SIN
Pin 03 - SOUT
Pin 04 - DTR
Pin 05 - GND
Pin 06 - DSR
Pin 07 - RTS
Pin 08 - CTS
Pin 09 - RI
Data Carry Detect

Serial In or Receive Data
Serial Out or Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
Ground
Data Set Ready
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Ring Indicate
Pin 01
Pin 02
Pin 03
Pin 04
Pin 05
Pin 06
Pin 07
Pin 08
Pin 09
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Pin Assignments - USB

Pin 2: Negative Data
Pin 4: Ground
15 14 13 12 11
Red, analog
Green, analog
Blue, analog
Reserved for monitor ID bit 2 (grounded)
Digital ground
Analog ground red
Analog ground green
Analog ground blue
+5V power supply for DDC (optional)
Digital ground
Reserved for monitor ID bit 0 (grounded)
DDC serial data
Horizontal sync or composite sync, input
Vertical sync, input
DDC serial clock
Pin Assignments - 5P PS/2 MOUSE

Pin 1: VCC +5V
Pin 3: Positive Data
Pin 6: Not Connected
Pin Assignments - 5P PS/2 KEYBOARD

Pin 4: Vcc +5V
Pin 3: Ground
Pin 5: Keyboard Clock

Pin 4: Vcc +5V
Pin 5: Mouse Clock
Pin 1: Mouse Data
Pin 3: Ground
Pin Ass. - 5P PS/2 KEYBOARD+MOUSE Combined

Pin 1: Keyboard Data
Pin 6: Mouse Clock
Pin 4: Vcc +5V

Pin 2: Mouse Data
21
IND100241-2
Pin 5: Keyboard Clock
Pin 3: Ground
Pin 1: Keyboard Data
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Pin Assignments - 25P Parallel
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Pin 01 - STROBE
Pin 02 - DATA0
Pin 03 - DATA1
Pin 04 - DATA2
Pin 05 - DATA3
Pin 06 - DATA4
Pin 07 - DATA5
Pin 08 - DATA6
Pin 09 - DATA7
Pin 10 - ACK
Pin 11 - BUSY
Pin 12 - PE
Pin 13 - SELECT
Pin 14 - AUTO FEED
Pin 15 - ERR#
Pin 16 - INIT#
Pin 17 - SLIN#
Pin 18 - GND
Pin 19 - GND
Pin 20 - GND
Pin 21 - GND
Pin 22 - GND
Pin 23 - GND
Pin 24 - GND
Pin 25 - GND
This signal indicates to the printer that data at PD7..0 are valid.
Parallel data bus from PC board to printer. The data line are able to operate in PS/2 compatible bi-directional mode.
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Same as Pin 02
Signal from printer indicating that the printer has received the data and is ready to accept further data.
Signal from printer indicating that the printer cannot accept further data.
Signal from printer indicating that the printer is out of paper.
Signal from printer to indicate that the printer is selected.
This active low output causes the printer to add a line feed after each line printed.
Signal from printer indicating that an error has been detected.
This active low output initialises (resets) the printer.
Signal to select the printer sent from CPU board to printer.
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Pin Assignments - 24P DVI-D & DVI-I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C1 C2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
C5
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 C3 C4
Pin 01
Pin 02
Pin 03
Pin 04
Pin 05
Pin 06
Pin 07
Pin 08
Pin 09
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Pin 16
Pin 17
Pin 18
Pin 19
Pin 20
Pin 21
Pin 22
Pin 23
Pin 24
Pin C1
Pin C2
Pin C3
Pin C4
Pin C5
T.M.D.S. Data2 - (Digital - RED link 1)

T.M.D.S. Data2 + (Digital + RED link 1)
T.M.D.S. Data2/4 Shield
T.M.D.S. Data4 - (Digital - GREEN link 2)
T.M.D.S. Data4 + (Digital + GREEN link 2)
DDC Clock
DDC Data
Analog Vertical Sync (DVI-I only)
T.M.D.S. Data1 - (Digital - GREEN link 1)
T.M.D.S. Data1 + (Digital + GREEN link 1)
T.M.D.S. Data3 - (Digital - BLUE link 2)
T.M.D.S. Data3 + (Digital + BLUE link 2)
+5V Power (for standby mode)
Ground (for +5V and analog sync)
Hot Plug Detect
T.M.D.S. Data0 - (Digital - BLUE link 1) and digital sync.
T.M.D.S. Data0 + (Digital + BLUE link 1) and digital sync.
T.M.D.S. Data5 - (Digital - RED link 2)
T.M.D.S. Data5 + (Digital - RED link 2)
T.M.D.S. Clock Shield
T.M.D.S. Clock + (Digital clock + (Links 1 and 2)
T.M.D.S. Clock - (Digital clock - (Links 1 and 2)
Analog RED
Analog GREEN
Analog BLUE
Analog Horizontal Sync.
Analog Ground (return for RGB signals)
DDC = Display Data Channel /// T.M.D.S = Transition Minimized Differential Signal /// PIN C1,C2,C3,C4 = Only present on DVI-I connectors.
22
IND100241-2
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
User Controls
MMD Products
23
Operation
POWER SWITCH:
This TFT display features a Instant-ON/Delay-OFF switch, which ensures that the display is not turned off
by user accident.
Power ON: To turn the display on, press down

the power switch. The power light
indicator will turn green.
Assignable Hot keys
Auto Power LED Dimmer

Indication Mark
(If no RGB signal sync is present, NO SYNC

message will appear in the display)
Power OFF: To turn the display off, press and

hold the power switch down for
3 seconds.
Power Switch
Brightness Knob
Power Light Indicator
DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT CONTROLS:
This TFT display features a 100% dimmable image, which means it is capable of displaying a completely
black image when the BRIGHTNESS knob is turned fully to the left.
NOTE1: The design and placement of the user / osd controls may vary from product to product !
NOTE2: For ECDIS systems the brightness knob indication mark should be aligned directly with
the indication mark located on the label. (See illustration above)
AUTOMATIC POWER LIGHT DIMMING:
This TFT display features a Power LED Dimmer function which control the light intensity of the power light
indicator. There are two different solutions for this feature.
Note:
1- Intelligent Auto Power LED Dimmer which control the light intensity based on your environment
lightning. This can also be manually adjusted using the Led Adjust knob on the rear side of the
display.
2- The light intensity is regulated according to the backlight, that is according to the brightness
knob. With the exception that when the backlight brightness is zero, the power led is just visible
in dark environment. This means that the power led is not visible in daylight when the brightness
knob is turned fully to the left.
If there is a led adjustment knob at the connection area of the display as described in INSTALLATION
AND RECOMMENDATIONS chapter, the manner of operation described in paragraph one applies. For
displays produced after the creation date of this manual, paragraph two applies. For displays produced
before year 2002, paragraph one applies.
ASSIGNABLE HOT KEYS:
The user can assign various display functions as hot keys (increase/decrease).
This will enable the user to quickly adjust the brightness, image size, contrast or other functions to
control the image. To assign these hot keys, enter the UTILITIES MENU/DIRECT ACCESS menu and
change them to the desired hot key function. Default hot keys are set to increase/decrease volume.
User Controls
IND100064-1
24
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Operation
MENU
USER CONTROLS:
UP / DOWN Buttons
Adjust Buttons -/+
The On Screen Display (OSD menu) controls are located under the metal hatch on the left side
of the display. To begin understanding the menu and its usage, just follow these steps for a quick start.
1: Press the MENU button. The OSD menu will show all the available functions you
can adjust or control.
2: You can move to the next icon by pressing MENU.
3: Select options within icon menu by pressing UP or DOWN buttons.
The selected option will turn yellow.
4: Use + or - buttons to increase/decrease values.
5: Move the selection left or right by using + or - buttons. The selected option will turn green.
6: To confirm the selection, press + button. To abort press - button.
OSD MENU:
The On Screen Display (OSD menu) contains several functions that will let the user to adjust
or setup the display to their preferred setting. The functions are shown as easy understandable icons.
Some of the menus have sub-menus, use + to access and MENU to go back to the previous menu.
The OSD menu consists of 4 modes: (Icon beside function indicates if its available in that mode)
1
2
3
4
Mode 1 - Available functions in RGB / DVI* MODE Simplified OSD Menu - (Logo will appear)
User can adjust the most common functions needed to operate the display.
*Some functions are not available in DVI mode
Mode 2 - Available functions in RGB / DVI* MODE Advanced OSD Menu - (No logo will appear)
User can access more advanced functions. (Service menu)
*Some functions are not available in DVI mode
Mode 3 - Available functions in VIDEO MODE Simplified OSD Menu - (Logo will appear)
User can adjust the most common functions needed to operate the display.
Mode 4 - Available functions in VIDEO MODE Advanced OSD Menu - (No logo will appear)
User can access more advanced functions. (Service menu)
RGB/DVI MODE = When RGB/DVI signal (i.e OS or radar / charts) are displayed full screen.
VIDEO MODE = When video signal (i.e CAMERA / VCR / DVD) are displayed full screen.
To access the Advanced OSD Menu, you must press and hold the DOWN button while turning power on.
When picture appears, release the DOWN button and press MENU to access the Advanced functions.
If you have the Memorized state version of the OSD menu, use the same procedure to switch between Advanced
or Simplified modes. For more information about Memorized state, see the NOTES section in this manual.
WARNING !! ONLY A QUALIFIED SERVICE ENGINEER SHOULD ACCESS SERVICE MENU.
PERFORMANCE OF THE DISPLAY MAY BE SERIOUSLY AFFECTED.
User Controls
IND100064-1
25
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Overview

Mode 1 - Function layout in RGB / DVI MODE Simplified OSD Menu: (User menu)
Note that to be in RGB / DVI MODE, a computer signal must be present in full screen, i.e Windows or
other operating system/radar system. Having a PIP view simultaneously will not interfere or change
the menu structure in any way.
Frequency and Phase
Frequency
Phase
Picture Type
Motion
Up/Down [select]
Still
0
15
+/- [modify]
Mode 2 - Function layout in RGB / DVI MODE Advanced OSD Menu: (Service menu)
Note that to be in RGB / DVI MODE, a computer signal must be present in full screen, i.e Windows or
other operating system/radar system. Having a PIP view simultaneously will not interfere or change
the menu structure in any way.
Brightness and Contrast
Brightness
Contrast
50
50
Up/Down [select]
User Controls
IND100064-1
+/- [modify]
26
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Overview

Mode 3 - Function layout in VIDEO MODE Simplified OSD Menu: (User menu)
Note that to be in VIDEO MODE, a video signal must be present in full screen, i.e from a camera,
VCR or DVD player.
Video Adjustment
Color
Tint
Sharpness
Picture Type
Video Type
Motion
DVD
Up/Down [select]
Still
VCR
0
0
3
+/- [modify]
Mode 4 - Function layout in VIDEO MODE Advanced OSD Menu: (Service menu)
Note that to be in VIDEO MODE, a video signal must be present in full screen, i.e from a camera,
VCR or DVD player.
Brightness and Contrast

Brightness
Contrast
0
15
Up/Down [select]
User Controls
IND100064-1
+/- [modify]
27
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Functions

BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST: (No function in DVI mode)
Selecting this function will enable the user to adjust brightness and contrast
for the display.
BRIGHTNESS:
CONTRAST:
Increase/decrease brightness level, total: 100 steps

Increase/decrease contrast level, total: 100 steps
COLOR TEMPERATURE:
Selecting this function will enable the user to modify the warmness of the picture.
Higher temperature = cooler picture. Lower temperature = warmer picture.
User can select between 9500K, 8000K, 6500K, and 5000K color temperature measured in
Kelvin degrees. Press + to access the sub-menu, where the RGB values can be adjusted.
Use + and - buttons to adjust these values, and MENU to exit. (Saving is done automatically)
FREQUENCY AND PHASE: (No function in DVI mode)

Selecting this function will enable the user to modify the image horizontal size and
fine tune the image quality.
1 2
FREQUENCY:
PHASE:
Increase/decrease the image horizontal size.

Fine tune the data sampling position (adjust image quality.)
PICTURE TYPE
: Motion / Still (Adjustment for best image quality)

If graphics on screen move a lot, select Motion
If graphics on screen are mostly still, select Still
VIDEO ADJUSTMENT:
Selecting this function will enable the user to modify the color saturation of the
picture, tint and sharpness.
3 4
COLOR:
TINT:
SHARPNESS:
Increase/decrease video color level.

Increase/decrease tint level.
Increase/decrease video image sharpness level.
PICTURE TYPE
: Motion / Still / Normal (Adjustment for best image quality)

If graphics on screen move a lot, select Motion
If graphics on screen are mostly still, select Still
General motion - non flicker mode, select Normal
VIDEO TYPE
: Change to best match the source signal. (DVD / VCR)
VIDEO SYSTEM:
Selecting this function will enable the user to select video system and input signals.
3 4
AUTO
NTSC / NTSC 4.43
PAL / PAL M
SECAM
User Controls
IND100064-1
: Automatic detection of NTSC or PAL system. (Not applicable in SECAM)

: Manual select NTSC system.
: Manual select PAL system.
: Manual select SECAM system.
28
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Functions

1 2
STATUS:
Selecting this function will display graphic information such as resolution and
frequency.
1 2
3 4
POSITION: (No function in DVI mode)

Selecting this function will enable the user to position the image within the display
area.
IMAGE UP/DOWN
IMAGE LEFT/RIGHT
1 2
: Position the image vertically using UP or DOWN buttons.

: Position the image horizontally using + or - buttons.
PICTURE IN PICTURE:
Selecting this function will enable the user to configure PIP window size, input signal
source, horizontal and vertical position and more.
PIP SIZE
PIP SOURCE
: Select PIP window size. Choose between OFF, SIZE1, SIZE2 or SIZE3.
: Select video source to be displayed in PIP window.
Choose between AUTO, COMP, SVID:
AUTO
COMP
SVID
HORIZONTAL POSITION:
VERTICAL POSITION:
= automatic detection of Composite, S-Video.

= manual select composite video signal only.
= manual select S-Video signal only.
Adjust the position of the PIP window horizontally.
Adjust the position of the PIP window vertically.
ADVANCED PIP SETTINGS: (Press + to access the sub-menu)

BRIGHTNESS:
CONTRAST:
SHARPNESS:
TINT:
COLOR:
Increase/decrease the image brightness of the PIP window.

Increase/decrease the image contrast of the PIP window.
Increase/decrease the image sharpness of the PIP window.
Increase/decrease the tint of the image of the PIP window.
Increase/decrease the color of the image of the PIP window.
ROTATION:
Selecting this function will enable the user to rotate the image to either
landscape or portrait format.
3 4
User Controls
IND100064-1
29
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Functions

2
GRAPHIC SCALING MODES:

Selecting this function will enable the user to configure the graphic scaling of the
PC or VIDEO image.
Scaling methods in PC/DVI MODE:
ONE TO ONE, FILL SCREEN,

FILL TO ASPECT RATIO,
NONLINEAR SCALING MODES
Scaling methods in VIDEO MODE:
NORMAL, LETTERBOX,
LETTERBOX WITH SUBTITLES,
NONLINEAR SCALING MODES
3 4
3 4
2
ONE TO ONE: (Press + to access the sub-menu)

HORIZONTAL PAN:
VERTICAL PAN:
Increase/decrease the horizontal pan.

Increase/decrease the vertical pan.
NORMAL: (Press + to access the sub-menu)
3 4
3 4
2
HORIZONTAL CLIPPING:
HORIZONTAL OFFSET:
HORIZONTAL STRETCH:
VERTICAL CLIPPING:
VERTICAL OFFSET:
VERTICAL STRETCH:
Increase/decrease the horizontal clipping.

Increase/decrease the horizontal offset.
Increase/decrease the horizontal stretch.
Increase/decrease the vertical clipping.
Increase/decrease the vertical offset.
Increase/decrease the vertical stretch.
FILL SCREEN
: Enable full screen expansion for lower resolution image.
FILL TO ASPECT RATIO
: Enable full screen expansion for lower resolution image
according to aspect ratio.
LETTERBOX
: Stretches a letterboxed picture to full screen.
LETTERBOX WITH SUBTITLES : Stretches and pans a letterboxed picture to full screen, which enables
viewing of subtitles in bottom.
NONLINEAR SCALING MODES: (Press + to access the sub-menu)
3 4
HORIZONTAL CLIPPING:
HORIZONTAL OFFSET:
HORIZONTAL STRETCH:
VERTICAL CLIPPING:
VERTICAL OFFSET:
VERTICAL STRETCH:
1 2
3 4
Increase/decrease the horizontal clipping.

Increase/decrease the horizontal offset.
Increase/decrease the horizontal stretch.
Increase/decrease the vertical clipping.
Increase/decrease the vertical offset.
Increase/decrease the vertical stretch.
LANGUAGE:
Available languages are: English, Danish and Simplified Chinese. This will affect all
text and messages in the OSD menus.
User Controls
IND100064-1
30
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Functions

UTILITIES:
Selecting this function will enable the user to configure the OSD menu, define
hot keys, verify BIOS Firmware version and miscellaneous operations.
1 2
3 4
2
USER SETTING: (Press + to access the sub-menu)
DPMS
DISPLAY INPUT
AUTO SOURCE SELECT
GAMMA
1 2
3 4
OSD SETTING: (Press + to access the sub-menu)

OSD H-POSITION:
OSD V-POSITION:
OSD BACKGROUND
OSD MENU ROTATE
USER TIME OUT
: Disable / Enable the DPMS function.

: Disable / Enable input source name upon power up.
: Off = Disable auto source select function.
Low = Auto source select enabled ONLY in power up.
High = Auto source select ALWAYS enabled.
: 1.0 / 1.6 / 2.2 - Adjusts gamma on TFT display.
FREEZE
Position the OSD menu horizontally.

Position the OSD menu vertically.
: Choose between Translucent or Opaque.
: Choose between Normal / Rotate. Will position the menu
either horizontally or vertically.
: Adjust the OSD menu time out period in a step of 5 seconds.
: Press + to freeze the display area, including PIP view.
ZOOM: (Press + to access the sub-menu)

ZOOM LEVEL:
HORIZONTAL PAN:
VERTICAL PAN:
1 2
3 4
DIRECT ACCESS 1 & 2: (Press + to access the sub-menu)

Define the hot key function (+ or - front/under hatch buttons) to one of these OSD functions:
Brightness / Contrast / Volume / Freeze / Zoom / Video Source / PIP * / No Function / Test Pattern
NOTE:
NOTE:
Zooms in the display area from center.

Pan the display area horizontally.
Pan the display area vertically.
* By pressing the assigned hot key, the sequence of the selected input video source are:
Analog RGB / Component / Video / Composite Video / S-Video. (Note: Component Video is not implemented)
Direct Access 1 default setting is VOLUME
Direct Access 2 default setting is NO FUNCTION
DISPLAY ORIENTATION: (Press + to access the sub-menu)

Will flip/inverse the display area including PIP view. Press + to choose between:
Normal / Horizontal Inverse / Vertical Inverse / Inverse
1 2
CALIBRATE RGB GAIN
1 2
3 4
LOAD (FACTORY) DEFAULTS: (Press + to access the sub-menu. NOTE: Only on newer models)
LOAD USER DEFAULT
SAVE USER DEFAULT
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULT
User Controls
IND100064-1
: Color Calibration. Press + to automatically adjust it.
: Load your own personal custom settings.

: Save your own personal custom settings.
: Will reset the VGA controller settings to the factory preset.
Use caution when using this function, as this will override
your current settings. (Does not affect USER DEFAULTS)
31
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Functions

1 2
3 4
TEST PATTERN
: Shows a generic test pattern.

(Introduced in the VGA BIOS Firmware V1.3x and up)
1 2
3 4
VIDEO SOURCE:
Selecting this function will enable the user to select the type of input signal to show
fullscreen. Available inputs are: Analog RGB, Component Video*, Composite Video,
S-Video and DVI. (*Component Video is not implemented in our products.)
Pressing + will activate the input, and pressing - will detect automatically.
1 2
3 4
VOLUME:
This function is not implemented in displays, and have no operational effect.
1 2
3 4
EXIT MENU:
Selecting this function will exit the OSD menu.
Press + to exit and save the current settings.
Note:
The OSD settings will also automatically be stored in memory when the OSD exit on user timeout.
User Controls
IND100064-1
32
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Preset
Signal
SXGA displays (NON-DVI)
Graphic/Video
Modes Timings
Supported
Mode
Resolution
Clk [MHz]
25.175
25.175
25.175
Horizontal freq
[KHz]
31.469
31.469
31.469
Vertical freq
[Hz]
70
70
70
E1_70
E1_70
E1_70
640x350
640x350
640x350
E1_85
E1_85
E1_85
Digital Separate Sync

Sync On Green (with or without serrate pulse)
Composite Sync (with or without serrate pulse)
640x350
640x350
640x350
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85

E2_70
E2_70
E2_70
640x400
640x400
640x400
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70

E2_85
E2_85
E2_85
640x400
640x400
640x400
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85

T_70
T_70
T_70
720x400
720x400
720x400
28.322
28.322
28.322
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70

T_85
T_85
T_85
720x400
720x400
720x400
35.500
35.500
35.500
37.927
37.927
37.927
85
85
85

V_62
V_62
V_62
736x480
736x480
736x480
28.200
28.200
28.200
31.403
31.403
31.403
62
62
62

V_60
V_60
V_60
640x480
640x480
640x480
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
60
60
60

V_67
V_67
V_67
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
67
67
67

V_72
V_72
V_72
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
72
72
72

V_75
V_75
V_75
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
75
75
75

V_85
V_85
V_85
640x480
640x480
640x480
36.000
36.000
36.000
43.269
43.269
43.269
85
85
85

SV_56
SV_56
SV_56
800x600
800x600
800x600
36.000
36.000
36.000
35.156
35.156
35.156
56
56
56

SV_60
SV_60
SV_60
800x600
800x600
800x600
40.000
40.000
40.000
37.879
37.879
37.879
60
60
60

SV_72
SV_72
SV_72
800x600
800x600
800x600
50.000
50.000
50.000
48.077
48.077
48.077
72
72
72

SV_75
SV_75
SV_75
800x600
800x600
800x600
49.500
49.500
49.500
46.875
46.875
46.875
75
75
75

SV_85
SV_85
SV_85
800x600
800x600
800x600
56.250
56.250
56.250
53.674
53.674
53.674
85
85
85

X_60
X_60
X_60
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
65.000
65.000
65.000
48.363
48.363
48.363
60
60
60

21
33
IND100104-1
Sync Mode
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Preset Signal Timings SXGA displays (NON-DVI)

X_70
X_70
X_70
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
56.476
56.476
56.476
70
70
70

X_72
X_72
X_72
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
57.515
57.515
57.515
72
72
72

X_75
X_75
X_75
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
78.750
78.750
78.750
60.023
60.023
60.023
75
75
75

X_87I
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
X_85
X_85
X_85
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
94.500
94.500
94.500
68.677
68.677
68.677
85
85
85

SX_60
SX_60
SX_60
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
108.000
108.000
108.000
63.981
63.981
63.981
60
60
60

SX_72
SX_72
SX_72
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
78.125
78.125
78.125
72
72
72

SX_75
SX_75
SX_75
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
79.976
79.976
79.976
75
75
75

SX_85
SX_85
SX_85
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
149.844
149.844
149.844
91.146
91.146
91.146
85
85
85

NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
X_87I
X_87I
34
IND100104-1
22
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
APPENDIX II SUPPORTED MODES TABLE
Preset
Signal Timings SXGA displays (DVI)
Graphic/Video Modes Supported
Mode
Resolution
Clk [MHz]
25.175
25.175
25.175
Horizontal freq
[KHz]
31.469
31.469
31.469
Vertical freq
[Hz]
70
70
70
E1_70
E1_70
E1_70
640x350
640x350
640x350
E1_85
E1_85
E1_85
Sync Mode
640x350
640x350
640x350
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85

E2_70
E2_70
E2_70
640x400
640x400
640x400
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70

E2_85
E2_85
E2_85
640x400
640x400
640x400
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85

T_70
T_70
T_70
720x400
720x400
720x400
28.322
28.322
28.322
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70

T_85
T_85
T_85
720x400
720x400
720x400
35.500
35.500
35.500
37.927
37.927
37.927
85
85
85

V_62
V_62
V_62
736x480
736x480
736x480
28.200
28.200
28.200
31.403
31.403
31.403
62
62
62

V_60
V_60
V_60
640x480
640x480
640x480
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
60
60
60

V_67
V_67
V_67
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
67
67
67

V_72
V_72
V_72
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
72
72
72

V_75
V_75
V_75
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
75
75
75

V_85
V_85
V_85
640x480
640x480
640x480
36.000
36.000
36.000
43.269
43.269
43.269
85
85
85

SV_56
SV_56
SV_56
800x600
800x600
800x600
36.000
36.000
36.000
35.156
35.156
35.156
56
56
56

SV_60
SV_60
SV_60
800x600
800x600
800x600
40.000
40.000
40.000
37.879
37.879
37.879
60
60
60

SV_72
SV_72
SV_72
800x600
800x600
800x600
50.000
50.000
50.000
48.077
48.077
48.077
72
72
72

SV_75
SV_75
SV_75
800x600
800x600
800x600
49.500
49.500
49.500
46.875
46.875
46.875
75
75
75

SV_85
SV_85
SV_85
800x600
800x600
800x600
56.250
56.250
56.250
53.674
53.674
53.674
85
85
85

X_60
1024x768
65.000
48.363
60
31
35
IND100104-7
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Preset Signal Timings SXGA displays (DVI)

X_60
X_60
1024x768
1024x768
65.000
65.000
48.363
48.363
60
60

X_70
X_70
X_70
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
56.476
56.476
56.476
70
70
70

X_72
X_72
X_72
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
57.515
57.515
57.515
72
72
72

X_75
X_75
X_75
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
78.750
78.750
78.750
60.023
60.023
60.023
75
75
75

X_87I
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
X_85
X_85
X_85
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
94.500
94.500
94.500
68.677
68.677
68.677
85
85
85

SX_60
SX_60
SX_60
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
108.000
108.000
108.000
63.981
63.981
63.981
60
60
60

SX_72
SX_72
SX_72
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
78.125
78.125
78.125
72
72
72

SX_75
SX_75
SX_75
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
79.976
79.976
79.976
75
75
75

NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
X_87I
X_87I
36
IND100104-7
32
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Mode
Resolution
Clk [MHz]
Horizontal freq Vertical freq [Hz]

[KHz]
31.469
70
31.469
70
31.469
70
Sync Mode
E1_70
E1_70
E1_70
640x350
640x350
640x350
25.175
25.175
25.175
E1_85
640x350
31.500
37.861
85
E1_85
E1_85
640x350
640x350
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
85
85

E2_70
640x400
25.175
31.469
70
E2_70
E2_70
640x400
640x400
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
70
70

E2_85
640x400
31.500
37.861
85
E2_85
E2_85
640x400
640x400
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
85
85

T_70
T_70
T_70
720x400
720x400
720x400
28.322
28.322
28.322
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70

T_85
T_85
T_85
720x400
720x400
720x400
35.500
35.500
35.500
37.927
37.927
37.927
85
85
85

V_62
V_62
V_62
736x480
736x480
736x480
28.200
28.200
28.200
31.403
31.403
31.403
62
62
62

V_60
V_60
V_60
640x480
640x480
640x480
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
60
60
60

V_67
640x480
31.500
37.500
67
V_67
V_67
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
67
67

V_72
V_72
V_72
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
72
72
72

V_75
640x480
31.500
37.500
75
V_75
V_75
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
75
75

V_85
640x480
36.000
43.269
85
V_85
V_85
640x480
640x480
36.000
36.000
43.269
43.269
85
85

SV_56
800x600
36.000
35.156
56
SV_56
SV_56
800x600
800x600
36.000
36.000
35.156
35.156
56
56

SV_60
800x600
40.000
37.879
60
SV_60
SV_60
800x600
800x600
40.000
40.000
37.879
37.879
60
60

SV_72
800x600
50.000
48.077
72
SV_72
SV_72
800x600
800x600
50.000
50.000
48.077
48.077
72
72

SV_75
800x600
49.500
46.875
75
SV_75
SV_75
800x600
800x600
49.500
49.500
46.875
46.875
75
75

SV_85
800x600
56.250
53.674
85
SV_85
SV_85
800x600
800x600
56.250
56.250
53.674
53.674
85
85


30
37
IND100104-8
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

X_60
X_60
X_60
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
65.000
65.000
65.000
48.363
48.363
48.363
60
60
60

X_70
X_70
X_70
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
56.476
56.476
56.476
70
70
70

X_72
X_72
X_72
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
57.515
57.515
57.515
72
72
72

X_75
X_75
X_75
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
78.750
78.750
78.750
60.023
60.023
60.023
75
75
75

X_87I
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
X_85
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
94.500
68.677
85
X_85
X_85
1024x768
1024x768
94.500
94.500
68.677
68.677
85
85

SX_60
1280x1024
108.000
63.981
60
SX_60
SX_60
1280x1024
1280x1024
108.000
108.000
63.981
63.981
60
60

SX_72
1280x1024
135.000
78.125
72
SX_72
SX_72
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
78.125
78.125
72
72

SX_75
1280x1024
135.000
79.976
75
SX_75
SX_75
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
79.976
79.976
75
75

UX_60
UX_60
UX_60
1600x1200
1600x1200
1600x1200
112.288
112.288
112.288
75.000
75.000
75.000
60
60
60

NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
X_87I
X_87I
38
IND100104-8
31
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Mode
Resolution
Clk [MHz]
25.175
25.175
25.175
Horizontal freq
[KHz]
31.469
31.469
31.469
Vertical freq
[Hz]
70
70
70
E1_70
E1_70
E1_70
640x350
640x350
640x350
E1_85
E1_85
E1_85
Sync Mode
640x350
640x350
640x350
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85

E2_70
E2_70
E2_70
640x400
640x400
640x400
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70

E2_85
E2_85
E2_85
640x400
640x400
640x400
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
85
85
85

T_70
T_70
T_70
720x400
720x400
720x400
28.322
28.322
28.322
31.469
31.469
31.469
70
70
70

T_85
T_85
T_85
720x400
720x400
720x400
35.500
35.500
35.500
37.927
37.927
37.927
85
85
85

V_62
V_62
V_62
736x480
736x480
736x480
28.200
28.200
28.200
31.403
31.403
31.403
62
62
62

V_60
V_60
V_60
640x480
640x480
640x480
25.175
25.175
25.175
31.469
31.469
31.469
60
60
60

V_67
V_67
V_67
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
67
67
67

V_72
V_72
V_72
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.861
37.861
37.861
72
72
72

V_75
V_75
V_75
640x480
640x480
640x480
31.500
31.500
31.500
37.500
37.500
37.500
75
75
75

V_85
V_85
V_85
640x480
640x480
640x480
36.000
36.000
36.000
43.269
43.269
43.269
85
85
85

SV_56
SV_56
SV_56
800x600
800x600
800x600
36.000
36.000
36.000
35.156
35.156
35.156
56
56
56

SV_60
SV_60
SV_60
800x600
800x600
800x600
40.000
40.000
40.000
37.879
37.879
37.879
60
60
60

SV_72
SV_72
SV_72
800x600
800x600
800x600
50.000
50.000
50.000
48.077
48.077
48.077
72
72
72

SV_75
SV_75
SV_75
800x600
800x600
800x600
49.500
49.500
49.500
46.875
46.875
46.875
75
75
75

SV_85
SV_85
SV_85
800x600
800x600
800x600
56.250
56.250
56.250
53.674
53.674
53.674
85
85
85

X_60
1024x768
65.000
48.363
60
33
39
IND100104-2
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

X_60
X_60
1024x768
1024x768
65.000
65.000
48.363
48.363
60
60

X_70
X_70
X_70
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
56.476
56.476
56.476
70
70
70

X_72
X_72
X_72
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
75.000
75.000
75.000
57.515
57.515
57.515
72
72
72

X_75
X_75
X_75
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
78.750
78.750
78.750
60.023
60.023
60.023
75
75
75

X_87I
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
44.900
35.522
87
X_85
X_85
X_85
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768 43Hz
Interaced
1024x768
1024x768
1024x768
94.500
94.500
94.500
68.677
68.677
68.677
85
85
85

SX_60
SX_60
SX_60
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
108.000
108.000
108.000
63.981
63.981
63.981
60
60
60

SX_72
SX_72
SX_72
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
78.125
78.125
78.125
72
72
72

SX_75
SX_75
SX_75
1280x1024
1280x1024
1280x1024
135.000
135.000
135.000
79.976
79.976
79.976
75
75
75

UX_60
UX_60
UX_60
1600x1200
1600x1200
1600x1200
112.288
112.288
112.288
75.000
75.000
75.000
60
60
60

NTSC
S_Video
PAL SVideo
NTSC
Composite
Video
PAL
Composite
Video
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
---
14.318
15.734
60
---
---
17.75
15.625
50
---
X_87I
X_87I
40
IND100104-2
34
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
User Controls
STD Products
41
Operation
POWER SWITCH:
This TFT display features a Instant-ON/Delay-OFF switch, which ensures that the display is not turned off
by user accident.
Power ON: To turn the display on, press down

the power switch. The power light
indicator will turn green.
Assignable Hotkeys
Auto Power LED Dimmer
(If no RGB signal sync is present, a message

will appear in the display)
Power OFF: To turn the display off, press and

hold the power switch down for
3 seconds.
Power Switch
Brightness Knob
Power Light Indicator
DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT CONTROLS:
This TFT display features a 100% dimmable image, which means it is capable of displaying a completely
black image when the BRIGHTNESS knob is turned fully to the left.
ASSIGNABLE HOTKEYS:
The user can assign various display functions as hotkeys (increase/decrease).

This will enable the user to quickly adjust the brightness, image size, contrast or other functions to
control the image. To assign these hotkeys, enter the EXTENDED MENU/DIRECT ACCESS menu and
change them to the desired hotkey function. Default hotkeys are set to increase/decrease contrast.
User Controls - STD

IND100064-2
42
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
User Controls / OSD Menu

MENU
UP / DOWN Buttons
Adjust Buttons -/+
USER CONTROLS:
1: Press the MENU button. The OSD Menu shows the functions menu.
2: To modify the values or access to its submenu, use the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+).
3: To select another function use the Select Buttons / Up or Down to navigate up or down.
Note:
- The image quality depends on the computer or video card you are using.
- Select a crisp and bright image for display while adjustment takes place.
- The modified settings is automatically saved on menu exit. The user can also
decide whenever to deactivate this function. This means the user has to save the settings
manually by selecting the Exit Menu function and choosing save.
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS:
The OSD Menu provides On Screen Display of certain common functions.

Pressing the MENU button will bring up the menu with its available functions that can be adjusted.
The selected function is highlighted. Often the selected function also have some quick information
(status line) which is displayed in the bottom of the menu. The user can also use the MENU button to exit
any menu or sub-menu.
To select another function, use the Select Buttons to navigate down/up on the menu. All modifications
will instantly be updated on screen. Some of the menus also have sub-menus where you can modify
more parameters, these are marked with an > arrow. They can be accessed by pressing the
Adjust Button (+) button as the OSD Menu describes.
Brightness
Contrast
Tuning
Autosetup
Image Adjust>
OSD Menu>
>System Info>
Extended Menu>
Exit Menu
PC
XGA
HF=48.73kHz
Selected function
VF=60.0Hz
Status line
Above: Sample of OSD Menu
User Controls - STD

IND100064-2
43
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Functions

Brightness
124
Use this function to adjust the image brightness in relation to the background.
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the value. The slider on screen will also
move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value. Range 0 to 236
114
Contrast
Use this function to adjust the overall image and background screen brightness.
Tuning
17
Use this function to fine tune the data sampling position (adjust display quality).
Autosetup
Use this function to automatically set up the display area like positions, image size, tuning etc.
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate auto setup.
Image Adjustments> (Sub-menu)
In this sub-menu the user can adjust the horizontal position, vertical position, horizontal size, sharpness
and the 3 component RGB (Red, Green, Blue) color saturations of the display area.
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu which contains these functions:
Image Horizontal Position
32
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the display area horizontally (left or right).
The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical
value. Range 0 to 58
Image Vertical Position
31
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the display area vertically (up or down).
Image Horizontal Size
1340
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will expand or shrink the display area from center horizontally.
Sharpness
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will adjust the sharpness level of the display area.
value. Range 0 to 3
continues on next page........
User Controls - STD

IND100064-2
44
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Functions

....continued from previous page.
Red
18
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the red color level. The slider on
screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a numerical value.
Range 0 to 35
Green
18
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the green color level. The slider on
Range 0 to 35
Blue
18
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will increase or decrease the blue color level. The slider on
Range 0 to 35
Reset RGB to default
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will reset any modifed RGB settings back to the previous
setting before the user entered this sub-menu.
Back>
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit this sub-menu with the modified settings
intact.
User Controls - STD

IND100064-2
45
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Functions

OSD Menu> (Sub-menu)
In this sub-menu the user can modify the horizontal position, vertical position, horizontal size,
transparency, time out and auto save parameters for the OSD Menu itself.
Menu Hori Position
31
Menu Vert Position
30
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the OSD Menu horizontally (left or right).
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will move the OSD Menu vertically (up or down).
Transparency
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will adjust the OSD Menu transparent level in a stepwise
manner. The slider on screen will also move from left or right indicating the current setting and as a
numerical value. Range 0 to 3
Time Out
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will modify the timeout of the OSD Menu. The parameter
selected will be highlighted. Values are in seconds before the OSD Menu will automatically disappear
from the display area. Available parameters are: 10/20/30/45/60/cont
Choosing cont (never auto exit) requires that the user manually exits the menu.
Auto Save
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will choose whenever the modified settings will be
automatically saved when the OSD Menu exits. The parameter selected will be highlighted.
-When set to Off the user will manually have to save the modfied settings using the Exit Menu
function and choosing save.
-When set to On all settings modified will automatically be saved when the user exist the menu, or
the menu exits itself based on a timeout value.
Back>
intact.
User Controls - STD

IND100064-2
46
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Functions

System Info> (Sub-menu)
The status line will show some important technical information about the current display mode/controller:
Example: PC
XGA HF=48.73kHz VF=60.0Hz
On this sub-menu the user can view various technical information for the internal graphics controller and
the OSD Menu software. Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu:
Display type
Shows the suggested display technology the user is running. Also detects what resolution the user is
running on the display area. Example: TFT LCD 1024x768
Model and Serial No
Shows the internal graphic controller model and its serial number.* Example: ACL-1024
* (Note: This is not the same as the display product serial number from Hatteland Display AS)
Bios version
Shows the BIOS version of the OSD Menu software. Example: 00.03-00.03
Run time
Shows the uptime for the display itself. The user can reset this internal clock by pressing the
Adjust Button (+) and hold it for 5 seconds.
Example: 480h00m (480 hours and 0 minutes)
Back>
intact.
User Controls - STD

IND100064-2
47
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
OSD Menu Functions

Extended Menu> (Sub-menu)
On this sub-menu the user can modify various OSD Menu parameters such as Direct Access (hot-keys)
and language for all the OSD Menu and its submenus including any messages.
DOS Text or Graphics
Pressing the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) will select between Text or Graphics
The parameter selected will be highlighted. Leave this setting to Graphics for best results.
Direct Access 1>
Allow the user to define the hot-keys (-) or (+) / Up or Down ) to one of the OSD functions.
When the user presses one of the Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) or Select Buttons / Up or Down the
assigned hot-key will increase / decrease the value without the user entering the OSD Menu itself.
This can be very time consuming if the user has to modify any of the OSD functions quickly.
Brightness
Selecting this function will assign Brightness parameter changes to the

Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) buttons.
Contrast
Selecting this function will assign Contrast parameter changes to the

Adjust Buttons (-) or (+) buttons.
Back>
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit the sub-menu one level with the
modified settings intact and saved.
Direct Access 2>
The same procedure applies here as above on: Direct Access 1>
The user can now assign the Select Buttons / Up or Down to the selected OSD function.
Language
Allow the user to configure the OSD Menu language for all the OSD Menu and its submenus
including any messages. Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will activate a new sub-menu
which enable the user to select the preferred language. The parameter selected will be highlighted.
Available languages are: English, Italian, Francais, Espanol, Svenska, Nederlands, Deutsche.
Back>
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) or MENU will exit the language sub-menu with the
modified settings intact and saved. Pressing it once more will also exit out to the main menu.
Exit Menu
Pressing the Adjust Button (+) will save the settings and exit the menu.
Pressing the Adjust Button (-) will exit the menu but does not save the modifed settings.
User Controls - STD

IND100064-2
48
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Preset Signal Timing XGA Displays

This TFT display is capable of detecting the following resolutions along with its preset signal timing setting.
These settings have been pre-programmed by the RGB controller factory. The following industrial standard
settings are supported for this display:
Mode
Resolution
Clk (MHz)
V_60
SV_56
SV_60
X_60
640 x 480
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
25.175
36.000
40.000
65.500
User Manual - STD

IND100104-3
Horiz.Freq(KHz)
31.469
35.156
37.879
48.363
49
Vert.Freq(Hz)
59.940
56.250
60.317
60.004
Sync Gate
Digital Separate Sync.
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
50
Specifications
51
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Note: All specifications are subject to change without prior notice!
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
TFT Technology:
Physical Dimensions:
10.4 inch viewable image size

Active Matrix, Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
RGB vertical stripe
339 (W), 256 (H), 54 (D) mm

Weight: 3,5 kg (approx)
Input Signal Terminal:
TFT Characteristics:
Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
640 x 480
0.33 (H) x 0.33 (V) mm
20 ms (typical), black to white
300:1 (typical)
350 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 70 deg. (H), 40 deg. (V)
211.2 (H) x 158.4 (V) mm
262,144 colors (6-bit max)
: 1 x D-SUB 9P Connector (female)
Environmental Considerations:
Operating
: Temperature -15 deg. C to +55 deg. C

Humidity 30% to 90% (non condensing)
Storage
Safety Considerations:
Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum
operating temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic
components should, if possible, take place at ambient temperatures of only
25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low service costs.
* Recommended for optimum picture quality
Supported Signal Inputs:
: 640 x 480 * (Including 640 x 350)
Available Options:
Power Specifications:
Power Supply Options:

115VAC/60Hz & 230VAC/50Hz
12-24 VDC
Accessories:
Touchscreen
On front bezel:
Power On/Off (push button)
Brightness Control
Mode Status LED
On Screen Display control (OSD/OSM)
Synchronisation Range:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 48,3 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz *
Resolutions:
VGA
: 15pin mini D-SUB (female)

: Std IEC Inlet
Model JH 10T06 STD A1
: Screw terminal Model JH 10T06 STD A2
User Controls:
Synchronisation:
Sync Signal:
Separate synchronisation only
Auto detects VGA, non interlaced
Video Signal
: Analog RGB 0,7Vp-p
: Input Impedance 75 Ohm
RGB (PC) signal

AC Power signal
DC Power signal
: Model JH 10T06 STD A1

JH 10TBR
JH XXTRO STD
JH 10TSV
Touch Screen
=
=
=
=
Bracket *
Bracket *
Sun Visor *
Factory mounted
*Option: Standard or custom logo and color

*Option: See separate datasheet for specifications on bracket options.
Power Consumption:
Operating
: 60 W (max)
Compass Safe Distance: JH 10T06 STD

Standard: 100cm*
Steering: 70cm*
(*Not tested, but expected to be the same as corresponding model JH 10T06 MMD)
52
IND100129-11
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

TFT Technology:

RGB vertical stripe
339 (W), 256 (H), 54 (D) mm

Weight: 3,5 kg (approx)
Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
640 x 480
0.33 (H) x 0.33 (V) mm
300:1 (typical)
350 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 70 deg. (H), 40 deg. (V)
211.2 (H) x 158.4 (V) mm
262,144 colors (6-bit max)
DVI-D (PC) signal

RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal
:
:
:
:
:
:
Accessories:
Touchscreen
DVI-D Input 24pin Connector

15pin mini D-SUB (female - Input)
RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug
Std IEC Inlet
Model JH 10T06 MMD A1
Screw terminal Model JH 10T06 MMD A2
Synchronisation:
User Controls:
Sync Signal:
Digital separate synchronisation
Composite synchronisation
Synchronisation on green.
Video Signal
On front bezel:
Brightness Control
Mode Status LED
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz to 85 Hz
Operating
Storage

Resolutions:
VGA
: 640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)
Video Signals:
Interlaced NTSC and PAL/SECAM video
Composite video
S-Video
Available Options:
JH 10TBR
JH XXTRO STD
JH 10TSV
Touch Screen
=
=
=
=
Bracket *
Bracket *
Sun Visor *
Factory mounted


24 VDC

: Model JH 10T06 MMD A1

Power Consumption:
Operating
: 60 W (max)
Compass Safe Distance: JH 10T06 MMD
Standard: 100cm
Steering: 70cm
53
IND100129-10
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

TFT Technology:

Color Active Matrix LCD Module
a-Si Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
412 (W), 345 (H), 58 (D) mm

Weight: 7 kg (approx w/bracket)
Pixel number
Pixel pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1024 x 768
0.297 (H) x 0.297 (V) mm
400:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
+/- 85 deg. (typical) (Up/Down/Left/Right)
304.1 (H) x 228.1 (V) mm
16.7 millions
Synchronisation:
Sync Signal:
Separate synchronisation only
Auto detects VGA -> XGA, non interlaced
Video Signal
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 48,3 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz *
RGB (PC) signal

AC Power signal
DC Power signal
User Controls:
On front bezel:
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Behind hatch:
Operating

Storage

Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
: 15pin mini D-SUB (female)

: Std IEC Inlet Model JH 15T05 STD A1
: Screw terminal Model JH 15T05 STD A2
: 640 x 480
: 800 x 600
: 1024 x 768 *
Available Options:
JH 15TBR
JH 15TRO
JH 15TSV


115VAC/60Hz or 230VAC/50Hz
12-24 VDC

Power Consumption:
Operating
: 40 W (max)
Compass Safe Distance: JH 15T05 STD

Standard: 130cm*
Steering: 100cm*
(*Not tested, but expected to be the same as corresponding model JH 15T05 MMD)
54
IND100129-52
= Bracket *
= Rotary Bracket *
= Sun Visor *
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

TFT Technology:

Color Active Matrix LCD Module
a-Si Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
412 (W), 345 (H), 58 (D) mm

Pixel number
Pixel pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1024 x 768
0.297 (H) x 0.297 (V) mm
400:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
304.1 (H) x 228.1 (V) mm
16.7 millions
DVI-D (PC) signal

RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal
:
:
:
:
:
:
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control

RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug
Std IEC Inlet Model JH 15T05 MMD A1

: 2 x D-SUB 9P Connectors (female)
Synchronisation:
Sync Signal:
Auto detects VGA -> SXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
User Controls:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz * to 85 Hz
Behind hatch:
On front bezel:
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Operating
Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
Storage
: 640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)

: 800 x 600 (including 720 x 400)
: 1024 x 768 *
Video Signals:
Composite video
S-Video
115VAC/60Hz or 230VAC/50Hz
12-24 VDC

Power Consumption:
Operating
: 40 W (max)
Compass Safe Distance:
JH 15T05 MMD-A1 Standard: 125cm

Available Options:
JH 15TBR
JH 15TRO
JH 15TSV
JH XPR
Touch Screen
=
=
=
=
=
Bracket *
Rotary Bracket *
Sun Visor *
External Power Relay
Factory mounted

Steering: 85cm
Steering: 100cm
55
IND100129-49

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

TFT Technology:

MVA Premium Technology
483 (W), 444 (H), 68 (D) mm

Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1280 x 1024
0.294 (H) x 0.294 (V) mm
700:1 (typical)
300 cd/m2 (typical)
376.32 (H) x 301.056 (V) mm
16.7 millions (depending on graphics card)
Synchronisation:
Sync Signal:
Video Signal
DVI-D (PC) signal

RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control
:
:
:
:
:
:

RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug

User Controls:
On front bezel:
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Behind hatch:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz * to 85 Hz
Operating
Storage
Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA
:
:
:
:
640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)

800 x 600 (including 720 x 400)
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024 *
Video Signals:
Composite video
S-Video

24 VDC

Power Consumption:
Operating
: 100 W (max)

Available Options:
JH MMD BR
= Bracket *
JH MMDRO
= Rotary Bracket *
JH 19TSV
= Sun Visor *
JH VESA 18T04 = Vesa Bracket *
JH VBUF
= Video Buffer (1)
JH SCOM
= Remote Control
JH XPR
= External Power Relay
ECDIS Version = JH 19T02 MMD E1/E2 (E1=AC / E2=DC)
ECDIS w/buzzer= JH 19T02 MMD E11/E12 (E11=AC / E12=DC)
Touch Screen = Factory mounted

(1) The JHVBUF is tested at resolutions up to 1600 x 1200. Both separate sync and
composite sync is supported. The VGA output signal is at same resolution and sync as
the input. The output is working even if the main display is turned off. (Power supply
must be connected though)
Steering: 85cm
Steering: 65cm
56
IND100129-50

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

TFT Technology:

Active Matrix
Thin Film Transistor (Super-TFT)
534 (W), 481 (H), 79.50 (D) mm

Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1280 x 1024
0.312 (H) x 0.312 (V) mm
300:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
399.36 (H) x 319.49 (V) mm
DVI-D (PC) signal

RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal
:
:
:
:
:
:
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control
Synchronisation:

RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug
Std IEC Inlet
Model JH 20T03 MMD A1

User Controls:
Sync Signal:
Video Signal
On front bezel:
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Behind hatch:
Horizontal
: 31,5 kHz to 91,1 kHz
Vertical
: 60 Hz * to 85 Hz
Operating
Storage

Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA
:
:
:
:
640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)

800 x 600 (including 720 x 400)
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024 *
Available Options:
Video Signals:
Composite video
S-Video
24 VDC

Power Consumption:
Operating
: 100 W (max)
JH 20T03 MMD-A1
JH MMD BR
JH MMDRO
JH 20TSV
JH VESA 20T03
JH VBUF
JH SCOM
JH XPR
ECDIS Version
Touch Screen
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Bracket *
Rotary Bracket *
Sun Visor *
Vesa Bracket *
Video Buffer (1)
Remote Control
External Power Relay
JH 20T03 MMD E1
Factory mounted

Standard: 200cm
57
IND100129-5

Steering: 135cm
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

TFT Technology:

a-Si TFT (Thin Film Transistor) Active Matrix
SPVA (Super Patterned Vertical Alignment) mode
534 (W) 481 (H) 73 (D)

Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
Active Display Area
Max Colors
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
1600 x 1200
0.255 (H) x 0.255 (V) mm
700:1 (typical)
300 cd/m2 (typical)
408.0 (H) x 306.0 (V) mm
DVI-D (PC) signal

RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control
Synchronisation:
:
:
:
:
:
:

RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug

User Controls:
Sync Signal:
Auto detects VGA -> UXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
On front bezel:
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Behind hatch:
Horizontal
: 31.469 kHz to 75 kHz
Vertical
: 56 Hz* to 75 Hz
* Recommended 60Hz for optimum picture quality. 56 Hz only in 800x600
Operating
Storage
Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA
UXGA
:
:
:
:
:
640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)

800 x 600 (including 720 x 400)
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024
1600 x 1200*
Available Options:
Video Signals:
Composite video
S-Video
* Recommended for optimum picture quality. (60 Hz only)

24 VDC

Power Consumption:
Operating
: 100 W (max)
JH MMD BR
= Bracket *
JH MMDRO
= Rotary Bracket *
JH 20TSV
= Sun Visor *
JH VBUF
= Video Buffer (1)
JH SCOM
= Remote Control
JH XPR

58
IND100129-59

INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

TFT Technology:

Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
MVA Premium technology
584 (W), 534 (H), 72 (D) mm

Pixel Number
Pixel Pitch (RGB)
Response Time
Contrast Ratio
Light Intensity
Viewable Angle
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Active Display Area :
Max Colors
:
1600 x 1200
0.294 (H) x 0.294 (V) mm
600:1 (typical)
250 cd/m2 (typical)
(@ CR > 10)
470.4 (H) x 352.8 (V) mm
DVI-D (PC) signal

RGB (PC) signal
Composite Video
S-Video signal
AC Power signal
DC Power signal
Accessories:
Touchscreen
Remote Control
:
:
:
:
:
:

RCA Phono plug
S-Video (SVHS) plug

Synchronisation:
User Controls:
Sync Signal:
Auto detects VGA -> UXGA, interlaced and non interlaced
Video Signal
On front bezel:
Brightness Control
2 x hotkeys
Mode Status LED
Horizontal
: 31.469 kHz to 75 kHz
Vertical
: 56 Hz* to 75 Hz
* Recommended 60Hz for optimum picture quality. 56 Hz only in 800x600

Resolutions:
VGA
SVGA
XGA
SXGA
UXGA
:
:
:
:
:
640 x 480 (including 640 x 350)

800 x 600 (including 720 x 400)
1024 x 768
1280 x 1024
1600 x 1200*
Behind hatch:
Operating

Storage
Safety Considerations: Humidity 10% to 90% (non condensing)
Available Options:
Video Signals:
Composite video
S-Video
* Recommended for optimum picture quality. (60 Hz only)
24 VDC
Power Consumption:
Operating


: 100 W (max)
Compass Safe Distance: JH 23T02 MMD-A1
Standard: 260cm
Steering: 160cm
59
IND100129-7
JH 23TBRT01A1= Bracket *
JH MMDRO
= Rotary Bracket *
JH 23TSV
= Sun Visor *
JH VBUF
= Video Buffer (1)
JH SCOM
= Remote Control
JH XPR
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
60
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Technical Drawings
61
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
4,50
309
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
Custom logo is optional
163 viewing area
256
This document is the property of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.

This document and any authorized reproduction thereof, must not be used in
any way against the interest of Jakob Hatteland Display AS.
Any authorized reproduction, in whole or in part, must include this legend.
339
322
SIDE VIEW
313
BACK VIEW
10
4701
10
11
12
11
1:1.5
Size: A1 Format
Scale:
-Drawing number:
Approved by:
12
Revision:
JH10T06STD-A1
Mechanical DesignerProjection:

msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats
16-12-2002
Date:
Metric thread M4 or 4,50

4 places
PANEL CUT OUT
JH10T06STD-A1 EXCL. BRACKET
ISOMETRIC VIEW
42
FRONT VIEW
216 viewing area
146
55
14
54
226
15
42
42
IND100132-13
62
230
Standard Version
42
Due to dimensions without decimals, the tolerance on drawings is +/- 1mm (For accurate measurements, measure in AutoCAD)
Technical drawings (.DWG format) are found on our internet site: http://www.hatteland.com

Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-13
63
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Standard Version
IND100132-12
64
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-12
65
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Standard Version
IND100132-72
66
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-72
67
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Standard Version
IND100132-71
68
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-71
69
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Standard Version
IND100132-73
70
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-73
71
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Standard Version
IND100132-5
72
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Bracket(s) Version
IND100132-5
73
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

Standard Version
IND100132-82
74
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
6,50
539
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
JH23T02MMD-A1
534

568
584
FRONT VIEW
281
126
SIDE VIEW
ISOMETRIC VIEW
7
165
11
4701
10

msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats
18-12-2002
Date:
13
1:3
Size: A1 Format
Scale:
148
11
PANEL CUT OUT
Optional holes 6,50

Screwed from back side of panel
13
4 places horizontally
543
BACK VIEW
10
Metric thread M6 or 6,50

4 places vertically
148
13
13
148
14
72
501
14
110
114
IND100132-7
75
110
Revision:
12
12
A000176-1
Drawing number:
Approved by:
--
505
Standard Version
114
Bracket(s) Version
76
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
175
129
66
43
20
0
TOP VIEW
FRONT VIEW
320
345
360
385
442
50
BOTTOM VIEW
557
85
SIDE VIEW

18
23
IND100132-7
6
6
8
10
ROOF MOUNTING
556
536
32
4701
12
11
1:3
Size: A1 Format
Scale:
--
Revision:
12
A000176-1
Drawing number:
Approved by:
JH23T02MMD-A1

msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats
10
11
BACK VIEW
18-12-2002
Date:
10
Technical Drawings - Accessories
77


Suitable for: JH 10T06 MMD and JH 10T06 STD models
10 Inch Sun Visor
IND100132-47
78
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

17 >> 23 Rotary Bracket
IND100132-46
79
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
20"
18"
19"
17"
46,97
18,00
6,50
197,06
237,06
347,06
396,56
237,06
277,06
362,63
412,13
261,57
301,62
411,57
461,07
50,00

165,53
173,32
34,72
42,50
66,97
296,34
304,13
IND100132-69
80
197,78
17 Inch > 20 Inch Bracket

328,59
ThisdocumentisthepropertyofJakobHattelandDisplayAS.
Thisdocumentandanyauthorizedreproductionthereof,mustnotbeusedin
anywayagainsttheinterestofJakobHattelandDisplayAS.
Anyauthorizedreproduction,inwholeorinpart,mustincludethislegend.
348,59
19,70
42,70
65,70
11
11
10
10
ExampleAssemblyBracket17"
10
11
10
10
11
11
12
Konstr./Tegnet
4701
11
Projeksjon
1:2
Mlest.(A1Format)
12
Aluminium 2mm
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Aluminium
Materiale
Erstattetav
ID
P000202-1
3D001BKD-A4
P000175-1
P000180-1
P000175-2
P000180-2
P000199-1
M4 X 0.7 X 10
P000197-1
P000200-1
M6 X 1 X 20 HEX
A000067-1
Pos.nr Antall Beskrivelse

1
4
Skive mellom brakett og brakettfeste
2
1
Backcover JH17T01MMD-A1
3
1
brakkettfeste hyre
4
1
brakett hyre
5
1
brakkettfeste venstre
6
1
brakett venstre
7
1
senter-brakett
8
4
DIN 7985A_M4 X 0.7_10_NONE
9
4
Flatskive 17W07191
10
4
underlagsskive M6x1,5mm 48506
11
4
DIN 7991_M6 X 1_20_NONE
ExampleExplodedViewConfigurationBracket17"
JakobHattelandDispla
y
msosen
N-5578NedreVat
s
Dato
17-01-2002
10

15 TFT to 19 TFT adapter
IND100132-43
81
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
IND100132-44
19 TFT to 21 CRT adapter 82
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
32
28
98
117
47,50
23
34
ARB M6 * 4 stks.
11 Countersunk M6 hole * 4 stks.
533
R 3,25 * 2 stks.
6,50 * 2 stks.

384
411
455
448
176,50
R5
4701

msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats
Konstr./Tegnet
02-04-2002
485,50
499
510
Dato
480
Projeksjon
Pos.nr
1
Antall
1
1:3
Mlest. (A3 Format)
P000460-1
Beskrivelse
Adapterplate 19" TFT -> 21" CRT
Erstattet av
ID
P000460-1
Materiale
Aluminium
356,50


Shown for 19 inch display. Other sizes available.
19 Inch Sun Visor
IND100132-67
83
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
VESA Bracket
4
4 mounting holes
VESA Bracket - Backcover
M6x12 screws
98
242
Date:
100
10
11
11
Size: A1 Format
Scale:
Approved by:
--
Revision:
12
84
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

10
Drawing number:
12
H
1:3

msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats
222
75
130
160
IND100132-45
157

85
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
2

""

"



!
1"2!
IND100132-80
1"
Water Cover

"
%&'()

!"#

*++

,-&.$/0
$


86
INB100005-1 (Rev 7)
General - Appendix
87
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Basic Trouble-shooting
COMMON ERRORS: (Applies for Display products and Panel / Maritime / Rack Computers)
If for some reason there should be something wrong with the picture quality or no picture present,
check the symptoms carefully and try to cure it with the hints below:
NO PICTURE / LED BEHAVIOUR:
If there is no light at all in the LED at the FRONT, check power cables. If the LED in front is green
then check if the brightness knob is turned to the right (max brightness). If still no picture, check
if there is a VGA signal on the External VGA connector. If you have a picture on the external VGA
connector please look in BIOS documentation/chapter for correct display settings in BIOS.
Lack of image is most likely to be caused by incorrect connection, lack of power, or wrong BIOS
settings.
SCROLLING / UNSTABLE IMAGE:
Signal cable may not be completely connected to computer or TFT display.
Check the pin assignments and signal timings of the display and your video card with respect to
recommended timing and pin assignments. Make sure that the video card is compatible and that it
is properly seated / installed on the computer.
DISPLAY AREA IS NOT CENTERED / SIZED CORRECTLY
Make sure that a supported video mode has been selected on the display, or on the
video card / system. If it is impossible to position the image correctly, ie the image adjustment
controls will not move the image far enough, then test it again using another graphics card for the
PC system. This situation can occur with a custom graphics card that is not close to standard
timings or if something is in the graphics line that may be affecting the signal, such as a signal
splitter (please note that normally a signal splitter will not have any adverse effect).
If it is impossible to change to the correct resolution/color depth, check if you have the right VGA
driver installed in your system.
IMAGE APPEARANCE:
A faulty TFT panel can have black lines, pixel errors, failed sections, flickering or flashing image.
Incorrect graphics card refresh rate, resolution or interlaced mode will probably cause the image
to be the wrong size, it may scroll, flicker badly or possibly even no image is present. Sparkling on
the display may be a faulty TFT panel signal cable.
CONTINUED FAILURE:
If unit after unit keeps failing, consider and investigate whether you are short circuiting the
equipment or doing something else seriously wrong.
DEW CONDENSATION BEHIND GLASS:
Power on the TFT product and set brightness to 100%. Turn off any automatic screensavers on
PC or similar. During minutes the dew will be gone. To speed up the process, use a fan heater for
a reasonable time. Do not overheat the TFT product.
General - Appendix
IND100077-8
88
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

These products have been tested / type approved by the following classification societies:
Type Number
Tests
Certificated by
JH 10T06 STD Ax
EN60529 (IP66) (Applies only for flush mounting)
JH 10T06 MMD Ax
EN60945 3rd (IEC945 3rd)

ClassNK - Nippon Kaiji Kyokai

DNV - Det Norske Veritas
GL - Germanischer Lloyd
BV - Bureau Veritas
ABS - American Bureau of Shipping
JH 15T05 MMD Ax
EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th)
JH 19T02 MMD Ax
EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th)

EN61174 (IEC1174) - Bundesamt fr Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie (BSH)
KR - Korean Register Of Shipping
LRS - Lloyd's Register of Shipping
BV - Bureau Veritas
JH 20T03 MMD Ax
EN60945 3rd (IEC945 3rd)


BV - Bureau Veritas
EN60945 3rd (IEC945 3rd)


BV - Bureau Veritas
KR - Korean Shipping (for ECDIS versions)
JH 15T05 STD Ax
JH 20T06 MMD Ax
JH 23T02 MMD Ax
General - Appendix
IND100077-10
89
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)

These products have been tested / type approved by the following classification societies:
Type Number
Tests
Certificated by
JH 12T01 MMC A4
EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th)

IACS E10

BV - Bureau Veritas
JH 15T05 MMC A1
EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th)

IACS E10

BV - Bureau Veritas
JH 19T02 MMC A1
EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th)

IACS E10

BV - Bureau Veritas
JH 23T02 MMC A1
EN60945 4th (IEC945 4th) (Pending)

IACS E10 (Pending)
General - Appendix
IND100077-10
90
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Declaration of Conformity
We, manufacturer
Jakob Hatteland Display A/S
msosen, N-5578 Nedre Vats, Norway
declare under our sole responsibility that the
MMD, MMC, STD and MIL products
is in conformity with the following standards
in accordance with the EMC Directive
EN 55022 Class A - Emission

EN 55024 - Immunity
Signature:........................................................
Frode Grindheim
Technical Director
Jakob Hatteland Display A/S
Signature:........................................................
Arne Kristiansen
Development Engineer
Jakob Hatteland Technology A/S
Date: 08 September 2004
Return Of Goods Information

Return of goods: (Applies not to warrenty/normal service/repair of products)
Before returning goods, please contact your system supplier before sending anything directly
to JHD. When you return products after loan, test, evaulation or products subject for credit,
you must ensure that all accessories received from our warehouse is returned to JHD.
This applies to cables, powermodules and additional equipment except screws or similar, user
manual, datasheets or other written paper documents. Furthermore, the product must not have any
minor / medium or severe scratches, chemical spills or similar on the backcover, front frame or
glass.
This is needed to credit the invoice 100%. Missing parts will not be subject for credit, and you will
not get total credit for returned product. You will either be charged separately or the amount is
withdrawn from the credit. If you noticed that our product missed accessories upon receival, we
are of course open for further investigation and positive solutions. If you decide to ship the missing
items on the after hand, you will get 100% credit for that particular invoice or items received at JHD
incoming goods control. Please contact our sales personnel if additional questions.
Current prices apply as per May 2004:
Signal Cable DSUB 15P Male or Female - Approx 1,8meters
Price:
170,- NOK each
Signal Cable BNC 5P - Approx 1,8meters
Price:
350,- NOK each
RS-232 serial cable DSUB 9P - Approx 1,8meters
Price:
80,- NOK each
Powercable 110 / 220 VAC (European or US standard) - Approx 1,8meters
Price:
50,- NOK each
Minor / Medium or severe scratches / chemical spill on backcover
Price: 1300,- NOK
Any scratch, chemical spill or similar on front frame (including glass)

(Prices are approx, and any deviation are evaulated during incoming goods control)
Price: 2000,- NOK
Approved packaging methods/materials: (Applies to all shipments to JHD)

When returning goods, please make sure you surround the product with the following material,
whenever possible: Original packaging from JHD, firm foam material, bubble wrap or lots of
PadPack paper or Foam chips/polyester wrapped in sealed plastic bags. In any case, always use a
solid cardboard box to surround everything.
Not approved packaging methods/materials are: Foam chips, expanded polyester, clothes, nothing,
or too little, or anything that will crumble and get into the ventilation holes of products and
cardboard boxes that are not suitable to secure the product during shipment.
General - Appendix
IND100077-14
92
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Terms
The Hatteland Group - Terms Of Sale And Delivery:
1) APPLICATION
The terms of sale and delivery include the following companies: Autostore AS, Jakob Hatteland Assembly AS,
Jakob Hatteland Computer AS, Jakob Hatteland Display AS, Jakob Hatteland Logistics, Jakob Hatteland Supply AS
and Jakob Hatteland Technology AS.
2) PRICE
a) The price is per each, if nothing else has been stated, VAT not included. Price is based on the prices from our
suppliers, current custom rates, taxes, rate of exchange and international raw material prices. We reserve ourselves
the rights to adjustments in case of alternation on the above mentioned.
b) Included in the price is the suppliers standard packing. In case of re-packing/smaller quantities we reserve
ourselves the right to add an additional sum for warrantable packing according to CECC 0015 (Basic inspection for
protection of electrostatic sensitive devices)
3) VALIDITY
If nothing else has been stated in our quotation, the offer is valid for 30 days from the date of quotation.
4) PACKAGE QUOTATION
A package quotation means that all the components offered, must be ordered by us. If one component or more are
removed from the quotation, the prices given in the package quotation are not valid.
5) TERMS OF PAYMENT
Cash on delivery or payment in advance. Net granted for companies, schools and institutions only, according to
agreement. In case of too late payment 1.5% interest/month will be charged. Seller has mortage rights in the goods
delivered until the purchase price, additional interests and charges have been paid in full. Accepted bill is not
considered as payment until it has been honoured in full.
6) TIME OF DELIVERY
The quoted time of delivery is based on information from our suppliers. We disclaim any responsibility for the
consequences of any delay or cancellation from our suppliers. Belated delivery gives not solely the right for
cancellation.
7) DELIVERY POINT OF TIME
Goods are considered delivered to customer when handed over to charterer.
8) FREIGHT / PACKING / FORWARDING FEE
Jakob Hatteland Display AS charge NOK 50,- in forwarding fee for orders below NOK 1000,-.
For orders below NOK 1000,- Jakob Hatteland Supply AS charge freight according to expenses, and NOK 25,- for
packing. For handling requested beyond ordinary hours NOK 250,- is charged. Express service is charged with NOK
100,- + freight charges. All the companies charge freight according to expenses for orders above NOK 1000,-. VAT
not included.
9) COMPLAINT
By receipt customer must check goods for obvious defects which have to be claimed within 8 days from receipt.
Otherwise acceptance of complaint can not be counted on.
10) GUARANTEE / SERVICES
Time of guarantee is calculated from our date of shipment, and applies to the extent that we are covered by our
suppliers guarantee regulations. The guarantee does no longer apply if:
I) there has been encroached upon the goods without sellers consent
II) terms of payment is not fulfilled
III) the goods have been damaged due to unskilled treatment
IV) components which are sensitive for static electricity have not been unpacked and treated in a secure way.
Minimum requirements: CECC 00015s standards for handling of such components. The guarantee does not include
fair wear and tear.
General - Appendix
IND100077-7
93
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Terms
11) RESPONSIBLITY
Seller undertake to deliver faultless and functional capable goods according to existing technical specifications.
Seller disclaim responsibility for any damage or loss which directly or indirectly may be caused due to failure or defect
with the delivered goods, if carelessness from the seller can be limited up to the cost of the goods. The suppliers
responsibility for defects with the supplied goods do not include secondary damage or loss.
12) CANCELLATION / RETURN
Binding sales contract is concluded when we have confirmed customers purchase order. Any disagreements in our
order confirmation must be reported to seller within 6 days. The agreement can not be altered without our permission,
after acceptance from our supplier. If goods are wanted to be returned, a Return No must be assigned from seller.
Returned goods without a Return No will not be accepted. By return of stock listed goods, 20% return fee is charged.
Returned goods are shipped on customers account and risk.
13) LOAN, RENT and DEMO
When borrowing of goods for demo/test, the date of return must be added to the document. If no date has been
stated, date of return is two weeks from the date of the document. Before return, seller must be contacted for a
Return No (RTK). Goods which have been sold with an agreed right of return within stated terms, shall also have a
Return No. The Return No must be obtained before the stated date of return. Returned goods without a Return No, or
which have not been packed in original packing, will not be accepted.
14) LIMITATIONS
If any of our suppliers claim limited delivery terms towards us, our terms of delivery will be restriced according to
those.
15) SOFTWARE
Sold or borrowed software is not allowed to be copied or spread in other ways, without a written permission.
16) RE-EXPORT
Goods delivered from seller may be subject to special rules of exportation in their suppliers native country. Buyer is
responsible to obtain necessary permissions for further export/re-sale.
17) QUESTION IN DISPUTE
To settle any dispute the Karmsund Herredsrett is approved the legal venue.
General - Appendix
IND100077-7
94
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Terms
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CONSIGNEE
1) CONTROL
Control the goods immediately by receipt. Examine the quantity towards the invoice/packinglist/shipping documents.
Look for outward defects on the packing which may indicate damage on or loss of contents. Control the container and
the seals for any defects.
2) SECURING EVIDENCE
When defects on the goods have been found, evidence must be secured, and seller must be informed. Call the
transporter and point out the defects. Add a description of the defects on the goods receipt, the forwarders copy of
the way-bill or on the driving slip.
3) RESCUE
Bound the damage. Try to restrict the damage and the loss. Seller will compensate expences incurred due to
reasonable security efforts in addition to damage and loss.
4) COMPLAINT
Write immediately a complaint to the transporter or his agent. Forward immediately the complaint to the transporter or
his agent, and hold the transporter responsible for the defects. The complaint must be sent at the latest:
- for carriage by sea:
within 3 days
- for overland / air transportation
within 7 days
5) DOCUMENTATION
For any claims the following documentation is required, and must be forwared to the company or their agent:
invoice, way-bill and/or bill of landing, and/or statement of arrival, inspection document, besides a copy of the letter of
complaint to the transporter.
General - Appendix
IND100077-7
95
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Notes
General Notes: (For all products)
- The unit is type approved according to EN60945 (1997), 4.4, equipment category b) protected
from the weather.
- Other type approvals applies for the different products.
Please see Testing & Approvals Overview section in this manual for more information.
- Use of brightness and push buttons may inhibit visibility of information at night.
Note for ECDIS Systems:
For ECDIS systems the brightness knob indication mark should be aligned directly with the
indication mark located on the label. (See Physical Overview or Operation section elsewhere in
this manual)
VGA BIOS Firmware Verify: (On MMD and similar products only)
To verify your BIOS Firmware version, the version number is displayed in the UTILITIES menu in
the right top corner. If no version number shows, you may have a BIOS Firmware below V1.00
This manual currently applies for these BIOS Firmware Versions:
V0.xx / V1.00 / V1.10 / V1.2 / V1.2xx / V1.3xx / V1.5xx / V1.6xx
As the available functions are nearly indentical between older products and V1.6xx, there should
be no critical need to update the BIOS Firmware. In such case, consult your local technician or
sales/technical personnel at Hatteland Display if problems arise during the installation or within
usage of the product, or lack of support for your signal refresh rate etc.
VGA BIOS Firmware Versions: (On MMD and similar products only)
On products from V0.xx to V1.1xx = The advanced version of the OSD menu by startup default.
On products from V1.2xx to V1.5xx = The simplified version of the OSD menu by startup default.
On products from V1.6xx = The memorized state version of the OSD menu by startup default.
Advanced/Service Menu:
You will have a full set of functions available for your personal perference. Only for experienced
users.
Simplified Menu:
You will have a limited set of functions available for your personal perference. For the common
user.
Memorized State Menu:
The menu will either be advanced or simplified upon startup of display. If user changes from
simplified to advanced menu or visa versa, then this will be memorized in memory and it stays in
that mode until user changes it back again. This is only active on VGA BIOS Firmware versions
from V1.6xx and above.
General - Appendix
IND100077-6
96
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Notes
97
IND100077-24
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Revision History
Rev.
By
Date
Notes
SE
09 May 03
Pressed ver.
First release, User Manual. Pressed & internet version.
SE
16 Jan 04
Pressed ver.
Second release, User Manual. Pressed & internet version.

Removed Revision Record for SXGA, UXGA controllers.
Removed JH 10T05 VGA and JH 18T04 MMD (obsolete during Q1 2004).
Added DVI-D technical drawings for all MMD products. (where available)
Added testing and approvals section
Added accessories technical drawings.
Added revision history.
Added front page selected chapters.
Revised notes section, and VGA BIOS versions overview.
Reorganization of chapters and updating overall text where needed.
SE
14 May 04
Pressed ver.
Third release, User Manual. Pressed & internet version.

Added Declaration Of Conformity
Inserted Book ID on all pages and performed minor maintenance.
Added more pin assignments for common connectors.
(Final Pressed version 2)
SE
11 Aug 04
Fourth release, User Manual. Internet version.

Added SXGA (DVI) and UXGA (NON-DVI) preset signal timings.
SE
29 Sep 04
Added note and updated label for ECDIS systems in OPERATION and NOTES sections.
(MMD products only)
Added Sunvisor drawing for JH 10T06 MMD
SE
22 Dec 04
Revised drawings with rotary bracket.

Overall updates made.
SE
25 Jan 05
Pressed ver.
SE
10 Feb 05
Updated specifications/drawings for 15,19 and 20 Inch (2005 version)

Revised Testing & Approval Overview section.
Revised frontpage with correct type number for 15 Inch
SE
17 Mar 05
Added JH 20T05 MMD Standard and Brackets Technical Drawings

Updated datasheets where needed.
10
SE
15 Jun 05
Pressed ver.
11
SE
18 Nov 05
Added JH MMDBR Bracket Drawing for 17 Inch to 20 Inch

(Final Pressed verion 3)
Replaced JH 15T03 MMD with JH 15T05 MMD
Revised JH 20T03 MMD specifications and drawings.

Removed JH 17T01 MMD (obsoleted, will be replaced by JH 17T02 MMD)
Added Water Cover technical drawing.
JH 20T05 MMD replaced by JH 20T06 MMD, due to TFT panel change.
Revised all products specifications.
General - Appendix
IND100077-11
98
INB100005-1 (Rev 11)
Contact Information
Main office, Vats / Norway:
msosen
N-5578 Nedre Vats
Norway
Tel: +47 5276 3700
Fax: +47 5276 5444
Sales office, Oslo / Norway:
Gjerdrums vei 12
N-0484 Oslo
Norway
Tel: +47 5276 3700
Fax: +47 2258 6790
Sales office, Frankfurt / Germany:
Jakob Hatteland Display GmbH
Werner Heisenberg Strasse 12
D-63263 Neu-Isenburg
Germany
Tel: +49 6102 370 954
Fax: +49 6102 370 968
Sales office, Orlando / USA:

Jakob Hatteland Display Inc.
801 International Parkway, 5th Floor
Lake Mary, FL 32746
USA
Tel: +1 407 562 1677
Fax: +1 407 562 1777
www.hatteland.com
Thank you for choosing our quality products !
User Manual
for
HP Deskjet D2360

HP Deskjet D2360, User Guide
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-416003-01MU
Unrestricted
1.0

- BLANK PAGE -
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-416003-01MU
Unrestricted
1.0

HP Deskjet D2300 series
HP Photosmart Software Help
2006 Hewlett-Packard Development

Company, L.P.
Hewlett-Packard Company
notices
The information contained in this
document is subject to change without
notice.
All rights reserved. Reproduction,
adaptation, or translation of this
material is prohibited without prior
written permission of Hewlett-Packard,
except as allowed under copyright
laws.
The only warranties for HP products
and services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying
such products and services. Nothing
herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP
shall not be liable for technical or
editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Acknowledgements
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, and Windows
are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
TrueType is a U.S. trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
Adobe, AdobeRGB, and Acrobat are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Terms and conventions

The following terms and conventions
are used in this user's guide.
Terms
The HP Deskjet printer is also referred
to as the HP Deskjet, HP printer, or
printer.
Cautions and warnings

A Caution indicates possible damage
to the HP Deskjet printer or to other
equipment. For example:
Caution Do not touch the
print cartridge ink nozzles or
copper contacts. Touching
these parts will result in clogs,
ink failure, and bad electrical
connections.
A Warning indicates possible harm to
you or to others. For example:
Warning Keep both new
and used print cartridges out
of the reach of children.
Accessibility
Your HP printer provides a number of
features that make it accessible for
people with disabilities.
Visual
The printer software is accessible for
users with visual impairments or low
vision through the use of Windows
accessibility options and features. It
also supports most assistive
technology such as screen readers,
Braille readers, and voice-to-text
applications. For users who are color
blind, colored buttons and tabs used in
the software and on the HP printer have
simple text or icon labels that convey
the appropriate action.
Mobility
For users with mobility impairments, the
printer software functions can be
executed through keyboard
commands. The software also supports
Windows accessibility options such as
StickyKeys, ToggleKeys, FilterKeys,
and MouseKeys. The printer doors,
buttons, paper trays, and paper guides
can be operated by users with limited
strength and reach.
Support
For more details about the accessibility
of this product and HP's commitment to
product accessibility, visit HP's Web
site at: www.hp.com/accessibility.
Contents
1
2
3
4
5
Welcome.................................................................................................................3
Special features.....................................................................................................5
Get started..............................................................................................................6
The printer at a glance ...........................................................................................6
Buttons and lights ...................................................................................................7
Paper tray ...............................................................................................................9
Print cartridges .....................................................................................................12
Ink-backup mode ..................................................................................................13
Connect to the printer.........................................................................................15
USB ......................................................................................................................15
Print using the Photosmart Express button.....................................................16
About the Photosmart Express button ..................................................................16
About the HP Photosmart Express software ........................................................16
Print photos.........................................................................................................17
Print borderless photos ........................................................................................17
Print photos with a border ....................................................................................19
HP Real Life Digital Photography options ............................................................21
Photo print cartridge .............................................................................................21
Exif Print ...............................................................................................................22
Store and handle photo paper ..............................................................................22
Save money when printing photos .......................................................................23
Print other documents........................................................................................24
Print e-mail ...........................................................................................................24
Print documents ....................................................................................................25
Print letters ...........................................................................................................26
Print envelopes .....................................................................................................27
Print postcards ......................................................................................................28
Print index cards and other small media ..............................................................29
Print labels ............................................................................................................30
Print CD/DVD tattoos ............................................................................................30
Print transparencies ..............................................................................................31
Print brochures .....................................................................................................32
Print greeting cards ..............................................................................................33
Print booklets ........................................................................................................34
Print posters .........................................................................................................36
Print iron-on transfers ...........................................................................................37
Printing tips..........................................................................................................39
Printing shortcuts ..................................................................................................39
Fast/Economical printing ......................................................................................39
Select a paper type ..............................................................................................40
Change the print speed or quality ........................................................................40
Print resolution ......................................................................................................41
Maximum dpi ........................................................................................................41
Print in grayscale ..................................................................................................42
Set the page order ................................................................................................42
Set a custom paper size .......................................................................................42

Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper ...................................................43
Resize a document ...............................................................................................43
Print preview .........................................................................................................43
Two-sided printing ................................................................................................44
Bound two-sided documents ................................................................................44
9 Printer software...................................................................................................46
Make the HP Deskjet the default printer ...............................................................46
Set default print settings .......................................................................................46
Printer Properties dialog box ................................................................................47
What's This? help .................................................................................................48
Ink Status window .................................................................................................48
Download printer software updates ......................................................................49
10 Maintenance.........................................................................................................50
Install print cartridges ...........................................................................................50
Align the print cartridges .......................................................................................53
Automatically clean print cartridges ......................................................................53
Calibrate color ......................................................................................................53
Print a test page ...................................................................................................54
View estimated ink levels .....................................................................................54
Maintain the printer body ......................................................................................54
Remove ink from your skin and clothing ..............................................................54
Manually clean print cartridges .............................................................................55
Maintain print cartridges .......................................................................................56
Printer Toolbox .....................................................................................................57
11 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................59
Installation problems .............................................................................................59
Printer does not print ............................................................................................61
Paper jam .............................................................................................................63
Paper problems ....................................................................................................64
Printer is stalled ....................................................................................................65
Print cartridge problems .......................................................................................65
Photos do not print correctly .................................................................................67
Print quality is poor ...............................................................................................68
Document is misprinted ........................................................................................69
Problems with borderless documents ..................................................................70
HP Photosmart Express software is not installed .................................................72
Error messages ....................................................................................................73
Power light is on or flashing .................................................................................74
Document prints slowly .........................................................................................75
If you continue to have problems .........................................................................76
A HP support ..........................................................................................................77
Support process ...................................................................................................77
HP support by phone ............................................................................................77
B Supplies................................................................................................................79
C Technical information ........................................................................................80
Printer specifications ............................................................................................80
Environmental product stewardship program .......................................................80
Regulatory notices ................................................................................................82
Index............................................................................................................................83
Welcome
Welcome to the HP Deskjet D2300 series Help. Use the information in the following table
to find out how to do something. You can also use the table of contents pane on the left
to locate information.
Section
Description
Special features
Learn about some of the printer's special features.
Get started
Learn how to operate the printer and use and replace the
print cartridges.
Connect to the printer
Learn how to connect your computer to the printer.
Print photos
Learn how to print photos, adjust the appearance of

photos before you print, install a photo print cartridge,
store and handle photo paper, and share photos with
friends and family.
Print using the Photosmart

Express button
Open the HP Photosmart Express software and access

the HP imaging features.
Print other documents
Learn how to print a variety of documents, including email, greeting cards, envelopes, labels, posters,
booklets, transparencies, and iron-on media.
Printing tips
Learn how to use printing shortcuts, select a paper type,

change the print resolution, set the page order, print
multiple pages on a single sheet, preview a document,
and use two-sided printing.
Printer software
Learn how to make the HP Deskjet the default printer, set

default print settings, and download printer software
updates.
Maintenance
Learn how to install and care for print cartridges, view

how much ink is left in a print cartridge, print a test page,
and remove ink stains.
Troubleshooting
Find a solution to a hardware or software problem.
Chapter 1
(continued)
Section
Description
Supplies
Order supplies for the printer.
Specifications
Learn about the paper capacity, requirements, and other

specifications for the printer.
HP inkjet supplies
recycling program
Find out how to recycle print cartridges.
Special features
Congratulations! You have purchased an HP Deskjet printer that is equipped with several
exciting features:
User friendly: Easy to install and operate.

Borderless printing: Print 4 x 6 inch photos to the edges of the paper by using the
borderless printing feature.
Ink level indicator: Know the approximate ink level of each print cartridge with the
onscreen Ink Status window. For information, see View estimated ink levels Ink
Status window.
Ink-backup mode: Continue printing with one print cartridge when the other print
cartridge has run out of ink. For information, see Ink-backup mode.
Photosmart Express button: Use the Photosmart Express button to open the
HP Photosmart Express software, which provides a fast and easy way to make prints
of your photos or to purchase prints online.
Get started
The printer at a glance

Buttons and lights
Paper tray
Print cartridges
Ink-backup mode
The printer at a glance

Click the links below to learn about the printer features.
Buttons and lights
Paper tray
Print cartridges
USB port
Buttons and lights

Use the printer buttons to turn the printer on and off, cancel a print job, and open the
HP Photosmart Express software. The printer lights give you visual cues about the status
of the printer.
Power button and light
Print Cancel button
Photosmart Express button

Use the Power button to turn the printer on and off. It can take a few seconds for the
printer to turn on after you press the Power button.
Chapter 3
The Power light flashes when the printer is processing.

Caution Always use the Power button to turn the printer on and off. Using a
power strip, surge protector, or a wall-mounted switch to turn the printer on and
off might cause printer failure.
Print Cancel button

The printer also has a Print Cancel button.
Print Cancel button
Pressing the Print Cancel button cancels the current print job.
Note Pressing the Print Cancel a second time causes the printer to resume
printing.

Use the Photosmart Express button to open the HP Photosmart Express software. The
HP Photosmart Express software provides a fast and easy way to make prints of your
photos or to purchase prints online. It also provides access to other basic HP imaging
software features, such as saving, viewing, and sharing your photos.
8
Paper tray
For information about the paper tray, select one of these topics.
Unfold the paper tray

Use the paper tray
Fold the paper tray
Unfold the paper tray

To unfold the paper tray
1. Raise the printer cover.
2.
Lower the paper tray.
Chapter 3
3.
Pull out the tray extension.
4.
If you are printing in the Fast Draft mode, fold out the tray extension stop.
5.
Lower the printer cover.
Use the paper tray

Print on different sizes of media by sliding the paper guide to the right or to the left. The
printer deposits printed pages on the top of the paper tray.
10
Fold the paper tray

To fold the paper tray
1. Remove paper or other media from the paper tray.
2. If the tray extension stop is folded out, fold it back in.
3.
Push the tray extension into the paper tray.
4.
Raise the printer cover.
11
Chapter 3
5.
Raise the paper tray.
6.
Print cartridges
Three print cartridges can be used with the printer.
Black print cartridge
Tri-color print cartridge
Photo print cartridge
Note Your printer might be packaged with only a tri-color print cartridge. For
better results, install a black print cartridge in addition to the tri-color print
cartridge. You can print without a black print cartridge but doing so can cause the
printer to print more slowly and printed colors to differ from those you would see
if a black print cartridge and a tri-color print cartridge were installed.
To order print cartridges, go to www.hp.com. Choose your country/region, and
then click Buy or Online Shopping.
For information about using the print cartridges, see the following topics:
12
Use print cartridges
Replace print cartridges
Use print cartridges

The print cartridges can be used in the following ways:
Everyday printing: Use the black and tri-color print cartridges for everyday print
jobs.
Quality color photos: For more vibrant colors when printing color photographs or
other special documents, remove the black print cartridge and install a photo print
cartridge. The photo print cartridge, in combination with the tri-color print cartridge,
provides you with virtually grain-free photos.
Replace print cartridges

When buying print cartridges, look for the print cartridge selection number.
You can find the selection number in three places:
Selection number label: Look at the label on the print cartridge that you are replacing.
Selection number label
Printer documentation: For a list of print cartridge selection numbers, see the
reference guide that came with the printer.
Print Cartridge Ordering Information dialog box: For a list of print cartridge selection
numbers, open the printer Toolbox, click the Estimated Ink Level tab, and then click
the Print Cartridge Information button.
If a print cartridge runs out of ink, the printer can operate in ink-backup mode. For more
information, see Ink-backup mode.
For information about installing a replacement print cartridge, see Installation
instructions.
Ink-backup mode
Use the ink-backup mode to operate the printer with only one print cartridge. The inkbackup mode is initiated when a print cartridge is removed from the print cartridge cradle.
13
Chapter 3
Note When the printer operates in ink-backup mode, a message is displayed on

screen. If the message is displayed and two print cartridges are installed in the
printer, verify that the protective piece of plastic tape has been removed from each
print cartridge. When plastic tape covers the print cartridge contacts, the printer
cannot detect that the print cartridge is installed.
For more information about ink-backup mode, see the following topics:
Ink-backup mode output

Exit ink-backup mode
Ink-backup mode output

Printing in ink-backup mode slows the printer and affects the quality of printouts.
Installed print
cartridge
Result
Black print cartridge
Colors print as grayscale.
Tri-color print cartridge
Colors print but black is grayed and is not a true black.
Colors print as grayscale.
Note HP does not recommend using the photo print cartridge for ink-backup
mode.
Exit ink-backup mode

Install two print cartridges in the printer to exit ink-backup mode.
For information about installing a print cartridge, see Installation instructions.
14
Connect to the printer
USB
USB
The printer connects to the computer with a universal serial bus (USB) cable. The
computer must be running Windows 98 SE or later to use a USB cable.
Note For best printing performance, use a USB 2.0 compatible cable.
For instructions about connecting the printer with a USB cable, see the setup poster that
came with the printer.
Note A USB cable might not be packaged with your printer.
15
Print using the Photosmart

Express button
To quickly print photos, use the Photosmart Express button.
About the Photosmart Express button

About the HP Photosmart Express software
About the Photosmart Express button

The Photosmart Express button is located on the front panel of the printer. When you
press the button, the HP Photosmart Express software is opened on your computer.
The HP Photosmart Express software provides a fast and easy way to make prints of
your photos or to purchase prints online. It also provides access to other basic HP
imaging software features, such as saving, viewing, and sharing your photos.
About the HP Photosmart Express software

The HP Photosmart Express software provides a fast and easy way to make prints of
your photos or to purchase prints online. It also provides access to other basic HP
imaging software features, such as saving, viewing, and sharing your photos.
Note If the HP Photosmart Express software is not installed on your computer,
a message is displayed when you press the Photosmart Express button. For more
information, see HP Photosmart Express software is not installed.
16
Print photos
The printer software offers several features that make printing digital photos easier and
improve photo quality.
Learn how to print photos
Print a borderless photo.
Print a photo with a border.
Learn how to perform other photo printing tasks
Use the photo print cartridge for great colors and virtually grain-free photos.
Use HP Real Life technologies to touch up photos. For more information, see HP
Real Life Digital Photography options.
Print an Exif Print-formatted photo if you have Exif Print-enabled software.
Prevent photo paper from curling by following the photo paper storage and handling
guidelines.
Use HP Everyday Photo Paper to save money and ink when printing photos.
Print borderless photos

To print borderless photos, use 4 x 6 inch photo paper with a 0.5 inch tab (10 x 15 cm
with 1.25 cm tab); the photo prints without borders on three sides and with a small border
on the bottom edge that you tear off to make the photo completely borderless.
Guidelines
Use 4 x 6 inch photo paper with a 0.5 inch tab (10 x 15 cm with 1.25 cm tab).
Do not print borderless photos in ink-backup mode. Always have two print cartridges
installed in the printer.
For more information, see Ink-backup mode.
Open the file in a software program such as HP Photosmart software and resize the
photo. Ensure that the size corresponds to the paper size that you want to use.
For maximum fade resistance, use HP Premium Plus Photo Paper.
Verify that the photo paper that you are using is flat. For information about preventing
photo paper from curling, see the photo paper storage instructions.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 15 sheets of photo paper.
Prepare to print
1. Slide the paper guide all the way to the left.
2. Verify that the photo paper is flat.
17
Chapter 6
3.
4.
5.
Place the photo paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should
face down and the short edge should point towards the printer.
If you are using photo paper that has a tear-off tab, verify that the tab is pointing
away from the printer.
Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.
Print
Note If your software program includes a photo printing feature, follow the
instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow these
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the photo in a software program that allows editing, such as HP Photosmart
software.
Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Photo printing-borderless,
and then select the following options:
Print quality: Normal or Best
Note For maximum dpi quality, go to the Paper/Quality tab, and then
click Maximum dpi in the Print quality drop-down list.
18
Paper type: An appropriate photo paper type

Paper size: An appropriate borderless photo paper size
Orientation: Portrait or Landscape
5.
6.
Set the HP Real Life Digital Photography options as appropriate.

Click OK to print the photo.
If you printed on photo paper with a tear-off tab, remove the tab to make the
document completely borderless.
Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that appear in the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Print photos with a border

Guidelines
For maximum fade resistance, use HP Premium Plus Photo Paper.
Verify that the photo paper that you are using is flat. For information about preventing
photo paper from curling, see the photo paper storage instructions.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 15 sheets of photo paper.
Prepare to print
2. Verify that the photo paper is flat.
3. Place the photo paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should
face down and the short edge should point towards the printer.
19
Chapter 6
4.
5.

Small photos
Large photos
Print
Note If your software program includes a photo printing feature, follow the
instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow these
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the photo in a software program that allows editing, such as HP Photosmart
software.
In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Photo printing-with white
borders, and then select the following options:
Note For maximum dpi quality, go to the Paper/Quality tab, and then
click Maximum dpi in the Print quality drop-down list.
5.
6.
Paper type: An appropriate photo paper type

Paper size: An appropriate photo paper size
Orientation: Portrait or Landscape
Set the HP Real Life Digital Photography options as appropriate.
Click OK to print the photo.
dialog box.
20
HP Real Life Digital Photography options

HP Real Life technologies make it easy for you to get better photos. Automatic red-eye
removal and adaptive lighting to enhance detail in shadows are just a few of the
technologies included.
Use the HP Real Life technologies dialog box to set these options:
Automatic red-eye removal: Click On to automatically remove or reduce red-eye

in the photo.
Photo brightening: Automatically enhance colors and contrast for washed-out
photos. Click Automatic to allow the printer software to intelligently brighten your
photo, focusing only on areas that need adjustment.
Adaptive lighting: Adjust the exposure in dark areas of photos to bring out detail.
Click Automatic to allow the printer software to balance lightness and darkness
automatically.
SmartFocus: Enhance the image quality and clarity of low resolution images such
as those downloaded from the Internet. Click On to allow the printer software to
sharpen details in the image automatically.
Sharpness: Adjust the image sharpness to your preference. Click Automatic to
allow the printer software to set the level of sharpening for the image automatically.
Smoothing: Soften an image. Click Automatic to allow the printer software to set
the level of smoothing for the image automatically.
To open the HP Real Life Digital Photography dialog box

1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then click the Real Life digital photography
button.

The photo print cartridge, when used in conjunction with the tri-color print cartridge,
provides virtually grain-free photos. It offers exceptional fade resistance for photos that
are printed on HP Premium Plus Photo Paper.
The photo print cartridge can be purchased separately if it is not included with your
printer.
To install the photo print cartridge
To install the photo print cartridge, remove the black print cartridge from the printer,
and then install the photo print cartridge in the right side of the print cartridge cradle.
21
Chapter 6
Note To learn how to install a print cartridge, see Installation instructions. To

protect a print cartridge when it is not in the printer, follow these storage
guidelines.
To use the photo print cartridge
2. Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click either Photo printingborderless or Photo printing-with white borders.
4. In the Print quality drop-down list, click Normal or Best.
Note For maximum dpi quality, go to the Paper/Quality tab, and then click
Maximum dpi in the Print quality drop-down list.
5.
6.
In the Paper type drop-down list, select the appropriate photo paper type.
Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
Exif Print
Exif Print (Exchangeable Image File Format 2.2) is an international digital imaging
standard that simplifies digital photography and enhances printed photos. When a photo
is taken with an Exif Print-enabled digital camera, Exif Print captures information such
as exposure time, type of flash, and color saturation, and stores it in the image file. The
printer software then uses this information to automatically perform image-specific
enhancements to create outstanding photos.
To print Exif Print-enhanced photos, you must have the following items:
A digital camera that supports Exif Print

Exif Print-enabled photo software, such as HP Photosmart software
To print Exif Print-enhanced photos

1. Open the photo in an Exif Print-enabled software program that allows editing, such
as HP Photosmart software.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. In the Type is drop-down list, select the appropriate photo paper type.
5. In the Print Quality drop-down list, click Normal, Best, or Maximum dpi.
6. Select any other print settings that you want, and then click OK.
The printer software automatically optimizes the printed image.
Store and handle photo paper

Follow these instructions to maintain the quality of HP brand photo paper.
22
Storage
Keep unused photo paper in a plastic bag. Store the packaged photo paper on a flat
surface in a cool place.
When you are ready to print, remove only the paper that you plan to use immediately
from the plastic bag. When you have finished printing, return any unused photo
paper to the plastic bag.
Do not leave unused photo paper in the paper tray. The paper might start to curl,
which can reduce the quality of your photos.
Handling
Always hold photo paper by its edges. Fingerprints on photo paper can reduce print
quality.
If the corners of the photo paper curl more than 10 mm (0.4 inch), flatten the paper
by putting it in the storage bag, and then gently bending it in the opposite direction
of the curl until the paper lies flat.
Photo paper should be flat before it is printed on.
Save money when printing photos

To save money and ink when printing photos, use HP Everyday Photo Paper and set the
print quality to Normal.
HP Everyday Photo Paper is designed to create quality photos with less ink.
Note For higher-quality photos, use HP Premium Plus Photo Paper and set the
print quality to Best or Maximum dpi.
23
Print other documents
E-mail
Documents
Letters
Envelopes
Postcards
Index cards
Labels
CD/DVD tattoos
Transparencies
Brochures
Greeting cards
Booklets
Posters
Iron-on transfers
Printing tips: Minimize your cost and effort while maximizing the quality of your printouts
with printing tips.
Printer software: Learn about the printer software.
Print e-mail
Guidelines
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 100 sheets of plain paper.
Prepare to print
2. Place plain paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
24
3.
4.

Print
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click General everyday printing
or Fast/Economical printing, and then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: Plain paper
Paper size: An appropriate paper size
dialog box.
Print documents
Guidelines
For draft documents, use Fast/Economical printing.
Save paper with two-sided printing.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 100 sheets of paper.
Prepare to print
down.
25
Chapter 7
3.

Note Depending on the paper size, the paper might extend over the edge
of the tray.
4.
Print
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click General everyday
printing, and then specify the following print settings:
4. Select the following print settings:
Print quality if you want a print quality other than Normal.
Print on both sides if you want to print on both sides of the paper.
For more information, see Two-sided printing.
dialog box.
Print letters
Guidelines
For information about printing an envelope for your letter, see envelopes.
Prepare to print
down.
Note If you are using letterhead paper, the letterhead should face down and
point toward the printer.
26
3.
4.

Print
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Presentation printing, and
then specify the following print settings:
dialog box.
Print envelopes
Guidelines
Avoid using envelopes that have the following features:
Clasps or windows
Thick, irregular, or curled edges
Shiny or embossed coatings
Wrinkles, tears, or other damage
You can print a single envelope or multiple envelopes.
Align the envelope edges before inserting the envelopes in the paper tray.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 10 envelopes.
Prepare to print
2. Place the envelopes in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should
face down. The flap should be on the left side.
27
Chapter 7
3.
4.
Push the envelopes into the printer until they stop.

Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the envelopes.
Print
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then select the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate envelope size
Type is: Plain paper
dialog box.
Print postcards
Guidelines
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 20 postcards.
Prepare to print
2. Place the cards in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down and the short edge should point toward the printer.
3. Push the cards into the printer until they stop.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the cards.
28
Print
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate card size
Type is: An appropriate card type
dialog box.
Note If an out-of-paper message is displayed, see Out of paper message for
help in resolving the problem.
Print index cards and other small media

Guidelines
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 20 cards.
Prepare to print
2. Place the cards in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down and the short edge should point toward the printer.
3. Push the cards into the printer until they stop.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the cards.
Print
dialog box.
Note If an out-of-paper message is displayed, see Out of paper message for
help in resolving the problem.
29
Chapter 7
Print labels
Guidelines
Use only paper, plastic, or clear labels that are designed specifically for inkjet
printers.
Use only full sheets of labels.
Avoid using labels that are sticky, wrinkled, or pulling away from the protective
backing.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 15 sheets of labels (use only Letter or A4size sheets).
Prepare to print
2. Fan the edges of the label sheets to separate them, and then align the edges.
3. Place the label sheets in the right side of the tray. The label side should face down.
4. Push the sheets into the printer until they stop.
5. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the sheets.
Print
Note If your software program includes a label printing feature, follow the
instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow the
instructions below.
1.
2.
3.
4.

In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click General everyday
printing, and then specify the following print settings:
Click OK.
dialog box.
Print CD/DVD tattoos

Note This feature might not be available in your country/region.
30
Guidelines
See the instructions that are included with the CD/DVD tattoo for the most current
printing tips.
To avoid damaging the printer, do not feed a CD/DVD tattoo through the printer more
than once.
Make sure the CD/DVD tattoo covers the entire backing sheet with no exposed
spaces. Separating any part of the CD/DVD tattoo from the protective backing sheet
before printing could damage the printer.
Avoid using a CD/DVD tattoo that is pulling away from the protective backing, or that
is wrinkled, curled, or damaged in any way.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 1 sheet of CD/DVD tattoo paper.
Prepare to print
2. Place one sheet of CD/DVD tattoo paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be
printed on should face down.
3. Push the paper into the printer until it stops.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper.
Print
Size is: 5x7in.
Type is: HP CD/DVD Tattoo
Print quality: Best
dialog box.
Print transparencies
Guidelines
For great results, use HP Premium Inkjet Transparency Film.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 20 transparencies.
31
Chapter 7
Prepare to print
2. Place the transparencies in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed should
face down and the adhesive strip should face up and toward the printer.
3. Carefully push the transparencies into the printer until they stop, so that the adhesive
strips do not catch on one another.
4. Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the transparencies.
Print
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Presentation printing, and
then specify the following print settings:
Paper type: An appropriate transparency film
dialog box.
Print brochures
Guidelines
Open the file in a software program and assign the brochure size. Ensure that the
size corresponds to the paper size on which you want to print the brochure.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 30 sheets of brochure paper.
Prepare to print
2. Place the paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should face
down.
32
3.
4.

Print
3. Specify the following print settings:
Size is: An appropriate paper size
Type is: An appropriate HP inkjet paper or other paper type
Note Not all paper sizes and types are available for borderless printing.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Set the print quality to Best.

Click the Basics tab, and then set the orientation.
Click the Finishing tab, and then select Print on both sides to print on both sides
of the paper.
For more information, see Two-sided printing.
Click OK to print.
dialog box.
Print greeting cards

Greeting cards
Unfold prefolded cards, and then place them in the paper tray.
For great results, use HP Greeting Card Paper.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 20 cards.
Prepare to print
2. Fan the edges of the greeting cards to separate them, and then align the edges.
3. Place the greeting cards in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed on should
face down.
33
Chapter 7
4.
5.
Push the cards into the printer until they stop.

Slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the cards.
Print
Note If your software program includes a greeting card printing feature, follow
the instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise, follow
the instructions below.
1.
2.
3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings.
Type is: An appropriate card type
Print quality: Normal
dialog box.
Print booklets
Booklet printing automatically arranges and resizes the pages of a document so that
when the document is folded into a booklet, the page order is correct.
For example, when a four-page booklet is printed on both sides of the paper, the pages
are reordered and printed like this:
Guidelines
34
Prepare to print
down.
Print
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Two-sided, Duplex, printing.
4. In the Booklet layout drop-down list, click one of the following binding options:
Left edge booklet
Right edge booklet
6. When prompted, reload the printed pages in the paper tray as shown below.
7.
Click Continue to finish printing the booklet.
dialog box.
35
Chapter 7
Print posters
Guidelines
For poster printing, sections of the poster are automatically arranged on individual
sheets that can be taped together. After the sections of a poster have been printed,
trim the edges of the sheets and tape the sheets together.
Prepare to print
down.
Print
3. Click the Finishing tab, and then select the number of sheets for the poster.
4. Click the Basics tab, and then specify the orientation.
dialog box.
36
Print iron-on transfers

Guidelines
When printing a mirror image, the text and the pictures are horizontally reversed
from what is displayed on the computer screen.
Do not exceed the paper tray capacity: 10 iron-on transfers.
Prepare to print
2. Place the iron-on transfer paper in the right side of the tray. The side to be printed
on should face down.
Print
Note If your software program includes an iron-on transfer printing feature,
follow the instructions that are provided with the software program. Otherwise,
follow the instructions below.
1.
2.
3.

Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then specify the following print settings:
Type is: Other specialty paper
Click the Basics tab, and then set the orientation to Mirror image.
Note Some iron-on transfer software programs do not require you to print
a mirror image.
4.
37
Chapter 7
dialog box.
38
Printing tips
Save time
Use the Printing Shortcuts tab.

Set the order that the pages print.
Save money
Use Fast/Economical printing.

Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Print in grayscale.
Print a two-sided document.
Use HP Everyday Photo Paper to save money and ink when printing photos.
Enhance the quality of printouts
Preview the document before printing it.

Print on a custom paper size.
Select the correct paper type.
Change the print speed and quality.
View the print resolution.
Achieve the highest printing resolution with Maximum dpi.
Resize the document as needed.
Printing shortcuts
Use printing shortcuts to print with print settings that you use often. The printer software
has several specially designed printing shortcuts that are available in the Printing
Shortcuts list.
Note When you select a printing shortcut the appropriate printing options are
automatically displayed. You can leave them as is or change them.
Printing shortcuts
Use the Printing Shortcuts tab for the following print tasks:
General everyday printing

Photo printingborderless
Photo printingwith white borders
Fast/Economical printing
Presentation printing
Two-sided, duplex, printing
Fast/Economical printing
Use Fast/Economical printing to produce draft-quality printouts quickly.
39
Chapter 8
To use Fast/Economical printing

3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Fast/Economical printing.
4. Specify the print settings that you want, and then click OK.
General Everyday printing

Use General Everyday printing to print documents quickly.
Documents
E-mail
Presentation printing
Use Presentation printing to print high-quality documents, including:
Letters
Brochures
Transparencies
Select a paper type

When printing a higher-quality document, HP recommends that you select a specific
paper type.
To select a specific paper type
3. In the Paper type drop-down list, select an appropriate paper type.
Change the print speed or quality

The HP Deskjet automatically chooses a print quality and speed setting depending on
the paper type setting you select. You can also change the print quality setting to
customize the speed and quality of the print process.
Print quality settings
Fast Draft produces draft-quality output at the fastest printing speed, while using
the least amount of ink.
Fast Normal produces higher quality output than the Fast Draft setting and prints
more quickly than the Normal setting.
Normal provides the best balance between print quality and speed and is
appropriate for most documents.
40
Best provides the best balance between high quality and speed and can be used
for high quality prints. For most documents, the Best setting prints more slowly than
the Normal setting.
Maximum dpi optimizes the dots per inch (dpi) that the HP Deskjet prints. Printing
in maximum dpi takes longer than printing with other settings and requires a large
amount of disk space. For more information, see Maximum dpi.
To select a print quality and speed

3. In the Type is drop-down list, select the type of paper that you have loaded.
4. In the Print quality drop-down list, select the appropriate quality setting for your
project.
Print resolution
The printer software displays the print resolution in dots per inch (dpi). The dpi varies
according to the paper type and print quality that you select in the printer software.
To view the print resolution
3. In the Type is drop-down list, select the type of paper that you have loaded.
4. In the Print quality drop-down list, select the appropriate print quality setting for
your project.
The print resolution dpi is displayed beneath the Print quality drop-down list.
Maximum dpi
Use maximum dpi mode to print high-quality, sharp images.
To get the most benefit from maximum dpi mode, use it to print high-quality images such
as digital photographs. When you select the maximum dpi setting, the printer software
displays the optimized dots per inch (dpi) that the HP Deskjet will print.
Printing in maximum dpi takes longer than printing with other settings and requires a
large amount of disk space.
Note If a photo print cartridge is also installed, the print quality is enhanced. A
photo print cartridge can be purchased separately if it is not included with the
HP Deskjet.
To print in Maximum dpi mode
3. In the Type is drop-down list, select the appropriate paper type.
4. In the Print quality drop-down list, click Maximum dpi.
The print resolution is displayed in maximum dpi beneath the print quality setting.
41
Chapter 8
Print in grayscale
To print in grayscale
2. Click the Color tab.
3. Select the Print in grayscale check box, and then select a grayscale option.
Set the page order

The page order determines the order in which your multipage documents print.
To set the page order
2. Click the Basics tab.
3. Select one of the following options:
Front to back: The first page of the document will be on top when the document
is finished printing. You do not have to reorder the printed pages.
Note This option requires more time for printing.
4.
Back to front: The last page of the document will be on top when the document
is finished printing. You have to reorder the printed pages.
Set a custom paper size

Use the Custom Paper Size dialog box to print on a special paper size.
Note This feature is not available for all paper types.
To define a custom paper size

3. Click the Custom button.
The Custom paper size dialog box is displayed.
4. In the Name drop-down list, click a custom paper size name.
5. In the Width and Length boxes, type the dimensions of the custom paper size.
The minimum and maximum dimensions are displayed beneath each of the boxes.
6. Click the unit of measurement: Inches or Millimeters.
7. Click Save to save the custom paper size.
8. Click OK to exit the Custom paper size dialog box.
9. To use the custom paper size, select its name in the Size is drop-down list.
42
Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper

Use the printer software to print multiple pages of a document on a single sheet of paper.
The printer software automatically resizes the document text and images to fit on the
printed page.
To print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper
2. Click the Finishing tab.
3. In the Pages per sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages that you want to
appear on each sheet of paper.
4. If you want a border to appear around each page image that is printed on the sheet
of paper, select the Print page borders check box.
5. In the Page order is drop-down list, select a layout for the pages.
A preview of the page order is displayed at the top of the Finishing tab.
Resize a document
Use the printer software to print a document that is formatted for one paper size on
another paper size. Doing this can be useful if you do not have the correct paper size
available.
For example, if you have created a document that is formatted for letter-size paper, but
you do not have any letter-size paper available, you can print the document on another
paper size that is available.
To resize a document for a different paper size
2. Click the Effects tab.
3. Select the Print document on check box, and then select the target paper size in
the drop-down list.
The target paper size is the size of the paper on which you are printing, not the size
for which the document was formatted.
4. Select the Scale to fit check box.
Print preview
Use the print preview function to view a printout on your computer before printing a
document. If the printout does not look correct, you can cancel the print job and adjust
the print settings as needed.
To preview a printed document
2. Click the Basics tab.
3. Select the Show print preview check box.
43
Chapter 8
4.
5.
Before the document prints, a preview is displayed.
Do one of the following:
Click OK to print the document.
Click Cancel to cancel the print job. Adjust the print settings as needed before
printing the document.
Two-sided printing
Use two-sided printing, also called duplexing, to print on both sides of the paper. Printing
on both sides of the paper is not only economical, but environmentally conscious as well.
To print a two-sided document
3. In the What do you want to do? drop-down list, click Two-sided, duplex printing.
4. In the Print on both sides drop-down list, click Manually.
The printer prints the odd-numbered pages first.
6. After the odd-numbered pages have been printed, reload the printed pages with the
printed side facing up.
7.
Click Continue to print the even-numbered pages.
To create a two-sided document with a binding, see Bound two-sided documents.
Bound two-sided documents

If you want to bind printed pages into a book, you can adjust the print settings to
accommodate the binding.
Bound two-sided documents can have a book binding (binding on the side) or a tablet
binding (binding at the top). Book binding is the most common type of binding.
To print a two-sided document with a book binding
Follow the instructions for basic two-sided printing.
44
To print a two-sided document with a tablet binding

2. Click the Finishing tab.
3. Select the following check boxes:
Print on both sides
Flip pages up
The printer prints the odd-numbered pages first.
5. After the odd-numbered pages have been printed, reload the printed pages, with the
printed side facing up according to the document orientation, portrait or landscape.
Portrait
Landscape
6.
Click Continue to print the even-numbered pages.
45
Printer software
Make the HP Deskjet the default printer.

Set the default print settings for all documents.
Use the Printer Properties dialog box to select printing options.
Use the What's This? help to learn more about specific print settings.
View the Ink Status window for the approximate ink level of each print cartridge.
Download printer software updates for the latest features and improvements.
Make the HP Deskjet the default printer

You can set the HP Deskjet as the default printer to use from any software program. This
means that the HP Deskjet is automatically selected in the printer drop-down list when
you click Print from the File menu in a software program.
To set the default printer
1. On the Windows taskbar, click Start, point to Settings, and then click Printers.
2. Right-click the HP Deskjet icon, and then click Set as Default Printer.
Set default print settings

The HP Deskjet uses default print settings for all documents unless you specify other
settings.
46
To save time when printing, set the default print settings to options that you use often.
That way, you do not have to specify the options every time you use the printer.
To change the default print settings
1. Double-click the HP Digital Imaging Monitor icon on the right side of the Windows
taskbar.
2.
3.
HP Digital Imaging Monitor icon
The HP Solution Center is displayed.

In the HP Solution Center, click Settings, point to Print Settings, and then click
Printer Settings.
Make changes to the print settings, and then click OK.
Printer Properties dialog box

The printer is controlled by software that is installed on your computer. Use the printer
software, also known as the printer driver, to change the print settings for a document.
To change the print settings, open the Printer Properties dialog box.
Note The Printer Properties dialog box is also referred to as the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
To open the Printer Properties dialog box
1. Open the file that you want to print.
2. Click File, click Print, and then click Properties or Preferences.
The Printer Properties dialog box is displayed.
Note The path to the Printer Properties dialog box can vary depending on the
software program you are using.
47
Chapter 9
What's This? help

Use the What's This? help to learn about the features that you see on the Printer
Properties dialog box.
What's This? help

Use What's This? help to learn more about the available printing options.
To use What's This? help
1. Move the cursor over the feature that you want to learn more about.
2. Click the right mouse button.
The What's This box is displayed.
3. Move the cursor over the What's This? box, and then click the left mouse button.
An explanation of the feature is displayed.
Ink Status window

The Ink Status window is displayed each time the printer prints a file. The window displays
the approximate ink level of each print cartridge. To close the Ink Status window, click
Close.
Note This feature might not be available in your operating environment.
Print cartridge information and ordering

For print cartridge information and to link to HP's Web site for ordering print cartridges,
click the Print Cartridge Information button.
Displaying the Ink Status window
If you do not want the Ink Status window to appear when you print, select the Do not
show this again check box in the lower-left corner of the window.
If you previously chose not to show the Ink Status window but now want it to appear when
you print, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
48
Open the printer Toolbox.

Click the Configuration tab.
Select the Display Ink Status Window check box.
Click Apply, and then click OK.
Download printer software updates

Download the latest printer software update every few months to ensure you have the
latest features and improvements.
To download a printer software update
1. Make sure you are connected to the Internet.
2. From the Windows Start menu, click Programs or All Programs, point to HP, and
then click HP Software Update.
The HP Software Update window is displayed.
3. Click Next.
HP Software Update searches the HP Web site for printer software updates.
If the computer has the most recent version of the printer software installed, No
updates are available for your system at this time is displayed in the HP
Software Update window.
If the computer does not have the most recent version of the printer software
installed, a software update is displayed in the HP Software Update window.
4. If a software update is available, select the check box beside the update name.
5. Click Install.
6. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Download HP Photosmart software
Installing the printer software update you download from the HP Web site does not
update the HP Photosmart software you might have installed on the computer. For
information about updating the HP Photosmart software, see the HP Photosmart Help.
49
10
Maintenance
Install print cartridges

Align the print cartridges
Automatically clean print cartridges
Calibrate color
Print a test page
View estimated ink levels
Maintain the printer body
Remove ink from your skin and clothing
Manually clean print cartridges
Maintain print cartridges
Printer Toolbox
Install print cartridges

When you need to replace print cartridges, make sure you have the correct print
cartridges for your printer, and then install them in the print cartridge cradle.
Print cartridge combinations

Selection numbers
Ink-backup mode
Installation instructions
Print cartridge combinations

For printing most documents, use the tri-color print cartridge and the black print cartridge.
When printing photos, use the photo print cartridge along with the tri-color print cartridge.
Always install the tri-color print cartridge in the left side of the print cartridge cradle.
Install the black or photo print cartridge in the right side of the print cartridge cradle.
Note Your printer might be packaged with only a tri-color print cartridge. For
better results, install a black print cartridge in addition to the tri-color print
cartridge. You can print without a black print cartridge but doing so can cause the
printer to print more slowly and printed colors to differ from those you would see
if a black print cartridge and a tri-color print cartridge were installed.
To order print cartridges, go to www.hp.com. Choose your country/region, and
then click Buy or Online Shopping.
Selection numbers
When buying replacement print cartridges, look for the print cartridge selection number.
50
You can find the selection number in three places:
Selection number label: Look at the label on the print cartridge that you are replacing.
Selection number label
Printer documentation: For a list of print cartridge selection numbers, see the
Print Cartridge Information dialog box: For a list of print cartridge selection numbers,
open the printer Toolbox, click the Estimated Ink Level tab, and then click the Print
Cartridge Information button.
Ink-backup mode
The printer can operate with only one print cartridge installed. For more information, see
Ink-backup mode.
Installation instructions
To install a print cartridge
1. Press the Power button to turn on the printer.
2. Open the printer cover.
The print cartridge cradle moves to the center of the printer.
3. Push down on the print cartridge.
4. Slide the print cartridge out of the cradle.
Press the Power button
Open the printer cover
Push down on the print cartridge
Slide the print cartridge out of the cradle
51
Chapter 10
5.
Remove the replacement print cartridge from its packaging and carefully remove the
plastic tape. Hold the print cartridge so that the copper strip is on the bottom and
facing toward the printer.
Remove plastic tape
Caution Do not touch the print cartridge ink nozzles or copper contacts.
Touching these parts will result in clogs, ink failure, and bad electrical
connections. Do not remove the copper strips. They are required electrical
contacts.
6.
52
Ink nozzles
Copper contacts
Slide the print cartridge firmly into the cradle at a slight upward angle until you feel
resistance.
7.
8.
9.
Push the cartridge into the cradle.

You hear a snap when the print cartridge is correctly positioned.
Close the printer cover.
Align the print cartridges for optimum print quality.
For information about storing print cartridges, see Maintain print cartridges.
For information about recycling empty print cartridges, see HP inkjet supplies recycling
program.
Warning Keep both new and used print cartridges out of the reach of children.

After installing a print cartridge, align the print cartridges to ensure the best print quality.
To align the printer
1. Load Letter or A4 unused plain white paper in the paper tray.
2. Open the printer Toolbox.
3. Click Align the Print Cartridges.
4. Click Align, and then follow the onscreen instructions.
The HP Deskjet prints a test page, aligns the print cartridges, and calibrates the
printer. Recycle or discard the test page.
Automatically clean print cartridges

If your printed pages are missing lines or dots, or if they contain ink streaks, the print
cartridges might be low on ink or might need to be cleaned. For more information, see
View estimated ink levels.
If the print cartridges are not low on ink, clean the print cartridges automatically.
To clean the print cartridges
2. Click Clean the Print Cartridges.
3. Click Clean, and then follow the onscreen instructions.
If your documents are still missing lines or dots after cleaning, manually clean the print
cartridge contacts.
Caution Clean print cartridges only when necessary. Unnecessary cleaning
wastes ink and shortens the life of the cartridge.
Calibrate color
Perform a color calibration if the colors in photos that are printed with the photo print
cartridge consistently look incorrect.
Before performing a color calibration, align the print cartridges, and then reprint the photo.
If the color is still incorrect, perform a color calibration.
53
Chapter 10
To calibrate color
1. Load Letter or A4 unused plain white paper in the paper tray.
2. Verify that both a tri-color print cartridge and a photo print cartridge are installed in
the printer.
4. Click Calibrate Color.
5. Click Start, and then follow the onscreen instructions.
Print a test page

You can print a test page to view the effects of any changes you have made to the print
settings.
To print a test page
2. Click the Print a Test Page button, and then follow the onscreen instructions.

Follow these instructions to view the estimated ink levels of the print cartridges that are
installed in the printer:
1.
2.
Open the printer Toolbox.

Click the Estimated Ink Level tab.
Note If the print cartridges were used before being installed in the printer, the
estimated ink levels will not appear on the Estimated Ink Level tab.
The Estimated Ink Level tab also contains print cartridge ordering information. To view
this information, click the Print Cartridge Information button.
Maintain the printer body

Because the HP Deskjet ejects ink onto the paper in a fine mist, ink smudges will
eventually appear.
To remove smudges, stains, or dried ink from the exterior
1. Turn off the HP Deskjet, and then disconnect the power cord.
2. Wipe the outside of the HP Deskjet with a soft cloth that has been lightly moistened
with water.
Caution Do not use any type of cleaning solution. Household cleaners and
detergents might damage the printer finish. Keep all fluids away from the interior.
Do not lubricate the metal rod on which the print cartridge cradle slides. Noise is
normal when the cradle moves back and forth.
Remove ink from your skin and clothing

Follow these instructions to remove ink from your skin and clothing:
54
Surface
Remedy
Skin
Wash the area with an abrasive soap.
White fabric
Wash the fabric in cold water and use chlorine bleach.
Color fabric
Wash the fabric in cold water and use sudsy ammonia.
Caution Always use cold water to remove ink from fabric. Warm or hot water
can set the ink into the fabric.
Manually clean print cartridges

If the HP Deskjet is used in a dusty environment, a small amount of debris can
accumulate on the print cartridge contacts. This debris can cause ink streaks and missing
lines on printed pages. The problem can be corrected by manually cleaning the print
cartridge contacts.
You need the following items to clean the print cartridges:
Distilled water (tap water can contain contaminants that can damage the print
cartridge)
Cotton swabs or other soft, lint-free material that will not stick to the print cartridge
Be careful not to get ink on your hands or clothing as you clean.

To prepare to clean
1. Open the HP Deskjet cover.
2. Wait until the print cartridge cradle moves to the center of the HP Deskjet and is idle
and quiet.
3. Remove the print cartridges and place them on a piece of paper, with the copper
strips facing up.
Caution Do not leave the print cartridges outside the HP Deskjet for more
than 30 minutes.
55
Chapter 10
To manually clean print cartridge contacts

1. Lightly moisten a cotton swab with distilled water and squeeze any excess water
from the swab.
2. Gently wipe the print cartridge copper contacts with the cotton swab.
Caution Do not touch the print cartridge ink nozzles. Touching the ink
nozzles will result in clogs, ink failure, and bad electrical connections.
3.
4.
Ink nozzles (do not touch)
Copper contacts
Repeat this process until no ink residue or dust appears on the swab.
Insert the print cartridges in the HP Deskjet, and then close the cover. For more
information, see Installation instructions.
Maintain print cartridges

Use these tips to maintain and store HP print cartridges and to ensure consistent print
quality.
Maintenance tips
Storage tips
Print cartridge protector
Maintenance tips
Keep all print cartridges in their sealed packages until they are needed. Print
cartridges should be stored at room temperatures (15 to 35 C or 59 to 95 F).
Do not remove the plastic tape covering the ink nozzles until you are ready to install
the print cartridge in the printer. If the plastic tape has been removed from the print
cartridge, do not attempt to reattach it. Reattaching the tape damages the print
cartridge.
Storage tips
56
When you remove print cartridges from the printer, store them in an airtight plastic
container.
Make sure that the ink nozzles are face down but are not in contact with the
container.
Print cartridge protector

If you have purchased an HP photo print cartridge, you can store it in the protector that
comes with the print cartridge.
To insert the print cartridge into the print cartridge protector
Slide the print cartridge at a slight angle into the protector, and snap it securely in
place.
To remove the print cartridge from the print cartridge protector

1. Press down and back on the top of the protector to release the print cartridge.
2. Slide the print cartridge out of the protector.
Caution Do not drop the print cartridge. Dropping the print cartridge can
damage it.
Printer Toolbox
The printer Toolbox contains a number of useful tools to enhance the performance of the
printer.
Use the printer Toolbox to perform the following tasks:

Clean the print cartridges
Calibrate color
Print a test page
57
Chapter 10
To open the printer Toolbox

2. Click the Services tab, and then click the Service this device button.
The Toolbox is displayed.
58
11
Troubleshooting
Installation problems
Printer does not print
Paper jam
Paper problems
Printer is stalled
Print cartridge problems
Photos do not print correctly
Print quality is poor
Document is misprinted
Problems with borderless documents
HP Photosmart Express software is not installed
Error messages
Power light is on or flashing
Document prints slowly
If you continue to have problems
Installation problems
If the software installation program stops or fails, check the following topics for more
information:
Installation program stops

"Unknown Device" message displays
Printer name does not appear
If you continue to have problems, visit HP Technical Support at www.hp.com/support.
Installation program stops

If the installation program stops when it looks for new hardware, one of the following
issues is causing a communication problem:
The USB cable is old or defective.

Software, such as an antivirus program, is running.
Another device, such as a scanner, is connected to the computer.
To resolve the problem

1. Make sure that no USB devices other than the printer, the keyboard, and the mouse
are connected to the computer.
2. Disconnect and reconnect the USB cable.
3. Make sure that the printer is connected directly to a USB port on the computer
(instead of through a USB hub).
4. If the installation program still does not locate the printer, replace the USB cable,
and then continue to the next step.
5. Click Cancel, and then restart the computer.
6. Turn the printer off, and then disconnect the USB cable and power cord.
59
Chapter 11
7.
Quit any antivirus programs or other software programs that are running on the
computer.
Note To quit an antivirus program, follow the manufacturers instructions.
8.
Reinstall the printer software:

a. Insert the printer software CD into the drive.
b. Follow the onscreen instructions. When the installation program prompts you,
connect the USB cable and the power cord to the printer, and then make sure
that the printer is on.
Note Do not connect the USB cable until you are told to do so.
9.
c. Follow the onscreen instructions to finish the installation.

Restart the antivirus program.
"Unknown Device" message displays

During installation, an Unknown Device message might be displayed when you connect
a USB cable between the printer and the computer. A possible cause might be a defective
USB cable.
Note This is not a problem if you are using Windows 2000. If you are using
Windows 2000 and this message is displayed, you can continue with the software
installation.
1. Disconnect the USB cable from the printer.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the printer.
3. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
4. Reconnect the power cord to the printer.
5. Reconnect the USB cable to the printer.
6. If the Unknown Device message is still displayed, replace the USB cable.
60
Printer name does not appear

If the printer software seems to install correctly, but the printer name does not appear in
the list of printers when you click Print on the File menu or in the Printers folder in Control
Panel, try reinstalling the printer software.
To reinstall the printer software
1. Quit any antivirus programs or other software programs that are running on the
computer.
Note To quit an antivirus program, follow the manufacturers instructions.
2.
Uninstall the printer software:

a. Insert the printer software CD into the drive, and then follow the onscreen
instructions.
Note If the installation program does not start automatically, click your
CD drive letter in Windows Explorer, then double-click the setup.exe file.
For example, double-click D:\setup.exe.
3.
4.
b. When prompted, click Remove All.

Reinstall the printer software:
a. Insert the printer software CD into the drive.
b. Follow the onscreen instructions to finish the installation.
Restart the antivirus program.
Printer does not print
Verify the following

Check the printer cable connection
Clear the print queue
If the printer still does not print
Verify the following

Verify the following conditions if the printer is not printing:
The printer is connected to the power source.

The cable connections are secure.
The printer is turned on.
The print cartridges are the correct print cartridges for the printer and are properly
installed.
For more information, see Print cartridges and Installation instructions.
The paper or other media is correctly loaded in the paper tray.
The printer cover is closed.
The rear access door is attached.
61
Chapter 11
Check the printer cable connection

If your printer and computer are connected with a USB cable and the devices are not
communicating with each other, try the following:
Make sure the power cord is firmly connected to the printer and plugged into a power
outlet.
Check the USB cable. If you are using an older cable, it might not be working
properly. If you experience problems, the USB cable might need to be replaced. Also
verify that the cable does not exceed 3 meters (9.8 feet) in length.
Check the connection from your printer to your computer. Verify that the USB cable
is securely plugged into the USB port on the back of your printer. Make sure the
other end of the USB cable is plugged into a USB port on your computer. After the
cable is connected properly, turn your printer off and then on again.
If you are connecting the printer through a USB hub, make sure the hub is turned
on. If the hub is on, try connecting the printer directly to your computer.
Try connecting the USB cable to another USB port on your computer. After you
check the connections, try restarting your computer. Turn your printer off and then
on again.
Clear the print queue

When you start a print job, it is sent to a list called the print queue. If the printer stops
printing before the job is complete, the print job might be stalled in the print queue.
To resolve a print job that is stalled in the queue
1. Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.
2. Double-click the name of the HP Deskjet printer.
3. Click the Printer menu, and then click Pause Printing.
4. Click the Printer menu again, and then click Cancel All Documents.
5. Click Yes to confirm the cancellation.
6. Click the Printer menu, and then uncheck Pause Printing.
7. If there are still documents in the list, restart the computer.
8. After restarting, if there are still documents in the list, repeat steps 1 6.
If the printer still does not print

1.
2.
62
Select the topic below that best describes the problem:

Paper jam
Out of paper message
Printer is stalled
If the printer still does not print, shut down, and then restart your computer.
Paper jam
To clear a paper jam
1. Remove the paper from the paper tray.
2. If you are printing labels, verify that a label did not become detached from the label
sheet while passing through the printer.
3. Turn off the printer.
4. Remove the rear access door. Press the handle to the right, and then pull out the
door.
5.
Remove the paper jam from the back of the printer, and then replace the rear access
door securely.
6.
If the paper jam cannot be removed from the back of the printer, raise the printer
cover, remove the paper jam from the front of the printer, and then lower the cover.
Caution Remove the paper jam carefully as it is possible to damage the
printer when removing paper from the front.
7.
Reload paper in the paper tray.
63
Chapter 11
8.
9.
Turn on the printer.

Reprint the document.
Note If paper jams occur frequently, try using a heavier paper. See Printer
specifications for paper weight specifications.
Paper problems
Printer does not feed paper

Printer prints on multiple sheets at once
Printer does not feed paper

Try one or more of the following solutions:
Reduce the number of sheets in the paper tray.

Remove the paper from the paper tray, and then reload it.
Use a different type of paper.

Follow the appropriate steps for the condition that exists.
If the paper tray is loaded

If the paper tray is empty
If the paper tray is loaded

1. Verify the following:
A sufficient amount of paper is loaded in the paper tray (at least ten sheets).
The paper tray is not overly full.
The paper stack is touching the back of the paper tray.
2. Slide the paper guide so that it fits firmly against the edge of the paper.
3. Click Continue to resume printing.
If the paper tray is empty
1. Load paper in the paper tray.
2. Push the paper forward until it stops.
3. Slide the paper guide so that it fits firmly against the edge of the paper.
4. Click Continue to resume printing.
Printer prints on multiple sheets at once

If the printer prints on multiple sheets at once, check the following:
Paper weight
Paper might be loaded improperly
Paper weight
The printer might print on multiple sheets of paper at once if the paper is under the
recommended paper weight. Use paper that is within the recommended specifications.
64
Paper might be loaded improperly

The printer might print on multiple sheets of paper at once if the paper is loaded too far
toward the back of the printer or if the paper guide is not positioned firmly against the
paper. Reload the paper into the paper tray, pushing the paper until you feel resistance,
and then slide the paper guide firmly against the edge of the paper stack.
The printer also might print on multiple sheets if different paper types are loaded in the
printer. For example, photo paper might be mixed with plain paper. Empty the paper tray
and load only the paper type that is appropriate for the document that you are printing.
Printer is stalled
If the printer stalls while printing a document, raise the printer cover, and then disconnect
the power cable from the back of the printer.
Caution First, check for any loose or broken parts in the printer. If you find loose
or broken parts, go to www.hp.com/support.
If there are no loose or broken parts, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check for and remove any obstacles, such as packing tape or materials, that prevent
the print cartridges from moving back and forth.
Make sure the print cartridges are installed securely in the print cartridge cradle.
For more information, see Installation instructions.
Make sure the tri-color print cartridge is installed in the left side of the cradle and the
black or photo print cartridge is installed in the right side of the cradle.
Check for and clear any paper jam.
For more information, see Paper jam.
Connect the power cable to the back of the printer, and then turn on the printer.
Print cartridge problems
Incorrect print cartridge

Print cartridge is faulty or not installed properly
"Printing in ink-backup mode" message
"Print cartridge is in the wrong slot" message
65
Chapter 11
Incorrect print cartridge

The printer can only print when the correct print cartridges are installed.
To verify that you have the correct print cartridges
1. Open the printer cover.
2. Read the selection number on the print cartridge label.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Warranty date
Selection number
Check the list of print cartridges that can be used in the printer.
a. Open the printer Toolbox.
b. Click the Estimated Ink Levels tab.
c. Click the Print Cartridge Information button and view the list of print cartridge
selection numbers.
The reference guide that came with the printer also shows the print cartridge
selection numbers.
Check the warranty date on the print cartridge.
If the print cartridge has the wrong selection number, or if the warranty has expired,
install a new print cartridge. For more information, see Installation instructions.
Close the printer cover.
If the Power light is not flashing, then the problem is fixed.
If the Power light is flashing, visit HP Technical Support at www.hp.com/support.
Print cartridge is faulty or not installed properly

The printer cannot print if the print cartridges are faulty, or if they are not installed properly.
1. Raise the printer cover.
2. Do one of the following:
If an error message is displayed on screen, remove the print cartridge that is
named in the error message. Go to step 3.
If an error message is not displayed, remove and reinstall each print cartridge.
If the Power light is not flashing, the problem is solved.
If the Power light is flashing, go to step 4.
66
3.
4.
5.
Reinstall the print cartridge. For more information, see Installation instructions.
If the Power light is not flashing, the problem is solved.
If the Power light is flashing, go to step 4.
Manually clean the print cartridge.
Reinsert the print cartridge in the printer and close the printer cover.
If the Power light is still flashing, the print cartridge is faulty and must be replaced.
Note You can print with one print cartridge in ink-backup mode if you do not
have a replacement print cartridge available. For more information, see Inkbackup mode.
6.
If the Power light continues to flash after replacing the print cartridge, visit HP
Technical Support at www.hp.com/support.

When the printer detects that only one print cartridge is installed, ink-backup mode is
initiated. This printing mode lets you print with a single print cartridge, but it slows the
printer and affects the quality of printouts.
If you receive the ink-backup mode message and two print cartridges are installed in the
printer, verify that the protective piece of plastic tape has been removed from each print
cartridge. When plastic tape covers the print cartridge contacts, the printer cannot detect
that the print cartridge is installed.

If you receive this error message, the print cartridge is installed in the wrong side of the
print cartridge cradle.
Always install the tri-color print cartridge in the left print cartridge cradle compartment.
Install the black or photo print cartridge in the right print cartridge cradle compartment.
Photos do not print correctly
Check the paper tray

Check the printer properties
Check the paper tray

1.
2.
3.
Verify that the photo paper is placed in the paper tray with the side to be printed on
facing down.
Slide the paper forward until it stops.
Do not press the guide so firmly against the paper that the paper bends or curls.
Check the printer properties

Open the Printer Properties dialog box and verify the following options:
67
Chapter 11
Tab
Setting
Paper/Quality
Type is: An appropriate photo paper

Print quality: Best or Maximum dpi
Print quality is poor
Streaks and missing lines

Print is faded
Blank pages print
Streaks and missing lines

If your printed pages are missing lines or dots or if streaks appear, the print cartridges
might be low on ink or might need to be cleaned. For more information, see View
estimated ink levels and Automatically clean print cartridges.
Print is faded
Verify that neither of the print cartridges is low on ink.

For more information, see View estimated ink levels. If a print cartridge is low on ink,
consider replacing the print cartridge. For the correct part numbers, see the
Verify that a black print cartridge is installed.
If the black text and images on your printouts are faded, you might be printing with
only the tri-color print cartridge. Insert a black print cartridge, in addition to the tricolor print cartridge, for optimal black print quality.
Verify that the protective piece of plastic tape has been removed from the print
cartridges.
68
Remove plastic tape
Consider selecting a higher print quality.
Blank pages print
The protective piece of plastic tape might still be attached to the print cartridges.
Verify that the plastic tape has been removed from the print cartridges.
Remove plastic tape
The print cartridges might be out of ink. Replace one or both empty print cartridges.
For more information, see View estimated ink levels.
Document is misprinted
Text and images are misaligned

Document is printed off-center or at an angle
Parts of the document are missing or printed in the wrong place
Envelope is printed at an angle
Document does not reflect the new print settings
Text and images are misaligned

If the text and images on your printouts are misaligned, then align the print cartridges.
Document is printed off-center or at an angle

1.
2.
3.
Verify that only one type of paper is placed in the paper tray, and that the paper has
been placed in the tray correctly.
Verify that the paper guide fits firmly against the edge of paper.
Reprint the document.
Parts of the document are missing or printed in the wrong place

Open the Printer Properties dialog box and confirm the following options:
Tab
Setting
Basics
Orientation: Verify the appropriate orientation.
Paper/Quality
Size is: Verify the appropriate paper size.
Effects
Scale to fit: Select this option to scale text and

graphics to the paper.
Finishing
Poster printing: Verify that Off is selected.
69
Chapter 11
If parts of the document are still missing, the printer settings might be overridden by the
software program print settings. Select the appropriate print settings from within the
software program.
Envelope is printed at an angle

1.
2.
3.
Slide the flap inside the envelope before loading it in the printer.
Confirm that the paper guide fits firmly against the edge of the envelope.
Reprint the envelope.
Document does not reflect the new print settings

The printer settings might differ from the software program print settings. Select the
appropriate print settings within the software program.
Problems with borderless documents
Borderless printing guidelines

Image is printed at an angle
Fading occurs on the edges of a photo
Photo has an unwanted border
Borderless printing guidelines

When printing borderless photos or brochures, follow these guidelines:
Verify that the paper size that is specified in the Paper Size drop-down list on the
Printing Shortcuts tab matches the size of the paper that is loaded in the paper
tray.
Select the appropriate paper type in the Paper Type drop-down list on the Printing
Shortcuts tab.
If printing in grayscale, select High Quality under Print in Grayscale on the
Color tab.
Do not print borderless documents in ink-backup mode. Always have two print
cartridges installed in the printer when printing borderless documents.
For more information, see Ink-backup mode.
Image is printed at an angle
70
Verify that no problem exists with the source image. For example, if you are printing a
scanned image, verify that the image was not crooked when it was scanned.
If the problem is not caused by the source image, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove all paper from the paper tray.

Load the photo paper correctly in the paper tray.
Verify that the paper guide fits firmly against the edge of the paper.
Follow loading instructions for the paper type.
Fading occurs on the edges of a photo
Verify that the photo paper is not curled. If the photo paper is curled, place the paper in
a plastic bag and gently bend it in the opposite direction of the curl until the paper lies
flat. If the problem persists, then use photo paper that is not curled.
For instructions about preventing photo paper from curling, see Store and handle photo
paper.
Photo has an unwanted border
For small photo paper

For small photo paper with a tear-off tab
For small photo paper
71
Chapter 11
If the printout has an unwanted border, try the following solutions:
Align the print cartridges.

Open the Printer Properties dialog box, click the Paper/Quality tab, and verify that
the selected paper size matches both the paper size that the photo is formatted for
and the size of the paper that is loaded in the printer.
Open the Printer Properties dialog box, click the Paper/Quality tab, and then select
the Borderless auto fit check box.
Verify that the software application you are using supports borderless printing.
Verify that no problem exists with the source image. For example, if you are printing
a scanned image, verify that the image was not crooked when it was scanned.
For small photo paper with a tear-off tab

If the border appears below the tear-off tab, then remove the tab.
If the border appears above the tear-off tab, then align the print cartridges.
HP Photosmart Express software is not installed

You pressed the Photosmart Express button on the printer but the HP Photosmart
Express software is not installed on the computer.
The HP Photosmart Express software must be installed on the computer before you can
use the Photosmart Express button. Insert the HP software CD that came with your
72
printer in the CD drive. Follow the onscreen instructions to install the HP Photosmart
Express software.
Error messages
Print cartridge error messages

Other error messages
Print cartridge error messages

If you receive a print cartridge error message, follow these directions.
Incorrect print cartridge message
The printer can only print when the correct print cartridges are installed. If you receive a
print cartridge error message, one or both of the print cartridges cannot be used in the
printer.
To resolve the problem, follow the instructions in Incorrect print cartridge.
Print cartridge problem message
The printer cannot print if the print cartridges are faulty, or if they are not installed properly.
If you receive a message stating there is a problem with a print cartridge, follow the
instructions in Print cartridge is faulty or not installed properly to resolve the problem.
"Print cartridge carriage is stalled" message
If the printer stalls while you are printing a document, follow the instructions in Printer is
stalled.
If you receive this error message, the print cartridge is installed in the wrong side of the
print cartridge cradle. Follow the instructions in "Print cartridge is in the wrong slot"
message to resolve the problem.
If you receive this error message, follow these instructions.
Other error messages

If you receive an error message, follow these directions.
If you receive an out of paper message, follow the guidelines in Out of paper message.
"There was an error writing to USB port" message
The printer might not be receiving correct data from another USB device or USB hub.
Connect the printer directly to the USB port on the computer.
73
Chapter 11
"Two-way communication cannot be established" or "Printer not responding"

message
The printer might not be able to communicate with the computer if the USB cable is too
long.
If you receive this error message, make sure that the USB cable is not greater than 3
meters (approximately 9.8 feet) in length.
General Protection Fault

A General Protection Fault, or GPF, is a Microsoft Windows error message that appears
when a software program, or a device such as a printer, performs an action that Windows
determines to be a problem.
There are many possible causes of a GPF. Try the following to resolve a GPF:
1.
2.
3.
Restart your computer, and then try printing again.

Try printing using different settings or options.
If the problem still occurs:
Use a different software program, if available.
Check with the software program vendor for program updates.
Verify that your computer has sufficient RAM and hard disk space.
Delete any temporary files on your computer.
If you continue to experience problems, visit HP Technical Support at

www.hp.com/support.
Power light is on or flashing
74
Power light
If the Power light is on, the printer is either printing or ready to print.
If the Power light is off, the printer is off.
If the Power light is flashing, see the following information.
What the flashing light means
If an error message appears

If no error message appears
What the flashing light means

The Power light can flash for several reasons:
The printer cover is open.

The printer is out of paper.
A problem exists with the printer, such as a paper jam or a problem with a print
cartridge.
For information about clearing a paper jam, see Paper jam.
If an error message appears

Read the error message that explains the problem and its solution.
If no error message appears

Check the status of the printer by using the printer tools. To gain access to the tools,
open the Printer Properties dialog box, click the Services tab, and then click the Service
this device button.
Use the printer tools to perform the following tasks:
View estimated ink levels.

Clean the print cartridges.
Calibrate the printer.
Print a test page.
Perform other functions as needed.
Document prints slowly

Multiple software programs are open
The computer resources are insufficient for the printer to print at its optimum speed.
To increase printer speed, close all unnecessary software programs when printing.
Complex documents, graphics, or photos are printing
Documents containing graphics or photos print more slowly than text documents.
Best or Maximum dpi print mode is selected
The printer prints more slowly when Best or Maximum dpi is selected as the print quality.
To increase the printer speed, select a different print quality mode.
Printer is in ink-backup mode
The printer might print more slowly if it is in ink-backup mode. For more information, see
Ink-backup mode.
To increase the print speed, use two print cartridges in the printer.
75
Chapter 11
Printer software is outdated

Outdated printer software might be installed.
For information about updating the printer software, see Download printer software
updates.
Computer does not meet system requirements
If your computer does not have enough RAM or a large amount of free space on the hard
drive, the printer processing time will be longer.
1.
2.
Verify that the computer hard disk space, RAM, and processor speed meet the
system requirements.
The system requirements are listed in the reference guide that came with the printer.
Make space available on the hard drive by deleting unwanted files.
If you continue to have problems

If you continue to have problems after investigating the troubleshooting topics, shut down
your computer and then restart it.
If you still have questions after restarting your computer, visit HP Technical Support at
www.hp.com/support.
For information about the support process, see HP support.
76
HP support
Support process
HP support by phone
Support process
If you have a problem, follow these steps
1.
2.
Check the documentation that came with the HP Deskjet.

Visit the HP online support Web site at www.hp.com/support. HP online support is available
to all HP customers. It is the fastest source for up-to-date device information and expert
assistance and includes the following features:
3.
4.
Fast access to qualified online support specialists

Software and driver updates for your HP Deskjet
Valuable HP Deskjet and troubleshooting information for common problems
Proactive device updates, support alerts, and HP newsgrams that are available when you
register your device
For Europe only: Contact your local point of purchase. If your device has a hardware failure,
you will be asked to bring it back to your local point of purchase. (Service is provided at no
charge during the device limited warranty period. After the warranty period, you will be quoted
a service charge.)
Call HP support. Support options and availability vary by device, country/region, and language.
HP support by phone
Phone support period

Placing a call
After the phone support period
Phone support period

One year of phone support is available in North America, Asia Pacific, and Latin America (including
Mexico). To determine the duration of phone support in Europe, the Middle East, and Africa, go
to www.hp.com/support. Standard phone company charges apply.
Placing a call
Call HP support while you are in front of the computer and the HP Deskjet. Be prepared to provide
the following information:
Device model number (located on the label on the front of the device)
Device serial number (located on the back or bottom of the device)
Messages that appear when the situation occurs
Answers to these questions:
Has this situation happened before?

Can you re-create it?
Did you add any new hardware or software to your computer at about the time that this
situation began?
Did anything else occur prior to this situation (such as a thunderstorm, device was moved,
etc.)?
77
Appendix A
After the phone support period

After the phone support period, help is available from HP at an additional cost. Help may also be
available at the HP online support Web site: www.hp.com/support. Contact your HP dealer or call
the support phone number for your country/region to learn more about support options.
78
Supplies
Order the following supplies with your HP Deskjet.
Paper
To order media such as HP Premium Paper, HP Premium Inkjet Transparency Film, or HP Greeting
Cards, go to www.hp.com.
Choose your country/region, and then click Buy or Online Shopping.
USB cables
C6518A HP USB AB 2-meter cable
79
Technical information
Printer specifications
Environmental product stewardship program
Regulatory notices
Printer specifications
The HP Deskjet has the following specifications and requirements.
Physical specifications
Printer dimension (without the tray extended): 140 mm high x 467 mm wide x 190 mm deep (5.51
inches high x 16.57 inches wide x 7.48 inches deep)
Printer weight (without print cartridges): 2.5 kg (5.51 lbs)
Software compatibility
Windows compatible (98 SE, Me, 2000, and XP)
Memory
384 KB integrated memory
Minimum system requirements
Operating system
Processor
RAM
Hard disk
space
Windows 98 SE, Me, 2000,

XP
Pentium II or equivalent
64 MB
200 MB
Paper tray capacity

Plain paper sheets: Up to 100
Paper size
For a complete list of supported media sizes, see the printer software.
Paper weights
Letter Paper: 65 to 90 g/m (16 to 24 lb)
Legal Paper: 70 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lb)
Envelopes: 70 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lb)
Cards: Up to 200 g/m (110-lb index maximum)
Photo Paper: Up to 280 g/m (75-lb index maximum)
Environmental product stewardship program

Hewlett-Packard is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner.
Design for recycling has been incorporated into this product. The number of materials has been
kept to a minimum while ensuring proper functionality and reliability. Dissimilar materials have been
designed to separate easily. Fasteners and other connections are easy to locate, access, and
remove using common tools. High priority parts have been designed to access quickly for efficient
disassembly and repair.
80
For more information, visit HPs Commitment to the Environment Web site at:
www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/index.html
This section contains the following topics:
Paper use
Plastics
Material safety data sheets
Recycling program
HP inkjet supplies recycling program
Energy consumption - Energy Star
Paper use
This product is suited for the use of recycled paper according to DIN 19309 and EN 12281:2002.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability
to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of product life.
Material safety data sheets

Material safety data sheets (MSDS) can be obtained from the HP Web site at:
www.hp.com/go/msds
Recycling program
HP offers an increasing number of product return and recycling programs in many countries/regions,
and partners with some of the largest electronic recycling centers throughout the world. HP
conserves resources by reselling some of its most popular products. For more information regarding
recycling of HP products, please visit:
For more information regarding recycling of HP products, please visit:
www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/recycle/
HP inkjet supplies recycling program

HP is committed to protecting the environment. The HP Inkjet Supplies Recycling Program is
available in many countries/regions, and lets you recycle used print cartridges and ink cartridges
free of charge. For more information, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/recycle/
Energy consumption - Energy Star

Energy usage drops significantly while in ENERGY STAR mode, which saves natural resources,
and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product.
This product qualifies for ENERGY STAR (MOU v.3.0), which is a voluntary program established
to encourage the development of energy-efficient office products.
ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered service mark of the U.S. EPA. As an ENERGY STAR partner,
HP has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.
For more information on ENERGY STAR guidelines, go to the following Web site:
www.energystar.gov
81
Appendix C
Regulatory notices
FCC statement
LED indicator statement
Notice to users in Korea
FCC statement
The United States Federal Communications Commission (in 47 CFR 15.105) has specified that the
following notice be brought to the attention of users of this product.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Modifications (part 15.21): The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or
modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
For further information, contact the Manager of Corporate Product Regulations, Hewlett-Packard
Company, 3000 Hanover Street, Palo Alto, CA 94304, (650) 857-1501.
LED indicator statement

The display LEDs meet the requirements of EN 60825-1.
Notice to users in Korea
82
Index
A
accessibility 2
after the support period 78
aligning print cartridges 53
B
booklet printing 34
borderless printing 70
bound two-sided printing 44
brochure printing 32
buttons
Photosmart Express
button 8
Power button 7
Print Cancel button 8
C
calling HP support 77
CD/DVD tattoo printing 30
cleaning
print cartridges
automatically 53
print cartridges manually
55
printer body 54
clearing the print queue 62
color calibration 53
custom paper size 42
D
default print settings 46
default printer 46
digital photos 21
document is misprinted
document is printed offcenter or at an angle 69
document printing 25
document prints slowly
complex documents are
printing 75
ink-backup mode 75
Maximum dpi selected 75
multiple programs are
open 75
printer software is
outdated 76
system requirements 76
dpi, maximum 41
duplexing 44
E
e-mail printing 24
energy consumption 81
Energy Star 81
envelope printing 27
environment
Environmental product
stewardship program
80
error messages
other errors 73
out of paper message 64
print cartridge errors 73
estimated ink level 54
Exif Print 22
F
fast/economical printing
FCC statement 82
39
G
general everyday printing 40
grayscale printing 42
greeting card printing 33
H
Hewlett-Packard Company
notices 2
HP Photosmart software
downloading 49
I
index card printing 29
Ink Status window 48
ink, removing ink from skin and
clothing 54
ink-backup mode 13
installation
program stops 59
installing print cartridges 50
iron-on transfer printing 37
L
label printing
30
LED indicator statement 82

letter printing 26
lights
Power light 7
low ink 54
M
maintenance
print cartridges 56
printer 50
printer body 54
maximum dpi 41
O
other document printing 24
P
page order, setting 42
paper jam 63
paper tray
folding paper tray 11
unfolding paper tray 9
paper type, selecting 40
phone support period
period for support 77
photo has unwanted border
for small photo paper 71
photo paper, storing and
handling 22
photo print cartridge 21
photo printing
borderless photos 17
photos with a border 19
saving money 23
photo printing problems
verifying print settings 67
photos
digital 21
do not print correctly 67
16
placing a call 77
postcard printing 28
poster printing 36
power light is flashing
if an error message
appears 75
83
if no error message
appears 75
presentation printing 40
print cartridge problems
incorrect print cartridge 66
print cartridges
aligning 53
cleaning automatically 53
cleaning manually 55
faulty 66
installing 50
maintaining 56
not installed properly 66
ordering information 54
photo print cartridge 21
problem message 66
selection numbers 50
used with the printer 12
print preview 43
print quality
blank pages print 69
print queue, clearing 62
print resolution 41
print settings
changing 47
default settings 46
print speed 40
printer does not feed paper
64
printer features 6
printer is not printing 61
printer is stalled 65
printer maintenance 50
printer name does not
appear 61
printer prints on multiple sheets
at once 64
printer properties 47
printer software
downloading updates 49
printer specifications 80
printer Toolbox 57
printer troubleshooting 59
printing
4800 x 1200 optimized
dpi 41
booklets 34
borderless photos 17
bound two-sided printing
44
brochures 32
CD/DVD tattoos 30
custom paper size 42
84
digital photos 21
documents 25
e-mails 24
envelopes 27
Exif Print 22
fast/economical 39
general everyday printing
40
grayscale 42
greeting cards 33
high quality 41
index cards and small
media 29
iron-on transfers 37
labels 30
letters 26
maximum dpi 41
multiple pages on single
sheet 43
other documents 24
photos 17
photos with a border 19
Photosmart Express
button 16
postcards 28
posters 36
presentation printing 40
print preview 43
print quality 40
print resolution 41
print settings 47
print speed 40
resizing documents 43
selecting a paper type 40
setting the page order 42
software 46
tips 39
transparencies 31
two-sided printing 44
with one print cartridge 13
Printing Shortcuts tab 39
printing tips 39
problems with borderless
documents
for small photo paper with a
tear off tab 72
R
Real Life technologies 21
recycle
ink cartridges 81
regulatory notices
FCC statement 82
notice to users in Korea

82
removing ink from skin and
clothing 54
resizing documents 43
S
settings 47
T
terms and conventions in
manual 2
test page, printing 54
Toolbox 57
transparency printing 31
troubleshooting
borderless printing
guidelines 70
borderless printing
problems 70
document does not reflect
new print settings 70
document prints slowly 75
envelope prints at angle
70
image prints at angle 70
installation program stops
59
misprinted document 69
multiple pages print at
once 64
paper jam 63
parts of the document are
missing or in wrong
place 69
photo printing problems
67
poor print quality 68
print is faded 68
printer 59
printer does not feed
paper 64
printer is not printing 61
printer is stalled 65
printer name does not
appear 61
streaks and missing lines
68
text and images are
misaligned 69
unwanted border on
photo 71
Index
two-sided printing
44
U
Unknown Device message 60
updates
downloading for software
49
HP Photosmart software
49
USB
cable 79
connecting to the printer
15
W
What's This help 48
85
86
User Manual
for
DOT MATRIX PRINTER
OKI MICROLINE 280 Elite

OKI, MICROLINE 280 Elite, Users Guide
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-416001-01MU
Unrestricted
1.0

- BLANK PAGE -
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-416001-01MU
Unrestricted
1.0

ML280 ELITE
user's guide
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete,
accurate, and up-to-date. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for the results of
errors beyond its control. The manufacturer also cannot guarantee that changes in
software and equipment made by other manufacturers and referred to in this Guide will
not affect the applicability of the information in it. Mention of software products
manufactured by other companies does not necessarily constitute endorsement by the
manufacturer.
While all reasonable efforts have been made to make this document as accurate and
helpful as possible, we make no warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, as to the
accuracy or completeness of the information contained herein.
The most up-to-date drivers and manuals are available from the Oki Europe website:
http://www.okieurope.com
Copyright 2004. All rights reserved.
Oki and Microline are registered trademarks of Oki Electric Industry Company Ltd.
Energy Star is a trademark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency.
Hewlett-Packard, HP, and LaserJet are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard
Company.
Microsoft, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Apple, Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.
Other product names and brand names are registered trademarks or trademarks of
their proprietors.
As an Energy Star Program Participant, the manufacturer has
determined that this product meets the Energy Star guidelines for
energy efficiency.
This product complies with the requirements of the Council Directives
89/336/EEC (EMC) and 73/23/EEC (LVD) as amended where applicable
on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to
electromagnetic compatibility and low voltage.
PREFACE > 2
CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Using this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Online usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Printing pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Contents and unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Removing the shipping restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installing/replacing the ribbon cartridge . . . . . . . . . . 11
Ribbon cartridge handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installing the platen knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Adjusting the head gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fitting the paper separator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Setting up your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
For AC models:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
For DC models:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Rear feed continuous form fan-fold paper . . . . . . . 17
Bottom feed continuous form fan-fold paper . . . . 20
Top feed single sheet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Testing your printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Computer connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Parallel (LPT) connection, IEEE 1284 . . . . . . . . . . . 23
USB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Serial connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operating your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Front panel operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Setting printer defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Entering the MENU mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Default menu selections - AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using the pull tractor unit (if fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Using the cut-sheet feeder (if fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Manual loading with the cut-sheet
feeder installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cut-sheet feeder controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CONTENTS > 3
Using the roll paper stand (if fitted). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Loading the paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Replacing the ribbon cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Adjusting the printhead gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Testing your printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rear feed jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rear feed, repeating paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Single sheet paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Purchasing parts and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Oki contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
CONTENTS > 4
NOTES, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

CAUTION!
A caution appears in this manual like this. A caution provides
additional information which, if ignored, may result in equipment
malfunction or damage.
WARNING!
A warning appears in this manual like this. A warning provides
additional information which, if ignored, may result in a risk of
personal injury.
NOTE
A note appears like this. A note provides additional information to
supplement the main text.
NOTES, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS > 5
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on purchasing this Oki printer!
In this chapter you will find a summary of the main features of your
printer followed by some advice on how to use this Users Guide to get
the most from your printer.
The ML280 Elite is an entry level 9 pin dot-matrix printer. It is fast,
robust, compact and light. Outstanding reliability, compact size and
ease of use make it ideal for industrial workstation applications, as
well as customer service points in wholesale, retail and service
environments.
Using this manual

This manual will lead you logically through the unpacking, setting up
and operation of your printer to help you to make the best use of its
many advanced features. Also included are guidelines for
troubleshooting and maintenance to ensure that it continues to
perform at its best. Instructions are also provided for adding optional
accessories as your needs evolve.
l
The Users Guide has been written using one printer as a

model, and the illustrations/screenshots reflect this. What you
see will be appropriate to the model you are installing.
The Users Guide has been designed to provide you with a

clear presentation on the installation and maintenance of your
new printer. This information is compiled in the logical
sequence required to result in a successful installation.
NOTE
The information in this manual is supplemented by the extensive
online help facility associated with the printer driver software.
In addition, we provide a Technical Reference Guide for those users

requiring more in-depth Technical information. This is available in
English only.
INTRODUCTION > 6
Online usage
This manual is intended to be read on screen using Adobe Acrobat
Reader. Use the navigation and viewing tools provided in Acrobat.
You can access specific information in two ways:
l
In the list of bookmarks down the left hand side of your screen,
click on the topic of interest to jump to the required topic. (If
the bookmarks are not available, use the Table of Contents.)
In the list of bookmarks click on Index to jump to the Index. (If

the bookmarks are not available, use the Table of Contents.)
Find the term of interest in the alphabetically arranged index
and click on the associated page number to jump to the page
containing the subject.
Printing pages
The whole book, individual pages, or sections may be printed. The
procedure is:
1.
From the toolbar, select [File], then [Print] (or press the
Ctrl + P keys).
2.
Choose which pages you wish to print:

(a)
All pages, for the entire manual.
(b)
Current page for the page at which you are looking.
INTRODUCTION > 7
(c)
3.
Pages from and to for the range of pages you specify by

entering their page numbers.
Click on OK.
INTRODUCTION > 8
GETTING STARTED
Location
l
Select a firm, solid surface on which to site your printer.
Allow enough space around the printer to easily access the

platen knob and the various paper feed paths.
Make sure a suitable grounded power outlet is available

nearby.
Read the Installation Safety Booklet.
Contents and unpacking

l
If any items are missing, contact your dealer immediately.
Keep your packing materials and carton in case you ever need
to ship or transport the printer.
3
5
4
2
1
6
8
10
7
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Printer
Ribbon Cartridge
Power Cord(s)
Platen Knob
Sheet Separator
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
9
Installation Safety booklet
Pan European limited Warranty
Manual CD
Driver CD
Setup Guide
GETTING STARTED > 9
Do not plug the printer into the AC supply until the following steps
have been completed:
Removing the shipping restraint

1.
Remove any packing tape. Insert your hand in the top cover
slot (2) and remove the access cover (1) by lifting it.
2
2.
Remove the printhead shipping restraint. Keep shipping

restraint for future use.
3.
Reinstall the access cover.
GETTING STARTED > 10
Installing/replacing the ribbon cartridge

CAUTION!
When replacing a Ribbon Cartridge, make sure you have the correct
replacement ribbon for your printer. The wrong ribbon will not print
when installed in your printer.
Ribbon cartridge handling

l
Leave unused ribbon cartridges in their packages until

needed.
Careful; the ribbon ink may cause permanent stains.
Ribbon ink on skin or clothing can usually be removed with

soap and water.
Make sure the printer is turned OFF.

1.
Open the access cover and center the printhead (1).
2.
When replacing a Ribbon Cartridge, first remove the old one.
WARNING!
If you are replacing the ribbon Cartridge, the printhead may be HOT!
3.
Unpack the ribbon cartridge and install it on the printhead.
1
2
4.
Press gently on the ribbon cartridge until you feel it click into
place.
CAUTION!
Do not remove the ribbon shield (X in graphic above) from the
ribbon!
5.
Turn the take-up knob (a) in the direction of the moulded arrow
to take up any ribbon slack.
a
6.
Replace the access cover.
Installing the platen knob

If the Platen Knob is not already fitted, align the key way (a) correctly
and push it firmly into place.
Adjusting the head gap

The head gap is the distance between the print head and the platen
roller. When you use envelopes or multi-part forms you will need to
have a larger gap than when using plain paper. Use the recommended
head gap to ensure the best print quality and easy paper feed.
CAUTION!
Incorrect setting of the print head gap can cause print head damage
or ribbon jams. To avoid these problems set the print head gap for the
type of stationery being used.
To adjust the print head gap, move the coloured lever located to the
left of the ribbon cartridge (a), to the correct position for the type of
stationery being used......
.....as detailed in the following table:

Paper Type
Weight
Lever position
Single part paper

Form
Two part
Three part
Four part
14 - 20lb (52 - 75gm)
1, 2
9 - 11 lb. (35 - 40 gm) with a

2-3
maximum thickness of 0.28mm 3
3
Fitting the paper separator

The Paper Separator is utilised when using single sheets (no carbons)
and when using continuous stationery to separate the ingoing/
outgoing paper to prevent paper jams. It is fitted as follows:
1.
Grasp the paper separator by either side, with the spring

loaded stays to the rear of the printer.
2.
Locate the two hooked lugs on the edges of the paper

separator into the two corresponding slots in the top of the
printer.
3.
Release paper separator on to the top of the printer.
SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER

Power connection
Make sure both the printer and the computer are switched OFF.
For AC models:
1.
Plug the power cord into the back of the printer, then into a
grounded AC outlet.
2.
Switch the Printer ON.
For DC models:
With the printer switched OFF.....
1.
Terminate the free ends of the power cord with connector(s)

appropriate for connection to your DC voltage source.
WARNING!
Observe polarity of connection!
SETTING UP YOUR PRINTER > 16
2.
Plug the power cord into the back of the printer and lock by
twisting the collar of the connector clockwise.
3
2
3.
Switch the Printer ON.
Loading paper
Three types of paper can be used with your printer:
l
Single sheet (with or without the optional cut sheet feeder)
Roll paper (use the correct rollpaper stand)
Fan-fold paper (with or without the optional tractor feed unit)
When using fan-fold paper, adjust the distance between the sprocket
pins at the ends of the platen to the holes in the paper. Fan-fold paper
can be fed from the rear of the printer, or, if a slotted stand is
available, from underneath.
Rear feed continuous form fan-fold paper

Ensure that the printer is switched OFF and the power supply lead
removed.
1.
Place a box of fan-fold paper behind the printer.
2.
Remove the Access cover (1).
1
3.
Move the Bail arm lever (2) (on the left-hand side of the
printer) to the front of the machine to lift the Bail bar.
4.
Move the Paper lever (3) (on the right-hand side of the printer)
to the front of the machine, to the fan-fold symbol.
5.
Insert the first sheet of paper between the separator paper

guides (4).
4
2
3
5
Push the paper in just enough so that its sprocket holes

engage the sprocket pins located on the platen ends.
6.
Turn the Platen knob (5) to advance the paper until it appears
in front of the platen.
7.
Move the Bail arm lever (2) to the rear of the machine to lower
the Bail bar.
8.
Use the Platen knob (5) to advance the paper to the first
printing line.
9.
Replace the Access cover and switch the printer ON.
Bottom feed continuous form fan-fold paper

Ensure that the printer is switched OFF and the power supply lead
removed.
1.
Place the printer on a slotted printer stand, carefully aligning

the slot in the stand with the slot in the base of the printer.
2.
Place a box of fan-fold paper under the printer stand.
3.
Remove the Access cover.
4.
Move the Bail arm lever (2) (on the left-hand side of the
printer) to the front of the machine to lift the Bail bar.
5.
to the front of the machine, to the fan-fold symbol.
6.
Insert the first sheet of paper through the opening in the

printer stand and the bottom of the printer.
7.
Adjust the Platen sprocket(s) to align with the sprocket holes

in the paper.
8.
Use the Platen knob to gently pull the paper up until it appears
in front of the platen, and above the Bail bar
9.
Move the Bail arm lever to the rear of the machine to lower the
Bail bar (6).
10.
Use the Platen knob (5) to advance the paper to the first
printing line.
11.
Replace the Access cover and switch the printer ON.
Top feed single sheet paper

Your printer can accommodate single sheets of 216mm width x 297 or
355mm length paper. Remove the Tractor Feed unit and any other
accessories, then raise the Paper Separator into its upright position.
3
2
1.
Switch the printer ON.
2.
to the rear of the machine, to the Blank sheet of paper symbol.
3.
Ensure that the printer is OFF-LINE (press the SELECT switch if

necessary).
Make sure the Bail arm lever (2) is set to the rear of the machine
(in its closed position).
4.
Raise the paper separator as shown above.
5.
Adjust the Cut Sheet guide (3) on the Paper Separator to

position the left edge of the sheet.
NOTE
If letter size paper is used, set the cut sheet guide to the line mark on the
paper separator. 80 character width text (10cpi) is then positioned
centrally on the paper.
6.
Insert a single sheet along the Cut Sheet guide until it reaches
the pinch roller. Be sure to keep the paper inside the platen
ends, otherwise the built-in sprocket rollers will tear it.
7.
Move the Bail arm lever (2) towards the front of the machine,
into the open position. The sheet of paper will be pulled
around the platen.
8.
Close the Bail arm lever (2) ensuring that the paper has been
positioned correctly.
9.
Press the SELECT button to bring the printer ON-LINE.
10.
The sprockets can be released and moved out from the platen
if required.
Testing your printer

Your printer has a built-in test (self test) to make sure that your printer
is set up and working correctly.
1.
Firstly, load continuous forms paper into the printer (Please

see the Loading Paper section of this Guide).
2.
Hold down the LINE FEED button and turn the printer ON.
The printer will begin its test print.
3.
To stop the test, press the SELECT button or turn the printer
OFF.
Typical test print:

ML280 ELITE ME1
F/W XX.XX
CG XX.XX
42434401YR-00
HSD 10CPI
!$%^&*()0123456789:;<=>@aABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]abcdefghijklm
nopqrstuvwxyz
NOTE
The top of each print test contains information about your printer model.
Be sure to have a copy of the printout handy if you have to call for service.
Computer connections
NOTE
It is not recommended that you connect serial/USB and parallel
cables to the printer simultaneously.
For connection to a PC running Windows 98 or above (not Windows

95 upgraded to Windows 98) or Macintosh.
The operation of a printer is not assured if a USB compatible device is
connected concurrently with other USB compatible machines.
Interface cables are not supplied with your printer.
Parallel (LPT) connection, IEEE 1284

l
Requires a bi-directional cable, max. length 6 ft. (1.8 m), not

supplied
The printer has a 36-pin Centronics type socket.
CAUTION!
Make sure the printer and computer are both turned OFF.
1.
Switch both the computer and the printer OFF.
2.
Attach a suitable bi-directional cable to the parallel connector

on the back of the printer. Then attach and secure the cable to
your computer.
3.
Turn the printer and computer back ON.
USB connection
l
Requires a USB 1.1 cable, maximum length 19.7 ft. (5 m), not
supplied.
Printer has a USB series B receptacle.
NOTES
For connection to a PC running Windows 98 or above (not Windows
95 upgraded to Windows 98).
The operation of a printer is not assured if a USB compatible device is

connected concurrently with other USB-compatible machines.
When connecting multiple printers of the same type, they appear as
*****, ***** (2), ***** (3), etc. These numbers depend on the order
of connecting or turning on each printer.
USB is a hot-pluggable protocol. This means that the printer and
computer do not necessarily have to be switched OFF.
1.
Attach a suitable USB cable to the printer. Then attach the

cable to your computer.
2.
If you have turned the computer and printer OFF, turn them
back ON.
Follow any on-screen insructions.
Serial connection
The Serial Interface Board is an option on this printer and is supplied
with installation and setup instructions. Once this board has been
installed, the serial interface settings will appear in the printer menu
and may need to be adjusted to match your PC.
CAUTION!
Make sure the printer and computer are both turned OFF.
1.
Switch both the computer and the printer OFF.
2.
Plug the cable into the serial ports of both your PC and printer
and tighten the thumbscrews (1).
The cable should comply with the RS232C Serial Interface

Specification and have a maximum length of 15 metres (49ft).
3.
Turn the printer and computer back ON.
Printer drivers
Printer drivers enable your computer to communicate with the printer.
As with most printer manufacturers, Oki creates printer drivers for use
with popular types of software, such as Microsoft Windows operating
systems, from Windows 95 onwards. Installing a printer driver is
normally a simple process of making a selection within the software.
If a driver is not available by name for your printer, contact the
software manufacturer and ask if they can supply an updated version
of their software with additional drivers. Alternatively, check the
driver availability on the Oki Europe Web Site at:
www.okieurope.com
If you are using bespoke software or software created specifically for
your company, it is unlikely that the CDs supplied with this software
will include drivers for your printer. In this instance you will have to
choose a driver as closely compatible as possible. Compatible drivers
contain printing codes that will operate your printer. They may not
offer the special features of an original driver, but they will allow you
to perform normal printing tasks.
Okis printers contain more than one printer emulation selectable via
the menu system. See the table below for compatible drivers.
However, please note that the emulations listed toward the bottom of
this list are more basic and offer fewer of the printers features.
Microline
Emulation
IBM Emulation
Epson LQ Emulation
ML280 Microline
ML280 IBM
IBM Graphics Printer
ML280 Epson
Epson FX80
Epson FX
OPERATING YOUR PRINTER

Front panel operation
LINE
FEED
FORM
FEED
TOF
SET
SELECT
ALARM
POWER PITCH
10
NLQ
MODE
12
UTILITY
17
HSD
The Front Panel has 9 indicators and 6 buttons. The function of each
is as follows:
Indicators
SELECT
ALARM
Lit - Printer ON-LINE, unlit printer OFF-LINE. Flashes with ALARM on to

indicate a fault has been detected.
l
If lit permanently and SELECT is not lit - it is indicating paper out
or paper jam if a Cut Sheet Feeder is in use.
l
If lit permanently and SELECT is flashing - it is indicating that

auto diagnostics have detected an error.
If flashing and SELECT is lit - it is indicating either printhead

temperature protection circuit, firmware protection of line feed
or space motor is operating. In any case, normal print operation
will resume after a cooling period.
Indicates that the printer is connected to the supply and is switched ON.
Indicates the current character pitch selected.
Indicates the current print mode selected - NLQ, Utility, HSD (HSD is SSD
if 12cpi is selected).
l
POWER
PITCH
MODE
Buttons
LINE FEED
Advances the paper one line for each press.
FORM FEED Advances the paper to the next top of form (TOF) or ejects any single
sheet paper from the printer.
TOF SET
Sets new top of form (TOF) position.
SELECT
Places printer ON or OFF line
PITCH
Changes the character pitch setting (cpi)
MODE
Changes the print style setting.
OPERATING YOUR PRINTER > 27
Additional button functions if pressed at Power ON

LINE FEED
SELECT and
LINE FEED
SELECT and
FORM FEED
SELECT
TOF SET
Initiates the printer self test.

Initiates the printers continuous rolling ASCII test.
Places the printer into a Hex dump mode, printing all data and control
commands received as HEX codes for fault finding.
Enters the printers Menu Mode.
Selects the print pitch as 17cpi.
Setting printer defaults

The printer has an internal MENU containing a number of default
conditions that can be set to enable your printer to match the
parameters required by your computer.
Entering the MENU mode

1.
Power on the printer while holding down the SELECT button.

The 12 and UTILITY LEDs will flash.
2.
Press the SELECT button to print the complete menu. This will
detail the current default settings.
3.
Press the LINE FEED button to select the relevant group that
needs to be changed (the group is the left-hand column on the
MENU printout).
4.
Press the FORM FEED button to select the relevant item within
the selected group (the Item is the centre column on the MENU
printout).
5.
Press the TOF SET button to cycle through the settings

available for the item you want to change (the settings are the
right-hand column on the MENU printout).
6.
Once you have reached the setting that you want, press either
the LINE FEED button (for the next group) or the FORM FEED
button (for the next item) to be changed.
Follow steps to 3 to 5 until all your required settings have been
changed.
7.
On completion of the changes, press the PITCH and MODE

buttons together to exit and save all the changes you have
made.
NOTE
Important, do not exit the menu mode by switching off the printer, as this
will not save any changes you have made.
Default menu selections - AC

Group
Item
Setting
Printer Control See the Printer Driver section of this

document for more information.
Font
Print Mode
Draft Mode
Pitch
Proportional Spacing
Style
Size
Symbol Sets Character Set
Language Set
Zero Character
Code Page
Slashed Letter O
Vertical
Line Spacing
Control
Skip Over Perforation
Page Length
Set-up
Graphics
Receive Buffer Size
Paper out Override
Print Registration
Operator Panel Function
Reset Inhibit
Printer Suppress Effective
Auto LF
Auto CR
S1 Select Pitch (10 CPI)
S1 Select Pitch (12 CPI)
Time Out Print
Auto Select
ESC/S1 Pitch
CSF/RPS Pitch
Impact Mode
Parallel I/F
I - Prime
Pin 18
Bi - Direction
IBM
Utility
SSD
10 CPI
No
Normal
Single
Set II
ASCII
Unslashed
USA
No
6 LPI
No
12"
Uni-directional
64K
No
0
Semi Operation
No
Yes
No
Yes
17.1 CPI
20 CPI
Valid
No
17.1
RPS
Normal
Buffer Print
+5V
Enable
Using the pull tractor unit (if fitted)

Paper can be loaded either from the rear of the printer or from the
bottom if you have a slotted printer stand.
1.
Remove the access cover.
A
B
2.
Adjust the left tractor if necessary, making sure that it is not

more than 12.7mm (0.5 inch) from the left-hand end of the
tractor unit. To move the tractor, pull the lock lever forward,
slide the tractor to the desired position, then push the lock
lever backward to lock it in place.
A
B
3.
Adjust the right tractor to the paper width by pulling its lock
lever forward, sliding the tractor to the desired position, then
pushing the lock lever backward to lock it in place.
4.
Pull the paper under the Bail bar and up to the level of the
tractor unit.
5.
Open the sprocket covers and slide the paper release lever
forward.
A
B
6.
Locate the sprocket holes in the paper over the sprockets on

the tractor unit and close both sprocket covers (leave the
paper release lever open).
7.
Replace the access cover.
Using the cut-sheet feeder (if fitted)

3
4
5
2
1
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Paper set lever

Left paper guide
Rear sheet support
Front sheet support
Right paper guide
Front sheet guide
1.
Place the paper set lever (1) in the RESET position.
2.
Release the paper guides by pushing the locking levers

downward.
3.
Move the left paper guide (2) to the position where you wish to
set the left-hand edge of the sheet, making sure that this
paper guide is not set to the right of the paper out sensor (the
groove in the platen).
4.
Flex a paper stack (not more than 170 sheets of 60g/m

(16lb.) paper). Square the stack, turn over and repeat the
bending. The stack of paper should not exceed 16mm
thickness.
5.
Insert the paper stack into the hopper and push it against the
left paper guide, making sure that the paper fits under the
corner separators.
6.
Adjust the right paper guide to the paper width.
7.
Push both paper guide locking levers upward into the locked
position.
8.
Push the paper set lever (1) gently backward into the set
position.
Manual loading with the cut-sheet feeder installed.

1.
Gently insert the paper from directly above the front sheet
support.
2.
Use the FORM FEED button to feed the sheet.
3.
Turn the Platen knob clockwise/anti-clockwise for fine

adjustment.
NOTE
The manually set sheet is printed automatically, even when other sheets
are loaded in the hopper. When the FORM FEED button is pressed, the
manually inserted sheet will be fed from the cut-sheet feeder.
CAUTION!
l Do not manually feed paper if a sheet is being fed from the
hopper. Simultaneous feeding of paper will result in a paper
jam.
l To manually feed a sheet of paper, you must use the FORM FEED
button to feed the paper. If the paper is being fed manually and
is positioned using the platen knob rather than the FORM FEED
button, it may be ejected just before printing begins (use the
Platen Knob for fine adjustment only).
Cut-sheet feeder controls

The printers control switches also control the operation of the cutsheet feeder. The control switches, however, function only when the
printer is off-line or deselected (SELECT indicator is not lit).
Using the roll paper stand (if fitted)
Loading the paper

1.
Open the paper separator all the way.
2.
Remove the paper roller.

Note that there is a disk on the left end of the roller.
3.
Slide the roller into a tube of paper.

Ensure the disk is on the left side and paper must roll up from
the bottom.
4.
Replace the paper roller back into the stand, with the disc on
the left side.
5.
Feed the paper over the roller on the stand. NOT UNDER!
6.
Adjust the round paper guides at either side to the paper

width.
7.
Feed the paper down behind the platen and use platen knob to
bring paper through the printer.
Lift the bail arm as paper comes round to front of platen. (The
paper release lever needs to be in the top position to perform
this step.)
8.
Continue to feed the paper through for approx. 4 inches.
9.
Move the paper release lever toward the front of the machine.
Align the paper so that the exit and entry paper edges align.
Return the paper release lever to the rear position to re-apply
pressure on platen.
10.
Close the bail arm.
11.
Replace the access cover. Fit the cover tabs into the slots at the
printer front. Lower the cover carefully, making sure the paper
fits through the front slot in the access cover.
12.
Lower the paper separator so that paper enters the printer

from under the separator and exits the printer going over the
separator (see below).
13.
Turn the platen knob to move the paper to the point where you
want printing to start. (Many word processing packages
automatically allow for a top margin of 25.4mm (1 inch)).
Correct paper path

a
c
Paper roll
Platen
b
d
Roll Paper Stand

Paper Guide
MAINTENANCE
Replacing the ribbon cartridge
See Installing/replacing the ribbon cartridge on page 11.
Adjusting the printhead gap

See Adjusting the head gap on page 14.
Loading paper
See Loading paper on page 17.
Testing your printer

See Testing your printer on page 22.
MAINTENANCE > 37
TROUBLESHOOTING
General information
Here are some general things to check before proceeding with
detailed troubleshooting.
l
Is the printer plugged in and turned ON?
Are the connections (power and interface) secure?
Is the product being operated under the proper ambient

conditions?
Does the paper being used meet the specifications for this
product?
Is the paper properly installed?
Is the ribbon properly installed?
Is an Oki ribbon being used?
Is the printhead gap correctly set?
Are the correct printer drivers being used for the printer?
NOTE
Settings in your software application will normally override any
settings in your printer driver.
Printer driver settings normally override settings from the printer

menu or printer front panel.
Problem
My word processor files do not print the way I have the menu and front
panel set.
Solution
Remember: The note above!
Before sending a file to the printer, many word processors send either
an initialization string or an I-Prime signal to the printer.
TROUBLESHOOTING > 38
The initialization string contains codes that override the panel and
menu settings. To change your printer to ignore the reset code, enter
the Menu Mode, go to the Set-Up group and change the setting for
Reset Inhibit to Yes.
The I-Prime signal will automatically override any front panel settings
you have made. To eliminate this problem, enter the Menu Mode, go
to the Parallel Interface group and change the setting for I-Prime to
Invalid.
For more information on changing menu settings, see Changing the
Menu Settings in Chapter 3.
Problem
Nothing happens when I turn ON the printer.
Solution
Check the power cord connection to the outlet and to the printer. If
you are using a power strip, make sure it is turned ON, and that the
fuse hasnt blown or that the circuit breaker hasnt tripped. If the
solution is not obvious call for service.
Problem
The printer does not print when the computer sends data.
Solutions
1.
Is the SEL light on? If not, press the SEL key.
2.
Check that the interface cable is securely connected to both

the printer and the computer.
3.
If you have the optional serial interface board installed, check

to be sure that it is firmly seated in the printer and that the
interface cable is securely connected to both the printer and
the computer.
Problem
I'm getting strange symbols, incorrect fonts, etc., when I try to print a
document.
Solutions
1.
Check to be sure that the printer driver you have selected in

your software matches the printer emulation.
2.
Please refer to the Printer Driver section for details of

emulations, then check the menu settings (see Setting Printer
Defaults in the Operating your Printer section).
3.
If you have embedded any printer commands in your software,

check to be sure that you entered them correctly.
Problem
Ink smears on the paper when I print narrow columns.
Solutions
The head gap could be too close. Check that the head gap is set
correctly (see the table in Adjusting the head gap in the Getting
Started section).
Problem
I've installed a new ribbon and the printing is smeared and streaked.
Solution
The ribbon shield (1) is either loose or missing.
Remove the ribbon cartridge and check the ribbon shield.

If it is loose, secure it. If it is missing, find it and install it. If you
cannot find it, replace the ribbon cartridge.
Tip: If you still have an old ribbon cartridge, remove the shield
from it and install it on the ribbon cartridge on your printer.
Problem
There are dots missing in my printouts (typically, tops and /or bottom
of characters missing).
Solution
The head gap may not be set correctly. Try moving the headgap lever
to a lower setting. If that doesnt help, the printhead may be
damaged; call for service.
Problem
The ALARM light is flashing.
Solution
Try turning the printer OFF and then back ON again. If the light still
blinks, call for service.
Problem
The Print Quality and Character Pitch keys on the front panel don't
work.
Solution
The Operator Panel Function in the printer menu can be used to
disable these buttons (Limited Function). If the printer is part of a
customized system or if it is used by a number of people, the system
manager may have used this option to make sure the printer is always
set properly.
Check with your system manager before changing any menu settings.
Problem
My printer keeps indicating Paper out when there is paper installed.
Solution
The most likely cause is that the paper sensor groove in the platen is
not being covered by paper. Re-align paper to cover the sensor
groove.
Problem
When I am using continuous feed paper, the sprocket holes are torn,
causing alignment problems.
Solution
The most likely cause is that the paper lever is set to friction feed.
Move the lever to Fan-fold (to the front of the printer).
Clearing paper jams

Rear feed jams
1.
Turn the printer OFF.
2.
Use the platen knob to back the paper all the way out of the
printer.
CAUTION!
Make sure the printer is turned OFF before you open the access cover.
WARNING!
The printhead may be HOT!
3.
Open the access cover, move the bail arm lever toward the
front of the printer and remove any torn paper.
4.
Reload the paper (see section on Maintenance), move the

bail arm lever towards the rear of the printer and close the
access cover.
5.
Turn the printer ON.
Rear feed, repeating paper jams

If the paper keeps jamming, you may have:
l
defective paper
misaligned paper
bits of paper in the paper path
Defective Paper
Replace the defective paper with a fresh stack.
Misaligned Paper
1.
Turn the printer OFF.
2.
Use the platen knob to back the paper all the way out of the
printer.
3.
Tear off a couple of sheets of paper, leaving a new, clean,

square-cut edge.
4.
Reload the paper and turn the printer back ON.
Bits of paper in the paper path

Depending on which paper feed method you are using, remove any
accessories, open the access cover and remove any debris from the
paper path.
WARNING!
l Always ensure that the printer is switched OFF and that the
power supply lead is disconnected.
l If the printer has been recently used, the printhead may be HOT!
Single sheet paper jams

1.
Turn off the printer.
2.
Use the platen knob to back the paper out.
3.
Open the access cover.
4.
Remove any torn pieces from around the carriage.
5.
Close the access cover.
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

Purchasing parts and accessories
Before you purchase parts and accessories, make a note of your
printer model name (see the front of the unit) and have the correct part
number and description of the item you wish to purchase. Item
descriptions and part numbers are provided in this section.
l
Consult the dealer where you purchased your printer.
Locate an Authorised Oki Data Reseller by visiting your local

Oki web site. Links to all countries are provided on:
http://www.okieurope.com
x2
2
1
Item
Part number
Comment
Ribbon Cartridge (1)

Platen Knob (2)
Power Cord AC (3) - Euro
UK
09002303
40673402
YS4011-1272P001
YS4011-1273P001
Life - 3 million characters
Power Cord DC (not shown)

Printhead (4)
Access Cover (5)
Sheet Guide (6)
YS4100-1187P001
4YA4025-1401G002 Life - 200 million characters
42594601
42017901
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES > 45
Options
1
2
3
4
Option
Part number
Pull Tractor Assembly (1)

Roll Paper Stand (2)
Cut Sheet Feeder (3)
Serial Interface Card, RS232 (4)
Serial Interface Card, RS422 (not shown)
Current Loop Interface Card (not shown)
09002363
09002334
09000689
09002353
09002357
09000685
All Accessories are supplied complete with an Installation Guide.
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES > 46
SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Print Method
Printhead
Impact dot matrix

9 pins, 0.30 mm (0.0118") diameter, with
thermal protection
Epson FX
IBM Graphics
Oki MICROLINE
Emulations (co-resident)
Print Speed
High Speed Draft (HSD)
Utility (UTL)
Near Letter Quality (NLQ)
333cps*
250cps*
62.5cps*
* cps = characters per second
Paper Specifications
Type
Cut Sheets
Single part Continuous
Multi Part Continuous
Maximum thickness
Maximum number of
sheets
Feed
Top only
Rear/Bottom
Rear/Bottom
Weight
Width (range)
16 to 21lb. (60 to 81g/m)
14 to 20lb. (53 to 75g/m) 3 to 9.5 inches
14 to 20lb. (53 to 75g/m) 3 to 9.5 inches
0.28mm (0.11 inches)
4 (original plus 3 copies) carbonless
Reliability
Ribbon Life (black)
Printhead Life
Mean Time Between
Failures (MTBF)
Mean Time to Repair
(MTTR)
3 million characters, on average

200 million characters average in 10cpi utility mode
20,000 hours at 25% duty cycle and 35% page density

15 minutes
General Printer Characteristics

Dimensions
Weight
Buffer size
Noise level
Power requirements
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Operating
Storage
Height: 80mm (height) x 372mm (width) x 275mm (depth)

4.5Kg
128Kb
<54dBA and <51dBA in Quiet Mode
230VAC (+6%;-14%), 240VAC (10%;) @50/60Hz (2%)
5 to 40C
-40 to +70C)
20 to 80% RH
5 to 95% RH
SPECIFICATIONS > 47
Item
Interfaces:
Standard:
Optional:
Specification
Centronics parallel, IEEE-1284 compliant
USB 1.1
RS-232C Serial
RS-422
Current Loop
SPECIFICATIONS > 48
INDEX
A
Access cover........................ 18, 20

Additional button functions
if pressed at Power ON..............28
ALARM........................................27
Auto CR ......................................30
Auto LF .......................................30
Auto Select .................................30
H
Humidity.....................................47
I
Impact Mode...............................30
Initialization string......................38
Installing the Ribbon Cartridge ....11
I-Prime ................................ 30, 38
Bail arm lever....................... 18, 20

Bi - Direction...............................30
blank sheet of paper symbol .......21
Bottom feed continuous
form fan-fold paper...................20
Language Set..............................30
Limited Operation .......................41
LINE FEED ............................ 27, 28
Line Spacing ...............................30
Loading Paper.............................17
Centering printhead position.......40

Character Set..............................30
Clearing Paper Jams ....................42
Code Page ..................................30
Computer Connections................23
CSF/RPS Pitch.............................30
Current Loop...............................48
Cut Sheet feeder .........................21
Mean Time Between Failures

(MTBF)......................................47
Mean Time to Repair (MTTR) ........47
MODE .........................................27
ESC/S1 Pitch ..............................30
Fanfold ................................ 18, 20

Fitting the Paper Separator..........15
Fonts
Embedded Printer
Commands .........................40
FORM FEED .................................27
Front Panel .................................27
G
Graphics.....................................30
O
Operator Panel............................30
Operator Panel Function..............41
Page Length................................30
paper lever .................... 18, 20, 21
Paper out Override ......................30
Paper Separator..........................21
Paper Specifications ...................47
Parallel (LPT) Connection.............23
Parallel Interface
I-PRIME Signal.......................38
Pin 18.........................................30
PITCH .........................................27
POWER .......................................27
Power Connection ................ 16, 23
Print Method...............................47
Print Registration ........................30
Print Speed.................................47
INDEX > 49
Printer Drivers.............................30
Printer Suppress Effective ...........30
Printhead ...................................47
Z
Zero Character ............................30
R
Rear feed continuous form fan-fold
paper .......................................17
Receive Buffer Size .....................30
Removing the shipping
restraint ...................................10
Reset Inhibit ...............................30
Ribbon Shield ...................... 13, 40
RS-232C Serial Interface .............48
RS-422 .......................................48
S
S1 Select Pitch (10 CPI) ...............30
S1 Select Pitch (12 CPI) ...............30
SELECT .......................................27
SELECT and FORM FEED ...............28
SELECT and LINE FEED .................28
Serial Cable Connection ..............25
Serial Interface Option ................39
Setting Printer Defaults ...............29
Skip Over Perforation ..................30
Software
Embedded commands ...........40
Software vs. printer
settings ..............................38
T
Time Out Print.............................30
TOF SET ............................... 27, 28
Top feed single sheet paper ........21
Tractor Feed unit .........................21
U
Unpacking ....................................9
USB Connection ..........................24
Using the Cut-Sheet Feeder .........33
Using the Cut-sheet Feeder..........33
Using the pull Tractor Unit ...........31
Using the Roll Paper Stand ..........35
INDEX > 50
OKI CONTACT DETAILS

Oki Systems (UK) Limited
Oki Systems (Thailand) Ltd.
550 Dundee Road

Slough Trading Estate
Slough, SL1 4LE
956 Udomvidhya Building 6th

Floor, Rama IV Rd., Bangkok
10500, Thailand
Tel :44 (0) 1753 819819

Fax :44 (0) 1753 819899
http://www.oki.co.uk
Tel : (662) 636 2535

Fax : (662) 636 2536
http://www.okisysthai.com
Oki Systems Ireland Limited
Oki Hong Kong Limited
The Square Industrial Complex

Tallaght, Dublin 24, Ireland
Suite 1909, Tower3,

China Hong Kong City,
33 Canton Rd., Tsimshatsui,
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel :+353 1 4049590

Fax :+353 1 4049591
http://www.oki.ie
OKI Systems (Ireland) Ltd

40 Sydenham Park
Belfast, BT4 1PW
Tel : (852) 2736 0130

Fax : (852) 2376 3725
The IPL Group
Tel :+44 44 (0)28 90 20 1110

http://www.oki.ie
Technical Support for all of
Ireland:
Tel : +353 1 4049570
Fax : +353 1 4049555
E-mail: tech.support@oki.ie
Oki Data Corporation

4-11-22 Shibaura, Minato-ku,
Tokyo 108-8551, Japan
Tel : (81) 3 5445 6158
Fax : (81) 3 5445 6189
http://www.okidata.co.jp
63-85 Victoria Street

Beaconsfield NSW 2015,
Australia
Tel : (61) 2 9690 8200
Fax : (61) 2 9690 8300
http://www.oki.com.au
Comworth Systems Ltd.

10 Constellation Drive Marring
Bay, Auckland,
New Zealand
Tel : (64) 9 477 0500
Fax : (64) 9 477 0549
http://www.comworth.co.nz
Oki Data (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.

78 Shenton Way, #09-01,
Singapore 079120
Tel : (65) 221 3722
Fax : (65)421 1688
http://www.okidata.com.sg
OKI CONTACT DETAILS > 51
ML280 ELITE
Central House
Balfour Road, Hounslow
TW3 1HY
United Kingdom
tel +44 (0) 20 8219 2190
Fax +44 (0) 20 8219 2199
07051001 ISS.01
User Manual
for
Ultrasonic Anemometer, WindObserver II
and
Winddisplay, OMC-139

Gill Instruments Ltd, WindObserver II Ultrasonic Anemometer, User Manual
Winddisplay OMC-138/139, Users Manual Ver. No. 1.07
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-652003-01MU
Unrestricted

- BLANK PAGE -
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-652003-01MU
Unrestricted

WindObserver II
Ultrasonic Anemometer
User Manual
Doc No. 1390-PS-0004
Issue 16
Gill Instruments Ltd recognise all trademarks
Gill Instruments Limited

Saltmarsh Park,
67 Gosport Street,
Lymington,
Hampshire.
SO41 9EG
UK
Tel: +44 (0) 1590 613500
Fax: +44 (0) 1590 613501
E-mail: anem@gill.co.uk
Website: www.gill.co.uk
WindObserver II Anemometer
Gill Instruments Ltd

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 2
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
FOREWORD...................................................................................................... 6
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... 6
FAST TRACK SET-UP..................................................................................... 6
SPECIFICATION ............................................................................................... 7
PRE-INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 8
5.1.
5.2.
Equipment supplied...............................................................................................8
Installation requirements .......................................................................................8
6.
INSTALLATION...............................................................................................10
6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
Installation Guidelines .........................................................................................10

Bench system test...............................................................................................11
Cabling ................................................................................................................11
Connections ........................................................................................................12
Connecting to a Gill WindDisplay...................................................................... 13
Connecting to a PC with a RS422 or RS485 input ............................................. 14
Networking units............................................................................................. 15
6.5.
Analogue connections .........................................................................................16

Connections for 5V output................................................................................ 16
Connections for 2.5V output ........................................................................ 16
Connections for 4-20mA output ........................................................................ 16
Connections for 4-20mA output ........................................................................ 17
6.6.
6.7.
Power supplies ....................................................................................................17

Mechanical installation........................................................................................18
Location.......................................................................................................... 18
Orientation ...................................................................................................... 18
Mounting bracket............................................................................................. 18
Alignment ....................................................................................................... 20
7.
8.
USING WITH THE GILL WINDDISPLAY ...................................................21

MESSAGE FORMATS & OPTIONS............................................................22
8.1.
8.2.
8.3.
8.4.
8.5.
8.6.
8.7.
Wind Speed format .............................................................................................22

Output formats.....................................................................................................22
Networking...........................................................................................................22
Units.....................................................................................................................24
Output rate...........................................................................................................24
Averaging ............................................................................................................24
Options ................................................................................................................24
Speed of Sound (SOS) and Temperature.......................................................... 24
Heating (If fitted)............................................................................................. 24
45 Offset ....................................................................................................... 24
Vertical Output Padding................................................................................... 24
8.8.
ASCII message format (UV and Polar)...............................................................25

ASCII UV format............................................................................................. 25
ASCII Polar format ......................................................................................... 26
8.9.
Binary message format (UV, Polar and Tunnel).................................................26

Binary UV format ............................................................................................. 26
Binary Polar format .......................................................................................... 27
Binary Tunnel format ....................................................................................... 27
8.10.
NMEA Format......................................................................................................28
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 3
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8.11.
Analogue outputs and options ............................................................................29

Output modes ................................................................................................. 29
Channel outputs.............................................................................................. 29
Status............................................................................................................. 29
Temperature ................................................................................................... 29
Tunnel mode................................................................................................... 29
Scaling ........................................................................................................... 29
Polar mode direction wraparound..................................................................... 30
Low wind speeds............................................................................................. 30
9.
CONFIGURING ...............................................................................................31
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
9.5.
9.6.
9.7.
9.8.
9.9.
9.10.
Entering Configuration mode ..............................................................................31

Returning to Measurement mode .......................................................................31
Checking the configuration .................................................................................32
Changing settings................................................................................................32
Output format ......................................................................................................32
Unit Identifier .......................................................................................................33
Units.....................................................................................................................33
Output rate...........................................................................................................33
Averaging ............................................................................................................33
Options ................................................................................................................33
Speed of Sound (SOS) and Temperature.......................................................... 33
Heating (If fitted)............................................................................................. 33
NMEA ............................................................................................................ 34
Vertical Output Padding ................................................................................... 34
45 Offset ....................................................................................................... 34
9.11.
Communications settings....................................................................................35
Baud rate........................................................................................................ 35
Duplex mode .................................................................................................. 35
Data and parity options .................................................................................... 35
ASCII Message terminator ............................................................................... 36
9.12.
Analogue settings (if fitted) .................................................................................36

Voltage or current output ................................................................................. 36
Channel 3 output ............................................................................................. 36
Scaling ........................................................................................................... 36
Polar mode direction wraparound..................................................................... 36
Analogue power-up tests ................................................................................. 37
9.13.
Configuration and Diagnostic Information ..........................................................37
10.
MAINTENANCE & FAULT-FINDING..........................................................38
10.1.
10.2.
10.3.
10.4.
10.5.
10.6.
Cleaning ..............................................................................................................38
Servicing..............................................................................................................38
Fault-finding.........................................................................................................38
Returning unit ......................................................................................................39
Status (error) codes ............................................................................................39
Bench test............................................................................................................39
Integrity Check Chamber (ICC) ........................................................................ 40
Integrity & Zero Wind Check ............................................................................ 40
11.
APPENDICES..................................................................................................42
11.1.
11.2.
11.3.
Glossary & Abbreviations ....................................................................................42

Guarantee............................................................................................................43
Principle of operation ..........................................................................................44
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 4
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11.4.
Electrical Conformity ...........................................................................................45

EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ACCORDING....................................... 45
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 5
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1.
FOREWORD
Thank you for purchasing the WindObserver II manufactured by Gill Instruments Ltd.
The unit has no customer serviceable parts and requires no calibration or maintenance.
To achieve optimum performance we recommend that you read the whole of this manual
before proceeding with use. Do NOT remove black rubber transducer caps.
Gill products are in continuous development and therefore specifications may be subject to
change and design improvements without prior notice.
The information contained in this manual remains the property of Gill Instruments and
should not be copied or reproduced for commercial gain.
2.
INTRODUCTION
The Gill WindObserver II wind sensor is a very robust, lightweight unit with no moving
parts, outputting wind speed and direction. The units of wind speed, output rate and
formats are all user selectable.
The WindObserver II is available with or without de- icing heating (recommended if icing
is likely), and with or witho ut analogue outputs.
The WindObserver II can be used in conjunction with a PC, datalogger or other device,
provided it is compatible with the RS422 output or the analogue outputs. Multiple units
can be networked if required.
Alternatively, the WindObserver II is designed to connect directly to the Gill WindDisplay
unit to provide a complete wind speed direction system without any configuration required
by the user.
The output message format can be configured in Polar, UV (2-axis), NMEA (0183
Version 3), Tunnel formats, and as either a Continuous output or Polled (requested by
host system) , detailed in full in Section 8 Message Formats & Options.
WindObserver II may be configured using WindCom software which is available, free of
charge, from the Gill website www.gill.co.uk, or by using standard communications
software on a PC. This is explained in Section 9 Configuring.
3.
FAST TRACK SET-UP
If you are in a hurry to try out the WindObserver II, are familiar with Gill equipment, and
coupling to a PC using RS422, go to the following sections :
Section 6 Installation
Section 8 Message Formats & Options
Section 9 Configuring
After you have successfully set up the WindObserver II, we strongly advise that you then
go back and read the rest of the manual to ensure that you get the best results from the
WindObserver II.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 6
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.
SPECIFICATION
Measurement
Output
Parameters
Units
Averaging
Wind Speed
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Offset
Direction
1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 10Hz
UV, Polar, NMEA, Tunnel
m/s, Knots, MPH, KPH ft/min
Flexible 1-3600 seconds
0 - 65m/s (0-145mph)
2%
0.01m/s
0.01m/s
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Sonic Temperature Output
Range
Anemometer Status
0 - 359
2
1
Starting Threshold
Dead Band Wind Direction
Power Requirement
0.01 m/s
None
Anemometer only
Heating - Optional
Digital Output
9-30 V DC (40mA @ 12VDC)

3A @ 24V AC or DC
Communication
Baud rates
Formats
Analogue Output - Optional
Quantity
Scale
Type
V output resistance
4-20mA loading
Dimensions
Size
Weight
Materials
External Construction
Environmental
RS422, full duplex, network facility

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
8 data, odd, even or no parity
Moisture protection
Operating temperature
Humidity
Precipitation
EMC
-40C to + 70C
Supplied as part of standard message
3 (speed, direction, status or sonic temperature)

Multiples of 10m/s up to 70m/s
2.5V, 0-5V or 4-20mA
60 Ohms
10-300 Ohms
405mm x 210mm
1.5kg
Stainless Steel 316
Icing
Standards
IP66 (NEMA4X)
-55C to +70C (heated version)
5% to 100% RH
300mm/hr
BS EN 50081-1: 1992 (Emissions class B)
BS EN 50082-2: 1992 (Immunity)
FCC class A
MILSTD810E Method 521.1 Procedure 1
Traceable to UK national standards
Site Calibration
None required. (See Section 10.6 Zero Wind Check)
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 7
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5.
PRE-INSTALLATION
5.1.
Equipment supplied
or
or
or
and
and
and
and
WindObserver II Option 1 RS422 output

WindObserver II Option 2 RS422 output and analogue outputs
WindObserver II Option 3 RS422 output and de- icing
WindObserver II Option 4 RS422 output, analogue outputs and de-icing
Installation kit (comprising a gasket and four Stainless Steel screws)
WindObserver II Quick Start Guide
WindObserver II User Manual (this manual)
Integrity Check Chamber (ICC) (Optional)
5.2.
Installation requirements
Host system - One of the following:

PC with an internal or external interface compatible with the RS422 output from
the WindObserver II.
Gill WindDisplay.
Other equipment with I/O compatibility to the WindObserver II option selected.
For example if the unit has Analogue outputs, a Data Logger, Chart Recorder, or PC
fitted with an ADC card.
Networking - Multiple WindObserver II units can be networked
Software - One of the following:
WindCom A user- friendly package providing easy configuring of the
WindObserver II, for use on PCs running under Windows 98, 2000 or XP.
Available to customers as a free download from www.gill.co.uk .
Hyperterminal (for Windows 9x and later), or Terminal (Windows 3.n),
normally already installed on a PC.
Other Terminal Emulation software packages
Cable and Junction box
To connect between the WindObserver II and the host system. The unit is supplied with a
1.5m or 10m flying cable, requiring a mast mounted junction box (not provided) for
onward connection.
See Section 6.4 for connection details
The flying cable must be retained with a cable tie within 150mm of the base of the
anemometer.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 8
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Mounting Bracket
A mounting bracket is required (not provided) which will attach to the WindObserver II
via the four tapped holes in the base of the unit. Always ensure that the gasket supplied is
fitted to the base of the anemometer.
It is important that the gasket supplied forms a water tight seal on the base of the
anemometer.
In the event that the mounting bracket supplied by the customer is not flat or does not
form complete support for the anemometer base; the customer must fit a mounting ring as
shown in Figure 2.
See Section 6.7 for mounting details.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 9
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6.
INSTALLATION
Do NOT remove the black rubber transducer caps. Warranty is void if the
blue security seal is damaged or removed.
All the time the WindObserver II is not in its final location, it should be
protected from damage by keeping it in the original packaging as long as
possible, treating it as a delicate instrument.
If an Intrinsically Safe (IS) device is required, the I.S. WindObserver must be
used - the WindObserver II is NOT an IS device.
6.1.
Installation Guidelines
The WindObserver II has been designed to meet and exceed the stringent standards listed
in its specification. Operating in diverse environments all over the world, WindObserver II
requires no calibration or adjustment whatsoever.
As with any sophisticated electronics, good engineering practice should be followed to
ensure correct operation.
Always check the installation to ensure the WindObserver II is not affected by
other equipment operating locally, which may not conform to current standards,
e.g. radio/radar transmitters, boat engines, generators etc.
Guidelines
Avoid mounting in the plane of any radar scanner a vertical separation of
at least 2m should be achieved.
Radio transmitting antennas, the following minimum separations (all round)
are suggested
VHF IMM 1m
MF/HF 5m
Satcom 5m (avoid likely lines of sight)
Ensure the product is correctly earthed in accordance with this manual
Use cables recommended by Gill, keeping the length below the maximum allowed
(SeeSection 6.3) Where the cables are cut and re-connected (junction boxes, plugs
and sockets) the cable screen integrity must be maintained, to prevent the EMC
performance being compromised.
Earth loops should not be created earth the system in accordance with the
installation guidelines. (SeeSection 6.4)
Ensure the power supply operates to the WindObserver II specification at all times.
Avoid turbulence caused by surrounding structures that will effect the accuracy of the
WindObserver II such as trees, masts and buildings. The World Meteorological
Organisation make the following recommendation:
The standard exposure of wind instruments over level open terrain is 10m above
the ground. Open terrain is defined as an area where the distance between the
sensor and any obstruction is at least 10 times the height of the obstruction.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 10
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6.2.
Bench system test
Note : Prior to physically mounting the WindObserver II in its final location, we strongly
recommend that a bench system test is carried out to confirm the system is configured
correctly, is fully functional and electrically compatible with the selected host system and
cabling (preferably utilising the final cable length). The required data format, units,
output rate, and other options should also all be configured at this stage. If an Integrity
Check Chamber (ICC) has been purchased refer to Section 10.6.
6.3.
Cabling
Cable type
A RS422 compatible cable should be used, with the number of twisted pairs matching the
application. If both the (optional) Heating and Analogue outputs are utilised, then a 9 pair
cable is required.
Generic description Twisted pairs with drain wire, screened with aluminised tape,
with an overall PVC sheath. Wire size 7/0.2mm (24 AWG)
The table shows some suitable manufacturers references; other manufactures equivalents
can be used.
Table 1
Belden
Batt electronics
No. of pairs Gill ref.
ref.
ref.
2
9729
3
026-02660
9730
91030
4
026-03156
9728
91199
9
026-02663
8774
91009
Cable length
The typical maximum length at 9600 baud is 1km (3200ft), using the recommended cable.
If any problems of data corruption are experienced (due to, for example, a high local
electrical noise level), then a lower baud rate should be used. Alternatively, a thicker or
higher specification cable can be tried. See also Section 6.1
Cabling and junction box
The WindObserver II unit is fitted with a flying 9 pair cable attached (1.5m or 10m long).
This must be terminated in a suitable terminal box to IP66 or better, fitted with glands to
prevent moisture ingress.
The cable type from the terminal box to the host system must be as specified above. If any
cable is likely to be exposed to mechanical damage, it must be enclosed in a suitable
conduit or cable tray. The cable must be securely fixed with cable clamps or equivalent,
such that the cable is not under stress at the cable glands.
The gland area at the base of the WindObserver II should not be directly exposed to
moisture, as whilst the gland is sealed when mated, the anemometer is vented to air at the
base to avoid pressure build up. If an IP66 rating is essential or the unit is mounted other
than right way up use the gasket provided in the mounting kit.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 11
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6.4.
Connections
Important
Do NOT join any of the cores of the cable together. Joining cores
could damage the unit permanently. Any cores not used should be isolated.
Do NOT connect the units 0V, he ating ve, analogue output 0V or digital 0V to the
screen or earth.
The screens of each pair are joined together inside the anemometer - these should be
joined to the cable screen(s) of any further cable run. Avoid long grounding loops. Digital
OV should be used in conjunction with RS422 TX RX lines in order to improve noise
immunity. Each pair in the cable is labelled with its pair number.
Table 2
Conductor colour
Designation
Pair 1
green
RS422_TXB (+)
black
RS422_TXA (-)
Pair 2
white
RS422_RXB (+)
black
RS422_RXA (-)
Pair 3
red
Supply V+
black
Supply VPair 4
blue
Digital 0v
black
Not used (isolate)
Pair 5
yellow
Heater + *
black
Heater *
Pair 6
brown
Analogue Ch 1 voltage output *
black
Analogue Ch 1 current output *
Pair 7
orange
black
Pair 8
white
red
Pair 9
green
Analogue 0 volt reference/current return *
red
Analogue 2.5 volt reference *
Screens
Chassis ground
May not be functional - check model number and options fitted.
Earthing or grounding
To ensure correct operation, and for maximum protection against lightning, the
anemometer MUST be correctly earthed (grounded) via its mountings. Inadequate
earthing will degrade anemometer performance, particularly in the presence of radio
frequency interference.
See Fig 1 Suggested mounting bracket and earthing (grounding) arrangements
The unit MUST be connected to an appropriate grounding point with a minimum of 6mm
copper wire, via the M5 base screws. The cable screens must be joined with any cable
screen continuing from the units cable via a junction box. The primary earth for the
anemometer must be provided via the base screws and not via the cable screens.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 12
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Connecting to a Gill WindDisplay

For further details see Section 7 Using With The Gill WindDisplay,
and the WindDisplay User Manual for the method of operation.
Notes
Use the WindObserver II as supplied in the factory default settings i.e. do not
reconfigure, apart from configuring heater if fitted. (See Section 9.10)
The WindDisplay can provide power for the WindObserver II
WindObserver II
9 pair cable
Pair
Signal names
no.
TXB (+)
1
TXA ()
WindDisplay
colour
green
black
CONNECTED INTERNALLY
Supply V+
Supply V-
Heater + *
Heater - *
Cable 2 or 3
twisted pairs
Screen and
drain wires
Signal
names
TXD +
TXD
Terminal
nos.
RS422+
RS422-
Ground (Earth)
red
black
+
O
yellow
black
+
-
2
1
Heater power
supply
see Section 6.6
* If fitted
Default Settings
The factory default settings are:
A0 B3 C1 E1 F1 G0000 H1 J1 K1 L1 M2 NA O1 P1 T1 U1 V1 X1 Y1 Z1
See Section 9 Configuring for further details
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 13
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Connecting to a PC with a RS422 or RS485 input

The PC requires either an internal RS422 interface card, or an external RS422/485 to
RS232 converter which will plug into the standard 9 way or 25 way RS232 serial port of
the PC or host equipment.
WindObserver II
9 pair cable
PC with RS422
or RS485 input
Cable - 3 or 4
twisted pairs
Signal names
Pair
no
Colour
TXB (+)
TXA (-)
green
black
RXB (+)
RXA (-)
RXB (+)
RXA (-)
white
black
TXB (+)
TXA (-)
Digital OV
blue
Signal Ground
Supply V+
Supply V-
Heater + *
Heater - *
Screen and
drain wires
Signal names
Ground (Earth)
red
black
DC Power
+ supply 9-30V
see section 6.6
yellow
black
+
-
Heated power
supply
see section 6.6
* If unit is fitted with a heater
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 14
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Networking units
Before coupling units into a network:
Each device must be configured with a unique Unit Identifier (letter B to Z)

It must be configured to a tri-state polled mode M3 or M4 .
See Section 9 - Configuring
WindObserver II
9 pair cable
Signal names
PC with RS485
card
Pair
Colour
no
TXB (+)
RXB (+)
1
2
green
white
TXA (-)
RXA (-)
1
2
black
black
Digital OV
blue
Supply V+
Supply V-
Heater +
Heater -
Cable - 2 or 3
twisted pairs
.. ..
Signal names
T / RXB (+)
T / RXA (-)
Signal Ground
Screen and
drain wires
Ground (Earth)
red
black
DC Power
+
supply 9-30V
see section 6.6
yellow
black
+
-
Heated power
supply
see section 6.6
To Next Unit
Note : Each unit in the ne twork will require its own power supplies.
Please refer to section 8.3.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 15
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6.5.
Analogue connections
When using the analogue outputs it is advisable to use a low pass filter to remove any high
frequency noise present.
The analogue signals can be susceptible to external interference if unprotected. The
anemometer cable has individual screens covering each channels signal wires. The
continuing cable connected to the anemometer must be of equal or greater cross sectional
area as the anemometer cable and must be ind ividually screened or screened pairs.
Note that connections can also be made to a PC or other device as described in the
preceding section.
Connections for 5V output
Anemometer
Channel 1 Pair 6 Brown

Channel 2 Pair 7 Orange
Channel 3 Pair 8 White
+
V
Pair 9
Green
0v Ref
Connections for 2.5V output
Anemometer
Channel 1 Pair 6 Brown

Channel 2 Pair 7 Orange
Channel 3 Pair 8 White
+
V
Pair 9
Red
2.5V Ref
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 16
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Connections for 4-20mA output

Important When using the current outputs, the output loads on each channel
MUST be less than 300 ohms, including cable resistance.
Anemometer
Channel 1 Pair 6 Black

Channel 2 Pair 7 Black
Channel 3 Pair 8 Red
+
A
Pair 9
Green
0v
6.6.
300 max
Power supplies
All WindObserver II units

Voltage
Current
9 to 30v DC
60mA max. 50mA average
Heating
If fitted, the heating module requires a separate power supply.
Either
22 30V DC @ 3A
or
24V AC RMS 10% @ 3A AC RMS
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 17
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6.7.
Mechanical installation
Before installing, a bench system test is recommended (see Section 6.2).
All the time the WindObserver II is not in its final location, it should be
protected from damage by keeping it in the original packaging as long as
possible, treating it as a delicate instrument.
Location
It is important to ensure that the WindObserver II is mounted in a position clear of any
structure which may obstruct the airflow or induce turbulence.
Do NOT mount the WindObserver II in close proximity of high powered radar or radio
transmitters. A site survey may be required if there is any doubt about the strength of
external electrical noise. ( See Section 6.1 )
Orientation
Normally the WindObserver II is mounted vertically with the cable exit at the bottom.
Alternatively, the unit may be mounted in any orientation, but note that if the unit is
mounted with the cable uppermost ,the gasket provided in the mounting kit must be used.
Mounting bracket
A suggested mounting bracket is shown in Fig 1 below.
It is recommended that the WindObserver II mounting bracket is manufactured from
stainless steel 316, to prevent possible galvanic corrosion.
It is also recommended that the supplied gasket is always fitted to ensure IP66 rating and
to prevent galvanic corrosion if the mounting bracket is not manufactured from stainless
steel 316.
Stainless steel 316 fixings must be used.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 18
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 1. Suggested mounting bracket and earthing (grounding) arrangements
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 19
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Alignment
The anemometer should be set to point North (or to another known reference direction),
using the North alignment indicator on the base of the instrument. See Figure 2.
If the unit is used in a tunnel, (and the Tunnel format is used), the unit would normally be
aligned with the N S axis in the horizontal plane.
Figure 2 North marker and UV polarity definition (UV format) and Mounting Ring
SEE FIG.
4, ON PAGE 34 FOR U,V DEFINITION
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 20
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7.
USING WITH THE GILL WINDDISPLAY
The WindObserver II is designed to link directly to the Gill WindDisplay unit to provide a
complete wind speed and direction system.
When coupled to a WindDisplay, the WindObserver II must be used as supplied,
set to the factory de fault settings. It must NOT be reconfigured.
After coupling to a WindDisplay, the Wind Speed units and the Averaging period can be
selected using the WindDisplay controls. See the WindDisplay User Manual.
Note that although the WindDisplay can display wind speed in various units, these are
calculated within the WindDisplay. The data coming to the WindDisplay must be in
metres/sec (the factory default output setting).
Figure 3 WindDisplay
The WindDisplay has been designed to provide anemometer power (approximately 15V
@40mA).
If the WindObserver II has a de-icing heater fitted, this will need a separate power supply.
( See Section 6.6 )
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 21
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8.
MESSAGE FORMATS & OP TIONS
On first applying power to the WindObserver II, it will be in Measurement Mode, and it
will output wind measurement information in one of nine configurations as described
below.
Setting the output format, units, other parameters, options and the communication settings
are all carried out in the alternative Configuration Mode.
See Section 9 CONFIGURING for details of how this is done.
The factory default settings are shown here in bold, and for convenience some
Configuration codes (as used to set the configuration) are shown in blue boxes.
For example M3 .
8.1.
Wind Speed format
The wind speed measurements can be output in one of the following formats:
UV, Polar, Customer formats (NMEA and Tunnel).
8.2.
Output formats
The UV and Polar wind speed parameters are output in either ASCII or binary.
These parameters can be transmitted continuously or polled from the user.
Polar is also available in continuous NMEA format.
Figure 4 Output formats
Output format
ASCII
ASCII
Binary
Binary
Tunnel
NMEA
8.3.
UV
Polar
UV
Polar
Output
Continuous
Polled
Continuous
Polled
Polled
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Tri-state o/p
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Configuration code
M1
M3
M2
M4
M9
M7
M8
M6
M5
Networking
Gill Proprietary Network

Each anemometer connected to the network MUST be given a unique Unit Identifier
(Letters B to Z), and set to a polled tri-state mode (UV or Polar) ( M3 or M4 ).
In these modes the communications transmit line is tri-state unless the anemometer is
responding to a command.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 22
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Configuring WindObserver II for Half Duplex Operation.

1) Set up Two Terminals: One for RS485 Half Duplex and the other for RS422 Full
Duplex.
a (2-wire)
HYPER-TERMINAL
A (Half-D)
RS485 I/F
(USB)
SWITCH
HYPER-TERMINAL
B (Full-D)
WObsII
RS422 I/F
(USB)
b (4-wire)
One PC (with two USB ports) can be used for both Terminals, although two may be less
confusing.
Note: Power must not be disconnected from the anemometer throughout this procedure.
2) Assuming the unit is set for Full Duplex, connect 9-way at [b] disconnect 9-way at
[a]. Set Switch to position [b] (4 wire).
3) On Terminal B, enter CONFIGURATION MODE. Set Half Duplex (E2). The
CONFIRM> prompt will appear.
4) Disconnect 9-way [b] and connect 9-way [a]. Set Switch to position [a] (2 wire).
5) On Terminal A, type E <ENTER> to confirm.
6) The unit should now be configured in Half Duplex mode.
Configuring WindObserver II for Full Duplex Operation.
1) Assuming the unit is set for Half Duplex, disconnect 9-way [b] and connect 9-way
[a]. Set Switch to position [a] (2 wire).
2) On Terminal A, type E1 to select Full Duplex. The CONFIRM> prompt will
appear.
3) Disconnect 9-way [a] and connect 9-way [b]. Set Switch to position [b] (4 wire).
4) On Terminal B type E <ENTER> to confirm.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 23
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8.4.
Units
The wind speed can be set to any of the following units:

Unit
Metres per sec
Knots
Miles per hour
Kilometres per hour
feet per minute
8.5.
Abbreviation
m/s
knots
MPH
kph
fpm
Output rate
The output frequency can be set between 1 and 10 per second. The wind speed is sampled
every 25ms, each axis being sampled sequentially..
8.6.
Averaging
The Averaging Period can be set from zero to 3600 secs. (1 hour). The default setting is
zero. When averaging is enabled, data is output at a rate determined by the averaging
period. The data is an average of valid data collected during the averaging period.
8.7.
Options
Speed of Sound (SOS) and Temperature

Either or both of these parameters can be selected or disabled
Note that neither of these parameters is available in Tunnel or NMEA formats.
SOS is useful for calculating air temperature with a rapid response. Sonic temperature is
derived from the SOS, based on an assumption of the composition of the atmosphere.
Humidity will affect the result.
True temperature can be calculated by:
T=
Ts
1+0.32 e/p
Where
T = True temperature (Kelvin)
Ts = Sonic temperature
e = Vapour pressure of water in air
p = absolute pressure of water in air
Heating (If fitted)
Heating is autonomous and requires no set-up once activated.
45 Offset
If required, the U axis can be offset +45 to the transducer axis.
Vertical Output Padding
A dummy W vector is inserted to provide compatibility with any WindMaster that may be
in a network.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 24
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8.8.
ASCII message format (UV and Polar)
ASCII UV format
U axis wind speed
V axis wind speed
Units
<STX>A,+000.04,-000.02,M,+345.01,+022.36,00,<ETX>25
Start of
string
Unit
identification
Speed of
sound
Temperature
Status
End of
string
Check
sum
where
U axis wind speed
V axis wind speed
Units
In increments of 0.01 units (UUU.UU)

In increments of 0.01 units (VVV.VV)
Value
M
N
P
K
F
Units
Metres per second (m/s)
Knots (knots)
Miles per hour (MPH)
Kilometres per hour (kph)
Feet per minute (fpm)
Start of string
Unit identification
Speed of sound
Temperature
ASCII value 2
Letter A Z (default A)
In metres per second (if enabled)
Sonic temperature in degrees C (if enabled)
Status
Value
0
60
Any other value
End of string
Check sum
ASCII value 3
Exclusive OR of all characters between Start of String
and End of String reported as ASCII hex.
Status
OK
Heating enabled and OK if enabled
Warning or fault condition
- see Section 10.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 25
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ASCII Polar format

Wind direction
Wind speed
Units
<STX>B,121,000.08,M,+344.66,+021.76,00,<ETX>06
Start of
string
Unit
identification
Speed of
sound
Temperature
Status
End of
string
Check
sum
where
8.9.
Wind direction
Wind speed
In degrees relative to N (DDD)

In increments of 0.01 units (MMM.MM)
All other parameters
See Section 8.8 ASCII UV format
Binary message format (UV, Polar and Tunnel)
Binary UV format
U axis wind speed
V axis wind speed
Units
0x81 0x81 000.04 -000.02 +345.01 +022.36 00 1

Start of string
Speed of sound
Temperature
Status
where
U axis wind speed
V axis wind speed
Units
In increments of 0.01 units (UUU.UU)

In increments of 0.01 units (VVV.VV)
Value
1
2
3
4
5
Units
Knots (knots)
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 26
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Start of string
Speed of sound
Temperature
In metres per second (if enabled)

Sonic temperature in degrees C (twos complement
signed) (if enabled)
Status
Value
0
60
Any other value
Status
OK
Heating enabled and OK
Warning or fault condition
- see Section 10.5
Binary Polar format

Wind speed
Wind direction
Units
0x81 0x81 006.04 265 +345.01 +022. 36 00 1

Start of string
Speed of sound
Temperature
Status
where
Wind direction
Wind speed

All other parameters
See Section 8.9 Binary UV format
Binary Tunnel format

U axis wind speed
Direction
Units
0x81 0x81 +000.04 1 00 1

Start of string
Status
U axis Wind speed

Direction (along U axis)

Value
Polarity
1
+U
0
-U
Other parameters
See Section 8.9 Binary UV format
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 27
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8.10. NMEA Format

Instrument
Identifier
Wind direction
Wind speed
Units
Checksum
delimiter
$ IIMWV, 120, R, 002.10, M, A,* CC
Start of string
Instrument
type
Wind
measurement
Status
Check
sum
where
Wind direction
Wind speed

Units
M
N
P
K
F
Start of string
Instrument type
Wind measurement
Status
$
IIMWV
R
Relative wind measurement
A
Valid measurement
V
Invalid measurement
Exclusive OR of all characters between $ and *
reported as ASCII hex.
Check sum

Knots (knots)
A typical WindObserver II configuration suitable for NMEA would be:

B2, E1, F1, G0, K1, L1, M5, O1, P1, U1.
Consult specification NMEA 0183 version 3 (available on the web) www.nmea.org for
complete interface details.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 28
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8.11. Analogue outputs and options

Analogue outputs are available on WindObserver II versions 2 and 4 only.
See Section 6.5 for connection details, and Section 9.12 for configuring the
analogue outputs.
Output modes
There are three analogue output channels which can be configured as either voltage (0 to
5v, or 2.5v), or current outputs (4 to 20mA).
Channel outputs
The signals on the Channel outputs 1 and 2 are dependant on the Output format chosen.
The signal on Channel 3 can be configured for either Status or Temperature.
Output format
UV (M1,M3,or M7)
Polar (M2, M4, or M8)
NMEA (M6)
Tunnel (M6)
Channel 1
U
Magnitude
Magnitude
U
Channel 2
V
Direction
Direction
U direction*
Channel 3
Status or Temperature
Status
If channel 3 is configured for Status, the output will be 0v (or 4mA) if the unit is an OK
condition. In a fault condition, error code 01, 02, or 04, the output will be +5v (or 0mA).
See Section 10.5 for the list of Error Codes.
Temperature
If channel 3 is configured for Temperature, it reports the temperature if it is between 40
and +70C, scaled from +0.7V to +5V (6.25mA to 20mA). Temperatures outside this
range are reported as errors by setting the output to 0V (4mA).
Tunnel mode
In Tunnel mode, Channel 2 gives the direction of the wind along the U axis, where a U
vector (=wind from the N direction) is represented by 0v (or 4mA), and a +U vector
(=wind from the S direction) by 5v (or 20mA).
Scaling
All analogue outputs are in m/s and can be scaled to have a full scale deflection of 10 to
70 units.
In Polar mode the sign should be ignored. Only the + sign is effective.
In all cases zero Wind Speed is represented by 0V or 4mA.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 29
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Polar mode direction wraparound

The Wind Direction in Polar mode can be configured for either Standard (0 - 359) or
Wraparound (0 - 539) options. If the Standard mode is used with a chart recorder, large
swings of the recorder pen will be experienced each time the wind direction passes
between 0 and 359. Using the Wraparound mode, when the wind first changes from 0 to
359, there will be a step change on the output, but after this first time the output will
change smoothly each time the wind passes through 360. (Similarly, the first time the
wind veers from 539 to 180, there will be a step change, after which the output will
change smoothly).
Wind
direction
(degrees)
0
180
360
540
Voltage output (V)
Current output (mA)
Standard
Wraparound
Standard
Wraparound
0
2.5
5.0
n/a
0
1.67
3.33
5.0
4.00
12.00
20.00
n/a
4.00
9.33
14.67
20.00
Low wind speeds

Whilst the wind speed is below 0.05 metres/sec, the wind direction will not be calculated.
The outputs on Channel 1 and 2 will continue to output the last calculated value.
If channel 3 is configured for Temperature, it will likewise output the last calculated value.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 30
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9.
CONFIGURING
WindCom may be used to configure WindObserve r II. This is an easy to use menudriven package, available as a free download at www.gill.co.uk .
Alternatively, you may use terminal emulator software such as Hyperterminal or
Terminal.
This section describes the commands used to change settings when using terminal
emulator software. For a fuller descriptions of the settings and options see Section 8 Message Formats & Options
Keystrokes are shown thus :- D 3 ENTER
9.1.
Entering Configuration mode
From Continuous mode

*
From Polled mode

* N - where N is the Unit Identifier.
Note - the Unit Identifier must be entered
as upper-case
The WindObserver II responds with a CONFIGURATION MODE message, stops

reporting wind measurements, and waits for a command (as detailed below).
9.2.
Returning to Measurement mode

Q ENTER
If in Continuous mode, the anemometer responds with wind measurements immediately,

continuing at the selected Sampling rate .
If in Polled mode,
?
Enables poll
N
Polls anemometer (where N is the Unit identifier entered as upper-case)
The anemometer replies with a single set of wind measurements
&
Anemometer replies with Unit identifier
!
Disables poll
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 31
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9.3.
Checking the configuration
We strongly recommend that, as a standard procedure, you use this command ( D3 ) prior
to, and after, changing any settings. It shows the current settings for all the alterable
settings. We suggest you note down your settings, so that you can easily return to them.
Enters Configuration Mode (from Continuous mode)
or
*N
Enters Configuration Mode (from Polled mode)
D 3 ENTER
The WindObserver II responds with the current settings.
The factory default settings are
A0 B3 C1 E1 F1 G0000 H1 J1 K1 L1 M2 NA O1 P1 T1 U1 V1 X1 Y1 Z1
*
How to change these settings is explained in the following sections.

To return to Measurement mode
9.4.
Q ENTER
Changing settings
To change a setting, first go into Configuration mode and then refer to the sections below.
Enter the Configuration code of the new setting required, followed by ENTER.
If successful, the new setting will be echoed back as a message by the WindObserver II.
For example, to change the message format to NMEA, enter M 5 ENTER .
The WindObserver II will reply with M5. When the unit is returned to the Measurement
mode, it will be in NMEA format.
Note : The factory-set (default) settings are shown in bold in the following sections.
9.5.
Output format
Output format
ASCII UV Continuous
ASCII UV Polled (tri-state) *
ASCII Polar Continuous
ASCII Polar Polled(tri-state) *
ASCII Polar Polled
Binary UV Continuous
Binary Polar Continuous
Tunnel Continuous
NMEA Continuous
Configuration code
M1
M3
M2
M4
M9
M7
M8
M6
M5
* If units are to be networked, they MUST be given unique Unit Identifiers

(see Section 9.6 Unit Identifier)
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 32
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9.6.
Unit Identifier
Changes the Unit Identifier to X.

X can be any letter from B to Z.
Note that the default Unit Identifier A should not be used when networking units.
NX
9.7.
Units
Units
metres/sec
(m/s)
knots
(knots)
miles / hour
(MPH)
kilometre/hour
(kph)
feet / minute
(fpm)
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
Configuration
code
9.8.
Output rate
Outputs per second

Configuration code
9.9.
10
P1
P3
P2
P4
P5
P6
Averaging
Enter the required averaging period in seconds as a four figure number (nnnn) between
zero and 3600.
Gnnnn
9.10. Options
Speed of Sound (SOS) and Temperature
Setting
Report SOS
Report Sonic temperature
Report SOS andSonic temperature
Disable both
Configuration code
A1
A2
A3
A0
Note that neither of these parameters is available in Tunnel or NMEA formats.

Heating (If fitted)
Heating is autonomous and requires no set-up once activated.
Setting
Configuration code
H1
Disabled
Activated
H2
Each transducer is heated independently and will be active when ambient temperature
drops below approximately +15C each transducer will de-activate when +25C threshold
is reached.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 33
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
NMEA
Setting
NMEA string IIMWV
NMEA string WIMWV
Configuration code
K1
K2
Vertical Output Padding

Setting
Disable vertical output padding
Enable vertical output padding
Configuration code
V1
V2
45 Offset
Setting
Align U axis with
transducer axis
Align U axis +45
to transducer axis
Reverses Polar
Direction
Align @ 45 from
North
Configuration
code
Notes
X1. Aligns U axis with North/South axis.
X1
X2. This re-aligns both U&V and polarity 45.
X2
X3 reverses reported polar direction to allow the

instrument to be mounted upside down. N.B.
Does NOT affect UV alignment (Mode 1, 3).
X4 set UV & polar alignment at 45 degrees from
North when instrument is mounted upside down.
X3
X4
Figure 4 shows the polarity of U and V if the wind components along the U and V axis are
blowing in the direction of the respective arrows.
-U
N
-V
+V
S
+U
Figure 4 UV Polarity
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 34
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9.11. Communications settings

Baud rate
Setting
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
1200
300
Configuration code
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
If a request is sent to change the Baud rate, before it changes it must be

confirmed by entering B ENTER (at the new Baud rate.)
eg. If set to B3 (9600 baud), to change to B5 (38400 baud), enter
B 5 ENTER , change host terminal to 38400 baud, and confirm by
entering B ENTER.
NOTE: a random echo will be generated after the B5 confirmation
Duplex mode
Setting
Full duplex
Half duplex
Configuration code
E1
E2
Data and parity options

Setting
8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
8 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
8 bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
7 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
7 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
7 bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
Configuration code
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 35
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ASCII Message terminator

Setting
Configuration code
CR LF
LF
L1
L2
9.12. Analogue settings (if fitted)

Voltage or current output
Setting
Configuration code
Voltage (0 to 5V, or 2.5V) *
T1
Current
T3
* The selection between 0-5V or 2.5V is made by the appropriate
hardware connections See Section 6.5 Analogue connections
Channel 3 output
Setting
Configuration code
Status
Temperature
Y1
Y2
Scaling
Setting
Configuration code
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
Z6
Z7
Polar mode direction wraparound

Setting
Wraparound (0 - 539)
Standard
Configuration code
C1
C2
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 36
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Analogue power-up tests

Setting
Disable analogue power-up tests
Enable analogue power-up tests
Enable continual cycling of analogue
power-up tests
Disable continual cycling of analogue
power-up tests
Configuration code
J0
J1
J2
J3
9.13. Configuration and Diagnostic Information

Each of these commands causes a response from the WindObserver II.
Item
Command
code
Type and serial No.

Software version
D1
Unit configuration
D3
Analogue ID
(if present)
Anemometer
power supply
voltage
Integrity check
D2
Typical response
E000694
2.07
current configuration :
A0 B3 C1 E1 F1 G0000 H1 J1 K1
L1 M2 NA O1 P1 T1 U1 V1 X1 Y1
Z1
D4
GI1390 fitted.
D5
+29.8
D6
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 37
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. MAINTENANCE & FAULT-FINDING

10.1. Cleaning
If there is any build up of deposit on the unit, it should be gently cleaned with a cloth,
moistened with soft detergent. Solvents should not be used, and care should be taken to
avoid scratching any surfaces. The unit must be allowed to defrost naturally after being
exposed to snow or icy conditions, do NOT attempt to remove ice or snow with a tool.
Do NOT remove black rubber transducer caps.
10.2. Servicing
There are no moving parts or user-serviceable parts requiring routine maintenance.
Opening the unit or breaking the security seal will void the warranty and the calibration.
In the event of failure, prior to returning the unit to your authorised Gill distributor, it is
recommended tha t :
All cables and connectors are checked for continuity, bad contacts, corrosion etc.
A bench test is carried out as described in Section 10.6.
You contact your supplier for advice
10.3. Fault-finding
Symptom
No output
Corrupted output
One way
communication
Failed / Incorrect
WindObserver II
ouput, data
invalid flag
Solution
Check DC power to WindObserve r II, cable and connections.
Check comms settings of WindObserver II (as detailed in Section
9) and host system match, including correct Com port
Check unit is in Continuous mode
Check that in- line communication devices are wired correctly.
NOTE: It is us ual for Anemometer TX + to be connected to
converter device RX +
Check comms settings of WindObserver II and host system
match.
Try a slower baud rate.
Check cable lengths and type of cable.
Check wiring is in accordance with the manual.
Check that transducer path is not blocked
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 38
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10.4. Returning unit

If the unit has to be returned, it should be carefully packed in the original packaging and
returned to your authorised Gill distributor, with a full description of the fault condition.
10.5. Status (error) codes

The Status code is sent as part of each wind measurement message.
Code
00
60
A
01
02
04
08
09
10
50
51
62
63
65
V
Status
Condition
OK
Sufficient samples in average period
OK and heating
Sufficient samples in average period
enabled
OK
NMEA data valid
Axis 1 failed
Insufficient samples in average period on U axis
Axis 2 failed
Insufficient samples in average period on V axis
Axis 1 and 2 failed
Insufficient samples in average period on both axes
NVM error
NVM checksum failed
ROM error
ROM checksum failed
System gain at max.
Inaccurate results likely
Marginal system gain
Results OK, but marginal operation
Measurement average building
Heating current tripped or electronic failure
Thermistor open circuit
Heating element open circuit
NMEA data invalid
10.6. Bench test

Couple the WindObserver II to the host system and power supply, using a known working
test cable.
Check that the unit is correctly configured by going into Configuration mode and using D3
See Section 9.3 Checking the configuration.
Check for normal output data, and that the Status Code is OK 00, 60 or A (for NMEA
format).
If the status code is other than these, refer to Section 10.5 Status (error) codes.
Use an office fan or similar to check that the unit is sensing wind, turning the unit to
simulate changing wind direction and to check that both axes are functioning.
Note that this a quick functional test. There are no calibration adjustments; the unit is
designed NOT to require re-calibration within its lifetime. Gill has provided and Integrity
Check, see next page for details.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 39
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Integrity Check Chamber (ICC)

The software to perform the Integrity Check (IC) is incorporated in the latest
WindObserverIIs.
The IC is designed to:
1. Identify any gross changes in the head geometry that would affect the
performance.
2. Provide a zero wind environment to confirm the WindObserverII zero calibration.
The ICC has been designed to be used in an indoor still air environment with an ambient
temperature between 10C and 28C. When conducting the test it is important that the ICC
is assembled on to the WindObserverII head and not touched or moved during the test.
This test is only valid if undertaken with an ICC purchased from Gill.
Integrity & Zero Wind Check
Zero Wind Check
Configure your PC to run HyperTerminal and assemble the ICC by inserting the reflector
cases and the two halves of the ICC onto the WindObserverII. The ICC must be retained
using the strips provided. Then:
1. Ensure that the WindbserverII is set in factory default mode. For Factory default
settings see section 9.3.
2. Enter Measurement Mode and Record/View data
In still air wind speed measurements should not exceed 0.03m/s. If wind speed exceeds
0.03m/s contact Gill Instruments.
Integrity Check
Ensure the ICC is assembled correctly on the WindObserverII. Using HyperTerminal,
enter Configuration Mode as described in Section 9.
Enter D6.
A typical report as shown below will be displayed.
ALIGMENT LIMITS: U=2417,2517
V=2369,2469
ALIGNMENT U:2467 *PASS*
ALIGNMENT V:2419 *PASS*
GAIN 0:0007 *PASS*
GAIN 1: 0007 *PASS*
GAIN 2:0008 *PASS*
GAIN 3:0008 *PASS*
D6
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 40
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
If there has been no significant changes to The WindObserverII head configuration then
*PASS* will confirm correct operation.
Alterations to the head geometry will result in a *FAIL* message. If this occurs please
contact Gill Instruments.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 41
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. APPENDICES
11.1. Glossary & Abbreviations
Item
CAL
CR
CRLF
CSV
ENG
ESC
ETX
FAC
fpm
GND
HEX
I/P
IP66
KPH
LF
m/s
MAG
MAX
MPH
NEMA
NMEA 0183
(version 3)
No:
NVM
O/P
PC
PCB
POR
PROCOMM
ROM
RS232
Meaning
Calibration
Carriage Return
Carriage Return Line Feed
Comma Separated Variable
Engineering
ESCape key on keyboard used to stop any process that is being
executed
End of string character
Factory
Feet per minute
GrouND
HEXadecimal
InPut
Protection Classification
Kilometres per Hour
Line Feed
Metres per second
MAGnitude - scalar reference to wind speed
MAXimum
Miles per Hour
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Marine Electronics Association standard for interfacing
marine electronic navigational devices
Number
Non-Volatile Memory
Output
IBM compatible Personal Computer
Printed Circuit Board
Power On Reset
Terminal emulator software package
Read Only Memory
Communications standard
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 42
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Item
RS422
RS485
RTS
RX
RXD
S/W
SOS
SEC
STX
TERM
TX
TXD
+VE
-VE
WindCom
WRT
Meaning
Request To Send
Receive
Received Data
SoftWare
Speed Of Sound
SECond
Start of string character
TERMinal
Transmit
Transmitted Data
Positive
Negative
Gill software used to configure WindObserver II
With Respect To
11.2. Guarantee
For terms of guarantee contact your supplier.
Warranty is void if the red security seal covering base nuts is damaged or broken, or the
transducer caps have been damaged.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 43
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11.3. Principle of operation

The WindObserver II measures the times taken for an ultrasonic pulse of sound to travel
from the North transducer to the South transducer, and compares it with the time for a
pulse to travel from S to N transducer. Likewise times are compared between West and
East, and E and W transducer.
If, for example, a North wind is blowing, then the time taken for the pulse to travel from N
to S will be faster than from S to N, whereas the W to E, and E to W times will be the
same. The wind speed and direction (and the speed of sound) can then be calculated from
the differences in the times of flight on each axis. This calculation is independent of
factors such as temperature.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 44
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11.4. Electrical Conformity

EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ACCORDING
TO COUNCIL DIRECTIVE 89/336/EEC
We, Gill Instruments Ltd., declare our sole responsibility that the products:
WindObserverII Ultrasonic Anemometer (Heated Variant)
WindObserverII Ultrasonic Anemometer (Heated with Analogue Outputs Variant)
WindObserverII Ultrasonic Anemometer (Non-Heated Variant)
WindObserverII Ultrasonic Anemometer (Non-Heated with Analogue OutputsVariant)
Manufactured by:

Saltmarsh Park
67 Gosport Street
Lymington, SO41 9EG
to which this declaration relates, are in conformity with the protection requirements of Council Directive
89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws relating to electromagnetic compatibility.
This Declaration of Conformity is based upon compliance of the product with the following harmonized
standards:
EN50081 - 1
(Using EN55022 Class B)
EN50082 - 2
(Using IEC 61000-4-2

IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 61000-4-6)
Signed by:
A.C.R. Stickland Director
Date of issue:
28/11/2000
Place of issue:

Saltmarsh Park
67 Gosport Street
Lymington, SO41 9EG
________________________________________________________________________________________________
WindObserver II
Page 45
Issue 16
Doc. No. 1390-PS-0004
February 2005
130,00
113,50
80,00
63,50
X1
C
101,60
PG13,5
12 3456 78
PG13,5
For sensors with heater a

third PG 13,5 cablegland
must be mounted on left
side of the junction box.
PG13,5
1: RED, +V
2: BLACK, -V
3: YELLOW, HEATER+ (OPTION)
4: BLACK, HEATER- (OPTION)
5: GREEN, TX+
6: BLACK, TX7: WHITE, RX+
8: BLACK, RX-
WIND OBSERVER II JUNCTION BOX
A
DIPL. ING HOUM A.S
SIZE
SCALE
FSCM NO
YES
DWG NO
REV
E\HB\GILL\WOII.VSD
2
SHEET
1 OF 1
Winddisplay
OMC-138/139
Users Manual
Ver. No. 1.07
(pdf version)
OBSERVATOR instruments B.V.

P.O.Box 60
2980 AB Ridderkerk
Rietdekkerstraat 6
2984 BM Ridderkerk
Tel.
++31 (0)180 463411
Telefax ++31 (0)180-463510
The Netherlands
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
Contents
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1. Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2. Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Cable layout without heater
2.2.2 Power supply settings . . . .
2.2.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4. Daisy chaining . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
3
3
3
4
5
6
3. Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Internal hardware settings . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Analogue output . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Serial in/output . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Settings via frontpanel . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1Units and averaging settings
3.2.2 Lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Deviation setting . . . . . . . .
3.3 Settings possible via the RS232 port.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
10
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5. Setting up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Input device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Vector range settings . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Instrument output device . . . . . . .
5.4 Analogue output range settings . .
5.5 RS232 output settings . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Baudrate RS232 port . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Currentloop/RS422 output settings
5.8 Baudrate Currentloop/RS422 . . . .
5.9 Averaging of channels . . . . . . . . .
5.10 Device options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11 Show all settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
1. General
The Obsermet digital wind display OMC-138 is a combined display
for wind speed and wind direction. The OMC-138 is provided with
a digital LED indicator for speed, and a double ring of 36 LEDs
actual and average direction information.
A second three digit display located in the lower right corner
provides gust information.
The front panel is provided with three buttons for adjusting the
brightness of the LEDs. testing all the LED displays and entering
a set menu for adjusting display settings.
The OMC-138 will accept the output-signals directly from the series
OMC-160 and OMC-170 wind sensors, without the need of
additional interfaces. It provides the power supply to the wind
sensor, and "daisy-chain" connections are available for additional
indicators. As an option, the OMC-138 can provide analogue
output signals for speed and direction. Those can be 4...20 mA or
0...1 volt.
The display is housed in a 144x144 mm. DIN-size casing suitable
for flush mounting in a console or display panel. Unit depth is
63mm.
The signal transmission of the daisy chain is: 20mA current loop,
300 Baud, ASCII-code.
The OMC-138 can display the wind speed in various scales i.e.
Miles per hour (mph). Meters per second (m/s). Knots. kilometers
per hour (km/h) and Beaufort. In addition the analogue output for
wind speed and direction can be transmitted using a variety of
averaging periods between 1 and 600 seconds.
Principle characteristics.
Power supply
Power supply optional
Speed display
Gust display
Direction display
Direction average
Input signal
Input optional
Output
Output (optional)
Dimensions
Weight
Scale
Brightness control
Readout units
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
220Vac. 115Vac and 24Vdc selectable via wire bridges

12 Vdc
3 digit 7 segment LED display 14.3 mm height
3 digit 7 segment LED display 10.1 mm height
36 LEDs circular color RED
36 LEDs circular color AMBER
Currentloop with ASCII information
Pulse. Potmeter and RS422
Daisy chain
0...1 volt. 4...20 mA, RS232 and NMEA-183
144x144x94 mm
approx. 800 gr
Knots, mph. m/s or km/h
From the front panel (optional on distance)
m/s. Km/h. knots, Mph and Bft
Page 2
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
2. Installation
2.1. Mechanical
Panel mounting of the OMC-138 display requires a panel cut-out of 137 mm square. Maximum
panel thickness 5 mm. Rear access must be provided, for fixing of the tightening clamps and
connecting the electric cabling. The depth of the unit is 63 mm and an additional clearance of 8 mm
should be allowed for the cable connections.
2.2. Electrical
All Obsermet displays utilize a common terminal strip for the connections to the wind sensors and
the ancillary displays and/or recorders. The signal cable between sensor and display is a 4-core
cable with 2 cores for power to the sensor and 2 cores for signal transmission. To reduce
interference the cable must have a common screen. This screen should be grounded to earth in the
junction box of the wind sensor. In this way the cable may run distances up to 1 kilometer.
Recommended cable: 2 (or 3) twisted pairs with common screen, core size 0.75 mm2.
In the case that the wind sensor is provided with a heater. 2 extra cores are required for power
supply to the heater. The size of the heater cable depends on the cable length. (For more details
see manual wind sensor)
The OMC-138 display unit provides the 15 Volts DC. power supply to the microprocessor
transmitter in the wind sensor. The power consumption of the sensor transmitter electronics is
approx. 65 mA. This power supply should not be used for the optional heaters in the sensor. These
sensor-heaters must be powered independently from the display unit.
2.2.1 Cable layout without heater
Page 3
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
2.2.2 Power supply settings

The OMC-138 will be delivered with the power supply set as required by the customer. If no power
supply is mentioned in the official ordering papers the OMC-138 power supply will be set for 230
Vac.
If during installation is found that the supply setting is wrong two things can be done, the unit can
be returned to the factory for modification or the user will modify the unit himself.
To modify the display unit for a different power supply proceed as follows,
On the power supply board, the Pcb with the terminal connection on the rear side, there is installed
a transformer. The transformer offers the possibility of 115 or 230 Vac. The supply depends on the
jumper settings between the filter transformer and the supply transformer. (see Pcb layout) If the
wired marked "B" are installed the unit is set for 115 Vac, If the wire "A" is installed the unit is set
for 230 Vac.
For 24 Vdc power supply the transformer TR1 has to be removed from the printed circuit board.
When the transformer has been removed two wire connection can be made (marked with "C")
As an option the OMC-138/139 can be delivered for 12 Vdc, If the unit has to be modified to work
with 12 Vdc the transformer has to be removed. With the transformer removed it becomes possible
to install a DC/DC converter on the location of the transformer. The DC/DC converter converts the
12 Volt supply voltage up to 24 Vdc.
Page 4
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
2.2.3. Connections
All connections to the OMC-138 display
are made to the rear of the display as
shown on the drawing on the right.
If the Obsermet windsensor is used, only

the terminals 1. 2. 3, and 4 are used.
Daisy chaining to the next instrument is

done on the terminals 5 and 6.
If a sensor is used providing a pulse

signal for windspeed connections must
be made to terminals 1 and 2.
If for wind direction a sensor is used with

a potentiometer connections must be
made to the terminals 13. 14 and 15.
1 = -15 Vdc sensor supply

2 = +15 Vdc sensor supply
3 = - serial currentloop input
4 = + serial currentloop input
5 = - daisy chain output
6 = + daisychain output
7 = - RS422 input
8 = + RS422input
9 = - RS422 output
10 = + RS422 output
11 = - pulse input (windspeed) (*)
12 = + pulse input (windspeed) (*)
13 = 0 Volt reference supply potmeter (winddirection)
14 = input signal potmeter
15 = + reference signal potmeter 2500 mV
16 = - analogue speed output 4..20 or 0..1 Volt
17 = + analogue speed output 4..20 or 0..1 Volt
18 = - analogue direction output 4..20 mA or 0..1 Volt
19 = + analogue direction output 4..20 mA or 0..1 Volt
*) it is possible to use the pulse input for windspeed to adjust the brightness of the display from a
remote location. This is optional and must be ask for when the instrument is ordered.
Page 5
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
2.2.4. Daisy chaining

The daisy-chain output is used to transfer the wind sensor information to a second wind display.
The cable length depends on the type of cable used. Depending on the total capacity of the cable a
distance up to 1000 meter is possible. The cable should be screened, and the screen should be
grounded at 1 point only.
Recommended cable: 1 twisted pair with common screen, core size 0.75 mm2.
Page 6
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
3. Commissioning
Before switching ON the mains, check that the power supply is correct as indicated on the
identification label on the rear of the equipment.
With no signal cable connected, switch on the display and observe the front panel LED,s. The
system will perform a led test all led are switched on and off one by one. When the test is finished
the display shows on the led circle no information and on both speed displays only "---" is shown.
This is because no sensor information is received by the display.
Check the voltage at terminals [1] and [21 on the rear panel this should be 15 Volts DC. With all
cabling correctly connected, the display will show the wind speed and wind direction directly as
transmitted by the OMC-160 wind sensor.
Adjustment cannot be made as the sensor-signal is digitally transmitted.
When there is no serial information received from the wind sensor the watchdog circuit in the
display unit starts to switch the 15 Volt supply voltage to the sensor ON and OFF. The supply
voltage is 10 seconds ON and if none information is received from the wind sensor the supply
voltage is switched OFF for 5 seconds. If this is happening during the commissioning check the
wiring to the wind sensor.
When the display is fully operational and the and the sensor information is not received for more
than 5 seconds the display starts flashing indicating that the sensor information is not longer
received by the display unit.
The OMC-138 is also available as OMC-139. The OMC-139 is made to be used on board of ships.
The front panel of the OMC-139 is different, the degree scale is made from 0...180 degrees on both
sides of the scale.
If from the speed display inside the led circle the decimal point between the hundred and the ten
display is ON the Eeprom has been damaged. Settings for proper operation are most probably lost.
The display must be returned to the factory.
Extension (optional)
The display can provide information of wind speed and direction in the NMEA-183 format.
The display can be used with a Gill wind sensor
The display can be used with an Irdam wind sensor
The display can be used with Vector wind sensors (12 Vdc supply possible)
Adjusting brightness on remote location. (not when Vector sensors are used)
The display can provide 0...1 Volt or 4...20 mA output signals
Page 7
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
3.1 Internal hardware settings

3.1.1 Analogue output
The OMC-138/139 provides an analogue output signal for wind speed and wind
direction. This is optional and not as standard available.
On the processor board (middle board) there are some jumper settings to select
a current or an voltage output signal. There are three jumpers that have to be
set in the correct position. In the drawing the selection for a voltage output is
set. In jumper field J3 de position 2-3 is selected and in jumper field J4 the
jumper settings 1-3 and 2-4 are selected.
To get a 4...20 mA output the jumpers must be set as follows,
Jumper field J3 set 1-2
Jumper field J4 set 3-5 and 4-6
The Potmeters R18 and R19 are used to set the range of the analogue output
signals.
For analogue output the following IC,s must be placed in the sockets, IC16,
IC17, IC18 and IC20.
3.1.2 Serial in/output

The OMC-138 has two different serial in/output ports. Port 1 is used to receive information from the
windsensor on the input and to transmit information on the currentloop and RS422 output.
Port 2 is used to communicate via the RS232 port on the rear of the instrument.
Receive information port 1
The OMC-138/139 has the possibility to receive information on different levels, the
possibilities are RS422, RS485 and Currentloop. A selection is made with the
jumper field J1 in the following way.
Jumper field J1
Jumper field J1
Jumper field J1
RS485 set jumper 4-5

RS422 set jumper 2-3
Currentloop set jumper 1-2
Transmit information Port 1

The OMC-138/139 provides the possibility to transmit information on different
signal levels. Those levels are RS422 and Currentloop.
Transmit and receive Port 2
Port 2 is the 9-pin D-connector at the rear of the instrument. This port can be used
for setting up the instrument or to output the wind information (optional). The
baudrate for this port is standard set to 9600 bps. But with the menu options this
can be changed.
Page 8
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
Currentloop output OMC-160 message format

The currentloop output is normally used to transport the collected data from the currentloop input.
Using the system in this way it is not necessary anymore to output the data as analogue signals
which upgrade the performance and the accuracy. The data is transmitted with the same speed as
data is received from the windsensor. 300 baud 8N1.
If the currentloop output signal from the OMC-160 is repeated by the OMC-138 the message looks
as follows,
<LF>D125<sp>V234<sp >cscs<CR>
In the above message the transmitted wind direction is the number shown after the indent "D" 125
degrees. the windspeed in the message is shown after the indent "V" 234 is 23.4 m/s. The
windspeed is transmitted without decimal point and must therefor be divided by 10 to get the correct
windspeed.
The checksum is all information in the string added, the least significant byte is divided into high
and low nibble and both nibbles are incremented by hexadecimal 30. This information is sent out as
a checksum.
OMC-2900 message format
Sometimes the data is transmitted in the OMC-2900 format. This format is used when more
parameters are transmitted.
The wind data transported in the OMC-2900 format looks as following,
<STX> <LF>V21.2<SP>CSCS< CR>
<LF>D156<SP>CSCS<CR> <EOT>
Every message starts with a start of text character after this the messages are transmitted. All
messages start with a line feed followed with the identifier for the data, then the data and then a
checksum for protection reasons, the message end with a carriage return.
All input channels can be transmitted in this way every second to any receiving station.
RS232/RS422 in/output channel
The OMC-2900 and the OMC-160 format on the RS232/RS422 looks the same as the format used
in the currentloop output described paragraph 3.2.2.2
There are two possibilities to transmit data in the NMEA output, windspeed can be transmitted in
m/s or in knots, both messages are shown below.
SIIMWV,123,R,5.8,N,A*24 Windspeed in knots
SIIMWV,123,R,5.8,M,A*27 Windspeed in meters per seconds
The transmission speed is the same as the communication speed of the windsensor used, if this is
the OMC-160 it will be 300 bps 8N1.
If the currentloop input is not used the speed can be set from 300 to 9600 bps.
Page 9
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
3.2 Settings via frontpanel

On the frontpanel of the display there are three pushbuttons. The buttons are marked "MENU",
arrow up and arrow down. Under normal conditions the buttons marked arrow up and down are
used to adjust the brightness of the display.
3.2.1Units and averaging settings
When the menu button is pressed the led in the average time window starts flashing indicating that
the select option is on. It becomes possible now to make a selection using the arrow up and down
button. If the menu button is pressed again the led in the units window starts flashing indicating that
the select option is on. With the arrow up and down button it is possible now to select different units
for the windspeed.
When the buttons are not touched for 5 seconds the display will return to the normal operation
mode.
3.2.2 Lamp test
With both arrow buttons pressed all the displays and leds start flashing (lamp test) When the
interval time for gust is set to 0 seconds the Gust must be reset manually. this has to be done by
pressing the menu and the arrow down button at the same time.
3.2.3 Deviation setting
The display provide the possibilty to add an offset to the wind direction. This is very usefull for
windsysystems installed on oilrigs and for airports if they want to use the magnetic North instead of
the true North.
An offset is added in the following way, Press the arrow-up button and the Menu button, the Gust
display starts flashing and is showing the offset. As long as the display is flashing the offset can be
changed using the arrow-up or arrow-down buttons. The set value is added to the actual wind
information from the sensor.
3.3 Settings possible via the RS232 port.

1
Users interval time, 3 different times can be set, direction, speed and gust. When for gust a
time of 0 is selected the gust can be reseted by pushing the menu button and the arrow
down button at the same time.
Scaling analogue outputs. For the analogue outputs it is possible to set the span of the
signal. 4...20 mA can be 0...40 m/s or 50 m/s. For the direction a choice can be made
between 360 or 540 or 720 degrees.
Average time for analogue output signals, For the 2 available analogue outputs it is possible
to set a average time. This is done to prevent analogue recorder to paint the paper.
Page 10
Obsermet division
4
OMC-138/139 Manual
Selection of sensor type, a selection can be made between the following inputs.
a. Obsermet sensors OMC-160. OMC-170 and OMC-165 (standard)
b. Gill sensors RS422 (optional)
c. Irdam sensor RS422 (optional)
d. Vector puls/potmeter (optional)
When pulse/potmeter is selected it is possible to set the scaling factors for the input signals.
RS232 output on/off and baudrate setting
RS422 output on/off and baudrate setting
Repeat the sensor message on the RS232/422 or select NMEA-183 output signal.
4. Maintenance
The Obsermet OMC-138/139 digital display unit has no moving parts, and requires no routine
maintenance. If required, the perspex display front can be cleaned with a cloth, slightly moistened
with a soft detergent. Care must be taken that no liquid enters the display unit. Solvents should not
be used, and scratches should be avoided.
Fuses: Glass fuses 5x20 mm,
40 mA for 230 Vac.
80 mA for 115 Vac
250 mA for 24 Vdc
The fuse can be reached as follows,
Switch of the main supply and disconnect all the wiring on the rear of the display.
Remove the four 2.5 mm screws on the rear of the display.
Remove the front window, pull on a corner with both hands.
With holding the front down, the whole case can be removed now.
The fuse can be reached now. The fuse is placed on the PCB where all the wires are connected to.
Page 11
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
5. Setting up procedure
During final testing in the factory the
OMC-138/139 is setup for the system it is
manufactured for.
If at a later stage the settings have to be
changed then this can be done by the user in
the following way.
Connected a cable to the RS232 connector at
the rear of the instrument.Connected the other
end of the cable to a PC.
Start on the PC a terminal program like
"Terminal" under Windows or "Hyper terminal"
under windows 95.
OMC-138/139 Obsermet wind display unit

Software version 1.5
Serial nr. 00000000
1 - Select input device
2 - Select output device
3 - Set averaging of channels
4 - Set options
5 - Show all settings
6 - Test Instrument
Select the proper transmission speed, the
speed is as a standard set to 9600 bps. This
setting might be set differently, if no response
from the instrument when pressing the ENTER
button on the keyboard try a different transmission speed.
If contact is established with the display the above shown menu will appear on your computer
screen.
5.1 Input device
With the given options the OMC-138 can be
set to customers needs.
If "Select input device" is selected the menu
on the right will appear on the screen. The
menu shows the actual setting (astrixs in front
of the option) and it shows the options that are
not available because they were not ordered.
That option are followed by the word disabled.
In the menu shown on the right the vector
sensors are selected as input.

Serial nr. 00000000
Instument input device
0 - menu back
1 - Obsermet equipment
2 * Vector wind sensor
3 - Gill wind sensor [disabled].
4 - Irdam wind sensor [disabled].
5 - NMEA input message [disabled].
6 - Young input message [disabled]
7 - Change baudrate CL/RS422 [300]
Select option :
Page 12
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
5.2 Vector range settings

If the vector sensor is selected a new window
will open. This window is shown on the right.
In this window the scaling values for the vector
instruments can be set.
Due to the fact that the vector wind-direction
sensor is using a potmeter the start and end
value can be set. For wind-speed the vector
sensor is using pulse signal. With option 3 the
value for every pulse can be set.

Serial nr. 00000000
Vector range settings
0 - menu back
1 - Wind direction min. value [1.875]
2 - Wind direction max. value [358.125]
3 - Wind speed m/s / pulse [1.25]
Select option :
5.3 Instrument output device

The OMC-138 has several output possibilities.
All those possibilities needs to be set to
customers needs.
The output possibilities are. the analogue
outputs, the RS232 output and the CL/RS422
output.
For the analogue output the range can be set
as well for speed as for direction.
For the serial outputs (RS232 and CL/RS422)
the format of the output message and the
transmission speed can be set.

Serial nr. 00000000
Instrument output device
0 - menu back
1 - Analog output
2 - RS232 output
3 - CL/RS422 output
Select option :
Page 13
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
5.4 Analogue output range settings

The OMC-138 provides two analogue output.
This outputs are optional. There are two
outputs one for the windspeed and one for
winddirection. With jumper settings on the
middle pcb if is possible to select current or
voltage. See paragraph 3.2.1
The scaling can be set with the menu shown
on the right. The actual settings are set to
0...360 degrees and 0...40 m/s over the full
output swing of the current or voltage signal.
The user can change this to meet his
requirements.

Serial nr. 00000000
Analog output range settings
0 - menu back
1 - Range wind direction [360]
2 - Range wind speed [40]
Select option :
5.5 RS232 output settings

The 9-pin connector on the rear of the
instrument can be used to program the
instrument but can also be used to output
messages. (optional) With the menu shown on
the right it is possible to select the format of
the message.
Option 1 will output the message as received
from the wind sensor.
With option 1 it is possible to have the
Obsermet windsensor message as output
when a different windsensor is used for input.
On the daisy chain the (option 2) the message
is transmitted as received from the
windsensor.

Serial nr. 00000000
RS232 output settings
0 - menu back
1 - Obsermet OMC-160 format [disabled]
2 - Obsermet OMC-160 format with dimmer
3 - Daisy chain [disabled]
4 - NMEA knots [disabled]
5 - NMEA m/s [disabled]
6 * No output
7 - Change baudrate [9600]
Select option :
Page 14
Obsermet division
5.6 Baudrate RS232 port
The communication speed of the RS232 port
can be set to one of the shown speeds.
Make a selection by typing the number in front
of the required speed and press the enter
button.
Change the communication speed of the
device which you are using for further
communication otherwise communication is not
possible anymore.
OMC-138/139 Manual

Serial nr. 00000000
Baudrate RS232 port
0 - menu back
1 - 300 baud
2 - 1200 baud
3 - 2400 baud
4 - 4800 baud
5 * 9600 baud
Select option :
5.7 Currentloop/RS422 output settings

In this menu it is possible to select what
message is transmitted on the
currentloop/RS422 output, also the
transmission speed can be set.
If the transmission speed is changed the input
speed will also changed. This will not be
possible is the OMC-160 wind sensor is used.
This sensor is transmitting data with a speed
of 300 bps en this can not be changed.
Option 1 will output the message as received
from the wind sensor.
With option 1 it is possible to have the
Obsermet windsensor message as output
when a different windsensor is used.
On the daisy chain the (option 2) the message
is transmitted as received from the
windsensor.

Serial nr. 00000000
Currentloop / RS422 output settings
0 - menu back
1 - Obsermet OMC-160 format.
2 * Daisy chain
3 - NMEA knots [disabled]
4 - NMEA m/s [disabled]
5 - No output
6 - Change baudrate [300]
Select option :
Page 15
Obsermet division
5.8 Baudrate Currentloop/RS422
If the transmission speed must be changed
and option 6 is selected the menu on the right
is shown.
OMC-138/139 Manual

Serial nr. 00000000
Baudrate currentloop /RS422 port
Select one of the numbers to change the

transmission speed on the currentloop and or
the RS422 output.
Beware of the fact that changing the speed of

the currentloop/RS422 output will also effect
the input. which is not allowed when an
Obsermet windsensor is used.
0 - menu back
1 - 300 baud
2 - 1200 baud
3 * 2400 baud
4 - 4800 baud
5 - 9600 baud
Select option :
5.9 Averaging of channels

On the front of the display a selection can be
made for the averaging of the wind
information. A choice can be made between 2
minutes, 10 minutes and user select. With the
menu shown the user select parameters can
be filled-in.
4. Average time of the analogue output for
wind speed and direction can be set.
1. Direction is the average time for the actual
direction indication. (red circle)
2. Variation direction is the average time for
the variation direction indication. (Yellow circle)
3. Speed is the average time for the speed
display.
6. The analogue output average time can be
set here.
Maximum wind speed (Gust) reset time can be
set. If this is set to zero the maximum wind
speed must be reset manually on the front
panel. Maximum time setting is 600 seconds.

Serial nr. 00000000
Averaging of channels
0 - menu back
1 - Direction [0]
2 - Variation direction [0]
3 - Speed [0]
4 - Analog output direction [60]
5 - Analog output speed [60]
6 - Max wind speed reset [600]
Select option :
Enter new value : 60
Page 16
Obsermet division
OMC-138/139 Manual
5.10 Device options

If possible with the existing hardware it is
possible to change the software to customers
specification. Those options can than be
selected in the menu "Device options".
The option "Dim on distance" provide the
possibility to adjust the brightness of the
display on remote location. A push button must
be connected to the pulse input normally used
for pulsed wind speed information.
A windsensor with a pulse output can not be
used anymore.

Serial nr. 00000000
Device options
0 - menu back
1 - Dim on distance [disabled]
2 - Deviation [355]
The option "Deviation" is used to add an offset

to the wind sensor measured value.
5.11 Show all settings
OMC 138/139 Obsermet Wind display unit

Serial nr. : 00000000
Input device
: Vector Wind direction min

: Wind direction max.
: Wind speed m/s / pulse
RS232 output
RS232 Baudrate
Currentloop / Rs422 output
Currentloop / RS422 Baudrate
Analog output range direction
Analog output range speed
:
:
:
:
:
:
not in use
9600 baud
Daisy chain
2400 baud
360
40
Average direction
Average speed
Average analog out direction
Max wind speed reset time
:
:
:
:
60
60
60
60
Deviation
: 350
: 1.875
: 358.125
: 1.25
Average variation direction
: 60
Average analog out speed
: 60
Press a key
When this option is selected the above shown screen is displayed showing all the settings
Page 17
Operating instructions
OMC-138/139 Display
Average wind variation
Average interval
time window
Average wind direction

Average wind speed
Unit selection
Window
Arrow down button

Arrow up button
Menu button
Gust display
Display indication
LEDs
On the front panel of the display are 3 pushbuttons. Menu, arrow up & arrow
down .
Brightness control:
- Adjust the brightness with the arrow up & arrow down buttons.
Min-Max indication:
-
Press the Menu button

The max LED starts flashing
The display will show the minimum over the selected interval
After 30s the displays will switch back to the Max wind speed.
Average interval setting:

-
Press Menu button twice

The LED in the Average interval window will start flashing.
Select the interval with the arrow up & arrow down buttons
Unit selection:
-
Press the Menu button 3 times.

The LED in the Unit selection window will start flashing.
Select the unit with the arrow up & arrow down buttons.
Gust display reset (only when in user average mode):

- Press Menu & arrow down button at the same time.
LED test:
- Press both arrow buttons at the same time.
When the buttons are not touched for 5 seconds, the display will return to normal
operation mode.
User Manual
for
MRUs

Seatex MRU, Users Manual, rev 8, issued 2004-10-21 by Seatex AS, Trondheim
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-651002-01MU
Unrestricted

Blank page
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-651002-01MU
Unrestricted

Seatex MRU
User's Manual
Issued: 2004-10-21
Blank page
Notice
All rights reserved. Reproduction of any of this manual in any form whatsoever without
prior written permission from Kongsberg Seatex AS is forbidden.
The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.
All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual.
However, should any errors be detected, Kongsberg Seatex AS would greatly appreciate
being informed of them.
The above notwithstanding, Kongsberg Seatex AS can assume no responsibility for any
errors in this manual or their consequences.
Copyright 2004 by Kongsberg Seatex AS. All rights reserved.
Kongsberg Seatex AS
Pirsenteret, N-7462 Trondheim, Norway
Telephone: +47 73 54 55 00
Facsimile: +47 73 51 50 20
Duty phone: +47 73 50 21 11
E-mail: firmapost@kongsberg-seatex.no
www.kongsberg.com
III
Blank page
IV
Revision log
Document ID
MRU-D-001
Rev.
Date
Reason for revision
1997-08-28
First version of the renewed manual
FOS
1998-03-20
Minor corrections
FOS
1999-01-15
Updated with latest sales and

warranty conditions and minor
corrections
FOS
1999-11-02
Updated to correspond with MRU

FOS
300 version and the third generation
of the hardware
2001-03-12
Updated with latest specifications
2001-11-17
Corrected sign on analog PitchHippy FOS

signal and updated to correspond
with Windows version of MRC
2002-11-12
Updated with latest specifications
FOS
2004-06-24
Description of the MRU D and Z

models. Updated specification on
MRU 4 and H
FOS
2004-10-21
Updated specifications on the

models MRU 4, H, Z, 2 and D
FOS
9
10
11
Approved
(sign)
FOS
Blank page
VI
Table of contents
1.
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 About this manual ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 References .................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms..................................................................... 2
1.3.1 Definitions .......................................................................................................... 2
1.3.2 Abbreviations and acronyms .............................................................................. 3
2.
TECHNICAL DATA ........................................................................................................ 5

2.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Health, environment and safety ................................................................................... 7
2.3 Restrictions in guarantee.............................................................................................. 7
2.3.1 Mechanical shock and improper transportation ................................................. 7
2.3.2 Wrong electrical connection, fusing of the power supply .................................. 8
2.4 Performance data.......................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1 MRU 6 specification........................................................................................... 8
2.4.2 MRU 5 specification......................................................................................... 10
2.4.4 MRU H specification........................................................................................ 15
2.4.5 MRU Z specification ........................................................................................ 17
2.4.7 MRU D specification........................................................................................ 20
2.5 Restrictions in use ...................................................................................................... 23
2.6 Physical dimensions................................................................................................... 24
2.7 Power ......................................................................................................................... 24
2.8 Environmental specification ...................................................................................... 24
2.9 Other data................................................................................................................... 25
3.
INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................ 27
4.
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION...................................................................................... 29
4.1 Design principles........................................................................................................ 29
4.1.1 Six degrees of freedom motion......................................................................... 29
4.1.2 Gravity erection of orientation ......................................................................... 31
4.1.3 How to compute velocity/position.................................................................... 33
4.1.4 Magnetic north seeking .................................................................................... 35
4.1.5 Magnetic disturbances ...................................................................................... 36
4.1.6 Frames for measurements of motion entities.................................................... 36
4.1.6.1 Definition of frames and variables ..................................................... 37
4.1.6.2 Used reference frames ........................................................................ 39
4.2 Construction ............................................................................................................... 41
4.2.1 Internal sensors ................................................................................................. 43
VII
4.2.1.1 The angular rate sensors ..................................................................... 43

4.2.1.2 The accelerometers............................................................................. 44
4.2.1.3 The magnetometer .............................................................................. 45
4.2.2 Sensor calibration procedure ............................................................................ 46
4.2.2.1 MRU calibration certificate................................................................ 46
4.2.3 Processing algorithms....................................................................................... 48
4.2.3.1 Computation of orientation ................................................................ 49
4.2.3.2 Magnetic heading estimation.............................................................. 53
4.2.3.3 Linear motion computation ................................................................ 54
4.2.3.4 Internal processing and I/O delays ..................................................... 60
4.2.3.5 Electronics and mechanics ................................................................. 63
5.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................... 65

5.1 Start procedure ........................................................................................................... 65
5.2 Operation.................................................................................................................... 65
5.3 Stop procedure ........................................................................................................... 66
5.4 Performance monitoring ............................................................................................ 66
6.
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................ 67
6.1 Periodic maintenance ................................................................................................. 67
6.1.1 Software upgrades ............................................................................................ 67
6.1.2 Changing the internal lithium battery............................................................... 68
6.1.3 Recalibration..................................................................................................... 68
6.2 Repairs and modifications.......................................................................................... 68
6.2.1 Repair of the MRU ........................................................................................... 69
6.2.1.1 Installing a spare unit ......................................................................... 69
6.2.2 Repair of the MRU Junction Box ..................................................................... 70
6.3 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 70
6.3.1 No contact with the MRU................................................................................. 70
6.3.2 MRU status: Abnormal..................................................................................... 71
6.3.3 MRU status: Unreliable data or not ready........................................................ 72
6.3.4 Large oscillations in the roll and pitch measurements ..................................... 72
6.3.5 Reduced roll or pitch performance ................................................................... 72
6.3.6 Reduced heave performance............................................................................. 73
7.
DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................... 75
8.
PARTS LIST.................................................................................................................... 77
9.
APPENDIX A - ARRIVAL CHECK AND TEST OF THE MRU ............................. 79
10. APPENDIX B - STATUS MESSAGES FROM MRU ................................................. 83

11. APPENDIX C - MRU STATUS BITS........................................................................... 85
12. APPENDIX D - MRU EVENT NUMBERS.................................................................. 87
13. APPENDIX E - MRU HW REPORT STATUS BITS ................................................. 89
Index ........................................................................................................................................ 91
VIII
Reader's comments ................................................................................................................ 93
List of illustrations
Figure 1 MRU 6 functional modules........................................................................................ 8
Figure 2 MRU 5 functional modules...................................................................................... 11
Figure 4 MRU H functional modules..................................................................................... 15
Figure 5 MRU Z functional modules ..................................................................................... 17
Figure 7 The MRU-D functional modules ............................................................................. 21
Figure 9 Rigid body motion ................................................................................................... 29
Figure 10 Orientation measurements by utilising accelerometer........................................... 31
Figure 11 A single axis rate gyro based device...................................................................... 32
Figure 12 Computation of velocity/position .......................................................................... 34
Figure 13 Magnetic north seeking.......................................................................................... 35
Figure 14 Right oriented frame .............................................................................................. 37
Figure 15 Geographic frame and body frame ........................................................................ 38
Figure 16 Body/vehicle frame definition ............................................................................... 39
Figure 17 Overview of used frames ....................................................................................... 40
Figure 18 MRU 6 functional modules.................................................................................... 41
Figure 19 MRU 6 mechanical layout ..................................................................................... 42
Figure 20 The Coriolis force rate gyro function .................................................................... 44
Figure 21 The pendulum accelerometer construction ............................................................ 45
Figure 22 The Calibration Certificate for an MRU 6............................................................. 47
Figure 23 The magnetic heading estimation process ............................................................. 54
Figure 24 Relative heave residual in percentage of amplitude for "Hydrographic survey"
filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and 20
seconds .................................................................................................................. 58
Figure 25 Step response in heave with corresponding settling time for "Hydrographic
survey" filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and
20 seconds ............................................................................................................. 58
Figure 26 Relative heave residual as percentage of amplitude for "Hydrographic survey"
filter with average heave period set to 10 seconds with various damping factors
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8 and 0.9 ........................................................................................ 59
Figure 27 Selection of program mode to install..................................................................... 80
Figure 28 MRC Installation Complete ................................................................................... 80
Figure 29 MRU Configuration Window ................................................................................ 81
IX
Blank page
Seatex MRU User's Manual, rev. 8
Introduction
1.
INTRODUCTION
1.1
About this manual
This is a compilation of information on the MRU products released for the user. The manual
is organised into the following chapters:
Chapter 1 Introduction - A brief presentation of this manual with references and
abbreviations.
Chapter 2 Technical data - Presents the technical data of the various MRU models, their
physical dimensions, required power and environment specifications, together
with restrictions in guarantee.
Chapter 3 Installation - Refers to the Installation Manual for the appropriate model
number.
Chapter 4 Technical description - An in-depth description of the design principles and
construction of the MRU. This chapter should be read before the MRU is used in
a new application.
Chapter 5 Operation instructions - Describes the start-up of the MRU, its operation and
how to monitor the performance of the unit.
Chapter 6 Maintenance - Presents how the MRU is to be repaired and serviced with
detailed description on how to troubleshoot the product.
Chapter 7 Drawings - Refers to the Installation Manual for the correct model number.
Chapter 8 Parts list - Lists the parts in the basic delivery and the additional equipment.
In this manual the following remarks are used:
CAUTION
Is used to make the user aware of procedures and operational practice which, if not
followed, may result in degraded performance or damage to the equipment.
Note
A note text has this format and is used to draw the user's attention to special
features or behaviour of the equipment.
1.2
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Introduction
References
General Conditions for the Supply of Products, Orgalime S 2000 with one exception
sheet
MRU-D-091 Installation Manual, MRU 2, rev. 8
MRU-D-092 Installation Manual, MRU 5 & H, rev. 8
MRU-D-093 Installation Manual, MRU 6 & 4, rev. 8
MRU-D-094 Installation Manual, MRU 3 & 1, rev. 7
MRU-D-119 Installation Manual, MRU D & Z, rev. 0
MRU-D-011 Delivery Specific Documents, rev. 2
1.3
Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms
1.3.1
Definitions
alignment
Is the process of adjusting the current internal navigation

frame (g, h or b-frame) in the instrument to the true external
frame.
attitude
The orientation relative to the vertical axis of a vehicle.

Heading is not included. If heading is included, the word
orientation for the vehicle is used.
fluxgate
A sensor for magnetic fields based on chopping of field to be

measured by the use of time-varying magnetic permeability.
heading
The direction of the main axis (bow direction) of the vehicle

as opposed to course which is the direction of motion of the
vehicle. Heading has the measurement range 0 to 360, while
yaw is defined as an angle with measurement range 180.
heave
The vertical dynamic motion of a vehicle and defined

positive down. Heave position and velocity are dynamic
motion variables with a certain lower cutoff frequency.
inclinometer
A sensor measuring roll and pitch by measurement of the

direction of the acceleration. Inclinometers only provide
correct readings when there is no horizontal acceleration of
the vehicle.
pitch
A rotation about the pitch axis and defined positive when the
bow moves up. Normally pitch means the dynamic pitch
angle motion.
roll
A rotation about the roll axis and defined positive when

starboard side of the vehicle moves down. Normally roll
means the dynamic roll angle motion.
Introduction
starboard
When looking in the bow direction of a vehicle this is the

right hand side of the vehicle.
strap down
This means that the inertial sensors are fixed to the vehicle or
sensor instead of fixed to a turnable mechanical platform.
surge
The linear dynamic motion of a vehicle in the heading

direction (along the R-axis, but horizontal) and defined
positive for a forward motion.
sway
The sideways dynamic linear motion of a vehicle (along the

P-axis, but horizontal) and defined positive for a motion to
starboard.
yaw
A rotation about the vertical axis and defined positive when

turning eastward when the vehicle cruises in north direction.
Normally yaw means the dynamic yaw motion.
1.3.2
Abbreviations and acronyms
AHRS
b-frame
CG
EMI
HPR-system
g-frame
h-frame
INS
MP
MRC
Attitude & Heading Reference System. An inertial system measuring the

orientation of a vehicle.
Body frame. An orthogonal frame fixed to the MRU housing or to the
vehicle where the MRU is fixed.
Centre of gravity. The mass centre of a vessel. This is normally the location
with least linear acceleration, and hence the best location for measurements
of roll and pitch.
Electromagnetic interference.
Hydro Acoustic Positioning Reference System.
Geographic frame. An orthogonal frame having axes pointing north, east
and down at the current location of the vehicle.
Heading frame. This frame has common D-axis with the g-frame, but the
forward and starboard axes are turned the heading angle according to the
north and east axes. The forward and starboard axes are in the horizontal
plane.
Inertial Navigation System. A system consisting of gyros and
accelerometers intended for navigational purposes. These systems are
equipped with high performance gyros.
Measurement Point.
Special software delivered with all MRU units. Running on a PC under
Microsoft Windows. With this software the user can set up the MRU
according to his application by use of the delivered configuration cable. The
MRC software is used to change the configuration parameters, to check the
internal status, etc.
MRU
NMEA
P-axis
RMS
R-axis
ROV
Tesla
Y-axis
Introduction
Motion Reference Unit. This is a unit measuring dynamic linear motion and
attitude.
A standard for interchange of information between navigation equipment.
This axis is fixed in the vehicle, and points in the starboard direction
horizontally when the roll angle is zero. Positive rotation about this axis
means that the bow of the vehicle is moving up.
Root mean square.
This axis is fixed in the vehicle, and points in the forward direction
horizontally when the pitch angle is zero. Positive rotation about this axis
means that the starboard side of the vehicle is moving down.
Remotely Operated (underwater) Vehicle.
Unit for magnetic field strength.
This axis is fixed in the vehicle, and points in the downward direction when
the vehicle is aligned horizontally. Positive rotation about this axis is
turning the bow of the vehicle to starboard.
Technical data
2.
TECHNICAL DATA
2.1
General
The MRU products are supplied in a range of models from MRU 1 to MRU 6 as the top
performance model. The capabilities of the various models are:
MRU 6
MRU 5
MRU 4
MRU H
MRU Z
MRU 2
MRU D
MRU 1
Roll/pitch
Heading
Heave
0.02
0.02
0.05
0.05
0.15
0.15
0.35
1.0
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
1.2
Acceleration
[m/s2]
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.01
The top model MRU 6 is an inertial attitude and heading reference system (AHRS) with a
dynamic linear motion measurement capability included. The Seatex MRU 6 is primarily
intended for medium accuracy measurement of motion in marine applications where a long
lifetime and no regular maintenance is important. The MRU is not equivalent to a high
performance gyro platform or laser-gyro-based device, but it can compete with low-cost
"strap-down" rate gyro based AHRS.
Internally, the computing algorithms are designed as a "strap down" inertial navigation
system. The unit has a higher performance than simpler devices because it contains 3-axis
angular rate sensors and 3-axis acceleration sensors. The MRU performance in the heave
channel competes with expensive gyro platforms, while the performance in the horizontal
directions is only suitable to measure rather fast motions. The MRU is not intended for
standard inertial navigation purposes.
The MRU 6 outputs absolute roll, pitch and yaw (heading), and relative heave (dynamic).
Acceleration and velocity of the linear motions, as well as angular acceleration and velocity,
are also outputs from the MRU 6 unit. The MRU computes relative (dynamic) surge and sway
motions and the velocities and accelerations of these variables. Performance data of the MRU
6 and the other models are described in chapter 2.4.
Technical data
The MRU sensors can be supplied in a variety of performances and prices to meet the
customer's needs. The table below shows the various performances in relation to the MRU 6.
Overview of capabilities of MRU models
MRU 6
MRU 5
MRU 4
MRU H
MRU Z
MRU 2
MRU D
MRU 1
3
3
Yes
3
3
No
3
3
Yes
3
3
No
3
3
No
2
2
No
2
2
No
1
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Outputs:
Roll and pitch angles
Magnetic heading, static
Heading angle, dynamic only
Roll and pitch angular velocity
Magnetic field in g-frame
Magnetic field in b-frame
Acceleration in b-frame
Heave measurements
Surge and sway measurements
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Inputs:
Speed log
External heading
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Interfaces:
Analog channels, 4
Digital RS-232/422 compatible
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Capability
Primary sensors:
Accelerometers
Angular rate sensors
Magnetometer
Functions:
Full "strap down" function
Free mounting orientation
Lever arm corrections
Sensor temperature comp. &
linearisation & orthogonalisation
Built-in self testing
2.2
Technical data
Health, environment and safety
Operation or troubleshooting of MRU equipment will not imply any risk for heavy lift, high
voltages, explosions or exposure to gas. The MRU complies with IEC 950/EN60950
standards regarding fire, mechanical and heat hazards, radiation and chemical hazards.
2.3
Restrictions in guarantee
The liability of Seatex is limited to repair of MRUs only under the terms and conditions stated
in reference [1] and excludes consequential damages such as customer's loss of profit or
damage to other systems traceable back to MRU malfunction. The warranty does not cover
malfunctions of the MRU resulting from the following conditions:
a) The MRU is not shipped in the original transport boxes.
b) The MRU has been exposed to extreme shock and vibrations.
c) The MRU housing has been opened by the customer in an attempt to carry out repair
work.
d) Over-voltage or incorrect power connection.
2.3.1
Mechanical shock and improper transportation
Whilst the MRU is designed to be very robust, it is nevertheless an accurate measurement

system and contains a number of relatively fragile components. For reliable performance and
long life the MRU should be protected at all times from excessive mechanical shock. The unit
can tolerate mechanical shocks up to 100 g. However, this limit can easily be exceeded if, for
example, the unit is dropped. In some applications extra shock damping may be needed. The
MRU is delivered in a specially designed transportation box which should be kept in store by
the customer. Always use this box for transportation and storage of the MRU because the
warranty does not apply unless the specified box is used for transportation.
2.3.2
Technical data
Wrong electrical connection, fusing of the power supply
Permanent damage to the MRU may occur if power is applied to signal pins or the unit is
exposed to over-voltage. Maximum allowed voltage to the MRU is 30 Volts.
Hence, it is imperative that the power connection is always checked whenever new cables and
connectors are used. This can be done by measuring the DC power voltage at the MRU
connector before connecting the MRU. The warranty does not cover burnt out power or signal
I/O circuits. The MRU must be protected by an external fast fuse rated at 1 A or a power
supply with a current limit must be used. The MRU will short circuit a reversed polarity
power supply and blow this fuse without damage to the unit. If such a fuse is not used, the
internal power supply will burn out and the MRU will be permanently damaged.
2.4
Performance data
2.4.1
MRU 6 specification
Function
The MRU 6 outputs roll, pitch and yaw with magnetic north seeking together with relative
dynamic heave, surge and sway measurements. It has accurate measurements of roll, pitch
and heave at high horizontal accelerations. Use of the built-in magnetic north sensor or an
external heading input provides a precise estimation of the angular yaw rate error and the
availability of heading information output at high data rate. The MRU can operate through
360 degrees in all axes.
Figure 1 MRU 6 functional modules
Technical data
Typical applications are sonar compensation of orientation and heave on ROVs and ships that
require absolute north information, motion sensor for motion control and damping systems for
high speed vessels and advanced ocean wave measurement systems with north information.
Variables Output from the MRU 6
The MRU 6 outputs roll, pitch and yaw angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed to
the vehicle frame. Symmetric Euler parameters of rotation are also available. The unit outputs
relative (dynamic) heave, surge, sway positions, velocities and accelerations in adjustable
frames. The MRU 6 provides a magnetic field in the fixed vehicle frame or geographic frame.
Variables Input to the MRU 6
The unit may be integrated with external input of velocity and heading from external systems.
Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU 6 via the RS-232 interface at any time.
In addition, an external one-second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin
or the AUX3 line to enable complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock
system (typical from a GPS system or other highly accurate time source).
Angular Rate Sensors
Number of sensors:..................................................................................................................... 3
Angular orientation range: ........................................................................................... Unlimited
Angular rate range:...........................................................................................................150/s
Resolution in all axes: ........................................................................................................0.001
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:.......................................................................0.015/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ...................................................................................... 0.020 RMS
Static accuracy heading (no magn. vehicle influence, <60 latitude):......................... 0.3 RMS
Dynamic accuracy heading (at optimal magnetic conditions, <60 latitude): ................ 1 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): .............................................. 0.020 RMS
Scale factor error: ......................................................................................................0.15% RMS
Acceleration Sensors
Acceleration range (all axes):......................................................................................... 30 m/s2
Acceleration noise1: ...........................................................................................0.002 m/s2 RMS
Acceleration accuracy: .........................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Technical data
Heave Motion Output

Output range:....................................................................................................50 m, adjustable
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Dynamic accuracy:...................................................................5 cm or 5% whichever is highest
Magnetic Sensors
Magnetic sensor input range: ................................................................................... 100 Tesla
Magnetometer resolution (all axes):........................................................................... <10 nTesla
Magnetic sensor noise1:...................................................................................... 0.1 Tesla RMS
Magnetic sensor scale factor error: .............................................................................0.5% RMS
Magnetic signature (at 1 m distance, worst direction typical 10 nTesla): ................. <50 nTesla
Magnetic Output
3-axis terrestrial field in the fixed vehicle or geographic frame: ............................. 100 Tesla
Internal Processing
Internal update rate, angular rate sensors:.........................................................................400 Hz
Main processing cycle frequency:.....................................................................................100 Hz
Orientation estimation cycle frequency: ............................................. 1 Hz, Kalman filter based
Orientation erection time (from power on): ...................................................... Max. 15 minutes
1) When the MRU is stationary over a 30-minute period.
2) When the MRU is exposed to a combined two-axis sinusoidal angular motion with five
minutes duration.
2.4.2
MRU 5 specification
Function
The MRU 5 is the same as the MRU 6 except that it contains no magnetic sensor. The MRU
unit provides no absolute north information and the measurement drifts slowly in yaw, except
when external heading is input to the MRU 5.
10
Technical data

Typical applications are roll, pitch and heave compensation of multi-beam echo sounders on
ROVs and ships for seabed mapping, heave compensation of offshore cranes, dynamic motion
monitoring of roll, pitch angles and linear accelerations on offshore structures and platforms
and roll, pitch and heave measurements for use in dynamic positioning systems.
frames.
Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU 5 via the RS-232 interface at any time.
11
Technical data
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:.......................................................................0.015/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ...................................................................................... 0.020 RMS
Heave Motion Output
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Internal Processing
minutes duration.
2.4.3
MRU 4 specification
Function
The MRU 4 is built the same way as the MRU 6 but utilises a different type of angular rate
sensors. The MRU 4 is specially designed to accurately measure roll, pitch and heave together
with magnetic heading in environments with extreme horizontal accelerations.
The unit accepts external input of speed and heading information for improved accuracy in
heave, roll and pitch during turns and accelerations.
12
Technical data

The MRU 4 is an ideal sensor for orientation and heave measurements of oceanographic
buoys, tow-fish and ROVs.
frames. The MRU 4 provides a magnetic field in the fixed vehicle frame or geographic frame.

The unit may be integrated with external input of speed log and heading from an external
gyro compass. Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU 4 via the RS-232
interface at any time.
13
Technical data
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch, yaw:...........................................................................0.1/s RMS
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ........................................................................................ 0.04 RMS
Static accuracy heading (no magn. vehicle influence, <60 latitude):......................... 0.5 RMS
Dynamic accuracy heading (at optimal magnetic conditions, <60 latitude): ............. 1.2 RMS
Dynamic2 accuracy roll, pitch (for a 5 amplitude): ................................................ 0.05 RMS
Scale factor error: ........................................................................................................0.2% RMS
Heave Motion Output
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Magnetic Sensors
Magnetic sensor input range: ................................................................................... 100 Tesla
Magnetometer resolution (all axes):........................................................................... <10 nTesla
Magnetic sensor noise1:...................................................................................... 0.1 Tesla RMS
Magnetic sensor scale factor error: .............................................................................0.5% RMS
Magnetic signature (at 1 m distance, worst direction typical 10 nTesla): ................. <50 nTesla
Magnetic Output
3-axis terrestrial field in the fixed vehicle or geographic frame: ............................. 100 Tesla
Internal Processing
minutes duration.
14
2.4.4
Technical data
MRU H specification
Function
The MRU H is constructed in the same way as the MRU 5 but utilises a different type of
angular rate sensors. The MRU H is specially designed for motion measurements in marine
applications requiring highly accurate heave measurements in environments with extreme
horizontal accelerations.
heave, roll and pitch during turns and acceleration.
Figure 4 MRU H functional modules

The MRU H is an ideal sensor for roll, pitch and heave compensation of echo sounders and
sonars. The MRU H can also be used on typical ship motions monitoring applications such as
hull stress monitoring, voyage recording, helideck motion monitoring, as well as with
dynamic positioning systems.
Variables Output from the MRU H
The MRU H outputs roll, pitch and yaw angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed
to the vehicle frame. Symmetric Euler parameters of rotation are also available. The unit
outputs relative (dynamic) heave, surge, sway-positions, velocities and accelerations in
adjustable frames.
15
Technical data
Variables Input to the MRU H

Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU H via the RS-232 interface at any time.
Orientation Output
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: ........................................................................................ 0.04 RMS
Heave Motion Output
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Internal Processing
minutes duration.
16
2.4.5
Technical data
MRU Z specification
Function
The MRU Z is constructed in the same way as the MRU H but utilises a different type of
linear accelerometers. The limitation compared to an MRU H is that the MRU Z can only be
mounted in one fixed direction relative to the ship and that is with the connector pointing
down. The cost-effective MRU Z model is specially designed for use in marine applications
and is the ideal sensor for heave compensation of echo sounders. The unit incorporates 3-axis
Micro-Electro-Mechanical-Structure (MEMS) sensors for both linear acceleration and angular
rate.
heave, roll and pitch during turns and acceleration.
Figure 5 MRU Z functional modules

Variables Output from the MRU Z
The MRU Z outputs roll, pitch and yaw angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed
to the vehicle frame. Symmetric Euler parameters of rotation are also available. The unit
outputs relative (dynamic) heave, surge, sway-positions, velocities and accelerations in
adjustable frames.
17
Technical data
Variables Input to the MRU Z

Commands plus data may be transmitted to the MRU Z via the RS-232 interface at any time.
Angular orientation range: ....................................................................................................45
Orientation Output
Static1 accuracy roll, pitch: .......................................................................................... 0.1 RMS
Acceleration noise1: .............................................................................................0.01 m/s2 RMS
Scale factor error: ...........................................................................................................1% RMS
Heave Motion Output
Periods:............................................................................................................................1 to 25 s
Dynamic accuracy (RMS):.......................................................5 cm or 5% whichever is highest
Internal Processing
Settling time in heave to obtain full accuracy (from power on): ...................... Max. 30 minutes
minutes duration.
18
2.4.6
Technical data
MRU 2 specification
Function
The MRU 2 is specially designed for use in marine applications that require both static and
dynamic roll and pitch measurements. The unit incorporates 2-axis sensors for linear
acceleration and angular rate. The limitation compared to an MRU H which has 3-axis
angular rate and acceleration measurements, is that the MRU 2 is not capable of measuring
heave and can only be mounted in one fixed direction relative to the ship. The MRU 2
achieves high reliability by using sensors with no rotational or mechanical wear-out parts.

Typical applications for an MRU 2 are roll and pitch measurements for use within voyage
recording and dynamic positioning systems, and for antenna compensation.
The MRU 2 outputs roll and pitch angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed to the
vehicle frame. The unit outputs relative (dynamic) surge and sway velocities and
accelerations.
An external one second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin or the AUX3
line to enable complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock system (typical
from a GPS system or other highly accurate time source).
19
Technical data

Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch: ...................................................................................0.1/s RMS
Internal Processing
minutes duration.
2.4.7
MRU D specification
Function
The cost-effective MRU D model is specially designed for use in marine applications and is
the ideal sensor for roll and pitch measurements on board ships. The unit incorporates 2-axis
Micro-Electro-Mechanical-Structure (MEMS) sensors for both linear acceleration and angular
rate. This unit achieves high reliability by using solid state sensors with no rotational or
mechanical wear-out parts.
This unit has to be mounted in a fixed direction relative to the ship and is best suited for
applications with limited range in roll and pitch. If unlimited mounting orientation and/or
unlimited mounting range is required we recommend one of the MRU models with sensors in
all three axis.
20
Technical data
Figure 7 The MRU-D functional modules

Typical applications for this MRU D model are roll and pitch measurements for use within
voyage recording and dynamic positioning systems, and for antenna compensation.
Variables Output from the MRU D
The MRU D outputs roll and pitch angles and corresponding angular rate vectors fixed to the
vehicle frame. The unit outputs relative (dynamic) surge and sway velocities and
accelerations.
Variables Input to the MRU D
An external one second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN Pin to enable
complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock system (typical from a GPS
system or other highly accurate time source).
Resolution in all axes: ..........................................................................................................0.01
Orientation Output
Angular rate noise1 roll, pitch: ...................................................................................0.5/s RMS
21
Technical data
Internal Processing
minutes duration.
2.4.8
MRU 1 specification
Function
The MRU 1 is a single axis motion sensor with the same external housing, signal processing
electronics and power supply as the MRU 6. This unit measures linear acceleration in one
axis by use of a high quality servo accelerometer. The MRU 1 is capable of synchronising and
time-tagging data to a master system. The MRU 1 has the same thermal accelerometer
modelling and calibration as found in the other MRU models.
22
Technical data
The MRU 1 is the ideal sensor for accurate measurement of vertical and transverse motion.
The sensor is specifically designed for measuring accelerations on board ships or in offshore
structures.
The MRU 1 outputs linear acceleration in one axis, the Y-axis.
An external one-second time pulse signal can be input to the unit on the XIN line to enable
complete synchronisation of the MRU with an external clock system (typical from a GPS
system or other highly accurate time source).
Number of sensors:...............................................................................................................None
Sensitive axis:.................................................. Y-axis, along length direction of MRU cylinder.
Vibration lowpass filtering (2 order LP-filter):................................... Adjustable, 0.01 to 25 Hz
Period range for integration: ...........................................................................................1 to 25 s
Internal Processing
Internal sample rate at accelerometer:......................................400 kHz (aliasing free sampling)
2.5
Restrictions in use
The MRU models are designed for marine applications with a linear acceleration less than
30 m/s2 (3g) and an angular rate range less than 150/s. Only relative dynamic position,
velocity and acceleration are available from the models. The MRU is not intended for
standard inertial navigation purposes.
The linear motion measurements are limited by the selection of their motion periods available
in the range 1 to 25 seconds.
Note
Even though the dynamic measurement range of the MRU 5 and H models is
unlimited, the static measurement range is limited to maximum 45. If this limit
is exceeded, an instability may occur. This restriction in use can be avoided by
23
Technical data
inputting external heading information to these models. The same restriction in

use will occur on the MRU 6 and 4 models if the fluxgate usage is disabled and no
external heading information is sent to the unit.
2.6
Physical dimensions
MRU 1, 2, H, 4, 5 and 6 models

Height:............................................................................................................................. 204 mm
Diameter:......................................................................................................................... 105 mm
Weight: ............................................................................................................................... 2.5 kg
Colour:...................................................................................................................................Blue
MRU D and Z models
Height:............................................................................................................................. 129 mm
Diameter:......................................................................................................................... 105 mm
Weight: ............................................................................................................................... 1.5 kg
Colour:...................................................................................................................................Blue
2.7
Power
Voltage input:....................................................................................................12 to 30 Volt DC

Recommended voltage: ..............................................................................................24 Volt DC
Power consumption, MRU 6 & 5 models (power up surge):................................Max. 11 Watts
Power consumption, MRU 6 & 5 models (max. at -5C operation temp): ...................... 9 Watts
Power consumption, MRU 6 & 5 models (max. at +50C operation temp. or above): ... 5 Watts
Power consumption, MRU 4, H, 3, 2 & 1 models: .................................................Max. 6 Watts
Power consumption, MRU D & Z models:.............................................................Max. 3 Watts
Power rise speed:........................................................................................................ Not critical
Batteries: ...................................................................... None, connection to UPS recommended
2.8
Environmental specification
All MRU models

Enclosure material:......................................................................................Anodised aluminium
Enclosure protection: .......................................................................................................... IP-66
Operating temp. range:...............................................................................................-5 to +55C
Operating humidity: ............................................................................................ Sealed, no limit
Storage temp. range:.................................................................................................-20 to +70C
Storage humidity: ................................................................................................ Sealed, no limit
Max. allowed vibration operational (10 - 2000 Hz continuous): .................................... 0.5 m/s2
Max. allowed vibration non operational (0 - 2000 Hz continuous): ................................ 20 m/s2
Max. shock non operational (10 ms peak): .................................................................. 1000 m/s2
24
2.9
Technical data
Other data
Digital I/O Protocol

No. of output serial lines: ......................................................................One, RS-232 compatible
Max. no of output variables: .................................................................................................... 16
Max. output data rate: .......................................................................................................100 Hz
Data delay:.........................................................................Typical 9 ms plus transmission delay
Data out: ............................................... By request from host computer or cyclic output of data
No. of input serial lines: ..................................................................... Three, RS-232 compatible
Digital RS-232 Interface
The digital interface is shared between the setup/configuration and general data output. The
digital interface can be used independent of the analog interface.
Digital output:
Digital input:
Baud rate:
Drive length:
RS-232 compatible, but high current drive capability. Ground common to

the MRU communication ground. Galvanically isolated from electronics.
RS-232 compatible, ground can be used differentially. Galvanically isolated
from electronics.
Software adjustable 1200 - 57600 baud 8 bits, no handshake, adjustable
parity.
The RS-232 drive length can be increased to 1 km by the use of a special
RS-232 enhancer at the cable end opposite to the MRU. Max. baud rate at 1
km is 9600 baud.
Analog Data Out

No. of channels:.......................................................................................................................... 4
Range:.....................................................................10V, 0 to 10V, 5V DC, 14 bits resolution
Absolute accuracy: .........................................................................................<0.1% of full scale
Output data rate: ................................................................................................................100 Hz
Data delay:............................................................................................................ Typical 7.5 ms
Electrical data:........................................................................................ Output resistance 100
Max. external load:...................................................................... 10k (1M for full accuracy)
Other
Internal lithium battery life: ..........................................................................................>10 years
MTBF (computed): ......................................................................................................... 50000 h
Connector: .................................................................................... Souriau 851-36RG 16-26 S50
25
Technical data
Blank page
26
3.
Installation
INSTALLATION
For description of installation of the MRU, please see the Installation Manual for your MRU
model number, reference [2], [3], [4], [5] or [6].
27
Installation
Blank page
28
Technical description
4.
4.1
Design principles
This chapter covers basic properties of inertial motion measurement and explains how the
Seatex MRU models are functioning. It also defines the basic principles required to
understand the function of motion measurement devices.
4.1.1
Six degrees of freedom motion
A free moving body or vehicle has six independent degrees of freedom which may be
quantified as:
a) Linear translations in three perpendicular axes directions (x,y,z below).
b) Rotation about three perpendicular axes (shown below as x,y,z).
Figure 9 Rigid body motion

To obtain full knowledge concerning the state of this body or vehicle we also need to know
the velocities of the six entities above. Twelve totally independent numbers or variables are
needed to describe the full state of a moving stiff body at a given moment. The derivatives of
the velocities are accelerations, and the differentiated angular velocities are angular
accelerations. These six accelerations provide information about the forces acting on the
vehicle and can additionally be of value to the customer's system.
29
Inertial motion measurement can similarly be divided into the following tasks:
a) Inertial orientation measurements.
b) Inertial linear translation measurements.
Inertial orientation measurement requires a gyro-like device which physically measures
angular acceleration, angular velocity or angular displacements. Some sensors physically
measure angular rate, and integrate the rate over time to compute the angular displacement in
the sensor interface. This allows an angular rate sensor to perform like an angular
displacement sensor.
The inertial linear translation measurement requires acceleration measurement. There exists
no inertial sensor that directly measures the physical linear velocity. Consequently, the linear
motion is integrated over time twice to obtain the translations. This puts high requirements on
the accelerometers. Also, the orientation measurement must be very accurate to alleviate the
unavoidable g-component of the acceleration.
Inertial measurement of linear translations are only useful if the orientation of the body or
vehicle is known (for example if the motion is mechanically constrained in some way), or the
orientation is measured. In most cases, orientation measurement cannot be avoided, even if
only the linear acceleration, velocity and translation are measured.
Variables Output from the MRU and Similar Systems
The theoretical maximum number of variables available from an inertial measurement system
is 18. This includes the six accelerations (3 linear, 3 rotational) resulting from the forces
acting on the body. The other 12 are six velocities (3 linear, 3 rotational) and six
displacements (3 linear, 3 rotational).
Most inertial systems can only output some of these variables because the units are dedicated
to a specific application. The MRU can output all 18 variables mentioned above, with some
limitations:
a) Only dynamic (short-term) changes in velocities and positions can be measured.
b) Only dynamic changes in heading (or rotation about a true vertical axis) can be measured
if magnetic heading cannot be used.
c) The angular accelerations are obtained by numeric differentiation of the angular rates.
There are no separate sensors that measure angular acceleration.
The 18 basic output variables can be represented in several ways that are more or less
equivalent. The user can, in principle, compute all the desired variables from these basic 18
variables.
30
4.1.2
Gravity erection of orientation
Most practical Motion Reference Units utilise gravity to locate the vertical direction. The
gravity and the orientation of the system referred to earth down is measured by linear
accelerometers. Since the gravity is a known figure (g = 9.81 m/s2), the measured acceleration
from the accelerometer, a, is used to calculate the orientation of the accelerometer according
to earth down, see the figure below. The orientation angle of the accelerometer according to g
is directly given as:
= arcsin (a/g)
where,
a: measured acceleration by the accelerometer.
g: the gravity.
a
Accelerometer
g
Figure 10 Orientation measurements by utilising accelerometer
An important feature for such systems is to minimise the sensitivity to the horizontal
accelerations of the ship or vehicle. This is a contradiction because the last accelerations
cannot be separated from the g-vector by an accelerometer. A pure, classical inclinometer
directly measures the total acceleration direction. This results in large inclination errors when
horizontal accelerations are present.
The ideal situation is to utilise a Motion Reference Unit that averages the g-vector over an
extremely long period of time in order to obtain an accurate reading of the vertical direction.
A ship or a vessel will only accelerate for a limited time (except if cruising in circles). The
sensitivity to short term horizontal accelerations is restricted by averaging the gravity over
time. The angular erection to the vertical is calculated in the MRU in a complicated way,
since the calculation is carried out for 3 axes in parallel. The erection is performed through
software in the MRU. Figure 11 shows the principle for a simplified 1-axis MRU like device.
The function is:
a) Angular rate is integrated to roll angle.
31
b) Inclination is measured by the use of an accelerometer sensitive in the side direction of

the ship.
c) The roll angle is slowly adjusted from the difference between inclinometer output and
integrated roll rate.
Figure 11 A single axis rate gyro based device

A very small feedback in the controller results in low acceleration sensitivity, but errors in the
angular rate sensors will contribute largely to the error in the roll angle output . The better
the quality of the angular rate sensor and the better estimate errors in the angular rate sensors,
the better the total performance of the system will be. In a device like the MRU advanced
error models are used in order to reduce the errors as much as possible (see chapter 4.2.3 for
more details).
Figure 11 shows how the speedlog subtracts an adjustment on the side acceleration of the ship
to compensate for acceleration set up by the rate of turning at a high speed.
32
4.1.3
How to compute velocity/position
Position and velocity are both computed from acceleration in inertial Motion Reference Units.
If the acceleration measurement was infinitely accurate, it would be sufficient to integrate this
measurement twice to obtain the true position. The basic problem is to subtract the gcomponent of the measured acceleration. It is also important to know the orientation of the
gravity force relative to the ship, and not just the magnitude of the gravity.
Angular rate sensors provide the orientation. The angular rate sensing and the accurate
determination of the orientation of g are the limiting factors concerning the computation of
the linear velocity and position in most motion sensing products. The subtraction of the gvector is easily performed on a stabilised mechanical platform, where the accelerometers are
directly mounted on the platform.
One fundamental property to be aware of is that it is much easier to remove the g-influence in
the vertical component than in the horizontal component of the acceleration vector. A small
error in roll/pitch angle results in the following horizontal acceleration error:
aerr = g
For the vertical direction the same influence is approximately:
aerr = 0.52
where,
is given in radians
aerr is given in m/s2
A small error in the acceleration will be integrated over a long period of time. It is necessary
to low pass filter the integration of the acceleration to velocity and position to some given
values, so that the unavoidable errors are kept under control. This principle is shown for a
single axis in Figure 12. In the Seatex MRU the reference position and reference velocity are
always kept at zero. This means that if the MRU senses no motion, it will slowly reset the
position and velocity to zero. This type of device is best for sensing fast changes in position
and velocity.
33
Figure 12 Computation of velocity/position

The controller shown in Figure 12 can be tuned to choose between good low frequency
performance or to minimise the bias in the velocity and the position. The unit will not perform
well for linear motion with a frequency below the cutoff frequency (see chapter 4.2.3.3 for
more information).
34
4.1.4
Magnetic north seeking
North seeking can basically be performed in the following three ways:

1) By utilising the earth angular rotation rate, like in the gyro compasses.
2) By measuring the heading relative to an inertial frame from accurate position
measurements, like in GPS compasses.
3) By using the earth magnetic field, like in magnetic compasses such as the MRU models 4
and 6.
The MRU models 4 and 6 have a 3-axis magnetometer inside to provide magnetic north
measurements. The principle of determining heading from the MRU is very similar to the one
used for the vertical erection discussed above and shown in Figure 13.
Figure 13 Magnetic north seeking

The three measurements from the magnetometer can be compensated for the local vessel
softmagnetic and hardmagnetic field, described in chapter 4.1.5. This is very important when
the MRU is placed in a magnetic environment with steel, DC engines, etc. The compensated
magnetic measurements are rotated from the body frame to a horizontal frame by the MRU
roll and pitch angles, indicated by the "software gimbals" box in Figure 13. The north
direction is then found from the compensated horizontal magnetic measurements by utilising
the fact that the earth magnetism has no east component. The difference between the magnetic
heading and the MRU yaw is fed through a Kalman Filter (slow controller) that updates the
bias estimate of the yaw rate gyro. This is, however, more complicated than shown here, since
the true vertical axis is different from the yaw axis, when the vessel is rolling and pitching.
35
4.1.5
Magnetic disturbances
Magnetic compasses operating in magnetic environments are disturbed by the local magnetic
field. The disturbances give larger azimuth errors for larger inclinations (the angle between
the vertical direction (gravity) and the earth magnetic vector), and especially in areas that are
closer to the poles, where the horizontal magnetic field is weaker.
Softmagnetic disturbances distort the earth field. Steel walls and other magnetic materials
change the direction and the magnitude of the earth magnetic field. However, these
disturbances are usually quite stable, since the distorting materials are not moving relative to
the magnetometer. These disturbances may cause an azimuth error of 4-30 degrees if not
compensated for, depending on the magnetic environment on-board the vessel.
Hardmagnetic disturbances from permanent magnets and electrical currents add magnetism to
the earth's field. These can change more easily by temperature changes, shocks, people
carrying magnets passing by etc. Typically, hardmagnetic disturbances can give an azimuth
error of 20-30 degrees if not compensated for depending on the magnetic environment onboard the vessel. Typically, a 1 A electrical current through a long straight wire located a 3
cm distance away from the magnetometer, will set up an equivalent magnetic field to the earth
magnetic field.
This illustrates how sensitive the magnetometer inside magnetic compasses is for magnetic
disturbances. In the MRU 4 and 6 models the magnetic disturbances can be compensated for
by the included software for magnetic neutralisation of the vessel's own magnetic signature.
In chapter 4.2.3.2 it is described how magnetic neutralisation is implemented in the MRU
software.
4.1.6
Frames for measurements of motion entities
It is necessary to operate with a unified co-ordinate frame in order to avoid confusion in the
definitions of the outputs from the MRU. Many different definitions are used in industry. The
following basic rules apply:
a) Frames are orthogonal, which means that there are 90-degree angles between the axes.
Frames have a name.
b) The frames are always right-hand oriented as shown in Figure 14. The succession of axes
are X, Y and Z. Translations, velocities and accelerations are positive in the direction of
the axis.
c) Turning is defined as positive around a given axis, when the rotation is clockwise seen
from the origin along a given axis. Rotation X means rotation around the axis X in the
frame.
36
Figure 14 Right oriented frame

4.1.6.1
Definition of frames and variables
Geographic Frame or G-frame

This frame is called the g-frame. The g-frame has its origin at the current geographic location
and is fixed to the earth surface. The frame is chosen with the following successive axes
directions:
N: Geographic north
E: Geographic east
D: Down
37
Figure 15 Geographic frame and body frame

Down is defined by the local gravity (normal to the ideal earth geoide).
Body Frame or B-frame

We call this frame the b-frame. This frame is fixed to the vehicle or ship with its origin in the
ship's centre of gravity, CG. The definition of the axes directions is as follows:
R:
R-axis
Points in the bow direction of a ship and horizontally when pitch angle is
zero.
P:
P-axis
Points in the starboard direction of a ship and horizontally when roll angle is
zero.
Y:
Y-axis
Points down in the direction of gravity when roll and pitch are zero.
38
Figure 16 Body/vehicle frame definition

4.1.6.2
Used reference frames
Commonly used frames in the MRU are:

g: Geographic frame, with north, east and down at a given location.
h: Heading frame, axes F(forward), S(starboard), D(down). The F and S are always in the
horizontal plane. The axis directions F and S are the axes for surge and sway motion as
defined here. This h-frame is the same as the g-frame rotated the heading angle around
the D-axis.
b: Body frame. This frame is fixed to the vehicle or ship with its origin in the ship's centre
of gravity, CG.
s:
Sensor frame. This frame is defined by the MRU itself (the axes marked on the housing
of the MRU). The s and b-frame are identical if the MRU mounting angles set in the
software configuration, are zero.
39
Figure 17 Overview of used frames
40
4.2
Construction
This chapter contains an in-depth description of the function of the top model MRU 6. The
description is intended for potential users who want to see if the MRU is suitable for their
application. The differences between the MRU 6 and the lower model versions are described
in chapter 2.4.
The description of the highest level functions of an MRU 6 are shown in Figure 18 and the
mechanical layout in Figure 18. All functions are located inside the housing of the MRU,
including power supply and all signal processing. The function is similar to an Inertial
Navigation System (INS). This applies to both sensors and processing algorithms.

The interior of the MRU is divided into two sub-assemblies consisting of an electronics unit
and a sensor unit. The model depends on the type of sensors in the MRU. The electronic unit
consists of plug-in circular multi layer boards. Extensive use is made of surface mounted
components. The number of sensor boards mounted will depend on the MRU model number.
The unit is divided into nine separate mechanical parts, which may be exchanged very quickly
by plug-in boards when the housing cylinder has been removed. The housing cylinder should,
however, not be removed by anyone else than Seatex.
41
Figure 19 MRU 6 mechanical layout
42
4.2.1
Internal sensors
The MRU 6 has three built-in sensors that measure the following physical vector quantities:
angular rate, linear acceleration and magnetic field. The sensor system is equal for all three
axes, providing no limitations in mounting or operational orientation. The sensor readings are
scaled, linearized, orthogonalized and temperature compensated before they are passed on to
the more advanced signal processing inside the MRU. This is described in chapter 4.2.3.
The sensor axes are accurately aligned to the axes marked on the top lid of the MRU by the
orthogonalisation procedure. This means that accurate axis directional trimming is not
performed mechanically, but by computer software. The precision reference is the top lid.
Index holes in the top lid help the customer to align the MRU properly. The actual MRU axes
can be turned by software to various sets of roll, pitch and yaw angles relative to the basic
directions marked on the MRU housing.
No analog trimming is used inside the MRU. All sensors are trimmed by software during a
computer controlled calibration and burn-in-procedure completed at the factory.
4.2.1.1
The angular rate sensors
The MRU models measure the angular rate vector initially without the use of moving parts
(gyros). Coriolis force based vibratory angular rate sensors are used in the MRU 5 and 6
models. These rate sensors use linear vibratory motion instead of rotary motion, and have low
power consumption and no wear-out parts.
The accuracy of the angular rate sensors is very important for the accuracy of the MRU. If the
gyroscopes are accurate only small and slow feedback from the accelerometers is needed to
determine the vertical direction at all times. This ensures low sway and surge acceleration
sensitivity in the vertical direction.
The characteristics of the Coriolis force based angular rate sensors are as follows:
Very low environmental sensitivity to acceleration and vibration given by high frequent
oscillation (14 kHz), and a symmetric design that cancels external vibrations. This means
that mechanical vibrations in the sensor have only limited impact on the MRU rate
sensors.
Both the scale factor (gain) and the offset (zero) of the sensors are stabilised by a
symmetric and simple mechanical design of the oscillatory mechanical system. Electrical
drift is cancelled in the basic analog design.
High linearity, which results in small average drift errors during oscillating rate loads (as
on a ship's roll axis).
Small high frequency noise level.
The design of the Coriolis gyro is based on the use of a vibration cylinder.
43
Figure 20 The Coriolis force rate gyro function

d
f
s
c
v
ac
Drive axis direction.

Feedback, measurement of drive axis.
Sensing axis.
Compensation axis.
Rotation rate in an axis normal to the paper plane.
Linear velocity set up by driven oscillation.
The Coriolis acceleration.
The sensor is implemented as a force feedback system. The d-axis is used for excitation, and
the f-axis is used to measure the drive amplitude to control the excitation. A measurement
feedback loop controls an excitation along the c-axis. This excitation cancels the vibration set
up along axis s given by the Coriolis acceleration ac, which we want to measure. The drive
signal to the c-axis is thus the final output from the rate sensor. The gyroscopes are interfaced
to the computer by a high resolution A/D system ( technology), and some of the signal
processing for the rate integration is performed directly in a gate array creating the interface
to the micro-computer. A similar design based on quarts rate sensors are used in the MRU
models 4, H and 2.
4.2.1.2
The accelerometers
The accelerometers in the MRU 5 and 6 models are of the accurate pendulum type. These
accelerometers consist of a proof mass, a hinge, some damping, a pickoff, a forcer and a servo
loop.
44
Figure 21 The pendulum accelerometer construction

The etched quarts seismic element is held in place by an electronic servo loop during both
static and dynamic acceleration. Acceleration is determined by measuring the current required
to keep the seismic element (proof mass) in place. The current output is directly proportional
to the acceleration input.
The accelerometers are interfaced to the internal MRU computer with a special integrating
interface, based on gate array technology. This means that the computer directly reads
velocity increments and not acceleration, from this interface. The resolution of the
accelerometer interface is very high due to the signal conversion technology.
4.2.1.3
The magnetometer
The magnetometer is based on the servo fluxgate principle. This means that a local 3-axis coil
system (of Helmholtz type) cancels the external (the field to be measured) magnetic field. The
output from the sensor is then three DC currents representing the three magnetic field
components. The relation between current and magnetic field in a non-ferromagnetic
environment is linear and given by Biot Savart's law. This means high gain stability and high
linearity. This sensor has a much better linearity and stability than standard fluxgate sensors
based on direct voltage output from the fluxgate itself without the use of a zero field.
A zero field detector is placed inside this coil system and creates feedback to the DC current
flowing in the Helmholtz coils. The detection of the zero field offset is carried out by the use
of a traditional fluxgate based on a ferromagnetic metallic glass core and non-orthogonal use
of the core.
The electronics is directly controlled by the micro-computer for easy self-check and trimming
of the sensor from the internal MRU computer. Most of the electronics is placed in a gate
array. The DC current output conversion is implemented by the use of a high resolution
A/D converter.
45
4.2.2
Sensor calibration procedure
An advanced, time efficient and error-safe procedure for calibration of the internal sensors is
one of the key properties to achieve the quality of the MRU product. Calibration,
orthogonalisation, linearisation and temperature compensation is carried out for each physical
sensor inside each MRU by a computerised procedure.
For calibration of the angular rate sensors and the accelerometers a 2-axis Acutronic rate table
system with temperature chamber, is used. The calibration process is fully automated with the
capacity of calibrating and testing eight MRUs simultaneously. Due to the temperature
chamber on the rate table, temperature gradients can be kept at a minimum during calibration.
The accuracy of this Acutronic system is better than 1 arc s (0.0003) and provides a very
accurate reference during calibration and testing. The calibration of the angular rate sensors is
performed at different rates and temperatures. The accelerometers in the MRU are calibrated
by setting the rate table at certain angles relative to the vertical and repeating the procedure
for different temperatures. From these data the complete sensor calibration parameters are
computed using a generalised least square parameter fit procedure.
The magnetometer is calibrated with the MRU inside a precise 3-axis Helmholtz coil set
controlled by a computer. This is a magnetic field generator that generates homogenous
magnetic fields. Fields with different directions and magnitudes are set up across the MRU.
The internal dynamic and static ferro-magnetism of the MRU is compensated for in the sensor
calibration.
The parameters from the calibration process for each MRU can be found in the ASCII file
with the name "mruNNNN.par" on the floppy disk accompanying each MRU delivery. Here
NNNN is the serial number of the MRU.
4.2.2.1
MRU calibration certificate
After calibration, static and dynamic tests are performed on each MRU for final performance
verification. These tests are carried out utilising the Acutronic rate table system and
performed immediately after sensor calibration. The results from these tests are presented on
the MRU Calibration Certificate delivered with each unit.
In order to provide the customers with data showing the quality of each MRU compared with
its technical specifications, the following tests are carried out:
1) Dynamic roll and pitch test that combines two sine functions with different frequencies for
a five-minute recording period. The results are presented by RMS numbers and plots of
both the measurements and the errors are shown on the certificate.
2) Static noise level test for the roll, pitch and yaw angles and angular rate along with the
accelerometers and the magnetic sensor. The results are presented as RMS numbers for a
30-minute recording period.
46
3) Rate gyro scale factor test by rotating each sensor axis in the rate table at 10/s and
30/s. The measured scale factor error is presented as an RMS number.
4) The accelerometer scale factor is tested by tilting the MRU in steps of 30 degrees around a
circle. The measured scale factor error is presented as an RMS number.
All the above tests are performed at room temperature. The Calibration Certificate contains
data of each measurement along with the test requirements and an approval column
(passed/failed). The test requirements are according to the technical specifications for each
MRU model given in chapter 2.4 in this manual.
Figure 22 The Calibration Certificate for an MRU 6

When an MRU has passed the test requirements for each test, the certificate is signed by the
tester and included in the MRU Delivery Specific Documents, ref. [7]. At the top of each
MRU Calibration Certificate there is a model type number, the serial number of the approved
unit and a unique Calibration Certificate number.
The formula for the RMS (Root Mean Square) calculation of the errors used in presenting the
performance accuracy on the MRU Calibration Certificate and the technical specification for
each MRU model, is as follows:
47
RMS ( x) =
1
N
N
x2
i =1 i
where,
x
the measured variable amplitude for the sample, i.
the total number of samples.
4.2.3
Processing algorithms
It is important to understand its internal functions to fully exploit the possibilities of the
MRU. This section should be read before the MRU is used in a new application. The Seatex
MRU should not be used in applications for which it is not designed.
The MRU 6 operates much like a magnetic north seeking "strap down" inertial navigation
system. It is an inertial navigational system without use of gimbals or a mechanical platform.
All sensors are "strapped" to the housing of the unit or to the vehicle where the MRU is
mounted. The MRU 6 algorithms are tailored to obtain optimum performance from the
MRU's internal sensors in marine applications dominated by ocean wave induced roll, pitch
and heave motion. It is important to obtain as much information as possible from the angular
rate sensors, and to provide fast data response for use in critical real time applications of the
MRU.
A variable gain Kalman filter is part of the sensor error estimator. The algorithms take into
account the fact that the placement of the ship's centre of gravity, the MRU 6 location and the
measurement location on a ship, are usually different (lever arm compensation). An
"intuitive" description on how the MRU works, can be summarised as:
a) The angular rate sensors determine the short term orientation of the MRU, expressed as
roll, pitch and yaw angles or body angular velocity. Internally, the orientation
information is kept in a rotation matrix (a 3 x 3 matrix). This computation is executed at
fast cyclic rates and gives instant orientation response to the user.
b) A small feedback from the horizontal acceleration of the vehicle's centre of gravity, CG,
and the earth rate compensates for the angular rate sensor errors. (Compensation for
centripetal acceleration by speed log input is also performed, if available). In a time
frame of 3 to 10 minutes, the horizontal frame in the MRU will slowly be adjusted so that
the observed horizontal accelerations of the CG is averaged to zero.
c) A small feedback from the magnetometer in the heading direction compensates for the
angular rate sensor errors. This is done by first finding the true horizontal component of
the magnetic field, and then computing the north direction. The deviation from north is
used to correct angular rate sensor errors in the heading (yaw) direction. If no magnetic
sensor is available (MRU 5), or the magnetic conditions are poor, then external heading
information input from a gyro compass may replace the internal heading information.
When there is no heading information available, the measurement will drift slowly in
yaw. In this case the yaw angle is of no use.
48
d) Linear motions are computed by limited double integration of the acceleration. This
computation is performed in the g-frame. The limited integration means that the ideal 40
dB/decade frequency response of a double integration is broken at a lower cutoff
frequency. This frequency is typically chosen to be 0.005 Hz, but the user can change it
freely. If a low cutoff frequency is chosen, there will be a moving bias in the velocity
outputs. If a high frequency is chosen, the MRU will not measure low-frequency motions
well. The exact setting can be tuned to achieve the best performance from the MRU. (The
setting of this cutoff frequency corresponds to a tradeoff between external navigation
input weight and INS weight, for those who have worked with integrated navigation.)
The corresponding navigational input of the MRU is always set to zero.
Trimming of the MRU Axis Directions
The axis directions of the MRU are set to be aligned with the axis directions marked on the
MRU housing (R, P, Y) during the calibration procedure. When the MRU is installed in the
vehicle, it is important that the MRU axes are trimmed and aligned to the vehicle axis or the
axis of the system for which it is supposed to compensate the vehicle motions. These offset
angles between the MRU and the vehicle axes need to be downloaded to the MRU from the
setup software, MRC, or from a PC (see the Installation Manual for instructions). The entered
offset angle setting will change the directions of the sensor axes immediately, but the rate
sensors will not "feel" any physical rotation of the MRU. This means that the MRU will align
to the new direction given by the accelerometer and the axes of the magnetometer.
4.2.3.1
Computation of orientation
The orientation information is kept in an on-line rotation matrix representing the rotation of
the geographic frame (g-frame) relative to the body or vehicle frame (b-frame). From a given
initial value of the rotation matrix from b to g-frame Cbg , the present value of Cbg is calculated
by using the differential equation:
C&bg = Cbg b
Here,
C&bg
the skew symmetric form of the angular rate vector b

the time derivative of Cbg .
Angular rate sensors measure the angular rate. The equation above is solved with high
numeric accuracy using a special numerical method. Some of the processing is carried out in
the electronic interface and some in the software. An accurate computation is important for
the MRU's ability to operate in vibrating environments, where strong coning motion is a
problem.
49
The initial value of Cbg is computed in a special initial alignment procedure, where the average
value of the acceleration ab is supposed to provide the down-direction, and the heading from
the magnetic north defines the R-axis. If no magnetic north is available, the measurement will
drift slowly in yaw.
The average time needed to stabilise the initial alignment computation is approximately one
minute. Initial alignment starts immediately after power on, or after a command from the user.
If the vehicle has high dynamics (moves a lot) during startup, there may be problems with the
Kalman filter. At worst the alignment must be redone by restarting the MRU. High
dynamics during startup means that the MRU is moved up to 10 degrees in all axes.
The Orientation Estimation
The orientation estimator observes angular rate sensor errors from the measurement of
acceleration and magnetic fields in the g-frame. The estimator is designed as a variable gain
Kalman filter. The gain is a function of the present noise levels estimated from the
measurements (dependent on the present orientation of the MRU) and the present estimated
error variance in this estimator.
Earth rate compensation takes place in the orientation estimator. The earth rate is slightly
higher than the random drift of the angular rate sensors. Earth rate compensation gives a
small improvement to the performance of the MRU during fast changes in the
orientation of the vehicle. Earth rate is only compensated for when absolute north direction
is available (this means MRU 6, 5, 4 or MRU H with external heading input).
If the vehicle turns with a high velocity or accelerates up to a high velocity, this may result in
a dangerous long term acceleration error in the vehicle's CG. This can occur even if there are
no excursions in roll or pitch angle.
Over a very long period of time (> 500 sec), the size of this error in radians is directly
given by
= a/g [rad]
where "a" is the horizontal acceleration and "g" is the gravity. In this case the MRU functions
like an inclinometer.
Over a short period of time, the roll and pitch error of the MRU is given by
= kv v
where "v" is the change in horizontal velocity of the MRU or the actual time integral of
acceleration, while
kv = 0.0014 [s/m]
A changed pitch rate will give a roll error with the opposite sign. The value of kv is rather low
for the MRU if compared to similar products. This means that the sway acceleration
sensitivity is generally lower for the MRU.
50
In the case of turning at a high speed, we get a centripetal acceleration caused error given by
= kv v
where "" is the turn angle [rad] and "v" is the cruise speed.
An Example
A ship accelerates up to 10 m/s (20 knots) from standstill in a short time. The measured pitch
error caused by this is given as:
= kv 10 = 0.014 rad (0.8)

The same ship does a fast turn of 180 at the same speed v = 10 m/s. The resulting roll error
angle is given as:
= kv 10 = 0.044 rad (2.5)

As seen above, it is necessary to use an external velocity input to the MRU 6 (both speed and
heading input to MRU 5 and H) to restrict the errors on vessels that accelerate fast or operate
at high speeds. Note that the calculation above requires the turn to be so sharp that the
equivalent inclination error (direction of total acceleration) in the turn is more than 2.5
degrees. The error will converge to the acceleration direction after a long period of time. Most
of these errors will be eliminated with a velocity speed log (both speed and heading input
required for MRU 5 and H). An alternative is to neglect the vertical erection during short
periods of expected high acceleration.
Orientation Output Alternatives from the MRU
The orientation can be output as a rotation quaternion or as roll, pitch and yaw angles. The
basic internal entity in the MRU is the rotation quaternion from which the other quantities are
derived. There are several ways of defining these entities and below you will find how this is
defined in the MRU.
Roll, Pitch and Yaw (Angle) Output
There are numerous ways to define the orientation between the g-frame and the b-frame. We
will denote the roll, pitch and yaw angles (,,), which are actual outputs from the MRU. It
is important to note that these angles are not directly related to the R, P and Y-axes. The used
definitions for roll, pitch and yaw angles (named ,,) are given by the following turning
operation between the frames g and b:
a) Start with the two frames g and b aligned.
51
b) Rotate the b-frame an angle about the common Y and D-axis. This angle is defined as
the heading of the vehicle.
c) Rotate the b-frame an angle about the new P-axis of the b-frame.
d) Rotate the b-frame an angle about the new R-axis of the b-frame.
These definitions of rotation angles correspond to the standard definition of roll/pitch/yaw
angles for ships. The definition is a set of so-called Euler angles.
Notes
The angles are measured from the start position to the final position in each step above.
Positive angular directions are clockwise rotations around the actual turning axis, when
looking from the origin to the end of the axis.
Roll and yaw - angles are not defined for pitch angles of /2 (so-called singular
configurations). This is because the roll angle and the yaw angle in this case both describe
a rotation about the same vertical axis. Ships do not reach this configuration of a 90degree pitch in normal operations. If the MRU is used on an ROV with full orientation
control, the user should apply the quaternion outputs. An MRU requiring external heading
input will also malfunction in the internal processing close to these points, due to that yaw
angle input (same as heading). An MRU 6 using the internal magnetometer will, however,
function in the entire orientation space.
How to Compute the Rotation Matrix from Roll, Pitch and Yaw
Each of these three rotations given by the roll, pitch and yaw angles can be represented by a
rotation matrix. If all three transformations are multiplied, we get the rotation matrix shown
below. The definition can be used if the user wants to generate the rotation matrix from roll,
pitch and yaw outputs from the MRU (C and S are short notes for cosine and sine).
C ( )C ( ) C ( ) S ( ) S ( ) S ( )C ( ) C ( ) S ( )C ( ) + S ( ) S ( )
Cbg = S ( )C ( ) C ( )C ( ) + S ( ) S ( ) S ( ) C ( ) S ( ) + S ( ) S ( )C ( )
S ( )
C ( ) S ( )
C ( )C ( )
The roll and yaw outputs are also unusable close to = /2 due to numeric inaccuracies. This
means that the roll, pitch and yaw angles should not be used when close to the singularity,
that is when operation in the vicinity of pitch angle = /2 is expected. For example, do not
try to generate Cbg from ,, when close to this singularity.
52
Rotation Quaternion Output

The user can derive the rotation matrix by use of the corresponding symmetric Euler
parameters (quaternions ). The MRU quaternion output is a four parameter vector which
expresses the rotation matrix by the formula below. The quaternions can be an efficient way
to generate the rotation matrix in the user's software, because trigonometric function
evaluation is avoided, and there are no problems with singularities like at pitch = /2. The
quaternion components are denoted q1 to q4, and the rotation matrix can be expressed as:
q12 q 22 q 32 + q 42
C bg = 2(q1 q 2 + q 3 q 4 )
2(q1 q 3 q 2 q 4 )
2(q1 q 2 q 3 q 4 )
q +q q +q
2(q 2 q 3 + q1 q 4 )
2
1
2
2
2
3
2(q1 q 3 + q 2 q 4 )
2
4
2(q 2 q 3 q1 q 4 )
q12 q 22 + q 32 + q 42
q bg = [q1 , q 2 , q 3 , q 4 ] = l x sin ( / 2), l y sin ( / 2), l z sin ( / 2), cos( / 2)

T
Here lx, ly and lz are the direction cosines of the rotation axis, and is the angle of rotation.
Horizontal Plane Pitch Angle Output
The MRU can output horizontal plane roll angle instead of roll angle around the present pitch
axis. This type of roll angle is used in the sensors manufactured by Datawell. The Datawell
sensors additionally output the sine of the roll and pitch angles. The MRU in this case
outputs:
RollHippy (var. no. 66) = sin() = sin()cos()
PitchHippy (var. no. 67) = sin() = -sin()
Here
is the Euler roll angle.
is the Euler pitch angle.
4.2.3.2
Magnetic heading estimation
The MRU models 4 and 6 include a 3-axis fluxgate magnetometer measuring the magnetic
field at the MRU location. In case of a dominating earth magnetic field (small magnetic
disturbances), a fairly good estimate of the vessels heading angle relative true north can be
determined and output from the MRU. An even better estimate is obtained if the measured
magnetic field can be compensated for the vessel magnetic signature.
The MRU software includes a procedure which can be performed in order to find this
magnetic signature. During training an internal model describing the magnetic signature is
updated continuously while providing online information about the model quality to the user.
If the user accepts the result from the training procedure, the model is stored and used
internally at runtime.
53
Magnetic field from magnetometer
Ship magnetic
signature
neutralization
Ship magnetic
signature
estimation
Magnetic
heading
estimation
Internal heading
Angular rate
gyro bias
estimation
Figure 23 The magnetic heading estimation process

The training of the internal magnetic model is performed by running the MRU configuration
program, MRC, while turning the vessel. In the MRC magnetic neutralisation menu a model
quality figure is displayed that indicates when the model is properly trained. The collection of
magnetic samples has to last for at least five minutes and the vessel has to complete at least
one circle before a good magnetic model can be achieved. The data collection should continue
until the model quality figure is 0.8 or higher.
For more details on the magnetic estimation process, see description of the MRC software in
the Installation Manuals ref. [2], [3], [4], [5] and [6].
Note
If the vessel is operating in the vicinity of external constructions such as offshore

structures, putting up an additional magnetic field, the true north reference can
generally not be found, even though the vessel magnetic signature has been found.
4.2.3.3
Linear motion computation
The linear motion computation basically provides acceleration, velocity and position in the gframe (geographic north, east, down). Alternatively, they can be provided in the h-frame
(heading frame F, S, D) or the b-frame (R, P and Y-axes). See definitions of frames in chapter
4.1.6. All internal processing takes place in the h-frame, and data are later transferred to the
other actual frames.
The relative linear position computation is based on double integration of acceleration over
time. Only changes within a short time frame can be estimated, since we do not get static
information on motion (no position measurements). Hence, the MRU cannot be used for any
direct navigation purposes but it can be used to provide smooth measurements within a time
frame up to 25 seconds. The performance is far better in the heave direction than in the surge
and sway directions. The reason for the difference between the channels is the influence of
54
roll/pitch-error generated gravity components being a first order effect in the horizontal
channels, and a second order effect in the vertical channel.
A ship or vessel will have short term motions dominated by ocean waves when it is at sea.
The average heave level for a ship or vessel is zero and the heave measurements from the
MRU will always be output relative to this zero level. For surge and sway motions we can
expect motions around a straight-line trajectory.
Acceleration Processing
The measured acceleration is initially transformed to the h-frame at a high sample rate in the
same way as for the vertical erection acceleration processing. The down direction remains
stationary, hence the heave velocity and position can be obtained by direct integration over
time of the acceleration.
The acceleration is compensated for lever-arm effects and gravity. The user can specify a
lever arm from the MRU to the actual measurement point during the installation of the MRU.
The linear motions are then computed in the measurement point. The static value of g is
subtracted before the linear motion computation takes place. The static value is obtained by
using a low-pass filter for the computed acceleration in the vehicle's centre of gravity. The
angular velocity is low-pass-filtered with a cutoff at approximately 10 Hz, prior to processing
of lever-arms in order to reduce effects from sensor noise. This will influence the high
frequency heave/sway/surge components of the lever arm.
The acceleration at the measurement point is computed from:
g
g
& )r b
amp
= amru
+ Cbg ( 2 +
mp
where:
b
rmp
Lever arm vector from the MRU to the actual measurement location
(measurement point) for surge, sway and heave.
Angular velocity (from the angular rate sensors, b-frame), skew symmetric form.
&
Angular acceleration (derived from the angular rate, b-frame), skew symmetric
form.
g
amru
Acceleration sensed by the MRU.
55
Computation of Velocity and Position
The linear motion computation for position is a double integration over time for a selected
average period To. Integration of the acceleration over time for each axis gives velocity and
position. However, it is problematic to measure linear motions with long periods, like periods
of 25 seconds or more. The reason for using a highpass filter on the acceleration
measurements, is to remove static or slowly varying errors. These errors will give errors in the
velocity and position data. The filter may be made under-damped to improve the amplitude
response slightly down to To and to improve the phase response above To. The phase varies
more close to To. Low damping also means ringing at the selected average period To. The user
must tune this filter according to the requirements.
The user can set the average period To in the range 1 to 25 seconds. If a too long period is
selected, the velocity and position outputs will have a slowly varying error. If a short period is
chosen, the estimated heave will have a phase error for long period motions.
A low damping factor reduces the short term error for long period motions close to the
selected average period To, since the phase error is reduced. However, ringing in the output at
To may cause some problems. The damping factor can be set in the range 0.3 to 1.0. The
bias in the surge and sway directions is higher than the bias in heave. This is caused by the
influence of small orientation errors providing gravity components in the horizontal direction.
Average periods To set above 2.5 seconds is not recommended in surge and sway due to this
problem.
In the software two different types of filter structures are implemented. The filter mode
"General purpose" is implemented to achieve optimal amplitude performance, whereas the
"Hydrographic survey" mode provides optimal phase performance. For the "Automatic" filter
mode the hydrographic survey filter structure is used. This algorithm estimates the sea
conditions by computing the dominating period of the waves seen from ship or vehicle and
automatically sets the average heave period To in real time during operations. For the surge
and sway measurements the filter mode "General purpose" is the only mode available.
Selection of Heave Filter Mode
The following selections are available in the MRU configuration in order to achieve the
optimal heave performance:
Heave filter mode. Selection between different filter structures.
Period. The average heave period for the vessel, To.
Damping. The heave damping factor to be used in the filter.
The heave filter damping and average period should be chosen in order to obtain the best
possible correspondence between the estimated heave motion and the real heave motion.
These parameters can be set to a constant value or the automatic adaptive filter may be chosen
in case of varying sea environments. The following should be considered when selecting the
different heave filter modes and parameters:
56
Heave filter mode:

Automatic. To be selected when the vessel is operating in various sea states or when the
average heave period is unknown.
General purpose. Is selected when an optimal heave amplitude is to be measured and the
heave phase is of no importance. This mode is typically selected when the MRU is to be
used for measuring the heave height and period on oceanographic buoys.
Hydrographic survey. To be selected when the heave phase and amplitude have to be
output correctly according to real time. This mode is typically selected when the heave
output signal from the MRU is to be used for heave compensation of echo sounders and
offshore crane systems.
Period:
An expected average heave period has to be set to the heave filter. This period can be
determined by measuring the time between two wave-tops by a watch or by looking at the
MRU output variable 129 Heave period, when the vessel is operating in the actual survey
area.
The settling time for the heave measurements from power-on or after a turn will be about
10 times the selected period, To. By selecting an unnecessary high heave period the settling
time will be slower than it has to. For vessels performing surveys with frequent turns, the
period should be set as low as possible to minimise the heave settling time after turns.
Damping:
The heave damping factor shall usually be set to 0.7. Only for special occasions should this
parameter be changed. In operations with heave periods of more than 25 seconds, the
damping factor should be reduced to 0.6 in order to achieve correct phase measurements.
In operations with heave periods of less than 2 seconds, the damping factor should be
increased to 0.8.
Figure 24 and Figure 25 below are to be used as a guideline for selecting the correct average
heave period (To) in the "Hydrographic survey" filter.
57
Figure 24 Relative heave residual in percentage of amplitude for "Hydrographic survey"

filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and 20 seconds
Figure 25 Step response in heave with corresponding settling time for "Hydrographic
survey" filter with damping 0.7 and various average heave periods 5, 10, 15 and 20 seconds
The selection of heave filter settings is a trade-off between low heave error over a wide range
of heave periods and the settling time after an occurrence introducing a step response in the
heave filter, like after a turn if the MRU does not have external input of the vessel speed.
Input of vessel speed to the MRU is important to reduce the heave errors after a turn or
changes in speed.
58
For an MRU without external input we recommend the following selections:

The selection To =5 or lower is recommended for vessels performing surveys with a lot of
turning on rivers or within harbours. The settling time in heave will be about 50 seconds.
The selection To =10 is the default setting for this heave mode and covers most surveys,
unless long period heave motions.
The selection To =20 is recommended used for vessels operating in oceans with deep
waters or vessels that frequently operates with following sea.
Figure 26 illustrates the change in the "Hydrographic survey" filter performance by changing
the damping factor. We recommend that the damping factor is set to 0.7.
Figure 26 Relative heave residual as percentage of amplitude for "Hydrographic survey"

filter with average heave period set to 10 seconds with various damping factors 0.5, 0.6, 0.7,
0.8 and 0.9
The filter mode "General purpose" has been the only heave mode used in the MRU software
up to version 2.51. For the users that prefer to use this heave mode and their original setting,
the corresponding heave period and damping for each heave application used in earlier
versions, are as follows:
59
Application
Period
[s]
10
25
14
10
3
3
3
General purpose
Rigs & non-cruising ships
Large ships, cruising
Small ship, cruising
ROVs, towfishes & buoys
High speed vessels
Small survey boat
Damping
0.6
0.45
0.6
0.8
1.0
0.8
0.8
Heave Measurements with Mean Value Dependent on Vessel Tilt
In the MRU it is possible to output heave position and velocity measurements where the mean
heave value is not zero, but depends on the vessel trim and list at any time. These output
variables are:
109 LA PosMonD
Lever arm compensated heave position with the mean value

dependent on vessel tilt.
119 LA VelMonD
Lever arm compensated heave velocity with the mean value

dependent on vessel tilt.
These variables are calculated in the following way; First, the CG heave acceleration is
integrated twice to obtain the CG heave position and velocity in the normal way. Then the CG
heave position and velocity is lever arm compensated using the vector between CG and MP
(measurement point) to obtain the alternative MP heave position and velocity. The difference
lies in the lever arm compensation of heave position and velocity after integration, instead of
performing heave acceleration compensation before the integration process. Hence, the
measurement point (MP) heave position is not zero mean, instead its value depends on the
vessel tilt at any time. These variables are useful especially in applications where the distance
between the MP and the sea level is to be determined, like in offshore crane operations or in
echo sounder installations with depth changes due to changes in vessel trim and list.
4.2.3.4
Internal processing and I/O delays
The total time delay for the output data seen from the user is a sum of a number of delay
sources. The size of the contribution from each delay source is determined by the
configuration of the MRU. It also strongly depends on the baud rate and if polled or cyclic
I/O is used.
Below there is a summary of the timing delays found when measuring the time by the use of
an oscilloscope connected to software triggered hardware outputs. The basic timing of each
operation was measured. The actual times given by the configuration setting must be included
to find the total time. The timing will probably vary slightly depending on the release number
of the software. The numbers below are valid for the release 2.50 of the MRU software. Be
60
aware of the difference between cyclic and polled output of data. The sample interval will
always be an integer times the internal computation period within the unit (10 ms) when
cyclic output data are used. The output data will then be synchronous with the internal life of
the MRU. With polled output data the sample interval is set by the user during software
configuration, and it is then decoupled from the internal life of the MRU.
Summary of Time Delays Inside the MRU
a) Sensor interface delay given by averaging

over the last measurement sample
: ta = 5 ms
b) Main processing time. Varies with

varying processing time
: tb = 2.5 ms
c) Last sample adaptation

(only present with polled (asynchronous)
output)
: tc = 10 ms 10 ms
d) Output data preparation, n variable

(includes transmit overhead)
: td = 0.8 + n 0.2 ms
e) Digital line request response time

(only present with polled output)
: te = 2.5 2.5 ms
f)
: tf = (n + 1) 40000/b ms
Transmission delay on digital line

b is the baud rate, n is number of variables
g) Polling message transmission delay

b is the baud rate, only valid with
software polling.
: tg = 50000/b ms
61
Summary of Time Delays Given by Application
This is the time from the physical event until data are available as a complete message
received by the user.
By cyclic analog output:
t = ta + t b
By cyclic digital output:
t = ta + tb + tc + td
By polled hardware output:
t = ta + t b + t c + t d + t e + t f
By polled software output:
t = ta + tb + tc + td + te + tf + tg
Polling Response Times
This is the time from a request is issued until a complete message is received and not the
actual "age" of the physical data.
Hardware polling response time:
thr = td + te + tf
Software polling response time:
tsr = td + te + tf + tg
Examples
1) Analog output of data, three variables configured, cyclic reading of data by pulse on the
EXT0-line. The EXT0-line goes to low value each time new data are transmitted.
ta = 5 ms, tb = 2.5 ms
delay = ta + tb = 7.5 ms
2) Digital cyclic output of data, three variables at 19200 baud:
td = 0.8 + 3 0.2 ms
tf = 8.3 ms
Delay on output signals from the MRU; delay1 = ta +tb + td = 8.9 ms
Delay on output signals when received by the computer; delay2 = delay1 + tf = 17.2 ms
62
4.2.3.5
Electronics and mechanics
Software Programmable RAM Logic
Most of the logic in the MRU is made by RAM based logic circuits. These circuits can be
uploaded via a serial line from the computer. This means that the MRU can be updated with
new and improved functionality later without opening the MRU housing. Simply install new
software.
CPU
The CPU is a 32 bit CMOS microcomputer placed on one electronic board. A calendar clock
running from a Lithium battery makes the MRU able to time-tag data from this clock. The
serial line from the MRU has an adjustable baud rate up to 57600 baud.
Power Supply
The internal power supply also contains the MRU connector and noise filters. The power
supply can operate at 12-30 V DC. Seatex declares EMC with immunity, enclosure port
EN50082-2, and with radiation, enclosure port EN50081-2. The MRU complies with product
safety standard IEC/EN60950 regarding fire, mechanical and heat hazards, radiation hazards
and chemical hazards (the EMI is reduced even more with a screened cable).
The User I/O
The user I/O is placed on a separate board inside the MRU. Seatex's philosophy is to isolate
the faster changing demands for different types of I/O from the functionality of the MRU to
keep the number of MRU models at a minimum. An exception has been made for analog I/O
which is provided internally in the MRU. The MRU provides a voltage output.
All digital RS-232 I/O to and from the MRU are galvanically isolated. For those who prefer
RS-422 communication with the MRU an additional board can be mounted in the MRU
junction box in order to convert the RS-232 signal to RS-422 and vice versa.
The Real Time Software System in the MRU
The signal processing inside the MRU is real time with very accurate timing requirements and
high-speed operation. The important tasks are always performed independent of external user
requests. The processing software, configuration settings and calibration constants are
downloaded to the MRU from a PC via the RS-232 interface. The software and other data
remain resident while the MRU is not powered due to the Lithium battery inside. Seatex or
the users can download new configuration and revised or new versions of the MRU software
at any time. New software versions can be distributed to existing customers.
63
Blank page
64
5.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
5.1
Start procedure
The following start procedures shall be used when the MRU is installed according to the
procedures described in the Installation Manual.
1) Set power-on. The MRU starts automatically when the unit receives power and will be in
operation as long as power is received.
2) The MRU needs some time before full accuracy is achieved. The maximum erection time
is 15 minutes. During this period the MRU runs an internal self check procedure for
sensors and electronic boards and performs an initial alignment.
3) When the MRU has obtained full accuracy, the status message from the MRU will change
from "reduced accuracy" to "normal" on the asynchronous serial line, and the MRU
XOUT pin goes high or low depending on the selected configuration.
4) The MRU is preferably left with power on since there are no wear-out parts.
Once the MRU is installed, there is no need for manual intervention during operation.
Note
If the vehicle has high dynamics during startup, the MRU may run into problems.
At worst the alignment must be redone by restarting the MRU. High dynamics
during startup means that the MRU is moved up to 10 degrees in all the
orientation axes.
5.2
Operation
Normally the MRU outputs signals on the serial line and/or the analog channels without any
involvement from the user.
When using the MRU for heave measurements it is important to tune the heave parameters
(heave period and damping) to the vessel size and motion characteristics for the actual
weather conditions. Since the configuration parameter "Heave filter mode" only enters the
default values of the heave period and damping according to the selected mode, these values
have to be tuned for the actual vessel and weather conditions in order to achieve optimum
heave performance. Therefore, before a survey and/or during operation check the heave
performance of the MRU and tune the heave parameters until the best heave performance is
achieved. An alternative is to select "Automatic" and let the MRU automatically choose the
best settings.
For applications where the magnetic heading from the MRU 4 and 6 models are used, be
aware that the magnetic field of the vessel can change during operation, and that the magnetic
deviation and the magnetic model may need to be recalculated to ensure an optimum heading
measurement.
65
5.3
Stop procedure
When the power to the MRU is interrupted, the MRU will stop automatically in a controlled
way. The internal battery ensures that the configuration downloaded into the unit will be kept
while unpowered.
5.4
Performance monitoring
The "Sys Port" serial line from the MRU can be set up to transmit status and event messages
to the host computer for performance monitoring. These messages are set up in the MRU
configuration software, MRC, and in the configuration parameter Verbose mask. In addition
to the status and event messages described in appendix B, there is a quality status flag
transmitted via the "Sys Port" serial line. The quality status is either normal or invalid data.
66
6.
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
The MRU is not designed for service in the field except for installation of new software
versions and change of user configuration. An opening of the housing will result in damage or
degradation of the unit and void the warranty. The MRU is gas filled to insure correct thermal
conductivity and to avoid condensation of water vapour inside the MRU housing at low
temperatures.
An MRU that needs service has to be shipped in the original transportation box to Seatex.
You will find the address on page two of this manual.
During maintenance, Seatex can rent out a spare MRU unit to the user if needed. The user can
load his own configuration file into the spare MRU making it ready for operation. Seatex will
also assist the user with the configuration if needed.
Seatex will regularly provide software upgrades for the MRU. These upgrades will improve
the function of the MRU as additional features evolve. New software versions can also
improve much of the electronic hardware functions inside the MRU. These upgrades can be
carried out without opening the MRU housing by connecting a PC to the MRU and
downloading the new software.
All upgrades are intended to be "backward compatible" with the user's digital drivers so that
previous versions of these drivers will work. This depends on how well the driver is coded by
the user. Therefore, Seatex cannot give a warranty that is " backward compatible".
6.1
Periodic maintenance
The periodic maintenance of the MRU can be divided into three categories:
6.1.1
Software upgrades
Seatex will offer regular software upgrades for the MRU with improvements and new
functionalities. It is up to the user to decide whether he will upgrade his MRU with the new
software. The new software is downloaded to the MRU by following the setup procedure
described in appendix A.
67
6.1.2
Maintenance
Changing the internal lithium battery
The lifetime of the internal lithium battery within the MRU should be at least 10 years, unless
the unit has been stored unused for many years. An indication of a discharged battery will be
that the MRU loses its configuration when the unit is unpowered. The MRU has to be
returned to Seatex for changing of the lithium battery. A discharged battery will not have any
influence on the MRU as long as it is connected to an external power source.
6.1.3
Recalibration
For the models MRU 1, H and 4 a recalibration is recommended after four years in operation.
For the MRU 2, 5 and 6 models a recalibration is recommended after two years in operation
and after one year for the MRU D and Z. A recalibration is recommended due to changes in
the characteristics of the internal sensors over time and is therefore necessary in order to
achieve the specified performance. Exactly when a recalibration is required will depend on
the use of the unit and the actual model number. An indication that recalibration is needed is
oscillations in the roll, pitch and yaw measurements that cannot be related to the vehicle
motions. The MRU has to be returned to Seatex for recalibration.
The following procedures can be used to determine whether a recalibration is required:
1) Set up the MRU as described in "Appendix A - Arrival Check and Test of the MRU". The
MRU has to be brought onshore and located on a rigid and stationary table.
2) Output the variables 63, Roll, 64, Pitch and 65, Yaw at an interval of one second (1000
ms). Log data to file with the MRC software for a period of 30 minutes (approximately
2000 samples). Ensure that the MRU has been powered-on for at least 30 minutes before
the logging is started. For MRU 6 and MRU 4 units the parameter Fluxgate usage under
Magnetic conditions in MRC has to be set to Disabled before starting this procedure.
3) Import the logged data file to a spreadsheet and plot the variables on paper. If one of the
roll, pitch or yaw measurements oscillates around its average with a maximum amplitude
of more than 10 times the specified noise level of this model number, it indicates that the
unit will benefit from a recalibration.
To reduce the need for recalibration, try to install the unit in an environment with constant
and low temperatures.
6.2
Repairs and modifications
Repair of the MRU products consists of replacement of damaged cables, replacement of the
MRU, the MRU junction box or other MRU additional equipment.
68
6.2.1
Maintenance
Repair of the MRU
All repairs and modifications of the MRU except for installation of new software versions and
user configuration have to be carried out by Seatex. An opening of the MRU housing will
result in permanent damage and the user should under no circumstances make any attempt to
do so.
CAUTION
An opening of the MRU housing will result in permanent damage and the user should
under no circumstances make any attempt to do so.
6.2.1.1
Installing a spare unit
If a spare unit is rented while your unit is in for repair, use the following procedure to
download your configuration to the spare unit:
1) Connect a PC to the MRU to be repaired as described in "Appendix A - Arrival Check
and Test of the MRU", if your MRU configuration is not already available on your PC or
backup diskette. When contact is established with the MRU by the MRC software, enter
the folder list Parameter Management \ Save to file in Configuration mode and click the
Save to file button. The configuration in the MRU will then be saved on a file on the PC
or diskette. When the configuration file is saved on your hard disk or on a floppy disk,
close down the MRC software. If it is not possible to establish contact with the MRU and
a backup copy of the used MRU configuration is not available, the spare MRU has to be
configured from the start according to the configuration instructions in the Installation
Manual, reference [2], [3], [4], [5] or [6].
2) Disconnect the MRU to be repaired from the configuration cable and connect the spare
unit to this cable.
3) Enter the MRC software and click the Connect button to establish communication with
the spare MRU. When contact is established, enter the folder list Parameter
Management \ Load from file in Configuration mode and click the Load from file
button to read your saved configuration from a file on the PC or floppy disk. Enter the
folder list Parameter Management \ Download to download your configuration to the
spare MRU. Click the Download Parameters to MRU button to start downloading the
configuration into the MRU.
4) Finally, exit the MRC software. Disconnect the spare MRU from the configuration cable
and mount the unit into the mounting bracket. Ensure that the MRU is mounted in the
correct orientation.
69
6.2.2
Maintenance
Repair of the MRU Junction Box
First check that the fuse within the box is not blown and replace it if it is. Then check if any
of the cable wires have loosened from the terminals. If the LED light diodes indicate that the
junction box is still not working, the box has to be returned to Seatex for repair.
6.3
Troubleshooting
The best tool for troubleshooting of the MRU is utilising the configuration software MRC. If
trouble occurs, always connect a PC to the MRU by the test cable MRU-T-013 and power up
the unit. The equipment needed and how to start the MRC, is described in detail in the
"Appendix A - Arrival Check and Test of the MRU" in this manual.
Listed below are some hints for troubleshooting:
6.3.1
No contact with the MRU
If you have started the MRC software and there is no contact with the MRU:
Check that you have followed the start-up procedure described in the "Appendix A Arrival Check and Test of the MRU", in this manual.
Try to download the MRU software to the unit if the MRU consumes normal power
(approximately 0.25 A). First, ensure that you have the correct MRU software available
on your hard disk or on a floppy disk. Secondly, start up MRC once more by pressing the
Connect button and check that the MRC tries to connect from the communication port on
your PC (COM1 is default). Let the MRC software search through all baud rates. This can
take some minutes. If the MRC enters the monitor during the connection process, MRC
will ask whether you want to download MRU software. Then answer Yes and follow the
instructions on the screen. Third, if no contact at all click the Offline button. Enter the
Status Folder List and click on the Download Program code button in Status mode.
Click the Download new MRU software button in the next window and select the
location of the software to be downloaded (available on the MRU floppy disk label
delivered with the unit). Press Yes on the question "Are you sure about downloading
program file Mru330.0". After the MRU software is downloaded, remember also to
download the calibration parameter file "mruNNNN.par" by clicking the Download
Calibration set button. Finally, enter the folder list Parameter Management \
Download in Configuration mode to download the MRU configuration file
"mruNNNN.cfu".
If there is still no contact with the MRU after downloading the MRU software, the
hardware inside the MRU has most likely been damaged and the unit has to be returned to
Seatex.
70
6.3.2
Maintenance
MRU status: Abnormal
If the MRC software responds with the MRU status "Abnormal" in red characters in the MRC
Info Bar, no data will be transmitted from the MRU. When this status appears on the screen,
two types of failures may have caused the problem:
Corrupted Calibration and Configuration within the MRU
This can occur when downloading a major software upgrade to the MRU. A window with the
message "Warning: MRU is in 'Abnormal' mode" will then appear on the screen. Reloading of
the user configuration and the calibration file may help. Do the following:
Download the MRU configuration file "mruNNNN.cfu" (or the name on your own
configuration file) by entering the folder list Parameter Management \ Download in
Configuration mode (NNNN is the serial no of the MRU). A default configuration file is
available on the original software diskette supplied with your MRU or on the diskette with
the software upgrade.
Download the calibration parameter file "mruNNNN.par" by clicking the Download

Calibration set button in Status mode. A calibration file is available on the original
software diskette supplied with your MRU or on the diskette with the software upgrade.
Restart the MRU by clicking the Restart MRU button in Status mode. If the unit still
does not function properly, please contact your nearest Seatex office.
Failure in One of the Boards within the MRU
The MRU can enter into the "Abnormal" mode if there has been or there is a failure in one of
the boards within the unit. Enter the MRC Status mode to show the status of the MRU. It is
important that you write down or save on file the listed errors under "Raw status" window and
errors listed in the folder MRU Status \ HW error for later troubleshooting. If you have a
hardware failure in your MRU, it can be difficult to establish contact with the MRU through
the MRC and have any status information listed.
You should now try to restart the MRU from the MRC software by clicking the Restart
MRU button in Status mode
If the unit functions properly afterwards, there has been a temporary failure on one of the
boards within the unit. A temporary failure can occur if the unit has been subject to
environmental conditions for which the MRU is not specified. Typically, if the unit was
started when the temperature was below -5C. In this case the unit can be used as normal
after a restart.
If the unit still does not function properly, there is a permanent failure in one of the boards
within the unit. Ship the unit back to Seatex for service.
71
6.3.3
Maintenance
MRU status: Unreliable data or not ready
If the MRU reports unreliable output data (big Q) or a not-ready signal is output on the DPsystem, check the following:
The length of the lever arm vector from the MRU to CG configured in the MRU. This arm
should under no circumstances be longer than 150 meters. If a long arm is configured in
the MRU, try to zero it out and check whether this removes the unreliable data status flag.
The MRU status log by clicking the Status button in MRC to see the MRU Status
window. In the folder EventLog, enter the following events to check whether any events
have happened during the observed period with unreliable output data:
-
Rate Sensor Overrange

Acce Sensor Overrange
Magn Sensor Overrange
Kalman Overrange
Hardware error
If any events have occurred in these folders, save this report to file by clicking the Save
status to text file button and send the file to your nearest Seatex office for comments.
6.3.4
Large oscillations in the roll and pitch measurements
Check the actual mounting orientation of your MRU according to the mounting angles set in
the MRU software configuration. Check the parameter Mount Angles by entering the
Configuration Folder List Sensor \ Geometry in the MRC. For help to enter the correct
mounting angles, enter the Mounting Wizard in the MRC software.
6.3.5
Reduced roll or pitch performance
Reduced roll or pitch performance may occur if:
The MRU +R arrow is not properly aligned with the vehicle's longitudinal axes. A
misalignment of only one degree to two degrees will reduce the performance when
exposed to heavy motions due to cross-coupled roll and pitch measurements. If not
already done, ensure that the MRU yaw offset according to the vehicle's longitudinal axis
is accurately measured and entered into the MRU configuration.
There have been several years since the MRU was last calibrated. Check the quality of the
calibration with the procedure described in chapter 6.1.3.
Depth errors in the outer beams on a multi-beam echo sounder may occur when:
The oscillations in the depth of the outer beams are correlated with the pitch angle of the
vessel. Check the mounting angle around the Y-axis. The MRU R-axis has to be parallel
72
Maintenance
with the ship's longitudinal axis as long as the sounder transducer is aligned with the ship
axes.
The oscillations in the depth of the outer beams are correlated with the roll angle of the
vessel. Check the lever arm vector (the components along the R, P and Y-axes) from the
MRU to the ship's centre of gravity (CG), and especially the vertical component (Y).
Please note that it is the co-ordinates from the MRU to the CG that should be entered and
that positive vertical direction is downwards. If the location of the CG is below the
location of the MRU, the vertical component (Y) must be positive. Use the 3D "vessel
window" to check that the MRU is on the expected location according to the ship's centre
of gravity.
There is incorrect synchronisation of the MRU and the multi-beam data (timing error).
Check that the measurements from the two sensor data are handled correctly and that a
timing error has not occurred. A 1PPS input to the MRU should be considered used. Postprocessing of the MRU and the multi-beam data can be used to analyse whether incorrect
synchronisation is the reason for the depth errors.
6.3.6
Reduced heave performance
Reduced performance in heave or depth errors in the centre beam of an echo sounder may
occur:
If there are oscillations in the depth of the centre beams. Check that the correct heave
filter mode and heave period is selected in the MRU configuration.
Be aware that the MRU outputs heave measurements in the MRU mounting location and
not in the transducer location, unless the lever arm vector (the components along the R, P,
and Y-axis) from the MRU to the transducer head (MP, measurement point) is entered
into the MRU configuration. Please note that the vertical vector component from the
MRU to the measurement point is defined positive down. If the location of the transducer
head is below the location of the MRU, the vertical component will be positive and vice
versa. Use the 3D "vessel window" to check that the MRU is on the expected location
according to the enter measurement point (MP).
If the analog output channel is used to output heave from the MRU. Please be aware that
positive heave is defined as down in the MRU. If positive heave is preferred upwards,
change the sign of the gain for the analog channel.
73
Maintenance
Blank page
74
7.
Drawings
DRAWINGS
For outline drawings of the mechanical dimensions of the MRU or its additional equipment,
see the Installation Manuals, reference [2], [3], [4], [5] and [6].
75
Drawings
Blank page
76
8.
Parts list
PARTS LIST
The MRU basic packet consists of:

Part no.
MRU 1 to MRU 6 unit
MRU-T-013
MRU-D-91 to 119
MRU-D-001
MRU-D-011
MRU-SW-CP
MRU-M-SC1
No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
The MRU sensor.
Three-metre test cable for PC connection.
Installation Manual for the specific MRU model.
User Manual.
Delivery specific documents for the delivered MRU.
A diskette with the MRU and MRC software.
Transportation box.
The MRU can be delivered with the following additional equipment:

Part no.
MRU-M-MB1
MRU-M-MB2
MRU-M-MB3
MRU-M-LP1
MRU-M-SB5
MRU-M-SB6
MRU-M-SB7
MRU-E-PT8
MRU-E-JB1
MRU-E-JB1P
MRU-E-JB2
MRU-E-JBRS
MRU-E-SBRS
MRU-E-HYD
MRU-E-POS
MRU-SW-SF
MRU-E-CS1
MRU-E-CS2
MRU-E-CS4
Description
Wall mounting bracket with indexing for easy mounting.
Vibration damper extension to the MRU-M-MB1.
Hydrographic mounting bracket for easy alignment of MRU.
Laser pointer for use together with MRU-M-MB3.
Subsea bottle with two 8-pin Sea Con connectors depth rated to
4000 metres. The bottle is made in titanium.
Subsea bottle with two 8-pin Sea Con connectors depth rated to
1000 metres. The bottle is made of black anodised aluminium.
Subsea bottle with one 8-pin Sea Con connector depth rated to 10
metres. The bottle is made of black anodised aluminium.
Pigtail for 8-pin Sea Con connector.
MRU junction box for flexible connection of MRU to user
equipment.
MRU junction box with power supply for flexible connection of
MRU to user equipment.
Junction box for use in the Hydrographic Package with 10 meter
MRU-E-HY1 cable with connector to the MRU.
Additional board for the MRU Junction Box which includes RS232/-422 converting and galvanic isolation of input/output lines
to/from MRU.
Additional board for the Subsea bottles which includes RS-232/422 converting and galvanic isolation of input/output lines
to/from MRU.
Hydrographic package.
Hydro acoustic positioning package.
ANSI C source code drivers for the RS-232 interface.
Heavy duty screened cable with 14 twisted pairs.
Heavy duty screened cable with 4 twisted pairs.
Umbilical cable for the two 9-pin subsea bottles.
77
Part no.
MRU-T-021
MRU-T-022
Parts list
Description
Test and configuration cable for subsea bottles MRU-M-SB5, 6
and 7.
Configuration cable for use between a PC serial port and the
MRU service port connector in MRU-E-JB1/2/P
78
9.
Appendix A - Check and test of MRU
APPENDIX A - ARRIVAL CHECK AND

TEST OF THE MRU
We recommend that a simple test of the MRU is performed when receiving the unit. The test
procedure described below can also be used as a satisfactory test of the delivered MRU
products and as a setup for troubleshooting of the unit. The test is carried out by connecting
the MRU to a PC by the test cable supplied by Seatex.
Equipment Needed for the Test
a)
A 24 V DC 1.0 A power supply.
b)
The test cable MRU-T-13 (supplied with the MRU delivery).
c)
A PC that runs under Microsoft Windows 95, 98, Me, 2000 or NT 4.0, keyboard, mouse
and a VGA screen. The PC must have at least one free COM port (COM1 or COM2).
d)
A stable table on which to place the MRU.

PC
Configuration
cable
MRU
DC power supply
Startup Procedure
a)
Place the MRU on a stable table with the connector end of the housing pointing up.
b)
Connect the MRU to the PC by the test cable MRU-T-13, and to a power supply of 24
V 1 A DC (Note: The red banana connector is positive). Make sure that it is a 1 A fast
fuse on one of the power leads to the MRU. The COM1 port is the default port when the
test cable is connected to a PC.
d) Install the configuration software, MRC, on the PC fixed disk as follows: first insert Win
MRC CD-ROM into the CD or DVD drive on the local PC. Second, from the Start menu
select Settings. Then select Control Panel and Install program. Follow the instructions
on the screen in order to complete the installation of the "Mrcsetup.exe" program.
79
e) In the Select Components window shown in Figure 27, select the Standard mode. The
other selection, Hydrographic mode, is for those who want to select the digital interface
from the predefined list of echo sounders.
Figure 27 Selection of program mode to install

f)
When the installation of files is finished, the window shown in Figure 28 appears. Choose
to restart the computer now or later. Click Finish and the setup is complete. Remove the
CD.
Figure 28 MRC Installation Complete
80
d)
Approximately 10 seconds after connecting the MRU to the power supply, the user can
start the MRC software from Microsoft Windows by double-clicking on the MRC icon.
Click the Connect button to establish communication with the MRU. When
communication is enabled the user is free to configure the MRU.
Figure 29 MRU Configuration Window

If No Response
When the Connection Status field shows failed connection, check the following:
COM port connection and that the baud rate is selected correctly.
Power supply and voltage supplied to the MRU.
Cabling between the MRU and the PC.
The 10-second wait: wait at least 10 seconds after supplying the MRU with voltage before
starting the MRC from Windows. The MRU does not respond to requests on the serial
line due to internal self check during the first 10 seconds.
Click the Retry connection button to re-establish connection with the MRU
The MRU Test
a)
When the MRC software is started and the connection with the MRU is established,
select the MRC mode Configuration to enter the MRU configuration folder list.
81
b)
Modify the mounting angles of the MRU models 6, 5, 4, H and 3 by entering the
Configuration Folder List Sensor \ Geometry. Input the mounting angles 180.0, 0.0 and
0.0 in roll, pitch and yaw field. (The default mounting of the MRU is with the MRU
connector pointing right down 0.0, 0.0, 0.0). For the MRU model 2 and 1, the units
have to be mounted with the cable pointing down and the mounting angles should
always be 0.0, 0.0 and 0.0 in the roll, pitch and yaw field when performing this test.
c)
The digital channels have to be used to get output data from the MRU on the screen
with the MRC software. Enter the folder Data Interface / Digital and set the Protocol
to MRU normal, Digital channels to 4 and Interval to 100 ms. In the Source ID field
select variable no. 63 for roll measurement on the first channel, 64 for pitch on the
second, 65 for yaw on the third and 105 for heave (PosMonD) measurement on the
fourth.
d)
In the Parameter Management folder select Download and click the Download
Parameter to MRU button in order to download the edited configuration to the MRU.
e)
Select the MRC mode Data Presentation and click the Run button to display the MRU
data graphically on the screen. Check that roll, pitch, yaw and heave measurements
have stabilised within 20 minutes from startup of the MRU. Check the outputs of roll,
pitch, yaw and heave changes by moving the unit gently.
CAUTION
Avoid bumping into things and turning the MRU fast. This may result in short term
sensor overload, degraded performance or automatic restart of the MRU.
f)
If the MRU is functioning according to the description above, the unit is found
acceptable.
82
10.
Appendix B - Status messages from MRU
APPENDIX B - STATUS MESSAGES

FROM MRU
These are messages transmitted from the MRU without being asked for. The user
configuration parameter Verbose mask controls which messages that are transmitted and the
following settings are available:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Silent. No messages transmitted

Status report
Events report
Status + events report
Status Change Report Message
This message is transmitted after every MRU status change if enabled through Verbose mask
in the MRU configuration.
<'c'><6><9><0><s_0><s_1><s_2><s_3><chk>
s_0,1,2,3
32 bit MRU status, see "Appendix C - MRU Status Bits".
Event Message
This message is transmitted at every MRU event (i.e. change of normal operation in MRU, if
enabled through Verbose mask in the MRU configuration).
<'c'><10><9><event><t_0><t_1><t_2><t_3><c_0><c_1><0><0><chk>
event
MRU event number + 16, see "Appendix D - MRU Event Numbers".
t_0,1,2,3
32 bit date of event occurrence, number of sec. since 1 Jan 1970 00:00:00
c_0,1
16 bit code connected to event (only for internal use).
83
Appendix B - Status messages from MRU
Welcome Message
This message is sent at startup.

<'c'><20><8><'MRU VV.RR'><type><vers><v_0><v_1><s_0><s_1><0><mode><opt><0><chk>
MRU VV.RR is a 10 byte string with software version and revision level
type
MRU type: 1..7

bit 7=1 if emulation of other MRU type
vers
hardware version
'0', '1', '2', 'd' and 'e' hardware version identification
v_0,1
16 bit software number multiplied with 100 (version 3.20 will then be 320)
s_0,1
16 bit MRU serial number
mode
MRU modus
1: Normal
2: Abnormal
opt
N/A
Abnormal Mode Message
This message is sent every 2 seconds if the MRU is in "Abnormal" mode i.e. some error has
occurred. If the user configuration in the MRU is OK, the message is transmitted at user
specified baud rate & settings. Otherwise the default setting of 4800,N,8,1 is used.
<'c'><6><9><1><h_0><h_1><h_2><h_3><chk>
h_0,1,2,3
Bits".
32 bit MRU HW report status, see "Appendix E - MRU HW Report Status
84
11.
Appendix C - MRU status bits
APPENDIX C - MRU STATUS BITS
MRU status bits in a 32 bit status:

stat
32 bit status, made up of the following bit fields:
runtime modus: bit 0..3

bit 0 Normal mode
bit 1 Abnormal mode
model status:
bit 8..15
bit 8 Kalman initialise
bit 9 Sensor over range
bit 10 Data unreliable
bit 11 Sensor clipping
system status:
bit 16..31
bit 16 Break detected
bit 17 Overload, too many parameters out selected
bit 18 Configuration changed, need restart to take effect
bit 19 Magnetic erection off
bit 20 Gravity erection off
bit 21 External velocity
bit 22 External speed
bit 23 External yaw
bit 24 External magnetic
bit 25 External position ref.
bit 26 Emulating
bit 27 Bad Environment
bit 28 Time Sync
bit 29 Transmit buffer overflow
85
Appendix C - MRU status bits
Blank page
86
12.
Appendix D - MRU event numbers
APPENDIX D - MRU EVENT NUMBERS
MRU event numbers:

1: Startup OK
2: Startup Error
3: Last Stop
4: Receive Frame Error
5: Transmit Queue Full
6: Receive Message Error
7: Kernel error
8: Desc. version error
9: Transient Pwr Off/On
10:
11:
12: Bad Temp
13: Bad Pressure
14: Rate Sensor Over range
15: Acce Sensor Over range
16: Magn Sensor Over range
17: Heavy Load
18: Overload Data Out
19: Improper Power Down
20: Spurious NMI
21: Kalman Over range
22: Bad External Data
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28: Arithmetic overflow
29: Hardware Error
30: Orientation Init Err
31: System Restart
87
Appendix D - MRU event numbers
Blank page
88
13.
Appendix E - MRU HW report status bits
APPENDIX E - MRU HW REPORT

STATUS BITS
MRU HW report status bits in a 32 bit status:

bit 0:
bit 1:
bit 2:
bit 3:
bit 4:
bit 5:
332 error
Board config error
SW descriptor error
HW descriptor error
Board error
SW level error
89
Appendix E - MRU HW report status bits
Blank page
90
Index
Index
Heading Frame 39
heave 65, 73
horizontal plane 53
Hydrographic mode 80
A
Abnormal 71
Acceleration Processing 55
accelerometers 44
alignment 50
angular rate sensors 43
Automatic 65
I
Installation 27
junction box 70
battery 68
Body frame 38
Kalman filter 48
capabilities of MRU models 6

CPU 63
cyclic output 61
limited 23
linear motion computation 54, 56
lithium 68
Lithium battery 63
damage 8, 69
Datawell 53
depth errors 72
downloading 71
drawings 75
M
magnetometer 45
maintenance 67
mechanical shock 7
misalignment 72
modifications 69
MRC 81
MRU 1 22
MRU 2 19
MRU 4 12
MRU 5 10
MRU 6 8, 41
MRU D 20
MRU H 15
MRU Z 17
E
Earth rate compensation 50
Event message 83
F
fluxgate 45
Frames 36
Geographic frame 37
no contact 70
North seeking 35
not ready 72
H
hazards 7
heading 51
91
Index
sensor 43
Sensor frame 39
software upgrades 67
spare unit 69
speed 51
Standard mode 80
start procedures 65
synchronisation 73
O
offset angles 49
operation 65
orientation estimator 50
over-voltage 8
performance monitoring 66
periodic maintenance 67
Pitch 52
polarity 8
polled output 61
Power 24
power connection 8
test 79
time delay 60
transportation 7
Trimming 49
trouble shooting 70
tune 65
quaternions 53
unreliable 72
upgrades 67
recalibration 68
reduced 72, 73
Repair 68
roll 72
Roll 52
rotation matrix 52
warranty 7, 8, 67
Y
Yaw 52
S
satisfactory test 79
92
Reader's comments
Reader's comments
Please help us to improve the quality of our documentation by returning your comments on
this manual.
Your information on any inaccuracies or omissions (with page reference):
Please see next page
Reader's comments
Your suggestions for improvements:
Name:
..
Title/function: ..
Company:
.
Address:
.
.
.
Telephone: .
Facsimile:
.
E-mail:
.
Date:
.
Manual reference:
Revision:
.
.
Thank you for your contribution!

Please send this form to:
Secretary of Research and Development

Kongsberg Seatex AS
Pirsenteret, N-7462 Trondheim, Norway
Telephone: +47 73 54 55 00
Facsimile: +47 73 51 50 20
E-mail: firmapost@kongsberg-seatex.no
User Manual
User Manual
for
Veripos, Single and Multi GNSS
This document contains parts of manuals, and dimentional drawings by Veripos, UK

AB-V-MA-00505 rev.A2
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-610011-01MU
Unrestricted

User Manual
CHANGE HISTORY
Rev.
Reason for revision
Author
Date
First issue
AOA
11. June 2007
Updated with Veripos AB-V-MA-00505 rev.A2
AOA
26.August 2008
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-610011-01MU
Unrestricted

LD2 & Verify DP Operations Manual
A2
A1
A
02
01
13.05.2008
18.07.2007
22.05.2007
27.03.2007
26.01.2007
Updated for SBX-4 Integration

Updated MF Station Listing
Issued for Use
Updated After Review
Issued for Review
RL
RL
RL
RL
RL
DR
KG
KG
KG/DR
REVISION
DATE
DESCRIPTION
ORIGINATOR
CHECKED
DR
DR
APPROVED
Manual Title:

Manual No:
AB-V-MA-00505
File Ref:
AB-V-MA-00505
CLIENT APPR
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
CONTENTS
REFRENCE DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................................................... 4
1.
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................ 5
2.
ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 7
3.
LD2 SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................................................. 8
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
3.8.
MECHANICAL ...................................................................................................................................... 8
ELECTRICAL ..................................................................................................................................... 10
DEMODULATOR................................................................................................................................ 10
HF/MF DEMODULATOR.................................................................................................................... 10
DATA INTERFACES .......................................................................................................................... 10
ANTENNA........................................................................................................................................... 10
PC/104 BOARD.................................................................................................................................. 11
GNSS RECEIVER .............................................................................................................................. 11
4.
INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................................ 15
5.
LD2 FRONT PANEL .................................................................................................................................... 16

5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.5.
6.
LCD DISPLAY .................................................................................................................................... 16

PS/2 PORTS ...................................................................................................................................... 16
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................................... 17
USER KEYS ....................................................................................................................................... 17
STATUS LEDS .................................................................................................................................. 18
LD2 REAR PANEL....................................................................................................................................... 19

6.1.
6.2.
6.3.
6.4.
6.5.
6.6.
6.7.
6.8.
6.9.
6.10.
6.11.
6.12.
GNSS CONNECTOR TNC FEMALE .............................................................................................. 19

HF/MF CONNECTOR TNC FEMALE ............................................................................................. 19
SPEAKER CONNECTOR PHONO FEMALE.................................................................................. 20
L-BAND CONNECTOR N-TYPE FEMALE ..................................................................................... 20
ANTENNA VOLTAGE SWITCH ......................................................................................................... 21
PORT 3 IO SWITCH........................................................................................................................... 21
CHASSIS GROUND........................................................................................................................... 21
SIGNAL STRENGTH CONNECTOR SMA FEMALE...................................................................... 22
USB CONNECTOR ............................................................................................................................ 22
LAN CONNECTOR RJ45 FEMALE ................................................................................................ 22
SERIAL PORTS AND VGA CONNECTOR........................................................................................ 23
IEC POWER INTERFACE AND SWITCH.......................................................................................... 24
7.
INITIAL START UP ...................................................................................................................................... 25
8.
MAIN MENU STRUCTURE.......................................................................................................................... 26
9.
CONFIGURATION MODE............................................................................................................................ 27
9.1.
9.2.
9.3.
9.4.
10.
UNIT STATUS .............................................................................................................................................. 53

10.1.
10.2.
10.3.
10.4.
11.
DEMODULATOR MENU .................................................................................................................... 27

GPS RECEIVER CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................. 33
SERIAL PORTS CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 40
HF/MF - BEACON CONFIGURATION............................................................................................... 49
DEMODULATOR STATUS ................................................................................................................ 53
GPS RECEIVER MENU ..................................................................................................................... 57
HF/MF STATUS ................................................................................................................................. 60
BEACON STATUS ............................................................................................................................. 62
SYSTEM TESTS........................................................................................................................................... 63
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 2
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
12.

AB-V-MA-00505
SYSTEM INFORMATION............................................................................................................................. 64
12.1. PC/104 S/W........................................................................................................................................ 64
12.2. INSTALLED H/W ................................................................................................................................ 65
12.3. HOST IP ADDRESS........................................................................................................................... 65
13.
ACCESS CODE............................................................................................................................................ 66
14.
TROUBLE SHOOTING ................................................................................................................................ 69

14.1. POWER FAULTS ............................................................................................................................... 69
14.2. SIGNAL FAULTS................................................................................................................................ 70
15.
VERIFY DP ................................................................................................................................................... 71
15.1.
15.2.
15.3.
15.4.
15.5.
15.6.
16.
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 71
MONITOR........................................................................................................................................... 71
VERIFY-DP OPERATION .................................................................................................................. 71
SCREEN LAYOUT ............................................................................................................................. 72
DISPLAY VIEWS................................................................................................................................ 72
MAIN MENU ....................................................................................................................................... 90
CONTACT INFORMATION........................................................................................................................ 103
APPENDIX I.......................................................................................................................................................... 104

1.
2.
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.3.
3.4.
4.
5.
6.
MAIN MENU ..................................................................................................................................... 105

CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................... 106
CONFIG DMODULATOR ................................................................................................................. 107
CONFIG GPS ................................................................................................................................... 108
Config Serial Ports............................................................................................................................ 109
Config HF/MF Receiver (HF setup).................................................................................................. 110
CONFIG HF/MF RECEIVER (MF SETUP) ...................................................................................... 111
CONFIG BEACON RECEIVER ........................................................................................................ 112
STATUS............................................................................................................................................ 113
STATUS DEMODULATOR .............................................................................................................. 114
STATUS GPS................................................................................................................................... 115
STATUS HF/MF ............................................................................................................................... 116
STATUS BEACON ........................................................................................................................... 117
SYSTEM TEST................................................................................................................................. 118
SYSTEM INFORMATION................................................................................................................. 119
ACCESS CODE ............................................................................................................................... 120
APPENDIX II......................................................................................................................................................... 121

1.
VERIPOS REFERENCE STATION LISTING................................................................................... 122
APPENDIX III........................................................................................................................................................ 133

1.
USING L BAND ANTENNA FOR DGPS CORRECTIONS......................................................................... 134
2.
USING 'L' BAND TAP FROM INMARSAT FOR DGPS CORRECTIONS .................................................. 135
APPENDIX IV ....................................................................................................................................................... 136

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Rev No:
Date:
GGA.................................................................................................................................................. 137
GGX.................................................................................................................................................. 137
GLL ................................................................................................................................................... 138
VTG .................................................................................................................................................. 139
GSA .................................................................................................................................................. 139
GSV .................................................................................................................................................. 140
RMC.................................................................................................................................................. 140
ZDA................................................................................................................................................... 141
GST .................................................................................................................................................. 141
A2
13/05/2008
Page 3
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
REFRENCE DOCUMENTS
Rev No:
Date:
AB-V-MA-00503:
LD2 Installation Manual
FO-GL-GPS-004:
Signal notification from (SNF)
A2
13/05/2008
Page 4
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
1. INTRODUCTION
Veripos specialise in providing robust data broadcast services for precise positioning
applications for the offshore industry. For optimum performance it is essential that the
receiving and processing hardware is of an equally high standard.
To ensure this, Veripos offers a range of hardware designed and manufactured to the
highest specifications, and with relevant certifications.
The LD2 integrated mobile unit is designed to achieve our product philosophy, which is
standardised, upgradeable hardware with maximum flexibility whilst simple to operate and
maintain.
The LD2 is available in a number of configurations from basic satellite receiver to a fully
integrated mobile positioning unit with demodulator and multi-frequency GNSS receiver.
Completely modular, the unit can be upgraded to different configurations as required.
Functionally, the LD2 can be used in a virtual black box mode to generate any Veripos
proprietary position solution, depending upon which data subscriptions are enabled.
Additionally it can be used as a sensor that outputs received
data
and
GNSS
measurements to external processing or quality control software such as Veripos Verify

QC suite.
A small LCD display and keypad allow for quick and easy user setup and in addition to
calculating position the LD2 is able to output all received data in standard formats such as
RTCM and NMEA. The LD2 is exceptionally flexible and in most configurations overall
operating status can be determined via the LED indicators and the LCD display.
For more comprehensive status indication, the LD2 is equipped with onboard QC software;
Verify DP, which has been optimised for DP operations. The software gives the user basic
QC displays such as tracked satellite signal to noise ratios, polar plot of satellites in view,
current and predicted DOP levels, reference station information as well as Service
subscription indicators and warning alarms.
The LD2 can be used with both Veripos high and low-power satellite transmissions. When
used with high-power services a compact high-gain omni-directional antenna is required,
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 5
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
whilst for low-power operation a suitable stabilized dish antenna, such as that used on
vessels for communicating via Inmarsat is needed. A special interfacing kit can be supplied
in this case.
Advanced yet robust, easy to install and operate, the Veripos LD2 is an outstandingly
effective and flexible unit that ensures reliable reception of Veripos services, as well as
producing superior positioning from metre to decimetre level accuracy.
This manual contains the information required to Operate the Veripos LD 2 Unit For any
other information on related products can be found in the: LD 2 Installation Manual (AB-VMA-00503), and Veripos Verify QC (AB-V-MA-00500).
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 6
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
2. ABBREVIATIONS
BER
CoG
CR
DGPS
DOP
DP
GDOP
GLONASS
GPS
GNSS
HDOP
HF
KPH
LAN
LF
LNA
L-Band
LCD
LD2
MF
MPH
NMEA
m/s
PDOP
PPP
PPS
PRN
RMS
RTCM
SD
SNF
SNR
Spotbeam
Standard
Standard+
SV
Ultra
USB
UTC
VDOP
VGA
VOSS
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Bit Error Rate

Course over Ground
Carriage Return
Differential GPS
Dilution Of Precision
Dynamic Positioning
Geometry Dilution of Precision
GLObal NAvigation Satellite System Russian equivalent to GPS
Global Positioning System
Global Navigation Satellite System
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
High Frequency Radio used to Transmit Correction Data
Kilometres Per Hour
Local Area Network
Line Feed
Low Noise Amplifier
Methods of transmitting Correction data to mobile users
Liquid Crystal Display
Unit containing GPS card, demodulator and PC processor
Medium Frequency Radio used to Transmit Correction Data
Miles Per Hour
National Marine Electronics Association
Metres per Second
Positional Dilution of Precision
Precise Point Positioning
Pulse Per Second
Pseudo Random Noise
Root Mean Square
Radio Technical Commission for Maritime
Standard Deviation
Signal Notification Form
Signal to Noise
High Power L-Band Signal
Veripos Single frequency DGPS system
Veripos Dual frequency DGPS system
Space Vehicle
Veripos High accuracy positioning systems
Universal Serial Bus
Coordinated Universal Time
Vertical Dilution of Precision
Video Graphic Array
Veripos Online Support System
Page 7
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
3.
LD2 SPECIFICATIONS
3.1.
MECHANICAL
Rev No:
Date:
Receiver Size:
19in rack mount x 1U height x 32cm depth.
Weight:
5 kg / 11lb.
Display:
2 line x 20 character back lit LCD display.
A2
13/05/2008
Page 8
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Figure 1 - LD2 Front and Back panels
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 9
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
3.2.

AB-V-MA-00505
ELECTRICAL
Input Voltage:
85 to 264VAC.
Power Consumption:
20W.
Fuse:
250V 1A Anti Surge 20mm.
IEC 60945 EMC certified
3.3.
DEMODULATOR
1525 to 1559 MHz input from L-Band Antenna or tapped.
L-Band output from Inmarsat B terminals.
Acquisition time from switch on typically <20 seconds.
Re-acquisition time typically <10 seconds.
3.4.
HF/MF DEMODULATOR
2 channel HF/MF demodulator in the Frequency. Band 1.6 to 3.5 MHz.
RTCM Output.
Compatible with Veripos Standard HF and third party HF/MF transmissions.
3.5.
DATA INTERFACES
5 x RS232 Ports:
Port 1: NMEA Output.

Port 2: RTCM (Primary).
Port 3: Remote I/O, NMEA output in some LD2 configurations.
Port 4: RTCM (Secondary).
Port 5: GPS I/O, NMEA output in some LD2 configurations.
1 x VGA Video Output.

1 x RJ45 LAN Port with full Network Connectivity.
1 x USB Port.
Connections for optional external Keyboard with Touchpad or Mouse.
3.6.
ANTENNA
The GPS antenna is a right-hand circular polarised L band frequency range with an integral
low-noise amplifier. The internal thread is 5/8 x 11 UNC (standard marine mount).
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 10
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
3.7.

AB-V-MA-00505
PC/104 BOARD
300 MHz Geode processor.
256 Mb SDRAM.
64Mb or 1Gb Compact Flash Card depending on program being supported.
3.8.
GNSS RECEIVER
The following optional OEM GNSS cards can be installed in the LD2:
3.8.1.
Magellan* G12
12 channel L1 C/A code and carrier.
Strobe correlator multipath mitigation.
Standard NMEA-0183 V2.01 output.
Differential remote RTCM V2.2.
Raw data output.
1PPS (5V TTL).
Position and raw data update rates selectable up to 10Hz
2 x bi-directional RS-232 serial ports up to 115200 bps.
Operating temp: -30C to +60C.
Power Consumption: 2.2W.
3.8.2.
Magellan* DG14
12 channel L1 C/A code and carrier.
2 SBAS channels (WAAS/EGNOS/MSAS).
Edge and Strobe correlator multipath mitigation.
Differential base and remote RTCM V2.2.
Raw data output (code and carrier).
1PPS (5V TTL).
Position and raw data update rates selectable up to 20Hz.
Kalman Filter.
2 x bi-directional RS-232 serial ports up to 115200 bps
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 11
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505

3.8.3.
Magellan* Z-Family (including ZX-Eurocard and Z-Eurocard)

36 channel, all in view parallel tracking.
12 channel L1 C/A code and carrier tracking.
12 channel L1 P-code and full wavelength tracking.
12 channel L2 P-code and full wavelength tracking.
Z-tracking.
Enhanced edge and strobe correlator.
Standard NMEA-0183 V2.3 and V3.0 output.
1PPS (5V TTL).
Differential base and remote RTCM V2.2.
3.8.4.
Magellan* GG24
24 channel GPS and GLONASS.
12 channel L1 GPS code and carrier.
12 channel L1 GLONASS code and carrier.
Strobe correlator multipath mitigation.
1PPS (5V TTL).
Differential remote RTCM V2.2.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 12
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
3.8.5.

AB-V-MA-00505
Topcon Euro 112T

40 Channel, all in view, L1/L2 GPS, L1/L2 GLONASS and WAAS.
Advanced multipath mitigation.
Low signal tracking (down to 30 dbHz).
2 x 1 PPS outputs (LVTTL).
Standard NMEA 0183 V2.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 3.0 outputs.
Differential remote RTCM V2.1, 2.2.
Position and raw data updates rates selectable to 20 Hz.
Power Consumption: 2.7W typical.
Development work is in progress to integrate the following receivers into the LD2 for
future options:
Novatel OEMIV
Novatel OEMV
Trimble MS
Sepentrio
* Magellan purchased Thales Navigation (including Ashtech) in 2006 so all products

now default to the Magellan manufacturers name.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 13
AB-V-MA-00505
110/240V
AC
HF Receiver
Board
+12V
Port A
Port B
GPS Card
+5.0V
Battery
Backup
GPS I/O
1 PPS
Chan 2
+5.0V
Power Supply/Control Board
COM3
PC/104
Processor Card
LAN
1U Rack Mount Enclosure

GPS I/O
COM4
RTCM/NMEA
(TTL)
+5.0V
COM2 COM1 USB2 USB1
USB
Front-Panel Display/ Keys
Status LEDS
Battery
Backup
P3
REM I/O
+5.5V
P5
OEM I/O
NMEA
1 PPS
NMEA Out
P1
GPS I/O
RTCM
RTCM
Ext.
RTCM In
SIG.
STR(D)
MK4 Demodulator/
Decoder Board
P2
Primary
RTCM Out
Chan 1
+12V
+5.5V
P4
Secondary
RTCM Out
RS422 - USB
Interface
Board
PSU
SIG STR(A)
SIG.
STR
MSG/TEST
Out
Page 14
AB-V-MA-00505
A2
13/05/2008
Rev No:
Date:

AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
Configuration/
Status
Figure 2 - LD2 Layout / Wiring
Manual Title:
Manual No:
4.

AB-V-MA-00505
INSTALLATION
For Guidance on the installation of an LD2 please refer to the LD2 Installation Manual
AB-V-MA-00503.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 15
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
5.

AB-V-MA-00505
LD2 FRONT PANEL
The front panel of the LD2 contains back lit LCD display, 3 x user keys, 2 x PS/2 ports, 1 x
contrast adjustment key, 6x status LEDs and 1 x power LED.
5.1.
LCD DISPLAY
Two line, 20 characters with green backlight.

5.2.
PS/2 PORTS
Standard PS/2 Ports for connecting optional Mouse and Keyboard.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 16
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
5.3.

AB-V-MA-00505
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
A small flat headed screwdriver can be used to adjust the screen contrast as desired. Turn
clockwise to increase.
5.4.
USER KEYS
Page Key:
Advances the display through the options in a Menu level. After the last
Menu option in the current Menu level the display moves back to the entry
point of that menu.
Toggle Key: Shows the range of data entries available in a Menu.
Enter Key:
Displays the selected menu option, accepts a data entry and advances the
display to the next data entry field.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 17
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
5.5.

AB-V-MA-00505
STATUS LEDS
Sync LED:
Illuminated when LD2 is locked onto the downlink beam.
ID LED:
Illuminated when LD2 is enabled for service. Flashing when LD2 is

disabled. Off when LD2 has never been enabled.
Message LED:
Illuminated when a message has been received from the Veripos

Helpdesk.
IF Lock LED:
Present on older LD2s. Illuminated when using a 70MHz antenna

system and signal lock is detected in the internal upconverter. Not
currently implemented. The IF lock LED is in the same location as
that of the HF lock LED on the newer models of LD2.
HF Lock LED:
Present on newer LD2s. Illuminated when the internal HF/MF

demodulator has signal lock.
GPS LED:
Illuminated when the GNSS card is outputting a non differential GGA

telegram through Port 1. Flashing indicates the number of satellites
used in the position computation. Can be intentionally switched off in
some configurations/applications.
DGPS LED:
Illuminated when the GNSS card is outputting a differentially

corrected GGA telegram through Port 1.
Can be intentionally
switched off in some configurations/applications.

Power LED:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Illuminated when the internal DC power supply is activated.
Page 18
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
6.

AB-V-MA-00505
LD2 REAR PANEL
The rear panel of the LD2 contains 1 x TNC GNSS antenna connector, 1 x TNC IF/HF
antenna connector, 1 x speaker port, 1 x N-Type L-Band antenna connector, 1 x antenna
voltage locking toggle switch, 1 x Port 3 toggle switch, 1 x grounding pin, 1 x SMA signal
strength connector, 1 x USB port, 1 x RJ45 LAN port, 5 x RS232 data ports, 1 x VGA
display port and 1 x IEC power socket with on/off switch.
6.1.
GNSS CONNECTOR TNC FEMALE
Connect the GPS/GNSS antenna here.
This is the antenna that is used to receive
GPS/GNSS signals. Do not stress connector.
6.2.
HF/MF CONNECTOR TNC FEMALE
Not implemented in all LD2s, only where a HF/MF card is installed.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 19
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
If the LD2 is configured for an HF/MF system, connect the HF/MF antenna here. HF/MF
systems require the HF/MF antenna and LD2 chassis to be earthed in order to maximize
HF/MF signal reception.
6.3.
SPEAKER CONNECTOR PHONO FEMALE
Only used in Verify DP applications where an external speaker is required for the alarm.
6.4.
L-BAND CONNECTOR N-TYPE FEMALE
Connect either an L-Band omni directional Spotbeam antenna (see 6.2) or the line feed
from an Inmarsat system coupler, such as a Narda, Rojone or Radiall (see 6.4). Some
Inmarsat Systems such as the Nera F77 have a dedicated output that doesnt require the
installation of a coupler.
In some cases, the LNA feed should be switched off to prevent damage to vessel Inmarsat
system.
All coaxial cables should be 50 impedance.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 20
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
6.5.

AB-V-MA-00505
ANTENNA VOLTAGE SWITCH
Used to disable the 5VDC antenna LNA feed when connecting the LD2 to certain types of
Inmarsat systems to prevent damage. If the LD2 does not have this switch a DC block
should be used. When using an omni-directional Spotbeam antenna the voltage should be
enabled.
6.6.
PORT 3 IO SWITCH
When the switch is in the GPS position, raw GPS data is output from the GPS card on Port
3 When the switch is in the REM I/O position, the unit can be setup using the front panel to
accept external RTCM messages, Gyro data, output NMEA type messages and allows for
the upload of firmware upgrades to L-band demodulator card. See 9.3.3 for details on how
to set Port 3 up from the front panel.
6.7.
Rev No:
Date:
CHASSIS GROUND
A2
13/05/2008
Page 21
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
The chassis of the LD2 should be connected to ground, usually the vessels superstructure.
This is especially important when using HF systems, where both the HF antenna and LD2
chassis should be grounded.
6.8.
SIGNAL STRENGTH CONNECTOR SMA FEMALE
Used to provide a feedback line to a tracking dish type antenna such as a Minidome.
Vessel Inmarsat systems dont usually require signal strength feedback.
6.9.
USB CONNECTOR
The USB connector can be used to input external data from a Gyro or from an external
source of RTCM. (A USB to Serial Converter will be required).
6.10.
LAN CONNECTOR RJ45 FEMALE
Used to network the LD2, so that data can be broadcast over TCP/IP sockets.
The LAN connection can be used to feed External RTCM messages between two
LD2 systems for use with Verify DP 2.05, (A Crossed network cable will be
required).
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 22
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
vessel outline upload
outputting raw GPS and L-band corrections to Verify QC
It also allows a Verify DP status page to be displayed on any remote computer

provided that the LD2 is connected to a network that is properly configured.
6.11.
SERIAL PORTS AND VGA CONNECTOR

Referrer to 9.3.6 for Port pin out information.
PORT 1 D9 FEMALE
See 9.3.1 for details on data types output on Port 1 and its configuration.
PORT 2 D9 FEMALE
PORT 3 D9 FEMALE
PORT 4 D9 FEMALE
PORT 5 D9 FEMALE
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 23
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
6.12.

AB-V-MA-00505
IEC POWER INTERFACE AND SWITCH
The LD2 uses a standard IEC male connector for power interfacing. The power interface
has a built in fuse holder and power switch. Replace fuse with a 250V 1A Anti Surge
20mm.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 24
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
7.

AB-V-MA-00505
INITIAL START UP
To power up the LD2 Receiver, toggle the On/Off switch (next to the power cable on the
rear panel) to ON position. The red DC Supply LED on the front panel and the LCD display
will both illuminate.
For the first few seconds after power up the LCD display will display the following (this can
take up to 30 seconds).
Loading..
Veripos LD2 Receiver

Subsea7 - 2006
**** Main Menu ****

Configuration
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 25
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
8.

AB-V-MA-00505
MAIN MENU STRUCTURE

The top level Main Menu Structure is shown below. The full menu structure for the LD2 is
contained in Appendix I:
Figure 3 - LD2 High Level Menu Structure
Press the *Page* key to step through the Main Menu to the required section. Press the
*Enter* key to enter into the next menu level.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 26
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.

AB-V-MA-00505
CONFIGURATION MODE
The configuration menu allows the uses to setup the different components of the LD2:
Demodulator, GNSS Receiver, Serial Ports and HF/MF Receiver. The Menu structure can
be seen Appendix I (2)
To access the Configuration Menu, press the *Page* key until Configuration is shown in the
Main menu, then press the *Enter* key.
9.1.
DEMODULATOR MENU
From the Main Menu, Configuration Screen, access the Demodulator function by pressing
the *Enter* key. The following screen is shown:
This provides access to three sub menus See: Appendix I (2.1) which will allow selection
of the Satellite beam (channel) that is used to receive the Veripos corrections. User defined
allows a channel frequency to be entered manually.
Satellite
Low Power
AOR (E)
AOR (W)
POR
High Power
25East
109East
98West
IOR
Frequency (MHz)
Data Rate (bps)
1535.1050
1535.1150
1535.1050
1200
1200
1200
1535.1650
1535.1750
1535.1750
1535.0700
1200
1200
1200
1200
Table 1 Veripos Satellite Downlinks
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 27
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.1.1.

AB-V-MA-00505
Channel Select
When changing location or in areas where satellite footprints overlap, it maybe necessary
for the user to change to a different satellite Channel. A total of sixteen channels have been
allocated of which seven satellite channels have been pre-stored (see Table 1 for listing).
This allows the user to select an appropriate channel for a region (see Inmarsat coverage
chart Error! Reference source not found.).
The following is an illustration of how to change beam:
Begin at the main menu using the *Page* key toggle through the Main Menu till
configuration screen is displayed:
Press *Enter* key to access the next menu level this will display the below screen:
Press *Enter* key to access the next menu level this will display the below screen
Press *Enter* again to access the downlink channel table:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 28
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Now Press the *Toggle* key to step through the available downlink beams.
Till the
desired beam is displayed, press *Enter*. This will move the cursor to the right hand side
of the screen and the letter N will be displayed:
Press the *Toggle* key this will change the character from an N to a Y, followed by *Enter*
to confirm the change. This will change which beam corrections are being received from.
The screen will now display:
The > indicates that this is the selected beam.

It is good practice after selecting a Channel to check the status of the beam: Lock and data
quality. See 10.1.2.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 29
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.1.2.

AB-V-MA-00505
Channel 16 Editing
In the unlikely event of a satellite fault, you are able to enter a temporary new beam by
overwriting the satellite parameters in Channel 16. Note that the Channel 16 Edit facility is
to provide for manual entry of a new satellite channel.
Begin at the main menu using the *Page* key toggle through the Main Menu till
configuration screen is displayed:
Press *Enter* key to access the next menu level this will display the below screen:
Press *Enter* key to access the next menu level this will display the below screen
Press *Page* key to move to the channel 16 Edit menu shown below:
Press the *Enter* key to access the first screen in this sub menu which is the Channel 16
Edit screen shown below:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 30
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Press the *Enter* key again and the first letter of the name is highlighted. Use the *Toggle*
key to step through the letters of the alphabet. When the correct character is display, press
the *Enter* key which steps on to the next letter. The maximum six number of characters
long.
After the sixth letter, or blank, has been set, press the *Enter* key the display moves on to
the Frequency selection display shown below:
Press the *Enter* key again and the first number of the frequency is highlighted.
Using the *Toggle* and *Enter* keys as before to set the required frequency.
After the last number, has been set, when you press the *Enter* key the display moves on
to the Data Rate display shown below:
Press the *Enter* key again and the data rate 1200 is highlighted.
Use the *Toggle* key to step through the options which are 600, 1200, 2400, and 4800.
To set the BPS Rate press the *Enter* key. Using the *Page* key to return to the start of
the menu.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 31
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.1.3.

AB-V-MA-00505
Station ID List
See Appendix II for the Veripos satellite reference station listing.
Press the *Enter* key to select the Station ID List.

Use the *Toggle* key to step through the available stations on the list.
Please note that it may take up to 10 minutes for all reference stations accessible on the
beam to become available for use in the LD2 Port setups after switching the LD2 on. This
is because the LD2 waits for the Type 3 message from each station before adding it to the
list. Types 3s are broadcast at approximately 10 minute intervals.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 32
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.

AB-V-MA-00505
GPS RECEIVER CONFIGURATION

The GPS configuration allows the uses to setup the different components of the LD2:
Demodulator, GNSS Receiver, Serial Ports and HF/MF Receiver. The Menu structure can
be seen Appendix I (2.2).
Note that if REMOTE is selected for direct connection to the GPS Receiver via Port P5, the
option to configure the GPS Receiver via the Remote I/O Port P3 is disabled.
Port P5 must be set to OFF to allow configuration of the GPS Receiver via the Remote I/O
Port P3.
From the Configuration menu screen move to the GPS Receiver screen by using the
*Page* key Press the *Enter* key. The following screen is shown:
This provides access to the five sub menus which allow you to set parameters and options
for the GPS Receiver. Press the *Enter* key to select the first sub menu.
9.2.1.
Position Mode
Note: at present these settings are not implemented in the LD2 and do no affect to the GNSS
system.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 33
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.2.

AB-V-MA-00505
Dynamic Mode
Note: at present these settings are not implemented in the LD2 and do no affect to the GNSS
system.
9.2.3.
Mask Settings
This allows the user to set the GPS Receiver parameters for:
PDOP
HDOP
VDOP
Position Elevation Mask (PEM)
Raw Elevation Mask (REM)
Minimum SVs
Default settings are PDOP:40, HDOP:4, VDOP:4, PEM:5, REM:0, Min SVs:1.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 34
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.4.

AB-V-MA-00505
Diff control
This function allows the user to communicate with the GPS Receiver and set the Diff Mode,
Station ID, Correction Age Limit and from where the RTCM data is coming from.
The first screen of this sub-menu is as follows:
Press the *Enter* key to access the first screen in the sub-menu which is shown below:
The cursor > shows the current selection.*Toggle* displays the other settings available and
*Enter* selects. If Auto Diff is selected the receiver will output an autonomous position if no
differential corrections are received.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 35
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.5.

AB-V-MA-00505
Port A Settings
This function allows the user to set up the NMEA outputs from the LD2 which are output on
serial port 1 and serial port 2
Use the *Toggle* key to move through the list of available NMEA strings that can be output
by the LD2 see Table 2 and Appendix IV for details on the available strings . Press the
*Enter* key when the string to be output is displayed this will move the cursor to the right of
the screen the figure displayed is the output rate that the string will be output at press the
*Toggle* key till the correct output rate is displayed and press the *Enter* Key. It is
possible to output multiple strings on one serial port to a device, after selecting the output
rate for the first string this will return the user to the list of out put strings where additional
strings can be chosen. After selecting the strings to be output by the system press the
*Page* to move to the next menu.
(Note, only 1 second intervals can be used when outputting NMEA messages).
The screen above allows the user to output Ashtech type position strings from Port 1 and
Port 2 of the LD2.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 36
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.6.

AB-V-MA-00505
Port B Settings
This function allows the user to set up the NMEA outputs from the LD2 which are output on
Port 3
See 9.2.5 for the setup of NMEA outputs for Port B
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 37
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Positioning messages
Message type
Description
GGA
Position fix data

which provide 3D
location
and
accuracy data
GGA
with
a
position accuracy
at 7 decimal places
Geographic
Latitude
and
Longitude
Velocity
made
good.
It includes the
numbers of the
satellites
being
used in the current
solution and the
DOP
Satellites in View
shows data about
the satellites that
the unit might be
able to find based
on
its
viewing
mask and almanac
data
Position, velocity,
time data
Data and Time
GPS
Range
Residuals
GPS Pseudorange
Noise Statistics
GGX
GLL
VTG
GSA
GSV
RMC
ZDA
GRS
GST
Table 2 - NMEA position outputs (refer to Appendix IV for format information)
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 38
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.7.

AB-V-MA-00505
Factory Defaults
This function allows the user to communicate with the GPS Receiver to reset the unit to
factory defaults but does not reset the onboard memory.
9.2.8.
Data Memory
This function allows the user to communicate with the GPS Receiver to reset the GPS
Receiver to factory defaults and also reset the onboard memory.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 39
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.2.9.

AB-V-MA-00505
Settings
This function allows the user to save the settings of the GPS Receiver in battery backup
memory.
9.3.
SERIAL PORTS CONFIGURATION

The Data Input/Output Ports are all set up from the Serial Ports Menu see Appendix I
(Error! Reference source not found.).
From the Main Menu, Configuration Screen you access the Serial Ports Configuration
function by pressing the *Enter* key followed by the *Page* key twice. The following
screen is shown:
This provides access to the five sub menus which allow the user to set the parameters and
options for the five Serial Ports.
Press the *Enter* key to select the first page which is Serial Port P1.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 40
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.3.1.

AB-V-MA-00505
Port P1 Set Up
Port P1 is used to output NMEA data. The display is as shown below:
GPS RX is the default value for this Port the user can use the *Toggle* key to switch
between GPS RX and LOCAL (PC104) this allows the user to output a NMEA message
that are either generated from the GNSS receiver or from the onboard algorithms in the
LD2.
Select the source of the output required then press the *Enter* key.
Press the *Page* key to step onto Port P2 Set Up
9.3.2.
Port P2 Set Up
Port 2. Can be used to output RTCM messages directly from port 2, or to relay RTCM
messages internally to the onboard algorithm, for use with Verify DP, LD2 internal solutions
and or output NMEA messages. The default setting for this port is to output all the RTCM
messages for the currently selected beam. From this display the user can select the output
type, set the Baud Rate and Select/Deselect the Stations output through the port. The
display is as shown below:
Output type
When the above screen is displayed use the *Toggle* key to switch between the following
options:
RTCM (p) DLINK: This allows the user to setup which stations are to be output on
the port and or to the internal algorithms
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 41
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
NMEA OUT Local: This allows the RTCM messages to be used internally and for
the NMEA string being output on Port 1 to be output on Port 2.
(Note, setup up the required stations on serial port 2, then switch the port to NMEA out,
when the Port is in NMEA out mode, stations cannot be selected.
Baud Rate
From the menu the user can select the Baud Rate that is needed. Use the *Toggle* key to
step through the options which are:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200 and 38,400.
Press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection.
String Format
Pressing the *Enter* key after selecting the Baud rate moves the curser to STN where the
user can select to finish the RTCM output string with a LF or CR, to do this press the
*Enter* key then using the *Toggle* to toggle between the two options, when the option to
be changed is displayed press the *Enter* key then use the *Toggle* key to change from N
(not selected) to Y (selected). Press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection.
Reference Stations
The user can now select/deselect the reference stations from where RTCM data that is
available. The default setup for Port 2 is to output all RTCM messages from the Satellite
and HF sources either externally or internally.. Using the *Toggle* key to step through the
stations that are available from the station listing.
The stations have the suffix 'N' or Y after the Station Number. The character N indicates
that data for that station is being received by the unit but that it has not been selected for
output on Port 2. To output the data on Port 2 press the *Enter* key when that appropriate
station is shown and then using the *Toggle* key to change from N (not selected) to Y
(selected). Press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 42
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.3.3.

AB-V-MA-00505
Port P3 Set Up
Can be used for multiple input and outputs within the LD2:
Port 3 for the following:
Output Raw GPS
To output raw GPS data on port 3 the Port 3 switch on the back of the LD2 must be in
the GPS position. The P3 settings on the front panel should be set to GPS when the
screen above is displayed us the *Toggle* key till GPS is displayed and press the
*Enter* key.
Output NMEA messages
NMEA type messages can be output from port 3, the Port 3 switch on the rear of the
LD2 must be in the REM I/O position. The P3 settings on the front panel should be set
to SKT when the screen above is displayed us the *Toggle* key till SKT is displayed
and press the *Enter* key. To select the NMEA strings to be output, see the GPS Port
B setup 9.2.6.
Input for External RTCM
External RTCM messages can be input from an external device into Port 3 for use
within the Internal algorithms the Port 3 switch on the rear of the LD2 must be in the
REM I/O position. The P3 settings on the front panel should be set to SKT when the
screen above is displayed us the *Toggle* key till SKT is displayed and press the
*Enter* key. Select the appropriate Baud rate by pressing the *Toggle* till the required
Baud rate is displayed press the *Enter* key, the cursor moves to the right hand side of
the screen press the *Toggle* key untill RTCM is displayed then press the *Enter* key
to confirm the selection. It is possible to output NMEA messages at the same time as
inputting external RTCM when using a Y-cable to split the outgoing data and incoming
data see the LD2 installation manual.
Input of Gyro data
Gyro messages can be input from an external device into Port 3 for use within the
Verify DP2.0.5 for use with the Target monitoring screen. The Port 3 switch on the rear
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 43
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
of the LD2 must be in the REM I/O position. The P3 settings on the front panel should
be set to SKT when the screen above is displayed us the *Toggle* key untill SKT is
displayed and press the *Enter* key. Select the appropriate Baud rate by pressing the
*Toggle* to the required Baud rate then press the *Enter* key, the cursor moves to the
right hand side of the screen press the *Toggle* key untill GYRO is displayed then
press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection. It is possible to output NMEA messages
at the same time as inputting external GYRO when using a Y-cable to split the outgoing
data and incoming data see the LD2 installation manual
Upload of new demodulator firmware
Using Port3 it is possible to upload new firmware to the L-Band demodulator card. To
do this the user must switch the Port 3 switch on the back of the LD2 to the REM I/O
position and upload the firmware upgrade using the Veripos Teripos software
Data output types
9.3.4.
Port P4 Set Up
Port P4 can be used to output the Secondary RTCM data from the L-band and HF/MF card.
From this display the user can select the output type, set the Baud Rate and
Select/Deselect the Stations to output through the port. The display is as shown below:
Message output
Using the *Toggle* the message format that is output on port 4 can be altered.
RTCM outputs RTCM message format from the stations on the downlink.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 44
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
BCAST outputs broadcast messages to a terminal or printer. The messages are

transmitted by the Veripos Control Centre and provide information on the network status,
e.g. any problems with reference stations, unhealthy satellites.
TEST outputs diagnostic information on the receiver performance, e.g. signal-to-noise
ratio, frequency offset etc. Messages are output at approximately 5 minute intervals and
are mainly used during production burn-in testing.
MON outputs a proprietary message on Port P4 of the enabled or disabled status of all
user codes. This is used for Control Centre monitoring purposes.
OFF
Sets Port 4 outputs off.
Baud Rate
From the menu the user can select the Baud Rate that is needed. Use the *Toggle* key to
step through the options which are:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200 and 38,400.
Use press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection.
String Format
Pressing the *Enter* key after selecting the Baud rate moves the curser to STN where the
user can select to finish the RTCM output string with a LF or CR, to do this press the
*Enter* key then using the *Toggle* to toggle between the two options, when the option to
be changed is displayed press the *Enter* key then use the *Toggle* key to change from N
Reference Stations
The user can now select/deselect the reference stations from where RTCM data is
available. Using the *Toggle* key to step through the stations that are available from the
station listing.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 45
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
It can be seen that the stations have the suffix 'N' or Y after the Station Number. The
character N indicates that data for that station is being received by the unit but that it has
not been selected for output on Port 4. To output the data on Port 4 press the *Enter* key
when that appropriate station is shown and then using the *Toggle* key to change from N
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 46
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.3.5.

AB-V-MA-00505
Port P5 Set Up
Port P5 is used for a direct external connection to the I/O port of the GPS Receiver Board.
The display is as shown below:
Press the *Toggle* key to switch between REMOTE and OFF, then press the *Enter* key
to select it.
Note that if REMOTE is selected for direct connection to the GPS Receiver via Port P5, the
option to configure the GPS Receiver via the Remote I/O Port P3 is disabled.
Port P5 must be set to OFF to allow configuration of the GPS Receiver via the Remote I/O
Port P3.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 47
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.3.6.

AB-V-MA-00505
LD2 Port Pinouts

Ports 1 to 5 on the rear panel are 9 Way D Type Female plus 1 USB port.
Ports
Type
Data on Pins
Port 1
RS - 232
1
2
3
5
1PPS Out (GPS Rx / Veripos)

NMEA Out (GPS Rx / Veripos)
Ex RTCM In (GPS Rx)
Signal Ground
Port 2
RS - 232
2
5
RTCM Out / NMEA Out (Veripos)

Signal Ground
port 3
RS - 232
2
3
5
Remote I/O / NMEA Out (Veripos)

Remote I/O In
Signal Ground
Port 4
RS - 232
2
8
5
RTCM Out
Message/Test Out
Signal Ground
Port 5
RS - 232
2 GPS out
3 GPS In
5 Signal Ground
USB
RS - 232
Ext Gyro In
LAN
MF RTCM Data out

Port 5994
Table 3 LD2 I/O Ports
NOTE:
The MF RTCM Data is only available on the LAN, this is on socket 5994. The IP of
the LD2 unit will have to be configured to be on the same domain as the computer it
is to be connected to.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 48
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.4.

AB-V-MA-00505
HF/MF - BEACON CONFIGURATION.

The user must first choose from the Installed Hardware menu the hardware option that is
installed in the unit see 12.2
The HF/MF or Beacon configuration menu allows for configuration of the HF and MF radio
frequency reception.
The HF/MF or Beacon configuration is accessed form the Configuration menu in the main
menu. See Appendix I (2).
9.4.1.
HF/MF Card (HF+MF 3011)
9.4.1.1. Operating mode

The operating mode is the first menu in this section this menu allows the user to choose
between using corrections from the Veripos HF station network or from independent MF
correction systems. To change between HF and MF corrections press the *Toggle* key
and then to confirm the selection press the *Page* key this also return the user to the
previous menu.
9.4.1.2. HF/MF Station selection

Depending on the choice made in the Operating mode menu, the stations available to the
user will either be from the Veripos HF network or from a list of global MF stations see
Appendix II (Error! Reference source not found./1.1). The HF/MF receiver can receive
two channels of data. When HF is chosen from the Operating Mode, the User can select
one station from the predetermined list of stations, only one station can be chosen as each
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 49
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
of the Veripos HF station transmits corrections on both a high and low frequency. When MF
is selected as the operating mode, two independent MF stations can be selected from used
the LD2 can be setup in MF roaming mode where the Unit can select stations based on the
distance to the two closest stations, or on the strongest frequency being received by the
unit, this may lead to the same station being used on both channels, the user can also
manually enter a frequency
HF station selection
To select a station when in the HF band mode press the *Enter* key on the above display
which will bring up the list of available HF stations channel 1. Press the *Enter* key to gain
access to the station list. Use the *Toggle* key to scroll through the list of available
stations, until the required station is displayed, press the *Enter* key this will move the
curser to the far right LCD Screen. To enable the station use the *Toggle* key to toggle
between N and Y (N being disabled and Y being enabled), *Enter* to confirm the
selection.
MF station selection
When using the MF station operational mode when the above screen is displayed press the
*Enter* key, Use the *Toggle* key to toggle between the roaming MF modes and the
manual entry, press the *Enter* key to confirm the selection for Channel 1 this will move
the curser back to the left of the screen, use the *Toggle* to this allows the user to setup
channel 2
9.4.1.3. HF/MF Station Details
The station details menu, displays a list of attributes associated with the reference stations
in the station listing onboard the LD2, these details are also available in Appendix II
(Error! Reference source not found./1.1). One of the details is the C3 code this is a code
that must be generated by the Veripos helpdesk, for use of the Veripos HF stations. To
generate the C3 Code an SNF form should be filled out and sent to the Veripos helpdesk
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 50
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
see Veripos document FO-GL-GPS-004, along with the C2 code from the unit. See 10.3.2
for details on where to locate the C2 code.
The details that are available are listed below:
Station Name
Station ID
Channel 1 Frequency
Channel 2 Frequency
Data Rate
C3 Code
To enter the C3 code toggle through, to the bellow display, press the *Enter* key the curser
will start to flash then using the *Toggle* key to toggle through the characters to the first
character supplied by the Veripos help desk, press the *Enter* key to move to the next
character then so on.
9.4.1.4. HF Decryption
Veripos HF stations are encrypted using the C2 and C3 code. There are also free to air HF
stations that do not use encryption. When a free to air station is being used the Decryption
needs to be switched to off. Veripos cannot guarantee availability and system performance
of third party stations as these are not controlled by Veripos
Note: the MF option does not require a C3 code, as this is a free service available to users
and no decryption is necessary.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 51
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
9.4.2.

AB-V-MA-00505
Beacon Receiver
The Beacon Receiver is capable of receiving corrections from the MF IALA beacon
network.
9.4.2.1. Station Selection

The Beacon receiver card has three modes of operation:
Auto Distance: Selects the closest station to the users current location
Auto Frequency: Selects Station with the strongest signal strength at the users location
Manual: Allows the user to enter the frequency and bit rate of a station
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 52
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
10.

AB-V-MA-00505
UNIT STATUS
The Status menu allows the user to view the systems operational parameters for the
onboard components and system details. The Menu structure is outlined in Appendix I
(3).
10.1.
DEMODULATOR STATUS
The Demodulator status page gives the user details of the Demodulator card ID, the signal
status and the firmware versions on the card.
10.1.1. Unit ID
The first screen shown in this sub menu is as shown below:
Press the *Enter* key to access the first screen shown below:
This shows the Unit ID and that the unit status (Enabled or Disabled). If the unit is disabled,
it will have to be enabled by obtaining the appropriate access code from the Veripos
Network Control Centre. Note that the actual code displayed will be dependent upon the
receiver unit. (See 13) Press the *Page* key enter the next sub menu.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 53
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
10.1.2. Signal Status

The signal status gives information on the quality of the signal and signal lock of the
selected down link. See section Appendix I (3) to check the status of the downlink beam,
from the main menu press *Page* until the screen displays:
Press *Enter* and the screen will display:
Press *Enter* again, followed by *Page* and the screen will show:
Press *Enter* to access the Signal Status page:
This displays the status of the received signal from the selected downlink beam. For the
display above, 98West is selected.
3.5V is the signal strength and can range anywhere from 0.0V to 3.5V.
E-7 is the BER and can range anywhere from E-0 to E-7.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 54
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
For correct operation the BER should be E-5 to E-7 with the signal strength above 2V.
The BER is the most important value in the display since its possible to have a high signal
strength and poor BER. Always look at this first.
The four diamonds are the indicate levels of synchronisation lock, from left to right:
Reference Lock Indicates that the internal synthesiser is locked and is

independent of the received satellite signal.
Symbol Lock Indicates that symbol lock has been acquired.
Carrier Lock Indicates that carrier lock has been acquired.
Frame synchronisation Indicates that frame synchronisation has been acquired.

Solid black diamonds are required for correct operation of the demodulator.
-000610Hz is the frequency offset and is typically in the range of +/- 3KHz.
ID:R is the service ID and should display an R when the unit is operational.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 55
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
10.1.3. Software Version

The first screen is as follows:
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page, which is shown below.
Code
ROM Version
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Constants
Flash Memory
Page 56
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
10.2.

AB-V-MA-00505
GPS RECEIVER MENU

The GPS receiver menu information is only accessible when Port 5 is switched to OFF.
See 9.3.5
10.2.1. Receiver Information
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page. The information below is displayed:
Model and Firmware version
Serial Number
Installed Options (Not currently implemented)
10.2.2. Position
Rev No:
Date:
Lat
Long.
A2
13/05/2008
Page 57
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
10.2.3. Altitude
Alt
V.Vel (vertical velocity)
10.2.4. Course and Speed
Course and Speed
10.2.5. Time (UTC)
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
UTC Time
Page 58
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
10.2.6. DOP
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page. The information below is displayed here.
PDOP
HDOP
VDOP
TDOP
10.2.7. SVs In View
Press the *Enter* key to view the status page. The information below is displayed here.
PRN
Signal to Noise (S/N)
Azimuth (A/Z)
Elevation (EL)
Press *Toggle* to page through all the SVs in view.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 59
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
10.3.

AB-V-MA-00505
HF/MF STATUS
The HF/MF Receiver status page gives the user details of the HF/MF Receiver cards ID,
the signal status for Channel 1, Channel 2 and the firmware versions on the card.
10.3.1. Channel Status
Press the *Enter* key to access the sub menu and the *Toggle* key to toggle between
Channel 1 and Channel 2. The channel status menu gives details for both Channel 1 and
2, for the frequencys being used, the Bit rate (bps), the signal strength for the current
channel (dBuv/m), and the channels calculated signal to noise ratio (db)
10.3.2. C2 Code
The C2 code is a unique Code that is associated with the HF card this value is needed to
generate the C3 see 9.4.1.3.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 60
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
10.3.3. Model & F/W Version
On entry to the Model & F/W Vers Page, the screen will display the receiver type and the
current firmware version for the HF/MF card.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 61
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
10.4.

AB-V-MA-00505
BEACON STATUS
The Beacon Receiver status page gives the user details for the Beacon signal status for
Channel 1 and firmware versions on the SBX-4 card.
10.4.1. Channel Status
Press the *Enter* key to access the sub menu and the *Toggle* key to toggle between
Channel 1 and Channel 2. The channel status menu gives details for both Channel 1 and 2
(which for SBX-4 internal use only), on the frequencys being used, the Bit rate (bps), the
signal strength for the current channel (dBuv/m), and the channels calculated signal to
noise ratio (db)
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 62
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
11.

AB-V-MA-00505
SYSTEM TESTS
System Tests allow the user to check the operation of the front panel LCD display.
Access to System Tests is by pressing the *Page* key in the top level Main Menu until
'System Tests' is displayed. Then press the *Enter* key to show the following display:
Press the *Enter* key to initiate an internal self test of the LCD display Module. This test
checks each segment of the LCD display.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 63
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
12.

AB-V-MA-00505
SYSTEM INFORMATION
The system information has the following displays: current processor software version;
controller software version; GNSS hardware onboard; and the IP address of the unit.
12.1.
PC/104 S/W
The PC/104 S/W gives software information on the PC/104 card and the controller firmware
version number. When the above display is shown, Press the *Enter* Key to access the
information.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 64
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
12.2.

AB-V-MA-00505
INSTALLED H/W
The installed Hardware menu allows the user to change the type of commands that are
sent GNSS card by choosing different GNSS card types from a menu. This should only be
undertaken by engineers after a change of GNSS card. Changing this parameter will stop
data from being output from the card if the incorrect receiver type is chosen. It is also
possible to select whether the LD2 has a HF/MF card (3011) or a beacon card (SBX-4)
installed. This will enable the use to configure the selected card in the configuration menu.
12.3.
HOST IP ADDRESS
When the LD2 is connected to a network, the IP will be assigned by the network, provided it
is a DHCP network, otherwise the LD2 unit will default to the IP 192.168.150.249. The IP
of the LD2 will be displayed in the screen below, to access this screen when the above
screen is shown press the *Enter* key.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 65
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
13.

AB-V-MA-00505
ACCESS CODE
From the Main Menu the user can access the Access Code function by pressing the
*Enter* key. The following screen is shown:
This provides access to the sub menus, which allow you to see the value of the Access
Code.
Press the *Enter *key to select the first page which is the Access Code.
The following screen is shown:
The first 10 digits represent the code that needs to be given to the Veripos Helpdesk in
order to obtain a new enable or disable access code.
In the case of the screen above, that number is A08010003D.
The first digit, A, represents the service code of the Veripos service used:
VERIPOS-Standard (single or dual-beam satellite delivery) Service Code: A
VERIPOS-HF (compatible with VERIPOS-Standard) Service Code: A
VERIPOS-Standard Plus (single or dual-beam satellite delivery) Service Code: M
VERIPOS-DGlonass (single or dual-beam satellite delivery) Service Code: G
VERIPOS-Ultra (single or dual-beam satellite corrections delivery) Service Code: P
VERIPOS-Standard with Verify DP Display Service Code: C
VERIPOS-Standard Plus with Verify DP Display Service Code: J
VERIPOS-Ultra with Verify DP Display Service Code: S
VERIPOS Ultra Position Output Service Code: Z
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 66
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
The second generation of service code have been implemented into the latest release of
software.
L-band Decoder Version: 4.4
Controller Version: 6.33
Note, any controller version lower than 6.20 can only use the previously listed services (see
Page 65), Controller Versions that are 6.20 or higher can use the old services as well as
the new ones listed below:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
VerifyDP
Ultra
Verify DP, Ultra
STD+
VerifyDP, STD+
STD+, Ultra
VerifyDP, STD+, Ultra
Glonass
VerifyDP, Glonass
Glonass, Ultra
VerifyDP, Glonass, Ultra
Glonass, STD+
VerifyDP, Glonass, STD+
Glonass, STD+, Ultra
Verify DP, Glonass, STD+, Ultra
STD
VerifyDP, STD
STD, Ultra
VerifyDP,STD, Ultra
STD,STD+
Verify DP, STD, STD+
STD, STD+, Ultra
VerifyDP, STD, STD+, Ultra
The new IDs provide the user with more flexibility, and the Glonass service has been
added.
Note : When contacting the service help desk, ensure that you have your controller revision
number to hand.
0801 represents the serial number of the LD2. 0003 represents the number of times the
LD2 has had its signal activation changed. The D at the end indicates that the LD2 is
currently disabled. An E would mean its currently enabled.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 67
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
The second set of digits, 2A34 in the case of the screen above, represents the area where
the new access code needs to be entered once it has been received from the Helpdesk.
The last 4 digits, 66A4 in the case of the screen above, represent the confirmation code.
Whenever the LD2 is enabled or disabled the confirmation code will change.
Please fill out the Signal Notification Form with the relevant information see Veripos
document FO-GL-GPS-004 for instructions and the SNF form.
Once the Veripos Helpdesk has received the SNF form with the current code and service
requirements they will issue a 4 digit code access code. This should be entered into the
screen above using the *Toggle* and *Enter* keys.
Once the code is entered the confirmation code will automatically change. This new code
needs to be reported back to the Veripos Helpdesk to confirm that the signal changes have
been completed. The ID LED on the front panel will switch from being totally off or flashing,
to being on continuously. This indicates that the LD2 is now enabled for use.
Disabling the LD2 is done in exactly the same way as enabling it. Obtain the current code
from the LD2:
In the case of the screen above, that code would be A08010004E. Report this to the
Veripos Helpdesk using the SNF form. Once the disable code has been received, enter it
into the LD2 and report the confirmation code back to the Helpdesk.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 68
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
14.

AB-V-MA-00505
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The equipment is designed and manufactured to exacting standards and, once installed
and operated correctly, should provide prolonged trouble-free service.
The information contained in this section is restricted to such testing that can be
undertaken in the field.
There are no user-adjustable controls or user-serviceable items within the receiver. Units
should be returned to the manufacturer for repair. To expedite repairs, the following
information should be included with the returned unit:
Detailed fault description and operating conditions
Contact name with telephone/fax numbers
The following diagnostic procedures enable the user to carry out simple fault finding on the
system.
14.1.
POWER FAULTS
Fault
Unit off completely.
Reason
On/Off Switch to OFF
Remedy
Switch unit On using
switch on rear panel.
Blown fuse.
Check units fuse on rear

panel and replace fuse as
necessary.
Faulty supply.
Check ac supply is
available.
Faulty power connector.
Check continuity of the

power lead. Replace or
repair power cable as
necessary.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 69
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
14.2.

AB-V-MA-00505
SIGNAL FAULTS
Fault
Reason
Remedy
No Signal
Insufficient time allowed
Allow 20 seconds for
Signal Status Page:
for unit to warm up.
initial warm up period.
Antenna not connected.
Check the antenna
0V signal strength.
BER=E-0 or E-1
Reference Lock Solid
connection is secure.
Black
Status LEDs:
Satellite is not visible to
Relocate the antenna.
the antenna.
SYNC is off.
No signal
If the S/W version on the
Signal Status Page:
Demodulator menu reads seconds then reactivate.
0V signal strength
BER=E-0 or E-1
VERS *** then

communications between
the demodulator and
Reference Lock White
decoder have failed. This
LEDs:
could be due to a short
SYNC is off.
Switch the unit off for ten
power break.
Signal Intermittent
Incorrectly sited or tuned
Check antenna location
Signal Status Page:
antenna.
and connections.
Low signal strength
Poor antenna
Check and remake
connections
connections.
BER=E-1
Intermittent Lock Flags
LED's:
SYNC Intermittent
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 70
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
15.
VERIFY DP
15.1.
INTRODUCTION
The software has been designed to keep operator intervention to a minimum and to permit
a fast and easy assessment of the current positioning status. A semi fixed graphical display
provides pertinent information regarding the calculated position solution and associated
received differential corrections. The software generates alarms on all key positioning
parameters as well as software function status and provides flexibility across different
scenarios. Alarm thresholds are user configurable.
The mouse and keyboard operate the functions of the software.
With the appropriate access code, the Verify DP software will automatically start and
configure the necessary inputs required to populate the various graphical views.
Amongst other information, the software displays; position error ellipse, a track plot,
location and signal strength of all GPS satellites and Glonass Satellites when enabled, the
age of corrections received from each Veripos reference station used and or external
RTCM sources. The geographical location of the vessel can be viewed as well as the
available Veripos reference stations in the region, both of which are displayed on a map of
the operating area. When using an external Gyro input the target monitoring screen can be
used to display the vessel outline and user defined targets. A complete record of events is
maintained in a log, which also shows real-time RTCM Type 16 messages broadcast by
Veripos regarding service status.
15.2.
MONITOR
Use a VGA monitor to suit the operational environment. The monitor input is directly from
the LD2 15 way video output on P6.
15.3.
VERIFY-DP OPERATION
Once the LD2 unit has been connected to the appropriate antennas, operation of the Verify
DP can commence.
With the LD2 correctly configured, the onboard Verify DP software automatically runs, this
will configure the GNSS receiver in the LD2 and enable all the information required. The
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 71
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
software will then configure the screen automatically with predetermined windows which
are regarded as the essential information required by the DP operator.
If the vessel is starting work in a new area or the unit is switched on for the first time, then
the appropriate communications satellite transmitting the corrections (sometimes referred
to as the Beam) may have to be changed (see 13.2)
15.4.
SCREEN LAYOUT
Figure 4 - Verify DP Main Screen Layout
15.5.
DISPLAY VIEWS
Figure 4 shows the Verify DP front end display that is automatically presented when Verify
DP is activated and receiving data, this is the standard screen that will be displayed when
the software is started.
The Standard display opens showing the RTCM information from the reference stations
that are being used in the onboard algorithms. Where the system configuration allows it is
possible to display the vessel outline. If the system is configured to display outline from the
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 72
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
setting menu when in Admin mode select Options and Enable the Vessel outline option,
this will add the buttons in Figure 5, and this enables the user to toggle between the station
information view and the vessel outline view.
Figure 5 RTCM/Vessel outline display toggle button
Each screen window will now be described in detail. The windows have the following titles.
Position Information
Almanac/DOP
Satellite Polar Plot
Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR)
DGPS Calculations
Map
Veripos Reference Station Information
Target Monitoring
Event Log (and Type 16 Messages)
15.5.1. Position Information View
Figure 6 - Position Information View

Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 73
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
This view is divided into four sections:
1. Position
This is the calculated position in WGS84 it is displayed in Degrees, Minutes, Seconds to
three decimal points of second (centimetre level precision).
Height is the Antenna height above sea level and is in Meters. This is sometimes referred
to as the height above the Geoid which can be considered for DP purposes to be the height
above the MSL.
2. Mode
The mode shows which Veripos service is being used by the system as a primary source.
The software will always use the best solution available and provided a valid position is
being calculated this box will remain green and indicting which solution is being output.
If the box changes colour to red, there is no valid position is being calculated and the status
will change to Invalid and will require operator intervention.
The mode box will display GNSS and be coloured orange when only free to air services are
used as well as external RTCM sources. The QC of these positions is reduced.
Full QC is used when the Veripos Corrections are input into the solutions.
3. Date and Time

The date and UTC time are displayed.
4. Speed/Course/Heading
Speed is available in different units; click the grey button to the side which will allow the
user to change units: Mph, Kph, m/s, Knots.
Course over Ground is calculated from the GPS antenna and represents the direction of
travel for the vessel. It should be noted that if the vessel is stationary the course can vary
as the antenna is not moving and thus the CoG will constantly change, as the GPS has no
positional history to calculate a heading.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 74
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Heading is available when an external Gyro input is connected to Port 3 and is configured
to accept gyro data, see 9.3.3 (GYRO data can also be input via the USB port, when a
USB Serial converter is used).
5. Fix Button
This Fix button is used to fix the users location at the moment of pressing the FIX button,
the position will be antenna location, unless offsets have been entered.
It is possible to enter Lat / Longs where required to be used for target monitoring purposes.
15.5.2. ALMANAC/DOP
The Almanac/DOP view displays data from the GNSS Almanac which provides the user
with a six hour window that can be used for planning purposes. In addition, a two hour
history is kept showing the predicted DOP from data in the Almanac and the actual DOP
values generated by the Algorithms to the left of the current time, this allows the user to
compare the actual and predicted DOP values.
(Note the actual figures are plotted as lighter lines, compared to the darker lines drawn by
the predicated values).
Figure 7 Almanac View
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 75
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
DOP (Dilution of Precision) is an indicator of the quality of the geometry of the satellite
constellation. The DOP values for the current time are displayed at the top of the view as
well as the last two hours of DOP data being graphically displayed on the display.
GDOP is computed from the geometric relationships between the receiver position and the
positions of the satellites that the receiver is using. For planning purposes GDOP is
computed from the Almanac and a user position. Predicted GDOP does not take into
account obstacles that block the line-of-sight from the position to the satellites.
GDOP Components:
PDOP - Position Dilution of Precision (3-D), sometimes the Spherical DOP.
HDOP - Horizontal Dilution of Precision (Latitude and Longitude).
VDOP - Vertical Dilution of Precision (Height).
The Green area displays the number of GPS and possible GLONASS (if enabled) satellites
that will are above elevation mask, the white area displays the total number of satellites
above the horizon.
15.5.3. Satellite Polar Plot
Figure 8 - SV Polar Plot View
The satellite polar plot displays the satellite constellations for the users location. The
satellites are colour coded to provide information on their status with circles representing
the satellites of the GPS constellation and squares representing the GLONASS
constellation:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 76
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Green healthy satellites which are used in the computation.
White satellites that are in view but below the elevation mask, and therefore not
used in the computation.
Yellow indicates missing satellites; these could be obstructed behind objects.
Red indicates unhealthy satellites.
The Left hand column of the view displays the unique PRN (satellite) number of the
satellites in view if the satellite is a GLONASS satellite it will be given a PRN number
greater than 32. The azimuth is the horizontal angle measured in degrees from the fixed
point north to the direction of the satellite and is relative to the users location.
The third column titled Elev is the Elevation of the satellite relative to that users position at
that instant of time. Final column provides an indicator to show if the satellite is either rising
or falling.
The satellite polar plot view will also show the elevation mask set in the unit and the
number of satellites being used of those available. A grey ring is used to indicate the
elevation mask from zero to the elevation mask used and any satellite below the mask will
be used in the position computations.
15.5.4. Signal to Noise
Figure 9 - SNR View
The strength of the signal received from each satellite available is displayed in the SNR
view. If a single frequency (L1) Multi-Reference solution is in use, only a single bar will be
displayed to represent the L1 SNR, and when the dual frequency solution (Standard Plus
and Ultra) are enabled, then both L1 and L2 measurements are plotted.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 77
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
The X axis lists the PRN numbers of the satellites being received and includes satellites
below the elevation mask. The range on the Y axis is 0 to 60 dBhz, where dBhz provides a
measure of the signal strength with a higher value indicating a stronger signal.
If a satellite is showing as red in the SNR display, check the elevation of the satellite in the
Polar Plot view. Low elevation satellites will typically have a low SNR values but if the
satellite is at a high elevation (i.e. above 40 degrees) and has a low SNR it would indicate
that the signal strength is not as it should be and may indicate a potential problem.
Note: Depending on the GPS receiver used, the values for the signal strength can vary
depending on the implementation by the GPS receiver manufacturer.
The SNR bars will fluctuate over the period that a satellite is in view, this is a characteristic
of the signal due to the changing elevation of the satellite. The main indication of a problem
is when SNR bars are constantly red for long periods.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 78
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
15.5.5. DGPS Calculation
Figure 10 - DGPS Calculation View
Figure 10 shows the DGPS calculation view which displays the position error ellipses for all
the calculations. Each ellipse is uniquely coloured for ease of identification. There is a Key
showing the colours associated with each position calculation along with the deviation of
the solutions compared to the optimum solution.
The + and buttons on the view is available to zoom in and out with the scale ranging from
0.4m per scale bar division to 200m per scale bar division.
The RAD/GRID button toggles between a grid and circular display. In the grid display the
grid marks are spaced one scale bar division apart, whilst the radius of circular display is
two scale bar divisions apart.
The amount of position history shown on the graphical display is changeable to a user
defined value; the current default is 60 seconds. This can be found through the main menu
bar in Setting / DGPS Cal settings or by right clicking on the graphical display.
The numbers in the view relate to the statistics derived for each available solution. The
standard deviation is a measure of the spread of the measurements (at 95% confidence)
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 79
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
and hence the precision of the position computation. The smaller the SD Latitude, SD
Longitude and SD Height the better the derived position.
The RMS is a statistical measure of the computed positions about a best fit position
solution. Root Mean Square (RMS) error is the value of one standard deviation (68%) of
the error in one, two or three dimensions
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 80
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
15.5.6. Reference Station Information
Figure 11 - Reference station Information View
The RTCM view displays the age of the corrections from the individual reference stations
that are use in the position solution.
The reference stations are listed in the left hand column along with the Veripos station ID.
The number of satellites for the specific reference station is indicated in brackets located to
the right of the scrolling bar for the age of corrections.
Veripos RTCM Type 1 and Type 31 corrections are shown as scrolling bars. The bars will
remain green if corrections are being received, Amber when the corrections are not being
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 81
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
received and are still valid. If the bar is red corrections are not being received and the
corrections are not valid which would indicate a problem with the L-band link which should
be investigated by the user. After a period of time the station will drop off the display. In
conjunction with the scrolling bar for the age of corrections, the values for the age for the
RTCM messages is also shown message are shown.
If any HF stations are selected, they will be shown with blue scrolling bars and if any MF
stations are selected then they will be displayed with orange scrolling bars.
Note: The HF/MF card will have to be installed to receive these corrections along with an
appropriate antenna. When this service is used, the stations will automatically be used
within the calculation, depending on the distance from the stations. Please refer to section
9.4 for configuration of the HF/MF option.
Type 15 messages (Standard Plus service) are shown as an indicator box, with the number
of the satellites available from the station shown in brackets. The box remains green whilst
corrections are received, but if none are received after 6 minutes the box will revert to
amber and then red after 9 minutes. The Type 15 messages remain valid for longer than
the Type 1 messages.
Veripos Ultra corrections are also shown as a box which will remain green whilst valid
corrections are received. If after 2 minutes corrections are not received the box will revert to
amber (corrections still valid), and then after 6 minutes the box will then change to red,
showing that the corrections are no longer valid and solution will revert to s standalone
GPS solution.
It is worth pointing out that the threshold values for the age of corrections can be changed
by the user.
The reference stations that are used in the calculation are the four closest stations to the
users location. The corrections are those that are made available on Port2 of the LD2, the
system by default outputs all stations that are available on the beam that the L-band card is
tracking the user has the ability to switch stations ON and OFF on Port 2 (see 9.3.2). If
only 1, 2 or 3 stations are selected then these will be the only stations used within the
position calculations, provide they are within range.
When using Verify DP it is advised to leave Port 2 in its default setting of outputting all the
RTCM messages.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 82
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
The Map View shows the Veripos Reference stations that are available within the working
area and the users position.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 83
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
15.5.7. Target Monitoring

The target monitoring view, displays the vessels outline, vessels heading, a targets
position and the range and bearing to that target. This screen only works properly when a
heading source from a gyro is input into the LD2 through port 3 or the USB port.
Vessel Outline
The vessel outline can be chosen by right clicking the mouse on the background of the
view, selecting the required outline from the list of standard and user defined vessel
outlines. The user defined vessel outline can be generated using the Veripos Vessel Shape
Editor Excel Macro which can be downloaded http://downloads.veripos.com located in
Utilities folder. Instructions are given with in the sheet on how to upload the file to the LD2.
Figure 12 - Vessel out line view
Vessel Offsets
The user can define two offset positions relative to the vessels CRP (Central Reference
Point): the GPS Antenna offset and the vessels Centre of Rotation offset. To enter these
values the user should use a right click of the mouse, over the Target monitoring view and
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 84
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
from the popup options select Set Vessel Offset & Centre which will display the Offset &
Centre of Rotation dialog box see Figure 13. The user should enter the offset values for
the GPS antenna and Centre of rotation relative to the vessels CRP, measurements are in
metres (m) the sign convention is positive X = starboard, negative X = Port, Positive Y =
forward and Negative Y = Aft .
In this Dialog box it is also possible to set parameters for a vessel proximity alarm or for a
station keeping alarm.
When the alarm is set to Proximity alarm, the system will alarm when the distance from the
target to the vessels centre of rotation is less that the user defined distance. When the
system is set to station keeping an alarm will be given when the distance between the
target position and the vessels centre of rotation exceeds the user defined value.
Figure 13 - Offset and Centre of Rotation dialog box
Target Selection
To enter a target position to be tracked the user should press the FIX button, this will bring
up the Edit Fix Position dialog box, see Figure 14. The position in the Dialog that is
displayed when the screen is brought is the vessel position when the fix button was
selected.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 85
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
The user can enter alternative target position by entering the Lat and Long in WGS84.
Press the OK button to confirm the position, this will return the user to the target monitoring
display.
Figure 14 - Edit Fix Position dialog box
Target monitoring
When a target position has been entered and the target is within the range of the view it
will be displayed by a target symbol, a Red line will be drawn from the Centre of rotation to
the target position, in the top right hand side of the display the position of the target is
displayed and in the top left of the screen the bearing to the target from the centre of
rotation, distance from the centre of rotation and Estimated Time of Arrival at the target,
see Figure 15
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 86
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Figure 15 - Target Monitoring View
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 87
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Range Rings
It is possible for the user to switch the range rings off if needed, to do this use a right click
of the mouse, over the Target monitoring view, from the menu click the Show Range Rings,
if this is ticked the range rings will be displayed if it is not ticked then the range rings will not
be displayed.
Zooming
Using the [ + ] and [ ] buttons at the bottom of the screen it is possible zoom in, when
zooming out when the view reaches a set scale the symbol will change to an arrow pointing
in the direction of the heading of vessel.
15.5.8. Event Log View (and Type 16 messages)

This view presents a log of the events that have occurred whilst the program has been
running. The view contains information if the signal for the GPS and RTCM is lost and is
displayed in red. Every message has its own date and time stamp.
The Type 16 messages are special messages which contain information on the Veripos
system. Typically, the messages will provide information on planned service outages for
scheduled maintenance.
15.5.9. Mode / Warning Display

This information bar (Figure 16) is used to show the status of the software. The bar will be
green, indicating that the system is healthy and operating as expected. The information bar
will be yellow if a warning is displayed and if the bar is red then the system is critical and
requires immediate operator attention.
Figure 16 - System Status
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 88
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Figure 17 presents the system mode view (this is displayed along the bottom of the VerifyDP display). The system mode indicates which position calculations are available and
whether they have been enabled.
Figure 17 - System Mode
A green box denotes that the solution is available and if the text box is highlighted then this
will be the position solution being used (in Figure 12 Ultra is the solution being used). If a
service is not enabled the text box for the service will be greyed out. If the service is
enabled, but not available then the box will be red which may indicate a problem with the
solution.
In addition to the system mode indicators, there are also indicators for the RTCM data input
sources. In normal mode of operation, The RTCM boxes are green when valid corrections
are available but these will turn yellow for a period of 30 seconds, then red if corrections
are not available.
Figure 18 Differential Availability
It is possible to have multiple sources of RTCM feeding the algorithms, from the onboard Lband card, the onboard HF/MF card, and External sources of RTCM, external RTCM can
be feed in to the algorithms, through multiple I/O devices, a letter is assigned to the data
source to indicate which I/O it is coming from:
Rev No:
Date:
U = USB
S = Serial
L = LAN (network)
A2
13/05/2008
Page 89
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
15.6.

AB-V-MA-00505
MAIN MENU
The user has the ability to perform some limited configuration from the main menu
structure.
15.6.1. Settings
The settings menu allows for some basic configuration of the Verify DP software.
Figure 19 - Verify DP Main Menu
Edit RTCM Station Database
Figure 20 - RTCM Database
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 90
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
This displays the reference stations in the LD2 the edit facility allows the user to change
the name and ID of a station.
Reload Default Settings

Once this has been selected all the Factory Default settings are loaded into the preset
views of Verify-DP. This does not affect the hardware settings of the LD2.
Re-Initialise IO
This will Re-initialise the internal sockets used for passing RTCM data to algorithms within
the LD.
Re-Initialise Decoder
The Factory settings are re-established on the decoder when this is selected.
SNR Plots settings
Figure 21 - SNR Plot Settings
This dialogue allows the thresholds for the SNR can be set. To adjust the settings press the
up or down arrow on the appropriate threshold until the required value is displayed.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 91
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Ref. Station Info Settings
Figure 22 - Reference Station Info Settings
The Reference Station dialogue (Figure 16) indicates the age thresholds of the RTCM
corrections for each message type (Type 1, Type 15 and Ultra). The thresholds can be
changed by the operator with the limits altered by pressing the up or down arrow until the
required threshold value is reached. The default settings are recommended for use.
A maximum age limit can also be set, but it must be remembered that once this limit has
been exceeded that particular station will no longer be used in the calculations.
By right clicking on the view, the dialogue in Figure 12 will be displayed.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 92
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
DGPS Calc Settings
Figure 23 - DGPS Calculation Settings
Figure 12 is the dialogue related to the DGPS Calculation view and is used to set the
amount of time that the will be displayed on the view. The longer the time set in seconds
the more data will be displayed on the plot. This dialogue can also be accessed by right
clicking on the DGPS Calculation View (15.5.5).
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 93
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
15.6.2. Administration Menu

To access the administration menu a password must be entered. It is recommended that
only people qualified to change the operating data is given the password. The password
will be provided upon request, but is only required for used by qualified Veripos engineers.
To enter the Admin mode click on Admin Settings and enter the password into the
dialogue. Remember a keyboard must be plugged into the LD2 for the password entry and
the password is case sensitive.
Once the password has been correctly entered a new menu item called Admin will be
displayed on the menu bar. The items under Admin will be dealt with in the descending
order they appear.
Figure 24 - Administration Menu
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 94
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Configure Alarms
Figure 25 - Alarm Configuration
The alarms can be configured to the user requirements using the dialogue in Figure 25.
Alarms are used as an aid to help the user determine if the system is working correctly but
there may be a requirement to alter the alarms settings at some point during operations.
General settings are used to change the audible alarm that is used in addition to the pop-up
box that can be used to warn the user of any issues that might be occurring (Tick the
Enable Popup to facilitate use of this function).
The user also has the ability to set the alarm codes and the warning values. The alarm
codes are:
300 Data Lost
301 Data Missing
302 Data Invalid
303 Data Corrupt
400 Proximity Alarm
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 95
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
The user can configure the priority of alarms these depending on the severity of the
operation, i.e. is data is lost, this may be seen as critical as the system will not be operating
at all. The alarm priorities are:
Normal
Warning
Critical
To change the priorities on the alarm codes, select the select alarm code icon to change
the alarm code and the select the appropriate alarm priority for the alarm code. Finally
select the SET icon to enable the code and priority.
Configure IO Ports
Figure 26 - I/O Configuration
The Configure IO Ports dialog enables the user to configure the internal data ports with in
the LD2 for communications between the internal algorithms.
To configure an IO select which type of IO is being used for data input TCP or Serial,
currently no data is input through Serial port. The following data is available on the
associated port and IP address, as a minimum the VDP and VDP Aux IO should be
configured the gyro data is optional:
Rev No:
Date:
Data
Address
Port
VDP
127.0.0.1
5000
VDP Aux
127.0.0.1
8001
Gyro (HDT) serial port 3
127.0.0.1
4990
Gyro (HDT) USB
127.0.0.1
4997
A2
13/05/2008
Page 96
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Data Decoders
Figure 27 - Data Decoders
The Decoder settings dialog is used to associate the message types with the available data
port configured in the IO ports configuration. This allows the messages to be read by the
Verify DP GUI. It is highly recommended that these settings are not altered other than by a
qualified Veripos engineer.
Configure Data Streams
Figure 28 - Configure Data Streams
The above dialog enables the user to configure the data inputs from external data sources
into the algorithms. The Stream is the Source of the data input, the user should select the
appropriate data source then tick the Enable box then choose the appropriate data type :
Rev No:
Date:
GNSS
GNSS data from the onboard GNSS card when enabled.
L-band
RTCM corrections from the onboard L-band Card when enabled.
HF/MF
RTCM corrections from the onboard HF/MF Card when enabled.
A2
13/05/2008
Page 97
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Serial P3
External data from a third party system being feed through Port 3
HF/IALA
Allows for an external source of HF/MF data to be input into

the onboard algorithms.
UHF Local
Allows for an external source of UHF data to be input into the

onboard algorithms.
L-band (Ext 2) Allows for the input of None Veripos RTCM messages into
L-band (Veripos)
Allows for Veripos RTCM messages from another

Veripos demodulator to be input into the onboard
algorithms
External data from a third party system being feed through the USB
USB
port
HF/IALA

UHF Local

onboard algorithms.
L-band (Ext 2)
Allows for the input of None Veripos RTCM messages

into the onboard algorithms.
L-band (Veripos)

algorithms
Ext. LAN
External data from a third party system being feed through the LAN
Port. When using the External LAN data feed, the user must enter the IP and port
number of the system that is outputting the data.
HF/IALA

UHF Local

onboard algorithms.
L-band (Ext 2)
Allows for the input of None Veripos RTCM messages

into the onboard algorithms.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
L-band (Veripos)
Page 98
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505

algorithms
Configure IP Address
The IP Address Configuration dialog allows the user to configure the way that an IP
address is assigned to the LD2. The user can configure the system to obtain an address
from an Network using DHCP where supported, or the user can allocate the LD2 a Static IP
Address.
Figure 29 - IP Address Configuration
Change Password
If the password is changed, it is strongly recommended that the new password is held in a
secure place on the vessel so that when it is urgently required it can be easily obtained.
Clear Event Log

If the data is old in the Event Log then by using this facility all the data can be deleted. Not
recommended whilst the vessel is in DP operation.
Display Dimming
This facility can be used to adjust the display for the operators night time requirements.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 99
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Once in this menu, by putting the curser over, either the Day or Night time button (showing
the colour last selected) and left click, the colour palette will be displayed. Once the colour
has been selected it is advisable to add it to the custom colours for future use.
Colour selection can be done either directly from the basic colour table or the colour chart
on the right. There are two ways to use the colour chart, one to left click, and hold it down,
on the square box, and move the grey square around until the desired colour is displayed in
the sample box. The second method is to move the vertical slider up and down until the
desired colour is selected. Again this can be added to the custom colour selection. Once
the colour selection is correct then exit by pressing OK
Options
There are two options in the options menu:
Vessel outline enable: enables the View option in the top menu bar which allows the user to
toggle between the vessel outline and the station information view.
HF/MF card installed: should be enabled when there is an HF/MF installed in the LD2.
View Raw Data

This allows the user to view the data being used to populate the Verify-DP display. This is
useful to check if data is being output from the algorithms.
Exit Admin Mode

This will take the operator back to the normal display with the Admin menu item removed
from the task bar at the top of the screen.
Close Verify DP
Selecting this will close the screen leaving it blank, but the LD2 unit will keep running. To
restore Verify-DP on the screen, the LD2 must be cycled off/on.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 100
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
15.6.3. Display
Figure 30 - Display Setting
This Menu is for the night dimming of the Verify DP screen if it is situated on a ship bridge
which is darkened at night.
15.6.4. View
Figure 31 - View Menu
The View menu is available when system is enabled to display the vessel outline, from the
Admin menu. It gives the user the ability to toggle between the Vessel outline view and the
Station information view.
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 101
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
15.6.5. Help
Figure 32 - Help Menu
The Help menu enables the user to access this user manual the contents menu. The Index
menu is currently not used. The about menu opens the below dialog box which gives the
user information about the unit: IP address, the LD2 uptime and Software Versions.
Figure 33 - About Dialog
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 102
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:
16.

AB-V-MA-00505
CONTACT INFORMATION
Veripos c/o Subsea 7
Greenwell Road,
East Tullos,
Aberdeen, AB12 3AX
Rev No:
Date:
Tel
+44 (0)1224 877993
Fax
+44 (0)1224 879312
E-Mail
veripos.helpdesk@subsea7.com
Web Site
www.veripos.com
A2
13/05/2008
Page 103
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
APPENDIX I
LD2 Menu Structure Firmware Version
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 104
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
1. MAIN MENU
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 105
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
2. CONFIGURATION
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 106
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
2.1. CONFIG DMODULATOR
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 107
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
2.2. CONFIG GPS

Toggle
** GPS Receiver **
Position Mode
Enter
* Position Mode *
Man 3-D(Min 4SVs)
Toggle
* Position Mode *
Auto 3-D(Min 3SVs)
Toggle
* Position Mode *
Man 2-D(Min 3SVs)
Toggle
* Position Mode *
Auto 3-D(DOP lim)
Page
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Dynamic Mode
Enter
* Dynamic Mode
Static
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Quasi-Static
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Walking
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Ship
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Unlimited
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Aircraft
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
Automobile
Toggle
Page
Toggle
* Dynamic Mode
*
Adaptive Dynamic
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Mask setting
Enter
* Mask Settings
PDOP:
99
Toggle
* Mask Settings
HDOP:
99
Toggle
* Mask Settings
VDOP:
99
Toggle
* Mask Settings
*
Pos. Elev: 07 degs
Toggle
Page
* Mask Settings
*
Min SVs(Raw) 1
Toggle
* Mask Settings
*
Raw Elev: 00 degs
* Diff.Control
*
Station ID: 0000
Toggle
* Diff.Control
*
Age Limit: 0100 s
Toggle
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Diff.Control
Enter
* Diff.Control
*
Diff. Mode: Remote
Toggle
* Diff.Control
Auto Diff: ON
Toggle
Toggle
Page
*** Configuration***
GPS Receiver
Toggle
* Diff.Control
*
RTCM Source:DNLINK
Page
Enter
** GPS Receiver **
Port A Settings
Enter
* Port A Settings *
NMEA O/P:GGA1.0
Page
* Port A Settings *
Raw O/P:MBN 1.0
Page
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Port B Settings
Enter
* Port B Settings *
NMEAO/P:GGA OFF
Page
Page
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Factory Defaults
Enter
* Factory Defaults*
Use ENTER to reset
Enter
* Factory Defaults*
Restoring Defaults
* Data Memory
*
Use ENTER to Clear
Enter
* Data Memory*
Clearing Memory
* Save settings
*
Use ENTER to save
Enter
* Data Memory*
Saving Settings
Page
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Data Memory
Enter
Page
Page
** GPS Receiver **
Save Settings
Enter
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 108
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
2.3. Config Serial Ports
Serial Port
Page
P1: NMEA OUT GPS RX
Page
P2: RTCM(P) DLINK

9600 STN: 706 N
Page
P3: REMOTE I/O OFF

9600
Page
P4: RTCM(S) DNLINK

9600 STN: 706 N
Page
P5: GPS I/O OFF
Page
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
USB1 RTCM IN
9600
Page 109
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
2.4. Config HF/MF Receiver (HF setup)
Page
** Operating Mode **
Frequency Band: HF
Toggle
Frequency Band: MF
Toggle
Page
Note: Depending on the selection made in the Operating Mode selection this
will change the stations that can be selected in the Station selection listing to
those of the Veripos HF Network or of those of the Iala MF network
Page
** HF/MF Receiver **
Station Select
HF/MF Receiver
Enter
* HF Station Select*
>: See station list
Page
Page
Page
Station Details
Enter
* Station Details *
Station Name ID
Toggle
Enter
Toggle
* Station Details *
Name: Name
Toggle
* Station Details *
Station Name ID
* Station Details *
ID: XXX
Toggle
* Station Details *
CH1 Freq: 1111.11KHz
Toggle
Page
* Station Details *
C3 Code: XXXXXX
Page
Toggle
* Station Details *
Data rate: XXX
Toggle
* Station Details *
CH2 Freq: 1111.11KHz
Toggle
Page
Decryption
Enter
* Decryption *
Disabled
Toggle
* Decryption *
Enabled
Toggle
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 110
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
2.5. CONFIG HF/MF RECEIVER (MF SETUP)

Page
Frequency Band: HF
Toggle
Frequency Band: MF
Toggle
Page
Note: Depending on the selection made in the Operating Mode selection this
will change the stations that can be selected in the Station selection listing to
those of the Veripos HF Network or of the of the Iala MF network
Page
Station Select
HF/MF Receiver
Enter
* MF Station Select*
CH1: See station list
Page
Toggle
* MF Station Select*
CH2: See station list
Toggle
Page
Page
Station Details
Enter
*MF CH1: Auto Dist *

283.5KHz 100bps
Toggle
*MF CH2: Auto Dist *

283.5KHz 100bps
Toggle
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 111
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
2.6. CONFIG BEACON RECEIVER
*Beacon Receiver*
Station select
Beacon Receiver
Enter
Enter
MF CH1: AUTO DIST

291.5KHz 100bps
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 112
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
3. STATUS
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 113
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
3.1. STATUS DEMODULATOR
*** Status
***
Demodulator
Enter
** Demodulator
Unit Id
**
Enter
Unit Id: 1234

Status: Disabled / Enabled
Page
Page
** Demodulator **
Signal Status
Enter
AOR(E)
0.0V E-0
+000000Hz ID:
Page
Page
** Demodulator **
S/W Versions
Enter
Demodulator: 1.2 3.4

Decoder:
5.6 7.8
Page
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 114
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
3.2. STATUS GPS
*** Status
***
GPS Receiver
Enter
**GPS Receiver **
Receiver Info
Enter
*Receiver Info
*
Model & F/W Vers
Page
Page
**GPS Receiver **
Position
Page
Enter
Page
Model Name:
Firmware Vers:
Enter
Lat:
Lon:
Enter
Alt:
V.VEL:
Enter
Course:
Speed:
*Receiver Info
Serial Number
Page
Enter
*Receiver Info
*
Installed Options
Page
Serial Number:
0123456789
Enter
Installed Options
Page
**GPS Receiver **
Altitude
m
m/s
Page
**GPS Receiver **
Course & Speed
degs
knts
Page
**GPS Receiver **
Time (UTC)
Enter
UTC Time: : :
Page
**GPS Receiver **
DOPs
Enter
PDOP:
VDOP:
HDOP:
TDOP:
Enter
PRN: 01 S/N: 00
AZ: 360 EL: 00
Page
**GPS Receiver **
SVs in View
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Toggle
PRN: 02 S/N: 00
AZ: 180 EL: 00
Toggle
PRN: ect...S/N: 00
AZ: 180 EL: 00
Toggle
Page 115
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
3.3. STATUS HF/MF
Page
*** Status
***
HF/MF Receiver
Enter
*HF/MF Receiver *
Channel Status
Enter
Ch1: .kHz
...bps ..dBuv/m ..dB
Toggle
Ch2: .kHz
Toggle
Page
*HF/MF Receiver *
C2 Code
Enter
HF Encryption
C2 Code: XXXXX
Page
Page
*HF/MF Receiver *
Model & F/W Vers
Enter
Model Name:
F/W Vers:
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 116
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
3.4. STATUS BEACON

Page
*** Status
***
Beacon
Enter
*Beacon Receiver *
Channel Status
Enter
Ch1: .kHz
Toggle
Toggle
Page
Page
*Beacon Receiver *
Model & F/W Vers
Enter
Model Name:
F/W Vers:
Page
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 117
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
4.
Rev No:
Date:
SYSTEM TEST
A2
13/05/2008
Page 118
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
5. SYSTEM INFORMATION
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 119
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
6. ACCESS CODE
Page
**** Main Menu ****

AccessCode
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Enter
*Subsea7 AccessCode*
P12345689D 0123 456
Page 120
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
APPENDIX II
Veripos Station Listing
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 121
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
1. VERIPOS REFERENCE STATION LISTING

The Current Veripos Station listing can be found on the Veripos Online Support System via
the following URL:
http://help.veripos.com
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 122
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
1.1. Third party MF stations

Please note that VERIPOS cannot accept responsibility for the operation or performance of
third party systems.
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Gustavus
Cold Bay
Cape Hinchinbrook
Level Island
Potato Point
Biorka
Kenai
Kodiak
Annette Island
284
296
288
282
290
280
292
294
278
288.0
289.0
292.0
295.0
298.0
305.0
310.0
313.0
323.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Brisbane
Darwin
Exmouth
Cape Flattery
Karratha
Ingham
Perth
Sydney
Gladstone
Cape SchanckI
Albany
Mackay
Corny Point
Weipa
Mallacoota
Horn Island
007
014
015
005
001
008
012
003
006
000
011
004
010
009
013
002
294.0
294.0
297.0
304.0
304.0
306.0
306.0
308.0
313.0
314.0
315.0
315.0
316.0
316.0
318.0
320.0
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Horta
Sao Miguel
484
490
308.0
312.5
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Bahrain
480
298.0
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Malaga
514
299.5
100
Alaska
Australia
Azores
Bahrain
Balearics
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 123
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
MF
MF
Mahon
Cala Figuera
524
522
293.0
294.5
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Oostende
640
312.0
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
St David's Head
323.0
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
461
464
460
465
467
462
290.0
290.0
300.0
300.0
305.0
305.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
MF
MF
MF
MF
Abrolhos
Rio Grande
Ponta se Sao Marcos
Sao Tome
Cabo Calchanhar
Ilha da Moela
Cabo de Santa Marta Grande
Lt
Canivete
Ilha Rasa
Sergipe
466
463
469
468
310.0
310.0
315.0
320.0
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Cavarna
900
300.0
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Wiarton
Cape Ray
Labrador
Partridge Island
St. Jean Richelieu
Hartlen Point
Rigolet
Riviere du Loop
Sandspit
Cardinal
Fox Island
Albert Bay
Lauzon
Cape Norman
Western Head
Moise
Cape Race
Tofino (Amphitrite Point)
Point Escuminac
Richmond
310
340
345
326
312
330
344
318
306
308
336
300
316
342
334
320
338
302
332
304
286.0
288.0
290.0
295.0
296.0
298.0
299.0
300.0
300.0
306.0
307.0
309.0
309.0
310.0
312.0
313.0
315.0
315.0
319.0
320.0
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Belgium
Bermuda
Brazil
Bulgaria
Canada
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 124
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
MF
Trois Rivieres
314
321.0
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
La Entallada
534
284.0
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Fangchen Gang
Kau Yi Chau
Yanweigang
Dasansgan Dao
Haozhi Gang
Dajishan
Laotieshan Xijiao
Dinghai
Bachu Jiao
Beitang
Chengshan Jiao
Zhenai Jaio
Luyu
Zhoudao
Qinghuangdao
Sanya
Sanzao
Shi Tang
Tiandashan
Wangijamai
Yangpu
646
852
620
602
622
624
604
626
652
608
612
632
640
644
606
654
642
628
630
614
656
287.0
289.0
291.0
301.5
304.0
307.5
307.5
310.0
310.5
310.5
317.0
320.0
317.0
301.0
287.5
295.0
307
295
313
313.5
313
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
Hammerodde
Blavandshuk
Skagen West
Thorshavn
700
705
710
715
289.5
290.0
296.0
287.5
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Alexandria
Port Said
Ras Umm Sidd
Ras Gharib
Mersa Martruh
El Quseir
440
442
444
446
448
450
284.0
290.0
293.5
298.0
307.0
314.5
200
200
200
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
Flamborough Head
Wormleighton
North Foreland
Lizard
687
691
688
681
290.5
291.0
299.5
306.0
100
100
100
100
Canary Isles
China
Denmark
Egypt
England
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 125
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
MF
St Catherine's Point
680
307.5
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Narva
Ristna
841
840
295.5
307.0
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Klamila
Mantyluoto
Puumala
Kokkola
Porkkala Pilot Station
Turku
Outokumpu
Marjaniemi
606
601
602
608
600
604
603
605
287.0
287.5
290.0
290.5
293.5
301.5
304.5
314.5
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Porquerolles
Gatteville
Cap Bear
Les Sables Olonne
Pont de Buis
Pen Men
Cap Ferret
Les Baleines
Saint Mathieu
469
460
468
464
462
463
466
464
462
286.5
299.0
304.5
307.0
308.5
309.0
310.0
305.0
310.5
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Cayenne
475
307.0
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Dune Helgoland
Zeven
Gro Mohrdorf
762
763
761
298.5
303.5
308.0
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Upolu Point
Pahoa
Kokole Point
258
254
260
286.0
290.0
300.0
100
100
200
Estonia
Finland
France
French Guyana
Germany
Hawaii
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 126
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Skardhsfjara
Skagata
Raufarhofn
Djupivogur
Reykjanes
Bjargtangar
632
626
628
630
622
624
287.0
289.0
289.5
291.0
293.5
300.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Aguada
Utan Point
Dolphin's Nose
Okha
Periyar River
Keating Point
Pondicherry
Sagar Island
Minicoy Island
Periyar River
Suratkal Point
Gopnath Point
Porbandar
Ratnagiri
Indira Point
Antarvedi
Krishnapatnam
Nagapatinam
Pandian Island
Paradip
410
406
428
400
414
438
422
434
418
414
412
404
402
420
444
436
432
426
424
440
286.0
286.0
295.0
296.0
301.0
313.0
315.0
318.0
320.0
320.0
320.0
299.0
293.0
308.0
303.0
320.0
297.0
323.0
309.0
290.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Mizen Head
Tory Island
Loop Head
660
670
665
284.0
288.5
293.0
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Daio Saki
Gesashi
Kushiro Saki
Sakata
Hekura Shima
Inubo Saki
Muroto Saki
Soya Misaki
Wakamiya Shima
Hachijo Shima
Ose Saki
Shiriya Saki
692
710
660
676
674
682
694
664
702
688
704
678
288.0
288.0
288.0
288.0
295.0
295.0
295.0
295.0
295.0
302.0
302.0
302.0
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Iceland
India
Ireland
Japan
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 127
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Hamada Ko
Abashiri
Ken Saki
Matsumae
Toi Misaki
Kinkasan To
Miyako Shima
Shakotan Misaki
Tanga
Nagoya
Seto
E Saki
Nakano Shima
Ohama
Urayasu
Tsurugasaki
670
662
686
668
706
680
712
666
672
690
700
696
708
698
684
686
305.0
309.0
309.0
309.0
309.0
316.0
316.0
316.0
316.0
320.0
320.0
320.5
320.5
321.0
321.0
309.0
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Changgigot
Chuk To
Chumunjin Dan
Eochong Do
Geomun Do
Mara Do
Palmido
Ullung Do
Yong Do
732
730
726
728
724
730
722
734
720
310.0
290.0
295.0
295.0
287.0
290.0
313.0
319.0
300.0
100
100
100
100
100
200
200
200
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Kuwait
482
295.0
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Porto Santo
486
287.5
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
Bintulu
Kuantan
Lumut
Kuching
821
827
825
822
290.0
297.0
298.0
305.0
200
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Mode
Vlieland
Gilze Rijen
Hoek van Holland
Name
655
655
650
ID
294.0
301.0
312.5
F1
200
200
200
BPS
Korea
Kuwait
Madeira
Malaysia
Netherlands
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 128
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Norway
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Torsvag
Skomvaer
Halten
Svinoy
Sklinna
Lista
Vardo
Fruholmen
Faerder
Andenes
Utsira
Utvaer
796
793
790
788
791
783
800
797
780
794
785
787
284.0
286.5
301.0
302.5
303.5
304.0
305.5
309.5
310.5
311.0
313.0
314.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Miraflores
Gatun
901
903
302.0
307.0
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Dziwnow
Jaroslawiec
Rozewie
741
745
743
283.5
295.0
301.0
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Leca
Sagres
Cabo Carvoeiro
488
482
480
290.0
305.5
311.5
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
Isabella
034
295.0
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Jeddah
Gizan
961
962
320.0
324.0
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Stirling
Butt of Lewis
Girdle Ness
693
684
686
285.5
295.5
297.0
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
Panama
Poland
Portugal
Puerto Rico
Saudi Arabia
Scotland
Shetland Isles
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 129
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
MF
Sumburgh
685
291.5
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
Cape Recife
Cooper
Cape Aghulas
Cape Columbine
225
228
223
221
291.0
292.0
301.0
310.0
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Cabo Machichaco
Castellon
Pont Llobregat
Cabo Mayor
Cabo Salou
Estaca de Bares
Cabo Penas
Cabo Finisterre
Cabo de la Nao
Punta Sabinal
Cabo de Gata
Cabo de Palos
Tarifa
Rota
Cabo San Sebastian
La Entallada
500
526
530
502
528
506
504
508
520
515
514
518
512
510
532
534
285.0
286.0
288.5
289.0
291.0
293.0
295.0
296.0
297.5
298.5
299.5
302.0
302.5
303.5
313.5
284.0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
Colombo
Barberyn
Dondra
941
943
944
295.0
300.0
305.0
200
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Jarnas
Holmsjo
Kullen High
Goteborg
Hoburg
Nynashamn
Skutskar
Hjortens Udde
Kapellskar
Bjuroklubb
724
720
732
736
730
734
726
733
728
722
289.0
292.0
293.0
296.5
297.5
298.0
299.5
302.0
307.5
311.5
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
South Africa
Spain
Sri Lanka
Sweden
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 130
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Turkey
MF
MF
Turkeli
Kumkale
545
547
301.0
307.5
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Ra's Al Khaymah
Abu Dhabi
484
486
292.0
314.0
200
200
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
MF
Key West
Sandy Hook
Fort Stevens
Pigeon Point
Portsmouth Harbour
Cape Canaveral
Driver
Penobscot
Cape Mendocino
Cheboygan
Kensington
Moriches
English Turn
New Bern
Wisconsin Point
Milwaukee
Upper Keweenaw
Mobile Point
Angleton
Annapolis
Wildwood
Saginaw Bay
Point Loma
Whidbey Island
Aransas Pass
Bakersfield
Alexandria
Acushnet
Pickford
Reedy Point
Tampa
Portsmouth
Sturgeon Bay
Brunswick
Chico
Detroit
Savannah
Lompoc
Miami
Youngstown
Robinson Point
Isabella
022
008
272
266
002
018
012
044
270
112
192
006
028
196
100
106
102
026
246
058
038
114
262
276
032
084
040
198
110
170
244
1008
104
042
256
116
036
264
020
118
274
034
286.0
286.0
287.0
287.0
288.0
289.0
289.0
290.0
292.0
292.0
292.0
293.0
293.0
294.0
296.0
297.0
298.0
300.0
301.0
301.0
301.0
301.0
302.0
302.0
304.0
305.0
305.0
306.0
309.0
309.0
312.0
313.0
314.0
316.0
318.0
319.0
319.0
321.0
322.0
322.0
323.0
295.0
100
200
100
200
100
100
100
200
100
200
100
100
200
100
100
100
100
100
100
200
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
200
200
200
200
200
100
100
100
200
100
100
100
100
200
100
United Arab Emirates
United States
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 131
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
MF
Galveston
030
296.0
100
Mode
Name
ID
F1
BPS
MF
MF
Point Lynas
Nash Point
682
689
297.5
309.5
100
100
Wales
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 132
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
APPENDIX III
Equipment Setup
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 133
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
1.USING L BAND ANTENNA FOR DGPS CORRECTIONS
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 134
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
2.USING 'L' BAND TAP FROM INMARSAT FOR DGPS CORRECTIONS
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 135
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
APPENDIX IV
NMEA 0183 messages
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 136
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
1. GGA
Essential fix data which provides 3D location and accuracy information.
$GPGGA,123519,4807.038,N,01131.000,E,1,08,0.9,545.4,M,46.9,M,08,1004*47
GGA Data Message defined:
GGA
123519
4807.038,N
01131.000,E
Fix quality:
08
0.9
545.4,M
46.9,M
08
1004
*47
Global Positioning System Fix Data

Fix taken at 12:35:19 UTC
Latitude 48 deg 07.038' N
Longitude 11 deg 31.000' E
0 = invalid
1 = GPS fix (SPS)
2 = DGPS fix
3 = PPS fix
4 = Real Time Kinematic
5 = Float RTK
6 = estimated (dead reckoning) (2.3 feature)
7 = Manual input mode
8 = Simulation mode
Number of satellites being tracked
Horizontal dilution of position
Altitude, Meters, above mean sea level
Height of geoid (mean sea level) above WGS84 ellipsoid
Time in seconds since last DGPS update.
DGPS station ID number
Checksum data, always begins with *
If the height of the geoid is missing then the altitude should be suspect. Some non-standard
implementations report altitude with respect to the ellipsoid rather than geoid altitude. Some
units do not report negative altitudes at all. This is the only sentence that reports altitude.
2. GGX
Essential fix data which provides 3D location and accuracy information identical to the GGA
string structure with increased accuracy in the Latitude and Longitude from 3 decimal
points to 7 decimal points.
$GPGGX,123519,4807.0381234,N,01131.0001234,E,1,08,0.9,545.4,M,46.9,M,08,1004*47
GGA Data Message defined:
GGA
123519
4807.0381294,N
01131.0001234,E
Fix quality:
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Global Positioning System Fix Data

0 = invalid
1 = GPS fix (SPS)
Page 137
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
08
0.9
545.4,M
46.9,M
08
1004
*47
2 = DGPS fix
3 = PPS fix
4 = Real Time Kinematic
5 = Float RTK
6 = estimated (dead reckoning) (2.3 feature)
7 = Manual input mode
8 = Simulation mode
Number of satellites being tracked
Horizontal dilution of position
Altitude, Meters, above mean sea level
Height of geoid (mean sea level) above WGS84 ellipsoid
Time in seconds since last DGPS update.
DGPS station ID number
Checksum data, always begins with *
If the height of the geoid is missing then the altitude should be suspect. Some non-standard
implementations report altitude with respect to the ellipsoid rather than geoid altitude. Some
units do not report negative altitudes at all. This is the only sentence that reports altitude.
3. GLL
Geographic Latitude and Longitude is a holdover from Loran data and some old units may
not send the time and data active information if they are emulating Loran data. If a GPS is
emulating Loran data they may use the LC Loran prefix instead of GP.
$GPGLL,4916.45,N,12311.12,W,225444,A,*31
GLL Data Message defined:
GLL
4916.46,N
12311.12,W
225444
A
31
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Geographic position, Latitude and Longitude

Latitude 49 deg. 16.45 min. North
Longitude 123 deg. 11.12 min. West
Data Active or V (void)
checksum data
Page 138
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
4. VTG
Velocity made good.
GPVTG,054.7,T,034.4,M,005.5,N,010.2,K*33
VTG Data message defined:
VTG
054.7,T
034.4,M
005.5,N
010.2,K
*33
Track made good and ground speed

True track made good (degrees)
Magnetic track made good
Ground speed, knots
Ground speed, Kilometers per hour
Checksum
Note that, as of the 2.3 release of NMEA, there is a new field in the VTG sentence at the
end just prior to the checksum. Receivers that don't have a magnetic deviation (variation)
table built in will null out the Magnetic track made good
5. GSA
GPS DOP and active satellites. This sentence provides details on the nature of the fix. It
includes the numbers of the satellites being used in the current solution and the DOP. DOP
(dilution of precision) is an indication of the effect of satellite geometry on the accuracy of
the fix. It is a unitless number where smaller is better. For 3D fixes using 4 satellites a 1.0
would be considered to be a perfect number, however for overdetermined solutions it is
possible to see numbers below 1.0.
There are differences in the way the PRN's are presented which can effect the ability of
some programs to display this data. For example, in the example shown below there are 5
satellites in the solution and the null fields are scattered indicating that the almanac would
show satellites in the null positions that are not being used as part of this solution. Other
receivers might output all of the satellites used at the beginning of the sentence with the
null field all stacked up at the end. This difference accounts for some satellite display
programs not always being able to display the satellites being tracked. Some units may
show all satellites that have ephemeris data without regard to their use as part of the
solution but this is non-standard.
$GPGSA,A,3,04,05,,09,12,,,24,,,,,2.5,1.3,2.1*39
Where:
GSA
Satellite status
A
Auto selection of 2D or 3D fix (M = manual)
3
3D fix - values include: 1 = no fix
2 = 2D fix
3 = 3D fix
04,05... PRNs of satellites used for fix (space for 12)
2.5
PDOP (dilution of precision)
1.3
Horizontal dilution of precision (HDOP)
2.1
Vertical dilution of precision (VDOP)
*39
the checksum data, always begins with *
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Page 139
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
6. GSV
Satellites in View shows data about the satellites that the unit might be able to find based
on its viewing mask and almanac data. It also shows current ability to track this data. Note
that one GSV sentence only can provide data for up to 4 satellites and thus there may need
to be 3 sentences for the full information. It is reasonable for the GSV sentence to contain
more satellites than GGA might indicate since GSV may include satellites that are not used
as part of the solution. It is not a requirement that the GSV sentences all appear in
sequence. To avoid overloading the data bandwidth some receivers may place the various
sentences in totally different samples since each sentence identifies which one it is.
The field called SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio) in the NMEA standard is often referred to as
signal strength. SNR is an indirect but more useful value that raw signal strength. It can
range from 0 to 99 and has units of dB according to the NMEA standard, but the various
manufacturers send different ranges of numbers with different starting numbers so the
values themselves cannot necessarily be used to evaluate different units. The range of
working values in a given in the GSV string will usually show a difference of about 25 to 35
between the lowest and highest values, however 0 is a special case and may be shown on
satellites that are in view but not being tracked.
$GPGSV,2,1,08,01,40,083,46,02,17,308,41,12,07,344,39,14,22,228,45*75
Where:
GSV
2
1
08
01
40
083
46
*75
Satellites in view
Number of sentences for full data
sentence 1 of 2
Number of satellites in view
Satellite PRN number
Elevation, degrees
Azimuth, degrees
SNR - higher is better for up to 4 satellites per sentence
the checksum data, always begins with *
7. RMC
NMEA has its own version of essential gps pvt (position, velocity, time) data. It is called
RMC, The Recommended Minimum, which will look similar to:
$GPRMC,123519,A,4807.038,N,01131.000,E,022.4,084.4,230394,003.1,W*6A
Where:
RMC
123519
A
4807.038,N
01131.000,E
022.4
084.4
230394
003.1,W
*6A
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
Recommended Minimum sentence C

Status A=active or V=Void.
Speed over the ground in knots
Track angle in degrees True
Date - 23rd of March 1994
Magnetic Variation
The checksum data, always begins with *
Page 140
AB-V-MA-00505
Manual Title:
Manual No:

AB-V-MA-00505
Note that, as of the 2.3 release of NMEA, there is a new field in the RMC sentence at the
end just prior to the checksum. For more information on this field
8. ZDA
The ZDA message is Date and Time.
$GPZDA,hhmmss.ss,dd,mm,yyyy,xx,yy*CC
ZDA Data Message defined:
hhmmss
dd,mm,yyy
xx
yy
*CC
HrMinSec(UTC)
Day,Month,Year
local zone hours -13..13
local zone minutes 0..59
checksum
9. GST
The GST message contains Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
pseudorange error statistics.
$GPGST,hhmmss.ss,a.a,b.b,c.c,d.d,e.e,f.f,g.g *cc
GST Data Message defined:
hhmmss.ss
a.a
b.b
c.c
d.d
e.e
f.f
g.g
*cc
Rev No:
Date:
A2
13/05/2008
UTC time in hours, minutes, seconds of the GPS position

Root mean square (rms) value of the standard deviation of the
range inputs to the navigation process. Range inputs include
pseudoranges and differential GNSS (DGNSS) corrections
Standard deviation of semi-major axis of error ellipse (meters)
Standard deviation of semi-minor axis of error ellipse (meters)
Orientation of semi-major axis of error ellipse (meters)
Standard deviation of latitude error (meters)
Standard deviation of longitude error (meters)
Standard deviation of altitude error (meters)
Checksum
Page 141
AB-V-MA-00505
User Manual
for
CyScan
POSITION REFERENCE SENSOR

Guidance Navigation, CyScan Operators Guide
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-613001-01MU
Unrestricted

CHANGE HISTORY
Rev.
Reason for revision
First issue, ver. 3-5d of CyScan User Manual
Minor change
Updated to ver. 3-7a of CyScan User Manual
Author
Date
AO Austnes
05.06.2008
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-613001-01MU
Unrestricted

CyScan Covers (Guidance)
27/2/08
12:28 pm
Page 1
Operators
Guide
Guidance Navigation Limited
Document
4 Dominus Way
Meridian Business Park
Leicester
LE19 1RP
United Kingdom
This issue:
CyScan Operators Guide v3.7a
Date:
22/02/08
Tel: +44 (0)116 229 2600

Fax: +44 (0)116 229 2604
Email: cyscan@guidance.eu.com
Date:
27/2/06
Changes:
Updated with changes in CyScan User Console v3.15
Document : 94-0004-4
Previous issue: Operators Guide v3.6d
Copyright 2008 Guidance Navigation Limited. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright in the whole and every part of this document belongs to Guidance Navigation
Limited (the Owner) and may not be used, sold, transferred, copied or reproduced
in whole or in part in any manner or form or in or on any media to any person other
than in accordance with the terms of the Owners Agreement or otherwise without
the prior written consent of the Owner.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies or organisations.
Table of Contents
Introduction
Navigation Basics
Welcome................................................................................................................... 3
Blanking Zones....................................................................................................... 16
System Overview...................................................................................................... 3
Setting the Blanking Zone.................................................................................... 16
CyScan Sensor Part Names....................................................................................... 4
Selecting Preset Blanking Zones........................................................................... 16

Creating Custom Blanking Zones......................................................................... 17
Getting Started
Positional Display Modes....................................................................................... 18
Start Up and Shut Down.......................................................................................... 6
Range & Bearing.................................................................................................. 18
Screen Layout........................................................................................................... 7
Bow and Starboard Axes (NMEA0183P).........................................................................18
Sensor Display....................................................................................................... 8
A and B Axes (A Pos and B Pos) (NMEA0183R)..............................................................18
Navigation Section................................................................................................. 9
Working with Reflections...................................................................................... 19
Status Bar.............................................................................................................. 9
Basic Reflection Data........................................................................................... 19
Button Bar........................................................................................................... 10
Rejecting Unwanted Reflections........................................................................... 20
Alarms and Reflections Tabs................................................................................. 11
Scanner Tilt Controls.............................................................................................. 21
Day and Night Views.............................................................................................. 12
Scanner Tilt Modes.............................................................................................. 21
Setting The Date and Time.................................................................................... 13
Manually Tilting the Scanner................................................................................ 22
Using the On-Screen Keyboard............................................................................. 13
Setting the Tilt Bearing and Angle........................................................................ 23
Working with Alarms............................................................................................. 14

Filtering Alarms.................................................................................................... 14
Using the Historic Alarm List................................................................................ 14
CyScan
Operator 1
Navigation
Troubleshooting
Navigational Information Quality......................................................................... 25
Problems and Possible Remedies........................................................................... 39
Single Target Navigation....................................................................................... 26
Alarm Codes........................................................................................................... 40
Starting Single Target Navigation......................................................................... 26
Cleaning the Sensor and Targets........................................................................... 40
Ending Single Target Navigation........................................................................... 26
CyScan Fuse Information....................................................................................... 41
Multi-Target Navigation........................................................................................ 27
CyScan LED Indicators............................................................................................ 42
Starting Temporary Multi-Target Group Navigation.............................................. 27

Starting Preset Multi-Target Group Navigation..................................................... 27
Technical Notes
Ending Multi-Target Group Navigation................................................................. 27
TargetsReflective Material................................................................................. 44
Creating Preset Multi-Target Groups.................................................................... 28
TargetsInstallation And Position........................................................................ 45
Aligning Multi-Target Groups............................................................................... 30
Vertical Beam Divergence...................................................................................... 47

Low Temperature Operation................................................................................. 48
Support Information
Serial Numbers & Software Versions..................................................................... 32
CyScan System Specifications
Configuration Settings........................................................................................... 33
General System Specifications............................................................................... 49
DP Feed Format & Message String....................................................................... 34

Extended Dialogs................................................................................................. 34
Index
Entering Service Access Mode............................................................................... 35

Configuration Settings - Service Access Mode...................................................... 36
System Logging Options........................................................................................ 37
Starting and Stopping Manual Logging................................................................ 37
Copying Log Files to an External USB Drive........................................................... 37
Deleting Log Files................................................................................................. 37
Taking Screen Shots............................................................................................. 37
CyScan
Operator 2
Introduction
Welcome
Welcome to the CyScan position reference system. CyScan is a high accuracy laser sensor
which provides positional information to allow automated approach and/or station keeping
relative to a structure or vessel. The structure or vessel requires one or more reflective
targets to be attached to its sides.
System Overview
CyScan emits eye-safe infra-red light and detects the reflections back from retro-reflective
targets. Targets are mounted on designated structures or vessels. They consist of strips of a
high performance reflective tape mounted on a flat or a cylindrical support.
The accurate range and bearing of one or more targets is measured by CyScan and used to
calculate the exact position of the CyScan vessel relative to the target structure or vessel.
This positional information is displayed on the console screen and automatically transmitted
to the vessels DP system.
CyScan is designed to be semi-portable and straightforward to operate. In use, the CyScan

system consists of several key elements, these being:
XX
XX
XX
XX
The CyScan Sensor, which is mounted

on the vessel (typically on the wheelhouse) as required.
The CyScan Console. A monitoring and
control software application running
within Microsoft Windows on a
standard computer.
This provides the DP operator with full
status information and control of the
system and the data stream being fed to
the DP system.
Structure or
Vessel
CyScan
Sensor
Reflective targets
PSU
Power
The Power Supply Unit (PSU). It is

contained within a watertight enclosure
and is mounted near the CyScan sensor.
The Console and DP System cables are
connected via this unit.
The Data Converter (optional). This
sealed enclosure is situated near the
PC running the CyScan console software
package. It acts as an interface and
translates the RS422 signal generated by
the CyScan sensor to the RS232 signal
required by a standard PC serial port.
Console PC
Hardware
DP
System
CyScan
equipped
vessel
The key elements of the CyScan system
CyScan
Operator 3
CyScan Sensor Part Names

The diagram below shows the key parts of the sensor unit and the various names that are
used throughout this guide:
Rotor
Scanner
Sensor unit
Base Plate
CyScan
Operator 4
Getting Started
This section covers the basics of using the CyScan system. It contains the following pages:
XX
Start Up and Shut Down (page 6)
XX
Screen Layout (page 7)
XX
Day and Night Views (page 12)
XX
Setting the Date and Time (page 13)
XX
Using the On Screen Keyboard(page 13)
XX
Working with Alarms (page 14)
CyScan
Operator 5
Start Up and Shut Down

Start Up
Shut Down
To Enter CyScan User Console
To Suspend, Exit or Reset Communications
1. Ensure that the CyScan sensor is powered on and running correctly.
1. Click on the CyScan button in the lower left corner of the screen
Note: This button is disabled while navigating or during manual logging. (See page 37).
2. Double-click on the CyScan User Console icon.

(Or run the CyScan User Console application from
Start > Programs > CyScan > CyScan User Console).
A dialog box will be displayed.
3. T
he Console display screen will appear.
After a brief initialisation period the sensor will begin operation and its scanning results
will be displayed on screen.
2. Click on the down-arrow. Select one of the following options and click on the OK button.
XX
XX
XX
CyScan
SuspendPlaces the sensor into a sleep mode whereby the rotor ceases spinning and
the scanner tilt returns to a fixed state. However, upon command from the Console
application, the unit will return to full operation. This mode is suitable for use when
travelling between locations.
Suspend & ExitPlaces the sensor into the same sleep mode as the suspend command
(discussed above) and also closes the CyScan Console program.
Reset CommunicationsRe-initialises the communication links between the Console
computer and the CyScan sensor.
Operator 6
Screen Layout
The CyScan User Console screen has five key areas:
XX

The
Sensor Display(see page 8)
XX
The Navigation Section (see page 9)
XX
The Status Bar (see page 9)
XX
The Button Bar (see page 10)
XX
The Property Tabs (see page 11)
Positional Data Display
Navigation Section
The Navigation Section displays
positional data when the system is
in navigation mode. (See page 9).
Sensor Display
This circular area displays the
relative positions of the CyScan
vessel and any targets that have
been picked up by the sensor
(See page 6).
Property Tabs
The Alarms and Reflections tabs
are always displayed. (See page 11).
Additional tabs can be accessed by
clicking on the Sensor Operations
button.
Button Bar
A collection of nine buttons that
provide, or control, a range of
functions. (See page 10).
Status Bar
Provides important feedback information on various topics and displays
the date and time that the situation was first reported. (See page 9).
CyScan
Operator 7
Sensor Display
CyScan Vessel
The circular Sensor Display shows the relative positions of the CyScan vessel and any detected
reflections. Click on the Display Options button to configure which of the following elements
appear on the display. (See page 10).
Reflection
images
Tilt-direction
and tilt-angle
The CyScan vessel image can be displayed as either an outline or a solid filled shape, with a
distinct bow and stern. The vessel image may be switched off if required.
Depending upon the chosen display option, the centre of the Sensor display will either represent
the CyScan vessel, or the target origin of the current multi-target group.
(See Display Options on page 10).
Blanking Zone
The Blanking Zone is the segment within each revolution of the sensor rotor where the laser
is switched off. It is typically set to correspond with the area where the beam would strike
portions of its own vessel. The blanking zone can be adjusted to suit different situations.
(See Blanking Zones on page 16).
Range Circles
The Range Circles act as a visual guide to show the distance between the CyScan vessel and
the detected reflections. Distances are shown in in metres from the CyScan vessel.
Use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons on the Button Bar to change the scale of the display.
(See page 10).
Multi-Target Group Reference Frame

The Multi-Target Reference Frame indicates the A-B axis that the CyScan system uses to
define the positions of each target, relative to the origin of the multi-target group. The frame
can be included or excluded from the display as required. (See Display Options on page 10).
Tilt-direction and Tilt-angle

The tilt and direction arrow indicates the direction and amount of tilt that the CyScan sensor
is applying to keep its rotor at a set level. The colour of the arrow head and tail changes as the
scanner tilts up and down:
Blanking
zone
XX
GreenThe scanner is tilting upwards,
XX
GreyThe scanner is level,
XX
RedThe scanner is tilting downwards.
When the tilt-angle and tiltdirection are being adjusted manually, the outer arrow head follows
the cursor to apply the necessary offsets. (See Manually Tilting the Scanner on page 22).
Multi-Target
reference
frame
CyScan
vessel
Target Images
Range
circles
Reflections that have been picked up by the sensor are displayed as yellow squares. During
navigation, red or yellow boxes are drawn around reflections to show how they are associated
with the selected targets. A yellow box indicates strong association, whereas a red box
indicates poor or no association.
CyScan
Operator 8
Navigation Section
Tilt Mode and DP Feed
The upper right corner of the screen displays positional information while the system is
navigating.
Positional display
The status of the Scanner Tilt Mode (see page 21) and the DP Feed (see page 34).
Status Bar
Provides important feedback information on various topics and displays the date and time
that the situation was first reported. A flashing green icon indicates that communication
between the User Console and the CyScan sensor is OK.
Double click on the Time and Date portion of the status bar to set the current system date
and time. (See page 13).
Status Bar Buttons

To the left of the status bar are two buttons:
Scanner tilt mode
DP Feed mode
Information
Quality Indicator
Positional display Range, Bearing and Heading

XX
XX
XX
CyScan Button
For NMEA0183 DP feed types in single target operation, this display will show distances
along Bow and Starboard axes. Heading information is not available for single target
navigation.
For NMEA0183 DP feed types in multi-target operation, the range is displayed along
A and B axes determined by the multi-target group configuration, and Heading is
calculated relative to the axes origin, i.e. Target 1.
For ASCII17 DP feed types, Range and Bearing data are shown relative to the single
target or primary target (in multi-target target operation).
(See Positional Display Modes on page 18).
Click this button to view the Control dialog. From here you can select the following options:
XX
XX
XX
SuspendPlaces the sensor into a sleep mode whereby the rotor ceases spinning and the
scanner tilt returns to a fixed state. However, upon the resume command, the unit will
return to full operation.
Suspend & ExitShuts the Console software application but maintains power to the
sensor. Upon starting the application the unit will return to full operation. This mode is
suitable for use when travelling between mooring locations.
Reset CommunicationsRe-initialises the communication links between the Console
computer and the CyScan sensor.
Note: This button is disabled while navigating or during manual logging. (See page 37).
Information Quality Indicator

This graph indicates the confidence that the system has in the quality of the position data
that is being generated.
The more bars shown, the better the information. The height of the bars indicates the
brightness of the reflections returned by the target.
Help Button
Click this button to view the online CyScan User Console operators guide using
Acrobat Reader.
The colour of the bars and the display read-out also changes according to the quality of the
information. (See Navigational Information Quality on page 25).
CyScan
Operator 9
Button Bar
Display Options (continued)
The Button Bar contains nine buttons providing the following range of functions.
When a function is not available, the button image is greyed-out.
XX
Stop Navigation
Zoom Out
Click to stop navigating.
Click to zoom out

from the display.
The system will stop

sending live positional
data to the DP system.
Display
Options
Sensor
Operations
See below
See opposite
Cancel
XX
Click to abandon any

changes and revert to
the previous setting.
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Start Navigation
Zoom In
Alarms
Apply
Click to start navigating.
Click to zoom in
on the display
Click to view the

Alarms Tab.
Click to apply
the current
changes.
After clicking on this

button, you will need
to select either a single
target, temporary multitarget group, or a preset
multi-target group to
navigate with.
(This option only

becomes available
when one or more
Error or Fatal alarms
have occurred).
XX
XX
XX
Display Centred OnWhen navigating on a multi-target group, this option determines if

the scanner display is centred on the target or on the vessel.
Display Day/Night ViewSwitches between day/night display modes. (See page 12).
Display OptionsSelects the Extended Dialogs (see page 34) and
Range and Bearing Only (see page 18) options.
Display Vessel BowSelects the orientation of the vessels bow displayed on the screen,
either: Top, Left, Bottom or Right.

Multi-Target
GroupChoose between either Align, Create or Edit:
AlignAllows the Heading Axis to be rotated so that it aligns with true North.
This enables the reported position to be given in true Northings and Eastings.
(See Aligning Multi-Target Groups on page 30).
CreateUsed to create preset multi-target groups. (See page 28).
Click on the Display Options button to override the

options set in the Configuration Tab (See page 33).
XX
Show Vessel ShapeDetermines how the CyScan vessel is represented on the sensor
display the options are: Off, Outline and Filled.
Click on the Sensor Operations button to view the following configuration options:
Display Options
XX
Show TiltDisplay/hide the arrow and angle label that indicate the current direction and
angle of tilt.
Sensor Operations
XX
XX
Show Blanking ZoneDisplay/hide the angular area within each rotor revolution where
the laser is switched off.
EditUsed to edit preset multi-target groups.
Note: Display Options are temporary and only apply to the current session.
XX
Set Blanking ZoneUsed to select the required blanking zone. (See page 16).
Show Bearing AxisDisplay/hide the tick marks around the outer circle of the sensor
display.
XX
Select Tilt ModeSelects the scanner tilt mode. (See page 21).
XX

Show
Range CirclesDisplay/hide the concentric distance circles of the sensor display.
Show LabelsDisplay/hide the the numbering of targets within a multi-target group under
navigation.
how ReflectionsDisplay/hide the markers representing the reflections received by the
S
CyScan sensor.
Show TargetsDisplay/hide the range and bearing vector, if selected, and the association
boxes that are superimposed on the reflection squares.
Set Manual TiltUsed to set a manual tilt angle and direction. For example, when stationkeeping close to a platform where the targets are mounted high and the CyScan sensor
must be made to look up for them.
Note: Scanner tilt presets are only possible when the tilt mode is set to Manual Tilt.
XX
XX
XX
DatalogsActivates System Logging. (See page 37).

About CyScanOpens the About CyScan tab, which displays
software version, licence and contact details. (See page 35).
CyScan ConfigurationOpens the CyScan Configuration window. (See page 33).
Show Heading AxisDisplay/hide the heading axis line

(multi-target groups only, see page 27).
CyScan
Operator 10
Alarms and Reflections Tabs

The Alarms and Reflections tabs are always displayed. Other tabs appear when you select an
option from the Sensor Operations button. (See page 10).
Alarms Tab
Reflections Tab
Alarm messages are classified into four types, in increasing order of severity:
Provides a numeric list of the reflections received during the last complete revolution of the
sensor rotor. This screen can be used to verify the graphical representation of reflections
shown within the Sensor display.
XX
Informationgrey symbols
XX
Warningorange symbols
XX

Errorred
symbols
XX

Fatalred
symbols
A filter is available to suppress the display of particular alarm types. As standard, the filter is
activated and grey information messages are hidden from the list.
The arrow symbol indicates the start of an entry that persists, while the square symbol
indicates the end of an entry. The pause symbol indicates an entry that does not persist.
Accepting alarms in the Current list moves them to the Historic list. (See page 14).
As a new revolution is started, the list is cleared and starts again. For each verified reflection
the list provides: Range, Bearing and Brightness values. The two sliders allow you to filter out
unwanted reflections that might adversely affect navigation.
(See Rejecting Unwanted Reflections on page 20).
Extra information is displayed on the Reflections Tab when the Extended Dialogs option is
selected on the Configuration tab. (See page 34).
Note: If an arrow is appended to a reflection entry, this indicates that the reflection may
be improved by tilting the sensor either upwards (up arrow) or downwards (down arrow).
Please refer to the Scanner tilt adjustment section on page 21.
Deleting alarms from the Historic list will delete them permanently.
Note: The two rejection sliders

are not available if the CyScan
sensor has firmware version 3.07
or below.
CyScan
Operator 11
Day and Night Views

To provide maximum visibility during daytime operation and minimal glare during night shifts,
CyScan User Console offers two display modes: Day View and Night View.
The default option is set in the Configuration Tab (see page 33), but this setting can be
overridden from the Display Options menu:
To change the day/night view mode:

1. Click on the Display Options button.
2. Click on Display Day/Night View.
3. Click on either Day View or Night View.
Night View
Day View
CyScan
Operator 12
Setting The Date and Time
Using the On-Screen Keyboard
To Set the System Date and Time
In order to accommodate systems without keyboards, CyScan Console provides an on-screen

keyboard option. This enables text to be input text using only a mouse pointer. You can
activate the on-screen keyboard wherever you see this icon:
1. Double-click on the time displayed on the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen.
2. The Date and Time Properties window is opened.
If the icon is greyed out
then the on-screen keyboard feature is disabled.
Note: By default, the on-screen keyboard feature is disabled as CyScan is usually

installed on systems with keyboards. (See To enable the on-screen keyboard below).
3. Set the correct date and time and click on the OK button.
When displayed the on-screen keyboard appears Always on Top of all other applications
this can be changed using its Settings menu.
To use the on-screen keyboard

1. Click on the
icon to display the on-screen keyboard.
2. Select an item within CyScan Console that requires text entry or editing.
3. Click on the necessary keys on the on-screen keyboard using your mouse.
To enable the on-screen keyboard

Note: This procedure can only carried out when using Service Access mode, for which you
require a restricted authorisation code.
1. Enter Service Access Mode. (See page 35).
2. Click on the Sensor Operations button.
3. Click on CyScan Configuration.
The Configuration Tab is opened. (See page 33).
4. Click on the down arrow of the Select Configuration Category box and select the
Communications / Display Options entry.
5. Tick the Enable On-Screen Display option.
6. Click on the Apply button.
CyScan
Operator 13
Working with Alarms
Using the Historic Alarm List
During operation, the CyScan system produces an event audit trail of system messages.
These range in increasing order of severity from: Information, Warning, and Error to Fatal.
As these alarms are received from the sensor, the console application lists them within the
Alarms tab on the property sheet.
Alarm types are colour coded:
Information -
(grey)
Warning -
(orange)
Fatal and Error -
(red)
XX
The Current List displays new alarms (since the last start of the console software).
XX
The Historic List is used to store alarms that have been cleared from the current list.
Current alarms are automatically transferred to the Historic list on shutdown.

Items in the Current List cannot be deleted, they may only be moved to the Historic List.
Only items in the Historic List can be permanently deleted.
To accept alarms in the current list
The triangular and square symbols represent the start and stop points of each alarm.
When an alarm is raised, a start
The Alarms tab has two alarms lists:
symbol is displayed at the beginning of the entry.
When the alarm is resolved, the stop
1. Click on the Alarms tab on the

Property sheet and check that the
Select Log Type entry is Current.
2. Select the alarms that you wish
to move into the Historic list:
symbol is appended to the entry.
To accept one alarmClick on the required entry and click on the
Filtering Alarms
To accept two or more alarmsHold down the Ctrl key,

click on the required entries and click on the
button.
The alarm filter allows you to select the types of alarm that are displayed.
By default, only Warning, Error and Fatal alarms are displayed.
To accept all alarmsClick on the
button.
Note: If you attempt to transfer any alarms that are still unresolved, a warning dialog
will be displayed.
To enable/disable the filter, click on the left side of the filter

button.
The filter is active whenever the left side of the filter button is pressed in.
To use the alarms filter
To clear the historic list
1. Click on the Alarms tab on the Property sheet (in the lower right corner of the screen).
1. View the Alarms tab within the

Property sheet and check that
the Select Log Type entry
shows Historic.
2. Click on the right side of the filter
button.
button.
A drop down list will be displayed showing the four types of reports/alarms.
2. Select the alarms to delete:
3. Click on each type of alarm to check/un-check them as necessary.
To delete one alarm click on the alarm entry and then on the
Alarm types that are ticked are displayed in the alarms list, un-ticked items are hidden.
button.
To delete two or more alarms hold down the Ctrl key, and
click on the required alarm entries and click on the
button.
To delete all alarms click on the
button.
A dialog will be displayed and will require confirmation for each deletion.
You can confirm each deletion individually, or click on the Yes to All button.
To export an alarms list

XX
CyScan
To export all alarms to a text file, click on the

Export Historic and Current Alarms button
Operator 14
Navigation Basics
This section explains how to set up the system prior to navigating.
It contains the following pages:
XX
Blanking Zones (page 16)
XX
Positional Display Modes (page 18)
XX
Working with Reflections (page 19)
XX
Scanner Tilt Controls (page 21)
CyScan
Operator 15
Blanking Zones
Setting the Blanking Zone

There are two ways to set a blanking zone:
The Blanking Zone is used to mask the segment of the scan rotation that is obscured by the
vessels superstructure. While the scanner passes through the blanking zone, the laser is
switched off to prevent any unwanted reflections from interfering with the target data.
(Even if the sensor has a clear 360 view, there must be a blanking zone of at least 90).
Generally, once the blanking zone has been set, it will not need to be changed. However,
there may be occasions when it is necessary to adjust the blanking zone, for example if the
target is on the opposite side of the vessel to normal.
Note: Changing the blanking zone whilst navigating will interrupt the data sent to
the DP system.
If the blanking zone is adjusted while navigating, the new values are applied only to
the active multi-target group. However, if the blanking zone is adjusted while out of
navigation mode, the new values are not applied to any existing multi-target groups
but instead form a new baseline setting.
XX
Selecting a preset blanking zone (see below).
XX

Creating
a custom blanking zone (see page 17).
Selecting Preset Blanking Zones

The orientation of the vessel displayed in the Blanking tab automatically matches the Display
Vessel Bow settings (Top, Left, Bottom and Right) accessed from the Display Options button.
To select a preset blanking zone

2. Click on Set Blanking Zone > Use Presets.
The Blanking tab is opened.
3. Click on the blanking zone shape that best suits the current CyScan installation and its
field of view.
4. Click on the Apply button to confirm the changes.
CyScan
Operator 16
Creating Custom Blanking Zones

In custom blanking mode, you can manually select the segments of the display that make up
the blanking zone.
Note: When selecting the start and stop segments for the blanking zone, you must always
work in an anti-clockwise direction.
To Create a Custom Blanking Zone

2. Click on Set Blanking Zone > Manually.
3. Click on the first segment of the blanking zone.
4. Release the mouse button.
5. Drag the mouse in an anti-clockwise direction around the display circle.
(When you hover over a segment it will turn grey, showing that it will become part of the
blanking zone).
6. Click on the last segment of the blanking zone.
Note: The 360 sweep of the sensor display is split into sixteen segments. The blanking
zone must cover at least four segments.
0
7. Click on the Apply button
to confirm the changes.

click
CyScan
Operator 17
e
tS
ir s
gm
t
en
La
st
S
eg
m
en
t
click
Positional Display Modes
Bow and Starboard Axes (NMEA0183P)
The relative positions of the CyScan vessel and single or multiple targets can be expressed
either as Range and Bearing values, or in terms of the rectangular coordinate frame
appropriate to the selected type of navigation (single or multi-target) and DP feed messages.
Coordinate frame axes are only displayed if the DP feed is set to either NMEA0183P or
NMEA0183R. The display can be overridden to display Range and Bearing data, if required.
DP Mode
NMEA0183P (Primary)
NMEA0183R (Raw)
Navigation Type
Single Target
Multi-Target
In this mode the position of the sensor vessel is expressed in metres from the target along
Bow and Starboard axes which have their origin at the primary (or only) target.
The axes are parallel with the vessels own axes.
This mode is available for single target navigation, and for multi-target navigation where the
DP feed messages are of type NMEA0183P (primary).
Coordinate Frame Axes

Bow and Starboard Axes
Single Target
Bow and Starboard Axes
Multi-Target
A and B Axes
All other DP modes display Range and Bearing data only.
To change the positional display mode:

The default mode is set in the Configuration Tab (see page 33)
but this setting can be overridden from the Display Options menu:
Note: Selecting either option has no effect on the message strings sent to the DP system.
1. Click on the Display Options button.
A and B Axes (A Pos and B Pos) (NMEA0183R)
2. Click on Display Options > Range & Bearing Only.

If the Range & Bearing option is ticked, range and bearing will be displayed. If the option
is un-ticked, either Bow and Starboard or A and B axes information will be displayed,
depending on the type of DP feed messages that are being sent to the DP system.
In this mode the position of the sensor vessel is expressed in metres from the target along A
and B axes which have their origin at the primary target.
Range & Bearing
The axes are initially aligned with the multi-target group, with the A axis passing through the
secondary target. However, if the multi-target group is subsequently aligned, the axes are
rotated such that the A axis remains as the baseline for the vessel heading.
Range and Bearing mode displays the distance and the bearing of the target from the
sensor vessel.
This mode is only available for multi-target navigation where the DP feed messages are of
type NMEA0183R (raw).
CyScan
Operator 18
Working with Reflections
Extended Reflection Data
By default, only basic reflection data is displayed on the Reflections tab.

Extended information is displayed when the Extended Dialogs option (see page 34)
on the Configuration tab is ticked.
Pulses
The Pulses column displays the number of laser pulses that have been received back from
each target in the following format:
USING/BAD/TOTAL
For example, if the pulses column was displaying 9/1/10, it would indicate that CyScan was
using 9 laser pulses for the position calculation, and had discarded 1 bad pulse out of a total
of 10.
Basic Reflection Data
In general, the larger the target the more pulses that will be returned.
This value will increase as the distance to the target reduces.
The following icons indicate that the scanner is operating correctly:
A black cross indicates that the reflection has been manually rejected using the
minimum Range and Brightness sliders. (See page 20).
Extended Reflection Data
A red icon indicates that the reflected pulse was too bright and has blinded the scanner.
Width
The Width column shows the horizontal width of each target, measured in degrees.
Basic Reflection Data
Signal A, B and C Levels
Rev#The total number of revolutions made by the scanner rotor since CyScan has been last
switched on.
The Signal A-lo, Signal B, and Signal C-hi columns can indicate that the scanner is pointing
too low or too high in relation to the detected reflections.
ReflectionsThe number of detected reflections.
This can occur when the CyScan Vessel is working close to a rig and the targets are mounted
high above the scanner. (See Manually Tilting the Scanner on page 22).
RejectsThe number of manually rejected reflections. (See page 20).

PowerThe relative output power of the laser. CyScan automatically adjusts the output
power of the laser to receive an adequate reflection from the brightest target without
saturating the scanner. The maximum value is 100%.
Note: High readings in either the A or C sectors can also be caused by unwanted
reflections and do not always necessarily indicate that the scanner is pointing too low
or too high in relation to the intended target.
PulsesThe total number of pulses received during the last revolution of the scanner.
AmbientThe temperature inside the scanner unit.
(See Technical Note 4: Low Temperature Operation on page 48).
MarkerThe Marker displays the orientation of the scanner in relation to the vessel:
0 indicates that the scanner has been mounted with its connectors facing the bow.
180 indicates that the scanner has been mounted with its connectors facing the stern.
CyScan
Operator 19
Rejecting Unwanted Reflections
To reject unwanted reflections:
The Range and Brightness sliders on the Reflections tab can be used to reject any unwanted
reflections that may be interfering with the CyScan system. For example, reflections from a
different vessel to the one you are keeping station with.
1. Click and drag the range and/or brightness sliders to the required threshold settings.
Unwanted reflections can be rejected at any time, even during navigation.

Use the sliders to set the minimum thresholds for range and brightness:
The Range Slider allows you to reject reflections that are closer than the threshold range.
For example, if you set the range threshold to 40m, any reflections less than 40m away will
be rejected. The range threshold can be adjusted between 10 and 70 metres.
The Brightness Slider allows you to reject reflections that are below the threshold brightness
level. For example, if you set the brightness threshold to 30%, any reflections that have a
brightness of 30% or less will be rejected. The brightness threshold can be adjusted between
0% and 60%. (Reflection brightness is measured as a percentage value of the brightness of the
light initially emitted by the laser.)
The minimum brightness

setting of 41% has caused the
first reflection in the list to be
rejected and to be marked in
red on the scanner display.
Note: The two rejection

sliders are not available if the
CyScan sensor has firmware
version 3.07 or below.
Once set, any reflections that do not meet the specified range or brightness values will be
marked in red on the scanner display, listed as a reject on the property page and omitted as a
navigation reference.
To hide rejected reflections on the Reflections tab,
tick the Suppress rejects from reflection list option.
CyScan
Operator 20
Scanner Tilt Controls

The scanner tilt mechanism automatically compensates for the pitch and roll of the vessel.
Motion sensors and a two-axis tilt drive mechanism ensure that the scanning rotor remains at
the correct level to see the target.
The current tilt mode is displayed above the

top left corner of the property tab.
Scanner Tilt Modes

The scanner can be operated in one of three tilt modes:
XX
XX
XX
Zero TiltThe scanner tilt automatically maintains the rotor in a horizontal position by
compensating for the pitch and roll of the vessel.
Manual TiltThis mode is used when it is necessary to manually tilt the scanner to reach
the target. For example, when station-keeping close to a platform where the targets are
mounted high up and the CyScan sensor must be tilted up at them.
Auto Draught FollowThe scanner tilt automatically adjusts to compensate for draught
changes as the vessel loads or unloads.
To change the scanner tilt mode

Sensor tilt
20
2. Click on Select Tilt Mode and then choose the required scanner tilt option from the
sub-menu.
3. Click on the Apply Sensor Changes button
Beam spread
20
20
Note: When changing from Zero Tilt to Manual Tilt modes, you will be immediately
asked to select the required tilt bearing and angle of tilt.
(See Setting the Tilt Bearing and Angle on page 23).
8
8
to confirm your action.
Sensor tilt
20
Sensor tilt
CyScan
Operator 21
Manually Tilting the Scanner

The scanner can be tilted manually so that centre of the fanned beam is pointing at the
target. This may be necessary when the CyScan Vessel is close to a platform and the targets
are positioned above the sensor. (See Setting the Tilt Bearing and Angle on page 23).
The amount of signal being received in each sector is displayed on the Reflections tab (when
the Extended Dialogs option is selected).
When a target is in view of CyScan but is not central within the

fanned beam, indicator arrows are displayed in the Reflections
tab to show that tilting the sensor towards the target(s) will
improve the brightness and stability of the reflection.
An upward pointing arrow shows that the sensor should be
tilted up.
A downward pointing arrow shows that the sensor should be
tilted down.
Start with a small amount of tilt, say 3 to judge the optimum
setting.
All of the reflection signal is

being received in sector A the
sensor is pointing too high.
CyScan divides the beam spread into 3 vertical sectors; A, B and C:
Generally, most of the signal should be in the middle Sector B. If the sensor is pointing too
low then most of the signal will be in Sector C. If the sensor is pointing too high, most of the
signal will be in Sector A.
Sector C
Sector B
Beam spread
All of the reflection signal is

being received in sector C the
sensor is pointing too low.
Note: High readings in either the A or C sectors can also be caused by unwanted
reflections and do not always necessarily indicate that the scanner is pointing too low
or too high in relation to the intended target.
Sector A
CyScan
Operator 22
Setting the Tilt Bearing and Angle
Move the mouse around the circle

to the required tilt direction.
Note: If the tilt bearing and angle are adjusted while navigating, the new values are
applied only to the active multi-target group. However, if the tilt bearing and angle are
adjusted while out of navigation mode, the new values are not applied to any existing
multi-target groups but instead form a new baseline setting.
Click the mouse button to fix the

tilt direction.
1. Select Manual Tilt Mode:

Click on the Sensor Operations button and then on Select Tilt Mode > Manual Tilt.
2. Click on the Sensor Operations button and then on Set Manual Tilt.
3. Set the Tilt Bearing:
Move the mouse clockwise or anti-clockwise around the outside of the sensor display until
the arrow points in the required direction for the tilt.
When the tilt bearing is correct, click the mouse button to fix the tilt direction.
4. Set the Tilt Angle:
Move the mouse in and out between the centre and edge of the circular sensor display.
To tilt the scanner upwards, move the mouse towards the tilt arrow head.
To tilt the scanner downwards, move the mouse towards the tilt arrow tail.
The current tilt angle is shown just outside the circular sensor display. The colour of the
tilt arrow also indicates the up/down direction of tilt:
XX
Green upwards tilt
XX
Grey no tilt.
XX
Red downwards tilt
Move the mouse towards the arrow

head to tilt the scanner upwards.
Move the mouse towards the arrow
tail to tilt the scanner downwards.
When the tilt angle is correct, click the mouse button to fix the tilt angle.
5. Click on the Apply
tick button to confirm the new tilt settings.
Click the mouse button to fix the

tilt angle.
CyScan
Operator 23
Navigation
This section explains how to select targets and navigate with them.
It contains the following pages:
XX
Navigational Information Quality (page 25)
XX
Single Target Navigation (page 26)
XX
Multi-Target Navigation (page 27)
CyScan
Operator 24
Navigational Information Quality

The CyScan Sensor rotates anti-clockwise once every second. On each rotation, the sensor
emits a beam of infrared laser light and analyses the position of any reflections that it
receives.
After several rotations, the sensor is able to compare the reflections received on the last
rotation with those received during previous rotations. This enables CyScan to recognise the
reflections from the intended targets and to ignore any unwanted reflections.
Before navigation is started, the positional
display readings in the top right hand
corner of the screen are grey.
After a few seconds, as the scanner gathers

more information, the display readings
should turn amber and then green.
This indicates that the system is not

currently navigating.
This indicates that the vessels position can

now be calculated accurately.
When navigation is started, the positional

display readings in the top right hand
corner of the screen will go red.
The number of bars displayed on the

Information Quality Graph (up to a
maximum of 9) indicates the confidence
that the system has in tracking the targets.
This indicates that there have not been

enough rotation scans to calculate the
vessels position.
The height of the bars indicates the

brightness of the reflections received by
the sensor.
CyScan
Operator 25
Single Target Navigation

During Single Target Navigation, CyScan uses a single flat, cylinder, prism or prism cluster
target.
Single Target Navigation is quick and easy to use, but has the following limitations:
XX
Tracking stability will be affected if the target reflection is lost temporarily, as there is no
redundancy.
XX
If the true target reflection is obscured by vessel operations there is a possibility that the
sensor track will jump to another reflection.
XX
There is no provision for heading data to be produced.
Starting Single Target Navigation
Ending Single Target Navigation
Single target navigation can be started when the CyScan vessel is within range
of the platform or vessel, and a target is visible on the console sensor display.
1. Click on the
1. Click on the
button.
2. In the subsequent dialog, click OK to confirm your action.

The readouts in the navigation section will become inactive and turn grey.
button.
2. Select either:
[Single Cylinder or Flat Target]
(if the vessel/platform targets are flat or cylindrical)
Or:
[Single Prism or Prism Cluster]
(if the vessel/platform targets are prism style).
Note: The most common targets are flat or cylindrical.
3. Select a reflection to use as a target by clicking on one of
the yellow squares shown on the sensor display.
After a short delay, the navigation data will be determined
and displayed.
Note: Only Range and Bearing or Bow and Starboard
values will be shown as single targets cannot provide
heading information.
CyScan
Operator 26
Multi-Target Navigation
Starting Preset Multi-Target Group Navigation
During multi-target navigation CyScan uses between two and five retro-reflective targets.
Navigation using a preset group can be started when the CyScan vessel is within range of the
platform or vessel, and the groups reflections are visible on the console sensor display.
Multi-Target navigation has the following advantages when compared to using a single target:
1. Click on the
XX
Improved tracking stability.
XX
Increased immunity to false reflections.
XX
Redundancy allows temporary loss of a target reflection.
XX
Preset multi-target groups can be stored for re-use.
XX
Provision of heading data in relation to target group.
button.
2. Select the preset group that matches the rig that you
are approaching.
3. A
fter a short delay, the system will start to use the
preset reflections as targets and navigational data will
start to be sent to the DP system.
Note: When a multi-target group is selected for
navigation, the scanner tilt bearing and the blanking
zone defined for that multi-target group are applied.
Multi-Target Group Types

There are two types of multi-target group; temporary and preset.
Temporary Groups are set up in a similar way to Single Target Navigation, except that
multiple targets are selected. Temporary groups use the current scanner tilt details and
blanking zone. They are not stored by the system. If you stop navigating you must set up
another temporary group when you restart navigation.
Preset Groups can be created once and then stored, so that they can be reused when the
vessel next needs to approach or station-keep off the target-group location. Preset groups
also store the scanner tilt details and blanking zone used at a particular location.
Starting Temporary Multi-Target Group Navigation
Ending Multi-Target Group Navigation
A new temporary multi-target group can be created when the CyScan vessel is within range of
the platform or vessel, and two or more targets are visible on the console sensor display.
1. Click on the
1. Click on the
2. In the subsequent dialog, click on OK to confirm your action.

The readouts in the navigation section will become inactive and turn grey.
button.
2. Select [Temporary Multi-Target Group]
Note: Once navigation stops, the baseline scanner tilt and blanking zone defined for
single target mode will be re-applied.
3. Click on two or more of the yellow reflections shown on

the sensor display. (Up to a maximum of five).
Consider the following when selecting
reflections to use as targets:
XX
The first reflection that you click on will form the origin
point for the multi-target group. The positions of the other
reflections will be calculated relative to this origin point.
XX
If more than two reflections are used, select either the far
right or far left one as the origin.
button.
4. After a short delay, the system will start to use the

selected reflections as targets and navigational data will
start to be sent to the DP system.
CyScan
Operator 27
Creating Preset Multi-Target Groups

Preset multi-target groups can be used to store the targets, tilt details and blanking zones
used at a particular location. They are created using two or more targets located on a
platform or target vessel, that the CyScan vessel will regularly approach and/or station-keep.
i. Click on a yellow target image.
A new multi-target group can be created when the CyScan vessel is within range of the
platform or vessel, and two or more targets are visible on the console sensor display.
Note: Navigation accuracy is improved when using multiple, asymmetrically spaced
targets. This helps CyScan to differentiate between targets with greater precision.
(Please refer to Technical Note 2, TargetsInstallation and Position on page 45).
If multiple targets are not spaced asymmetrically, it is better to operate
with fewer (eg. 2) targets. If more targets are mounted on the rig, then the superfluous
ones should be physically removed and not just omitted from the multi-target group.
If there are other targets in the vicinity that cannot be removed (i.e. on a neighbouring
rig) try to adjust the blanking zone to obscure them from view.
(See Blanking Zones on page 16).
Consider the following when selecting targets:
XX
Use the zoom in or zoom out buttons to select an appropriate view where you can see all
of the targets.
XX
The first target that you click on will form the origin point for the multi-target group. The
positions of the other targets will be calculated relative to this origin point.
XX
If more than two targets are used, select either the far right or far left one as the origin.
ii. Click on a second target image.

Choose one that is a reasonable distance from the
origin target.
To create a new multi-target group

Note: New multi-target groups cannot be created while CyScan is navigating.
2. Click on Multi-Target Group > Create.
iii. An AB axis will be superimposed on the sensor

display, relative to the chosen targets.
3. Within the sensor display, click on two or more yellow target images
(up to a maximum of five targets).
4. If required/available, up to three more targets can be selected in turn.
(See note above about the asymmetric spacing of targets).
5. When all required targets have been selected, (up to a maximum of five)
click on the Apply tick button.
(Continued on next page).
continued
CyScan
Operator 28
Creating Preset Multi-Target Groups (Continued)

6. The New groups details will be displayed on the Multi-Target Groups tab,
with a placeholder name.
7. Click in the Multi-Target Group Name box and enter a meaningful name for the new
group, i.e. the name of the current rig/location.
8. Align the new group with the vessels compass, if required.

(See Aligning Multi-Target Groups on page 30).
9. Click on the Apply button to save the new multi-target group.
The new group will now appear on the navigation menu, and can be selected
as a preset multi-target group. (See page 27).
CyScan
Operator 29
Aligning Multi-Target Groups

When navigating using a multi-target group, CyScan creates a local coordinate frame on
which it bases all of its calculations. It is possible to rotate this frame to align with the ships
compass so that when navigating, the reported position will be given in true Northings and
Eastings.
Note: The data to the DP system will change instantly once the alignment is confirmed,
hence it is recommended to deselect the CyScan sensor at the DP Console before commencing this operation.
Enter the current heading

from the ships compass,
or drag the red compass
needle to the required
heading.
To align a multi-target group

1. Click on the
button and begin navigating with the required multi-target group.

3. Click on Multi-Target Group > Align.
The property sheet will display the Align Multi-Target Group tab containing a compass
representation.
4. E
nter the current heading from the ships compass, or drag compass needle to the
required setting. (CyScan will accept headings that are accurate to 0.1 of a degree.)
Click on the Apply button.

After a short pause, the multi-target group reference frame will be rotated
and navigation will begin using the new multi-target group reference frame.
CyScan
Operator 30
Support Information
This section contains the following pages:
XX
Serial Numbers and Software Versions (page 32)
XX
Configuration Settings (page 33)
XX
Entering Service Access Mode (page 35)
XX
System Logging Options (page 37)
CyScan
Operator 31
Serial Numbers & Software Versions

These numbers identify the hardware configuration and product revision and will be
requested by Guidance Navigation in the event of an application service or support call to the
company.
Product Labels
Software Version Information
Component Part Numbers and individual Serial Numbers are assigned to each component of
CyScan. They can be found on product labels affixed to each unit.
The Configuration tab within the Property sheet provides version information about every
software component within the Console application and the CyScan Sensor.
CyScan sensor
part number
CyScan sensor
serial number
Software component
version information
CyScan PSU
part number
CyScan PSU
serial number
CyScan
Operator 32
Configuration Settings
The Configuration tab is used to display CyScan sensor data for troubleshooting purposes, and
to set the default display options.
Note: The default display options can be overridden by clicking on the Sensor Display
Options button. However, any overrides will only last for the current CyScan session.
To open the Configuration tab:

2. Click on CyScan Configuration.
The Configuration tab will be displayed:
The Configuration tab has four selectable options:
XX
XX
XX
XX
CyScan
Day View/Night ViewClick on the drop-down arrow and select either

Day or Night display settings. (See page 12).
DP Feed Format & Message StringThis is key to correct operation but does not usually
require alteration during day-to-day operations.
(See DP Feed Format and Message Strings on page 34).
ange & Bearing OnlyTick this option to display Range and Bearing information.
R
(See page 18).
Extended DialogsIn normal user mode this option displays additional information in the
Reflections tab. (See page 19).
For more information please refer to the CyScan Engineers Guide.
Operator 33
DP Feed Format & Message String
Extended Dialogs
The DP Message string field displays the current text being sent to the DP system based on
the current selection of the DP Feed Format type
The Extended Dialogs option displays extra information in the Alarms and Reflections tabs.
(When the system is in Service Access (see page 35) or Engineer modes, extended dialogs are
displayed by default and the option is greyed-out).
The DP Feed Format option controls the format in which the positional information is packaged and sent to the vessels DP system. The DP Feed Format may only be changed when
CyScan is not navigating.
Note: Any changes to this setting MUST be carried out in conjunction with a similar
change on the DP system both systems must use exactly the same format.
The choice of DP Feed Format can have an effect on the information displayed in the
Navigation section (top right corner) of the console screen.
To Display Extended Dialogs:

1. Open the Configuration tab. (See page 33).
2. Tick the Extended Dialogs option.
To change the DP feed format:

Note: Changes in formats, other than between NMEA and ASCII, can only be carried out
in service access mode. (See page 35).
1. Ensure that the DP system is correctly prepared to receive the new message format.
2. Open the Configuration tab. (See page 33).
3. Click on the down arrow of the DP Feed Format box to reveal a drop-down list of options.
4. Select the required format and click on the Apply button.
CyScan
Operator 34
Entering Service Access Mode

There are many settings within CyScan Console that can seriously affect system operation
if they are incorrectly adjusted. For this reason they are concealed until you enter service
access mode.
IMPORTANT: Indiscriminate adjustment of parameter settings can adversely affect the

operation of CyScan. It is not advisable to edit the settings unless directed to do so by a
qualified technician or Guidance Navigation Limited.
Service access mode can be entered by plugging an engineer USB key into any available USB port on
the console computer prior to starting the application. It is recommended that the application be
re-started without the key in order to return to normal user mode.
3. Click on the Service Access button in the lower right corner of the About tab.
A dialog will be opened, displaying a Service request code:
4. Send the service request code to Guidance Navigation Limited
(cyscan@guidance.eu.com) or an authorised customer service representative.
Note: The service request code is constructed as two groups of six capital letters [A-Z]
separated by a + sign. There are never any numerals in a service access code.
5. A corresponding Service Access Code will be supplied to you. This code is nontransferable
and will operate only with current Console system for a limited period.
Note: The service access code is a 12 digit hexadecimal number [0-9, A-F].
6. Enter the received code into the Service access code field and click on the OK button.
To obtain and use a temporary service access code
Service access will be granted on this system for a maximum period of 12 hours, however,
the mode will be automatically ended after 20 minutes.
Click on the Service Access button to restart service access mode.

2. Select the About CyScan option.
The About Tab will be displayed:
Service access code dialog showing a request code and an area

to enter the corresponding access code
CyScan
Operator 35
Configuration Settings - Service Access Mode

In service access mode, the full range of DP Feed types become selectable within the General
Settings/Version Info category on the Configuration tab:
In Service Access mode, the

Configuration tab also displays
Communications/Display Options:
and Vessel Parameter/File Transfer

options:
CyScan
Operator 36
System Logging Options

During navigation, the system automatically generates a set of operation logs that can be
analysed by a service engineer to diagnose any system faults. Logging can also be started
manually, when the system is not navigating (see below).
Note: During manual logging, the CyScan and Navigation buttons are disabled. You must
stop logging before you can start navigating or exit the system.
Deleting Log Files

To delete all log files:
2. Click on Datalogs > Delete all log files.
Logs are written to compressed folders that each contain approximately one hours data. The
folders are named according to the date and time period that they cover, and the type of
navigation that was being carried out. For example, logs recorded between 1 and 2 oclock
on the 4th February 2008 during multi-target navigation would be stored in a folder named:
04d02m2008y 13h00m00s to 14h00m00s multi target.zip
Logs are stored in the C:\Program Files\CyScan directory and can be copied manually and
e-mailed to Guidance Limited (cyscan@guidance.eu.com) or your DP Supplier in the event
of a problem. Logs can also be copied automatically to a USB drive or memory-stick (see
below).
Taking Screen Shots
Starting and Stopping Manual Logging

To start (and stop) logging when CyScan is not navigating, either press the Alt + L keys
together, or use the menu option:
The Screen Shot option records every detail of the current screen and stores it as a bitmap
image. Screen shots can be analysed by a service engineer or e-mailed to Guidance Limited
in the same way as log files.
Screen shots are stored in the same directory as the log files (C:\Program Files\CyScan). They
are named according to the date and time that they were taken, for example:
2. Click on Datalogs > Log Data Now.
04d02m2008y 10h44m50s desktop image.zip
Copying Log Files to an External USB Drive
To take a screen shot:
1. Connect a USB drive with sufficient free space to your PC.
2. Click on Datalogs > Take screen shot.
3. Click on Datalogs > Copy Log Files to USB.
3. The name of the screen shot file is displayed:
4. Click on the time period that corresponds to the log files that you want to copy
(either All files from today, All files since yesterday, the Last 7 days files or the
Last 14 days files).
5. Click on Datalogs > Copy Log Files
to USB > USB DISK.
6. The light on your USB drive will
flash to show that files are being
copied.
When the light stops flashing, the
drive can be disconnected from the
PC.
4. Make a note of the name and location of the file and click on the OK button.
CyScan
Operator 37
Troubleshooting
If you experience problems when installing or using the CyScan system, please check through
this Troubleshooting section for a possible solution. It contains the following pages:
XX
Problems and Possible Remedies (page 39)
XX
Alarm Codes (page 40)
XX

Cleaning
the Sensor and Targets (page 40)
XX

CyScan
Fuse Information (page 41)
XX

CyScan
LED Indicators (page 42)
If your problem is not listed or you cannot resolve the issue, please contact the system
installer or equipment provider who are trained to assist with installation and operational
problems.
If the problem cannot be resolved by the system installer or equipment provider, please
contact Guidance Navigation Limited:
Contact Details
XX
Phone:
+44 (0)116 229 2600
XX
Fax:
+44 (0)116 229 2604
XX
E-mail:
cyscan@guidance.eu.com
CyScan
Operator 38
Problems and Possible Remedies

No communication between CyScan Console and the Sensor
XX
The User Console alerts the operator on loss of communications and offers to Reset
Communications. Click OK.
XX
Check the Power, DP Feed and Display/Diagnostic connections to the sensor.
XX
Ensure that the LEDs on the sensor unit only show the green LED flashing fast, the yellow
and red LED should be off. If this is not the case, power cycle the sensor and observe the
LED behaviour. (See page 42).
XX
Check on the data feed converter that it is powered (yellow LED on) and that the outer
transmit/receive lights are flashing once every couple of seconds (i.e. the user console
is trying to establish communications with the sensor unit). Under normal conditions
the outer LEDs should flash first followed by the inner two LEDs flashing in response (the
sensor unit answering with data).
Rotor does not rotate
XX
Check that the blanking zone is configured correctly.
XX
Clean the CyScan sensor lenses. (See Cleaning the Sensor on page 40).
XX
Check that the Show Reflections option in Display Options is selected. (See page 10).
XX
Check that the sensor display zoom is set appropriately.
System is operational but is not navigating

XX
Check that the correct multi-target group is selected.
XX
Check that the sensor has a clear view of the targets.
XX
Check that the blanking zone is not blocking targets from view.
System navigating but no data is received at the DP system
XX
The sensor rotor might be prevented from rotating due to mechanical

blockage.
XX
Investigate and remove blockage.
XX
Check the LEDs on the system unit. Ensure that the red LED is not on. Otherwise there is a
hardware fault; power cycle the unit and observe LED behaviour.
XX
Check for ice build up between rotor and gearbox cover. Remove any ice which may be
present.
XX
Check that the red locking pins used in transit have been removed.
XX
Check the DP Feed connection from the sensor.
XX
Check that the correct data format is selected for the DP system.
System appears to be operational, however, it is exhibiting erratic

behaviour with communications locking up occasionally
XX
Rotor rotates slowly

XX
System appears to be operational but no reflections are displayed

within CyScan Console
When switched on from cold at low temperatures the unit may rotate slowly for several
minutes before building up to normal speed of 1 rev per second.
CyScan
Check that the external supply voltage, supplied via the Power cable, to the sensor has
not dropped below 18V.
System operates correctly but in cold weather loses targets.

XX
Check for condensation or ice on targets. Clean if necessary.
XX
Check for condensation or ice on the lenses of the sensor. Clean if necessary.
Operator 39
Alarm Codes
Cleaning the Sensor and Targets
For the purpose of an audit trail, events of any nature are reported in the Console application
in the form of 4 different alarm types. These alarms only apply to the embedded navigator
and the interaction between the sensor unit and the Console user-interface.
To maintain the CyScan Sensor in good working order it is important that its optical elements
are kept free of contamination.
To clean the optical window
Fatal AlarmsCodes 2xxx

Signifies a fatal event such as malfunctioning software; the system might be able to recover
from this but a power cycle is always recommended (both sensor unit and console computer)
ErrorsCodes 3xxx
Signifies an unexpected event such as a missing parameter file or a lack of response from a
particular sub-system; these errors normally clear themselves after a while. If these errors
occur repeatedly in quick succession especially after restarting the system, then a serious
hardware problem might have occurred.
Use a lint-free cloth with IPA spray to carefully wipe the optical window.
To clean the targets

In dirty environments the reflective faces of the targets should be cleaned regularly for best
viewing.
Under icy or frosty conditions, the targets should be cleared of any condensation or ice.
WarningsCodes 4xxx
Signifies a possible error source; it will be followed by a relevant error message if the system
deteriorates, otherwise this will clear itself in due course. In general most warnings if they
are infrequent can be ignored.
InformationCodes 5xxx
Signifies purely an event, user initiated or automatic, for audit purposes.
Proxy AlarmsCodes 6xxx

Signifies events that are associated with the sensor rotor and tilt mechanism and can provide
diagnostic information about hardware issues.
CyScan
Operator 40
CyScan Fuse Information

The CyScan system contains two fuses, their locations are:
XX
Inside the Power Supply Unit casing on the AC input
XX
On the Controller PCB within the CyScan sensor housing on the DC input
Controller PCB Fuse
Power Supply Fuse
Fuse specification:
20mm
4A rating
Slow Blow
Fuse specification:
20mm
5A rating
Slow Blow
Please refer to the Engineers Guide for details on how to gain

access to the controller PCB.
CyScan
Operator 41
CyScan LED Indicators

To provide instant status information, the CyScan sensor features three LED indicators
mounted beneath both carrying handles. Each indicator displays the current status of three
key elements of the sensor circuitry:
Correct Startup Indication

As the CyScan sensor initialises itself, the following sequence should be seen:
Red

Flashes once briefly when power is applied and should then be off for as
long as the yellow LED is on.
As soon as the yellow LED has turned off, it will toggle at one second
intervals as the scanner tilt circuitry initialises for about 30 seconds.
After the initialisation period, the Red indicator should switch off and stay
off. If at any point it stays on permanently then a hardware fault has been
detected.
Yellow

On continuously after power has been applied while the embedded

PC circuitry initialises.
After the initialisation period, the Yellow indicator should switch off and
stay off. It will come on again once the system has been shutdown or in
case of an embedded PC failure.
Red
Yellow
Green
Sensor diagnostic
Embedded PC status
Main status
Green Flashes once per second after power is applied and while the yellow led is on.

As soon as the yellow led switches off and the leveller initialises

(RED led toggles), the green led will begin to flash at 10 Hz intervals giving the

main system heartbeat. When the system is suspended it flashes briefly once a

second.
Shutdown/Suspend
Error States and Possible Causes
Red
Red

Off unless there is a hardware failure.
Yellow On for shutdown, Off for suspend.

Green Flashes briefly once a second.
Permanently on at any pointElectronic hardware failure within the

leveller or sensor circuitry. Can also come on when a hardware failure is
detected during operation.
Yellow On after the initialisation period is completeEmbedded PC failure or

unit is shut down. Communication with the sensor is not possible. Recycle

power to the CyScan system.
Green Permanently on or offNo heartbeat to the system. No operation is

possible. Recycle power to the CyScan system.
CyScan
Blinking slowlyunit suspended or shutdown (see YELLOW and RED LEDs).
Toggling twice a secondAfter power has been applied, waiting for the PC to
initialise and the yellow LED to turn off.
Operator 42
Technical Notes
1. TargetsReflective Material (page 44)
2. TargetsInstallation and Position (page 45)
3. Vertical

Beam Divergence (page 47)
4. Low

Temperature Operation (page 48)
CyScan
Operator 43
Technical Note 1
TargetsReflective Material
CyScan has been designed to operate with good quality retro-reflective targets. There are
numerous manufacturers and types of reflective material available worldwide. These have
widely varying angular reflective specifications and are not all suitable for laser navigation
purposes.
Only one type of reflective material is recommended for use with CyScan. It is known as
Scotchlite Diamond Grade White 4090 and is manufactured by the 3M Company. It is widely
available as a tape or flexible sheet in a variety of sizes with an adhesive backing. The
material can be obtained through 3Ms international product distribution network as detailed
below.
3M trademarks are acknowledged.
Recommended reflective tape:
Contact details for 3M product distribution network:

Country
Contact point
United States

3M Austin Centre, Austin, Texas, 78726

Tel: 512-984-1800
United Kingdom

3M UK Plc, Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 1JU

Tel: 01344-858000
Canada

3M Canada Product Information Centre,

London, Ontario, N5V 3R6
Tel: 1-800-364-3577
Japan

Sumitomo 3M Limited, Setagaya-ku, Tokyo 158

Tel: 813-3709-8170
Germany

3M Deutschland GmbH, 41453 Neuss

Tel: 02131-143472
Italy

3M Italia SpA, Segrate, Milano

Tel: 392-70351
France

3M France Customer Information Centre,

F-95006 Cergy Pontoise Cedex
Tel: 331-130-318-020
Hong Kong

3M Hong Kong Limited, North Point, Hong Kong

Tel: 852-2806-6111
3M Diamond Grade
White 4090
CyScan
Operator 44
Technical note 2
TargetsInstallation And Position

Target Types
CyScan can operate successfully with flat or cylindrical targets. These are available from your
CyScan agent and are shown below:
Flat Targets
Cylindrical Targets
Prism Targets
Flat targets are generally attached to rigid structures

such as metal stanchions using steel bands.
Cylindrical targets can be used up to approximately 300 metres. They can be hung over the
side of the structure/vessel and secured at either
end.
Prism cluster with 8 x 6cm elements for

extended range operations.
2 metre tall flat targets can typically be seen at up to

400 metres in ideal conditions. Shorter 1 metre tall flat
targets are visible at up to 250 metres when viewed
straight on.
Part number: 20-0078-0

(1.5m cylindrical reflector)

(2m x 350mm flat reflector including stainless steel
bands)
CyScan
Operator 45
Target Installation
Key to the operation of the CyScan system is the correct installation of targets. Please follow
the guidelines given below when installing targets on the structure/vessel.
Once the targets are installed, their relative positions can be automatically surveyed by the
system.
Optimum Spacing for Multiple Targets
Installation Tips
XX
Targets should be placed in positions where the sensor can see them while the vessel is
within the expected working area. Consider vertical position as well as horizontal.
XX
lat targets should not be placed too far along the structure/vessel from the expected
F
working area as this can reduce the viewing angle for close operations.
XX
he sensor beam should not strike a flat target at an angle of more than 45 degrees to the
T
target surface.
XX
Cylindrical targets can be viewed from any angle equally well.
VI
ANEWAB
GLE LE
45
45
XX
o
XX
VI
ANEWAB
GLE LE
argets should be positioned with unequal spacing between them this helps the system
T
to distinguish between specific targets. For example, with a typical mooring distance
of 40-80m using three targets, suitable spacings between the targets would be 10m and
20m giving a total spread of 30m.
to assess which reflection corresponds to a

particular target.
Targets should be placed no closer than 5m together. Ideally they should be placed 10m or
more apart.
CyScan
Targets are asymmetrically spaced,
thus making it easier for the CyScan system
Operator 46
Targets are too close together and have
even spacings. This makes it more difficult

for the CyScan system to differentiate
them.
Technical note 3
Vertical Beam Divergence

CyScan has an optimised optical system to ensure that bearing precision and target lock are
maintained even in high sea states and over the full range of the sensor. The optics produce
a vertically divergent beam (16) with a very narrow profile. As the distance from the target
increases the beam becomes deeper as shown in the diagram.
Target
Range R
(Not to scale)
MK II
Range R (m)
Height h (m)
20
5.6
30
8.4
50
14.0
70
19.5
90
25.1
100
27.9
120
33.5
150
41.9
180
50.3
200
55.9
250
69.8
300
83.8
CyScan
Operator 47
Technical note 4
Low Temperature Operation

Introduction
CyScan is a precision electromechanical device with hardware components that, of necessity, are mounted in an external position on a vessels superstructure. It is recognised that
industrial marine operations may subject these components to harsh environments, including
low temperature.
The standard variant of CyScan is designed to operate within the temperature range 10
to 55C. A low temperature variant of the hardware complies with the requirements of
IEC60068-2-1 and is able to operate for prolonged periods at temperatures down to 25C
provided that certain operating conditions are maintained.
Operating Conditions
Technical Considerations
The following recommendations are made for low temperature use:
XX
yScan uses a sophisticated rotating infra-red laser range-finder to accurately measure

C
the distance and bearing to retro-reflective targets that are placed at specific locations in
the working area. Movement sensors allow a mechanically driven base to compensate for
vessel motion due to wave action. The internal mechanism may become disabled if it is
allowed to cool in a low temperature environment.
XX
safety interlock prevents activation of the range-finder laser if the scanner head stops
A
or is prevented from rotating by ice build-up.
XX
iew of the retro-reflective targets will be obscured by a build-up of ice on either the
V
optical windows of the scanner or the surface of the targets (N.B. ice has poor reflective
properties at the infra-red frequency used by CyScan).
XX
For operation below 5C the sensor should remain powered and running
(i.e. not suspended). However, where this is not possible and it is necessary for the
system to be switched on at temperatures below 5C (and down to 25C) the sensor will
require some time to reach optimum operating condition.
XX
hen the system is not in use (i.e. un-powered or suspended) the sensor should be
W
protected by means of a suitable insulating and protective cover to prevent the external
build-up of ice.
XX
For operation below 25C additional forced air heating must be provided
Note: Not exhaust emissions as these contain particulates which will degrade the optics.
XX
he external PSU leads are rated for static operation to 40C but only to 5C for flexing
T
operation. The leads must therefore be adequately secured to prevent flexing and the
system should not be installed or de-installed at temperatures below 0C.
CyScan
Operator 48
CyScan System Specifications

SENSOR
General System Specifications
VESSEL INTERFACE
Emitter Type
Pulsed (30kHz) semiconductor laser diode operating at 904nm.
Classification
Eye safe to Class 1 EN60825
Beam Characteristics
16 vertical, 0.23 horizontal
Positional Accuracy
Better than 0.5% of range dependent on target

layout
Range Resolution
Range Repeatability
Power Requirement
Stabilised 22-26VDC, 4A from PSU
I/O
RS422 data feed for sensor control and data display

RS422 9600 baud data feed to vessel control
Data Formats
Compatible with all DP and other vessel control

systems using standard or customised message
types
10cm
Connections
IAC PP series connectors
20cm
Diagnostics
Status LEDs with advanced software functions
Angular Resolution
0.006 (0.1 mrad)
CONTROL & DATA DISPLAY
Angular Repeatability
0.03 (0.5mrad) for multiple targets
Operating System
PC / MS Windows XP Professional
Rotation
Unidirectional 360/sec (6.28rad/sec)
Software
Dedicated real-time interactive
Hardware Options
Compact industrial PC module + 15 TFT monitor +

Mouse device
LEVELLING PLATFORM
Active Axis
Twin with independent dynamic control
Tilt Compensation
20 Roll and pitch combined
Sensors
3 axis solid state gyros,
Hatteland JH15 Type Approved integrated PC/TFT

module + Mouse device
Laptop PC with 15 TFT display
Twin axes fluid tilt sensor

Drive Mechanism
Stepper controlled linear actuator
Maximum Tilt Speed
5/sec maximum acceleration 4/sec2
Total Vertical Angular Visibility
56
Typical Wave Motion Compensation
5 for 15 second wave period
ENVIRONMENTAL
Marine Certification
2.5 for 5 second wave period
MECHANICAL
ABS Type Approved version available IACS E10 and

IEC60945
Operating Temperature
-10 to 55C (Low Temperature variant

available to 25C)
Water / Dust Protection
IP66 rated
EMC
CE certified
Enclosure
Anodised aluminium alloy baseplate with composite body shell
Compass Safe Distance
80cm for 0.33 deg deflection.
Dimensions
340 x 460mm footprint, 400mm () x 440(h) unit
Weight
ca. 27kg
Documentation
Training DVD, Engineers, Maintainers and

Operators Guides
Mounting
Permanent by securing bolt holes in base
Warranty
12 months return to base
Transport packaging
Re-usable strengthened flight case
SUPPORT
continued
CyScan
Operator 49
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Part Number
Simulator
A software package for training purposes
10-0011-4
Power Supply Unit
24V regulated PSU (90-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz)

complete with data cable assembly and mounted in
IP66 rated terminal box
20-0030-0
Cables And Converters
Set of test and software upload cables
31-0027-4
Retro-Reflective Targets
Flat 2m x 350cm
20-0031-0
Cylindrical 1.5m 205mm
20-0078-0
Glass prism cluster with 8x 6 cm elements
20-0075-1
CyScan
Operator 50
Index
Symbols
3M 44
Basic Reflection Data 19

Beam
A
A and B Axes 18
About
CyScan 10
Tab 35
Accept Alarms 14
Access Code 35
Accessories 50
Active Axis 49
Alarm Codes 40
Alarms
Accept 14
Clear 14
Export 14
Filter 14
Filtering 14
Tab 11
Align Multi-Target Group 10, 30

Ambient Temperature 19
Angular
Repeatability 49
Resolution 49
A Pos 18
Apply Changes 10
ASCII17 9
Auto Draught Follow 21
Contact Details 38
DP
3M 44
Guidance Navigation 38
Characteristics 49
Divergence 47
Control & Data Display 49

Create Multi-Target Group 28
Custom Blanking Zones 17
Cylindrical Targets 45
CyScan 3
Bearing Axis 10
Blanking
Tab 16
Blanking Zone 8, 16
Create Custom 17
Custom 17
Select Preset 16
Set 10
Setting 16
Show 10
About 10
Button 9
Configuration 10
Console 3
Sensor Part Names 4
Vessel 8
Bow and Starboard Axes 18

B Pos 18
Brightness 20
Button bar 7, 10
Feed 9
ASCII17 9
NMEA0183 9
Feed Format 33, 34

System 3
Drive Mechanism 49
E
E-mail 38
EMC 49
Emitter Type 49
Enclosure 49
Ending
Multi-Target Group Navigation 27
Single Target Navigation 26
C
Cables And Converters 50
Cancel Changes 10
Classification 49
Cleaning 40
Clear Alarms 14
Communication/Display Options 36
Compass Safe Distance 49
Configuration
Settings 33
Tab 33
Data Converter 3
Data Formats 49
Datalogs 10
Date and Time 13
Day View 10, 12, 33
Deleting Log Files 37
Diagnostics 49
Dimensions 49
Display
Centred On 10
Day/Night View 10
Extended Dialogs 34
Options 10
Vessel Bow 10
Documentation 49
Connections 49
Console 3
CyScan
Operator 51
Entering Service Access Mode 35

Environmental 49
Error States and Possible Causes 42
Export Alarms 14
Extended
Dialogues 33, 34
Reflection Data 19
F
Fax 38
Filtering Alarms 14
Flat Targets 26, 45
Fuse Information 41
G
General Settings 36
Getting Started 5
H
Hardware Options 49
Heading Axis 10
Help 9
Historic Alarm List 14
Mechanical 49
Memory Stick 37
Message String 33, 34
Minimum
Mounting 49
Multiple Target Spacing 46
Multi-Target Group 8, 10
Part Names
4
Part Number
Cylindrical Target 45
CyScan PSU 32
CyScan Sensor 32
Flat Target 45
Prism Target 45
Ending 27
Preset 27
Starting 27
Temporary Group 27
L
Labels 10, 32
LED Indicators 42
Levelling Platform 49
Logging 37
Copy Files to USB 37
Deleting Log Files 37
Starting 37
Stopping 37
Low Temperature Operation 48
M
Manually Tilting the Scanner 22
Manual Tilt 21
Set 10
Marine Certification 49
Marker 19
Maximum Tilt Speed 49
Range 20
Align 10, 30
Create 10
Creating 28
Name 29
Types 27
Keyboard 13
On-Screen Keyboard 13
Operating
Optional Accessories 50
Multi-Target Navigation 27
Conditions 48
System 49
Temperature 49
Brightness 20
Range 20
Information Quality Indicator 9

Introduction 3
I/O 49
Phone 38
Positional
Accuracy 49
Data Display 7
Display Modes 18
Information Quality 25
N
Name
Power 19
Power Requirement 49
Power Supply Unit 3, 50
Preset Blanking Zones 16
Prism
Multi-target Group 29
Navigation 24
Basics 15
Ending
Multi-Target 27
Multi-Target 27
Section 7, 9
Single Target 26
Starting 10
Cluster 26
Targets 45
Problems and Possible Remedies 39

Product Labels 32
Property pages 7
PSU 3
Pulse Icons 19
Pulses 19
Multi-Target 27
Stop 10
Night View 12, 33

NMEA0183 9
NMEA0183P (Primary) 18
NMEA0183R (Raw) 18
CyScan
Operator 52
Circles 8, 10
Repeatability 49
Resolution 49
Range & Bearing 18

Range & Bearing Only 33
Reflection Data
Basic 19
Extended 19
Reflections 19
Images 8
Rejecting 20
Show 10
Reflections Tab 11
Reflective Material 44
Reflective Tape 44
Rejecting Unwanted Reflections 20
Rejects 19
Reset Communications 6, 9
Retro-Reflective 3
Targets 50
Rev# 19
Rotation 49
Scanner Tilt
Controls 21
Modes 21
Screen Layout 7
Screen Shots 37
Select Tilt Mode 10
Sensor 3, 49
Display 7, 8
Operations 10
Part Names 4
Serial Number
CyScan PSU 32
CyScan Sensor 32
Service
Access Code 35
Access Mode 35
Configuration Settings 36
Request Code 35
Set
Blanking Zone 10
Manual Tilt 10
Tilt Angle 23
Tilt Bearing 23
Show
Bearing Axis 10
Blanking Zone 10
Heading Axis 10
Labels 10
Range Circles 10
Reflections 10
Targets 10
Tilt 10
Vessel Shape 10
Shut Down 6
Shutdown/Suspend 42
Signal A, B and C Levels 19
Signal A-lo 19
Signal B 19
Signal C-hi 19
Simulator 50
Single Cylinder or Flat Target 26
Single Prism or Prism Cluster 26
Ending 26
Starting 26
Tab
About 35
Alarms 11
Blanking Zone 16
Configuration 33
Reflections 11
Taking Screen Shots 37

Target 3
Software 49
Software versions 32
Spacing Multiple Targets 46
Specifications 49
Starboard Axes 18
Starting
Preset Multi-Target Group Navigation
27
Temporary Multi-Target Group Navigation 27
Start Navigation 10
Start up 6
Startup Indication 42
Status Bar 7, 9
Status Bar Buttons 9
Stop Navigation 10
Sub-zero Temperatures 48
Support 49
Support Information 31
Suppress Rejects 20
Suspend 6, 9
System Date and Time 13
System Logging 37
System Specifications 49
Cylindrical 45
Flat 45
Images 8
Installation 45, 46
Installation Tips 46
Position 45
Prism 45
Reflective Matierial 44
Show 10
Spacing 46
Types 45
Technical Notes 43
Temperature 19, 48
Temporary Service Access Code 35
Tilt
Angle 8
Set 23
Bearing 23
Compensation 49
Controls 21
Direction 8
Mode 9, 21
Select 10
Show 10
Total Vertical Angular Visibility 49

Transport Packaging 49
Troubleshooting 38
CyScan
Operator 53
USB Drive 37
Using the Historic Alarm List 14
V
Vertical Beam Divergence 47
Vessel 8
Interface 49
Shape 10
W
Warranty 49
Water / Dust Protection 49
Wave Motion Compensation 49
Weight 49
Welcome 3
Width
Target 19
Working with Alarms 14

Working with Reflections 19
Z
Zero Tilt 21
Zoom In/Out 10
CyScan Covers (Guidance)
27/2/08
12:28 pm
Page 3
User Manual
for
7 kVA UPS

MGE UPS, Comet EX 7 RT Installation and User Manual
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-381001-01MU
Unrestricted

- BLANK PAGE -
Document No.
Issue No.
Page
CAA-381001-01MU
Unrestricted

MGE UPS SYSTEMS
www.mgeups.com
Comet EX 7 RT
Comet EX 11 RT
Installation and user

manual
EXB
EX
11
RT
RT
ON
OFF
www
.mge
ups.com
s.com
D E R
V I
O
R
U N
I N
T E
R
.mgeup
T H E
www
34007558EN/AA
- Page 1
Introduction
Thank you for selecting an MGE UPS SYSTEMS product to protect your equipment.
The Comet EX RT range has been designed with the utmost care.
We recommend that you take the time to read this manual to take full advantage of the many features of your UPS.
Warning: this is a class A UPS product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which
case, the user may be required to take additional measures.
If the device must be installed in overvoltage category III or IV environments, additional upstream overvoltage protection
must be provided for.
To discover the entire range of MGE UPS SYSTEMS products and the options available for the Comet EX RT range,
we invite you to visit our web site at www.mgeups.com or contact your MGE UPS SYSTEMS representative.
Environmental protection
MGE UPS SYSTEMS cares about the environmental impact of its products and has therefore implemented an eco-design
process for the entire life cycle of the Comet EX RT product: design, usage and recycling.
Using this document

Information may be found primarily by checking:
the contents,
the index.
Icons
Important instructions that must always be followed.
Information, tips, help.
Visual indication.
Action.
Audible alarm.
In the illustrations on the following pages, the symbols below are used:
LED off.
LED on.
LED flashing.
Page 2 - 34007558EN/AA
Contents
1.
Presentation
1.1
Standard configurations .............................................................................................................. 5

Tower configuration ......................................................................................................................... 5
Rack configuration .......................................................................................................................... 5
1.2
Rear panels .................................................................................................................................... 6

Power module Comet EX 7 RT / EX 11 RT ..................................................................................... 6
Battery module Comet EXB 7 RT / EXB 11 RT ............................................................................... 6
1.3
1.4
Display and control panel ............................................................................................................ 7

Options .......................................................................................................................................... 7
Rack mounting kits .......................................................................................................................... 7
Transformer for galvanic isolation or earthing arrangement change .............................................. 8
Battery extensions for UPS backup times up to 60 minutes ........................................................... 9
CLA module (Long backup time charger) for backup times from 2 to 8 hours ................................ 9
Modules integration system .......................................................................................................... 10
Battery module with Remote Emergency Power Off function (REPO) ......................................... 10
Battery extension cable (1,8 m / 6 ft) ............................................................................................ 10
2.
Installation
2.1
Unpacking and parts check ....................................................................................................... 11

Power module ............................................................................................................................... 11
Battery module .............................................................................................................................. 11
2.2
2.3
Installation in tower configuration ............................................................................................ 12

Installation in rack configuration .............................................................................................. 13
Adjustment of the orientation of the logo and control panels ........................................................ 13
Battery module rack mounting (optional rail required) .................................................................. 13
Power or battery module rack mounting (optional rail required) ................................................... 14
2.4
Communication ports ................................................................................................................. 16

Connection to the RS232 communication port ............................................................................. 16
Connection to the communications port by relays ........................................................................ 16
Remote Power Off communication port ........................................................................................ 17
Installation of communication cards (optional, standard with the Network Pack version) ............. 17
2.5
Installation depending on the system earthing arrangement (SEA) ...................................... 18

UPS with common Normal and Bypass AC inputs ........................................................................ 18
UPS with separate Normal and Bypass AC inputs ....................................................................... 18
UPS with separate Normal and Bypass AC inputs, supplied by separate sources ....................... 19
Frequency converter (without Bypass AC input) ........................................................................... 19
Hot standby ................................................................................................................................... 19
2.6
Required protective devices and cable cross-sections .......................................................... 20

Recommended upstream protection ............................................................................................. 20
Recommended downstream protection ........................................................................................ 20
Required cable cross-section ........................................................................................................ 20
2.7
Connections of input/output power cables .............................................................................. 21

UPS with common Normal and Bypass AC sources ..................................................................... 21
UPS with separate Normal and Bypass AC sources .................................................................... 22
Frequency converter ..................................................................................................................... 23
Connection of battery cables ........................................................................................................ 24
Connection of galvanic isolation transformer ................................................................................ 24
Connection of CLA module ........................................................................................................... 25
34007558EN/AA
- Page 3
Contents
3.
Operation
3.1
Initial start up .............................................................................................................................. 26

UPS personalisation ..................................................................................................................... 26
Accessing personalisation with front panel buttons ...................................................................... 26
Access to the personalisation through external software .............................................................. 27
3.2
Final start up sequence .............................................................................................................. 27
3.3
Operating modes ........................................................................................................................ 28

Normal (double conversion) mode ................................................................................................ 28
Eco mode ...................................................................................................................................... 28
3.4
Operation on battery power ....................................................................................................... 29

Transfer to battery power .............................................................................................................. 29
Threshold for the low-battery warning ........................................................................................... 29
End of backup time ....................................................................................................................... 29
4.
3.5
Return of Normal AC source ...................................................................................................... 29
3.6
Shut down .................................................................................................................................... 30
Maintenance
4.1
4.2
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................... 31
Hot-swapping the power module .............................................................................................. 32
Disconnecting the power module .................................................................................................. 32
Reconnecting the power module .................................................................................................. 33
4.3
Hot-swapping the battery module ............................................................................................. 33

Disconnecting the battery module ................................................................................................. 33
Reconnecting the battery module ................................................................................................. 33
4.4
5.
Training center ............................................................................................................................ 34
Appendices
5.1
Technical specifications ............................................................................................................. 35

Electrical characteristics ............................................................................................................... 35
Thermal characteristics ................................................................................................................. 37
Page 4 - 34007558EN/AA
5.2
Glossary ....................................................................................................................................... 38
5.3
Index ............................................................................................................................................. 38
1. Presentation
1.1 Standard configurations
Tower configuration
Dimensions in mm/inches
(H x W x D)
Comet EX 7 RT
Comet EX 11 RT
Comet EXB 7 RT
Comet EXB 11 RT
444 x 131 x 635

17.49" x 5.16" x 25"
Weight in kg/lbs
EXB
EX
11
RT
RT
ON
OFF
www
www
.mge
ups.c
om
.mge
ups.c
Comet EX 7 RT
22.5 / 49.6
Comet EX 11 RT
27.5 / 60.6
Comet EXB 7 RT
64.5 / 142
Comet EXB 11 RT
68.5 / 151
om
Battery module
(Comet EXB 7 RT / EXB 11 RT)
Power module
(Comet EX 7 RT / EX11 RT)
Rack configuration
Power module (Comet EX 7 RT / EX11 RT)
Dimensions in mm/inches
(H x W x D)
Comet EX 7 RT
Comet EX 11 RT
Comet EXB 7 RT
Comet EXB 11 RT
131 (3U) x 444 x 635

5.16" (3U) x 17.49" x 25"
Weight in kg/lbs
1 RT
EX 1
Comet EX 7 RT
22.5 / 49.6
Comet EX 11 RT
27.5 / 60.6
Comet EXB 7 RT
64.5 / 142
Comet EXB 11 RT
68.5 / 151
ON
OFF
www.mg
eups.co
EXB
www.mg
eups.co
RT
Battery module
(Comet EXB 7 RT / EXB 11 RT)
34007558EN/AA
- Page 5
1. Presentation
1.2 Rear panels
Power module Comet EX 7 RT / EX 11 RT
1
Slot for communication cards.
Communication port by relays.
Remote Emergency Power Off communication port (REPO).
Connectors for automatic detection of battery module(s).
RS232 communications port.
Battery module connectors (to the UPS or to other battery

modules).
Manual Bypass switch.
Output terminal block.
Normal AC source circuit switch.
1
2
3
4
5
7
NORMAL
BY
PASS
8
9
10 Normal AC source terminal block.
10
11
11 Bypass AC source terminal block.
Battery module Comet EXB 7 RT / EXB 11 RT

4
Connectors for automatic detection of battery module(s).
Battery module connectors (to the UPS or to other battery

modules).
12 Battery circuit breaker.

4
12
Page 6 - 34007558EN/AA
1. Presentation
1.3 Display and control panel
13
14
15
16
13 Load protected LED.

14 Operation on battery LED.
EX 11 RT
15 Operation on bypass LED.

16 Fault LED.
17 Alphanumeric display.
18 UPS OFF button.
17
LOAD LEVEL
4 kW / 5 kVA
OFF
18
19 20 Function buttons (scroll up / scroll

down).
21 UPS ON button (or function button in
personalisation mode).
ON
19
20
21
1.4 Options
Rack mounting kits
Telescopic rails for Power module mounting in 19" enclosure with mounting hardware
(Part number 68001)
22 Ear hangup.
22
23 Rear bracket system for transportation.

23
25
24 Telescopic rails, 695 mm to 1015 mm

length (27.36" to 39.96").
24
25 Input/Output box bracket system.
Telescopic rails for Battery module mounting in 19" enclosure with mounting hardware
(Part number 68002)
22 Ear hangup.
22
23 Rear bracket system for transportation.

23
24 Telescopic rails, 695 mm to 1015 mm
length (27.36" to 39.96").
25
34007558EN/AA
- Page 7
1. Presentation
Transformer for galvanic isolation or earthing arrangement change
(Part number 68003)
This module is necessary either when a downstream neutral system from the UPS upstream is required, or when a
different power source connects the automatic bypass for higher availability.
EX
RT
www.m
Transform
geups.
er
com
Example of EX RT transformer connected upstream for Comet EX RT galvanic isolation

Battery module (Comet EXB RT)
Power module
(Comet EX 7 RT / EX 11 RT)
Transformer module (Comet EX RT)
UPS output to load
AC Normal input
Page 8 - 34007558EN/AA
1. Presentation
Battery extensions for UPS backup times up to 60 minutes (at full load)
Comet EX RT offers a standard backup time of 5/7 minutes at full load.
To increase backup time, it is possible to connect Comet EXB 7 RT / EXB 11 RT modules to the UPSs.
Battery extensions for Comet EX 7 RT or Comet EX 11 RT
Comet EX 7 RT
+ EXB 7 RT
/
Comet EX 11 RT
+ EXB 11 RT
7 kVA:
11 kVA:
Comet
EXB 7 RT
/
Comet
EXB 11 RT
7 min
5 min
Comet
EXB 7 RT
/
Comet
EXB 11 RT
20 min
14 min
32 min
22 min
Comet
EXB 7 RT
/
Comet
EXB 11 RT
Comet
EXB 7 RT
/
Comet
EXB 11 RT
45 min
30 min
Comet
EXB 7 RT
/
Comet
EXB 11 RT
57 min
42 min
70 min
53 min
CLA module (Long backup time charger) for backup times from 2 to 8 hours
(Part number 68004)
Very long backup times, from 2 to 8 hours at full load, require a Comet EX RT CLA module.
Comet EX 7 RT /
EX 11 RT
50A
~
Comet
EX RT CLA
Battery backup time
Recommended batteries for:

Comet EX11 RT
Comet EX7 RT
2 heures
65 Ah
100 Ah
4 heures
130 Ah
200 Ah
8 heures
200 Ah
400 Ah
Total battery voltage : 240 V DC (20 x 12V DC).

The battery capacity must be set within the UPS (5 Ah increment possible, see UPS Personalisation section).
34007558EN/AA
- Page 9
1. Presentation
Modules integration system (Part number 68005)
RT
EXB
Transformer module
www.mgeu
ps.com
Modules integration system for extended

backup time configurations to conveniently
stack and secure up to 8 modules on the
same cart (swivel wheels with brakes,
leveling feet, seismic side panels, plates to
lock modules and screws included).
RT
EX 11
Power module
ON
OFF
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
Batteries modules
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
RT
EXB
www.mgeu
ps.com
Battery module with Remote Emergency Power Off function (REPO)

Part number:
Comet EXB 7 RT EPO: 68079.
Comet EXB 11 RT EPO: 68119.
12
Battery circuit breaker with Remote Emergency Power OFF shunt trip.
Battery extension cable (1,8 m / 6 ft, Part number 68006)

This extended battery cable will be used instead of the standard battery cable when battery modules are distant from each
other (located in two different enclosures, for instance).
Page 10 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
2.1 Unpacking and parts check
Power module
EX
11
RT
23
22
24
30
26
31
25
IP=
MAC=00E0D8FF855E
100
10
Reset
Card Settings
UPS
data
1 2
ON
RS232 Download
ETHERNET
RS232
66074
Battery module
EXB
RT
27
28
29
32
25
22 Two sets of tower stands.
27 Tower stand expanders.
23 RS232 communications cable.
28 Battery cable.
24 Product documentation.
29 Battery communication cable.
25 Telescopic rails for rack enclosure with

mounting hardware (optional, or standard with
Network Pack version).
26 Solution-Pac power management suite CDROM.
24
30 Input/Output junction box (with 9 insulated ferrules).

31 Network Management card (optional, or standard in Network
Pack version).
32 Bezel screw driver.
Packaging must be destroyed according to waste management standards. Recycling icons are displayed for easy
selection.
A dangerous voltage is present inside the power module and the battery module. Any operations to be carried out
on these modules must be done so by qualified staff.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 11
2. Installation
2.2 Installation in tower configuration
Use the tower stand template provided with the battery module.
2
2
1
1
EXB
EX
11
RT
RT
ON
OFF
www
www
.mge
ups.c
.mge
ups.c
om
om
3
3
4
4
4
4
Follow steps 1 to 4 to adjust the tower stands for the upright position.
Page 12 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
2.3 Installation in rack configuration
We recommend to mount the battery module first, then mount the power module above the battery module.
Adjustment of the orientation of the logo and control panels
1 RT
EX 1
EX
11
OFF
RT
ON
www.mgeups.com
OFF
ON
om
www.m
EX
11
OFF
RT
ON
www.mgeups.com
geups.c
1 RT
EX 1
om
geups.c
www.m
ON
OFF
6
Battery module rack mounting (optional rails required, part number: 68002)
The battery module is very heavy. To ease its rack integration, we strongly recommend to remove the battery trays as
explained below:
2
RT
EXB
2
www.m
geups.c
om
x6
4
34007558EN/AA
- Page 13
2. Installation
6
Power or battery module rack mounting (optional rails required, part number: 68001)
Follow steps 1 to 4 for rack mounting the UPS onto the rails.
3
3
3
1
3
2
4
1
The rails and the necessary mounting hardware are supplied by MGE UPS SYSTEMS.
Note for step 1: it is possible to adjust the position of both front mounting ears.
Page 14 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
Rear bracket system (included with rail kits, part numbers 68001 and 68002)
To be used if you need to move the rack
enclosure with UPS already rack-mounted
inside.
2
2
Input/output junction box bracket system (included with power module rail kit, part number 68001)
This bracket will maintain the Input/Output box at the rear of the rack enclosure when hot-swapping the power module.
It will then be easier to slide the replacement module into the connectors of the Input/Output box.
4
4
3
34007558EN/AA
- Page 15
2. Installation
2.4 Communication ports
Comet EX RT provides 3 communication methods that can be used simultaneously:
The COM port provides RS232 communications using MGE UPS SYSTEMS SHUT protocol. Compatible with most power
management software applications available into the enclosed Solution Pac CD-Rom.
The output contact port is used for basic signaling or for protection of IT systems like IBM iSeries (formerly AS400) and
more.
The slot is compatible with any MGE UPS SYSTEMS communication card (check www.mgeups.com web site for the
complete list of compatible cards).
Connection to the RS 232 communication port

1 - Connect the RS 232 23 communications
cable to the serial port on the computer.
23
2 - Connect the other end of the

communications cable 23 to the RS 232 5
communications port on the UPS.
The UPS can now communicate with various
MGE UPS SYSTEMS power management
application software. Please note that the
configuration software is included with
Personal Solution Pac for Windows.
NORMAL
BY
PASS
Connection to the communication port by relays
Pin 1, 2: not used,

Pin 3: Remote Power Off signal (5 to 27 V DC, 10 mA max),
Pin 4: Operation on mains (not on battery),
Pin 5: User common,
Pin 6: Operation on automatic by-pass,
Pin 7: Low battery,
Pin 8: Load protected,
Pin 9: Operation on battery.
n.o.: contact normally open.
n.c.: contact normally closed.
4
9
n.o.
n.c.
3
8
n.o.
2
7
1
6
n.o.
n.o.
common
When the status is active, the contact between the common (Pin 5) and the relevant information pin is closed.
Output relays specifications

Voltage: 48 V DC max,
Current: 2 A max,
Power: 62,5 VA, 30 W.
Example: for 48 V DC, Imax=625 mA
Page 16 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
Remote Power Off communication port
Used in conjunction with the optional EPO battery module, this port enables total isolation of all power sources connected
to the UPS in case of emergency (the cable is not provided).
Remote power off contact normally open
RJ11
Remote power off contact normally closed
RJ11
654321
654321
5 V DC to 27 V DC
5 V DC to 27 V DC
Signal:
- activation voltage: 5 V DC to 27 V DC.
- current: 10 mA max.
Installation of communication cards (optional, standard with the Network Pack version)
Communication card.
IP=
MAC=00E0D8FF855E
100
10
Reset
Card Settings
UPS
data
1 2
ON
RS232 Download
RS232
ETHERNET
66074
It is not necessary to shut down the UPS to

install the communication card:
1 - Remove the slot cover secured by two
screws.
2 - Insert the card 1 into the slot.
3 - Secure the card with both screws.
NORMAL
BY
PASS
34007558EN/AA
- Page 17
2. Installation
2.5 Installation depending on the system earthing arrangement (SEA)
Comet EX UPS can only be connected to single phase and neutral distributed systems.
UPS with common Normal and Bypass AC inputs

Main lowvoltage
switchboard
(MLVS)
11
Bypass AC
Normal AC
10
load
Change in SEA between upstream and downstream or galvanic isolation required

Main lowvoltage
switchboard
(MLVS)
Bypass AC
11
Isolation transformer
part number: 68003
10
load
load
load
Normal AC
or
Main lowvoltage
switchboard
(MLVS)
Bypass AC
11
10
Normal AC
UPS with separate Normal and Bypass AC inputs

Main lowvoltage
switchboard
(MLVS)
Bypass AC
11
(*)
10
Normal AC

Main lowvoltage
switchboard
(MLVS)
Bypass AC
11
(*)
10
load
Normal AC
(*): The transformer is not necessary if:

Normal and Bypass AC inputs are connected to the same source,
and wires cross sections and wires lengths on Normal and Bypass inputs are identical,
and upstream protection is provided by only one switch with RCD (residual current device) for Normal and Bypass inputs.
Page 18 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
UPS with separate Normal and Bypass AC inputs, supplied by separate sources
Bypass AC
MLVS 1
11
MLVS 2
10
load
load
Normal AC
or
Bypass AC
MLVS 1
11
MLVS 2
10
Normal AC

Bypass AC
11
MLVS 1
10
MLVS 2
load
Normal AC
Frequency converter (without Bypass AC input)

Configuration used when the frequency of the application differs from the Mains (Example: marine requirements).
Main lowvoltage
switchboard
(MLVS)
11
10
load
Normal AC
Hot stand by
Configuration used to provide full redundancy (2N) to critical loads.
Main lowvoltage
switchboard
(MLVS)
Bypass AC
11
10
Normal AC
(*)
(see page 18)
11
Normal AC
10
load
34007558EN/AA
- Page 19
2. Installation
2.6 Required protective devices and cable cross-sections
Recommended upstream protection
UPS power
Upstream
rating
circuit-breaker
7 kVA
D curve - 40A
11 kVA
D curve - 63A
Note: see the simplified diagrams in the appendix for common or separate AC inputs, indicating the positions of the
protection devices, the characteristics of the internal UPS fuses and UPS line currents under overload conditions.
Recommended downstream protection

UPS power
Downstream
rating
circuit breaker
7 kVA
Z curve - 10A
C curve - 4A
11 kVA
Z curve - 10A
C curve - 6A
The indicated protection ensures

discrimination for each output circuit
downstream of the UPS, whether supplied
by the Normal or the Bypass AC source.
If these recommendations are not followed,
protection discrimination is not achieved and
may result in a potential power interruption
to the connected devices.
Note: see the simplified diagrams in the appendix for common or separate AC inputs, indicating the positions of the
protection devices, the characteristics of the internal UPS fuses and UPS line currents under overload conditions.
Required cable cross-sections

Terminal-block cable capacity: 10 mm2, solid or stranded wire (maximum 13 mm2 or AWG 6).
Capacity for earthing conductor: 10 mm2, solid or stranded wire (maximum 13 mm2 or AWG 6).
Page 20 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
2.7 Connections of input/output power cables
This type of connection must be carried out by qualified electrical personnel.
Before carrying out any connection, check that the battery circuit breaker 12 and that the upstream protection devices
(Normal and Bypass AC sources) are open ("0").
Comet EX RT UPS always comes from factory with Normal and Bypass AC inputs already connected together, using a
bridge.
Use included insulated ferrules with stranded wires.
UPS with common Normal and Bypass AC sources
To access the connection terminal blocks,

see section 1.2 "Rear panel":
1 - Remove the terminal block cover
(4 screws),
2 - Insert the Normal AC cable through the
cable gland,
3 - Connect the 3 wires to the Normal AC
terminal block,
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
L2
N2
1
1
Always connect the earthing

wire first.
4 - Insert the output cable to the load

through the output cable gland,
5 - Connect the 3 wires to the output
terminal block,
6 - Refit the terminal block cover and tighten
the cable glands,
7 - Secure the junction Input/Output box to
the rear of the power module by means of
the 3 screws.
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
L2
N2
5
2 4
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
L2
N2
10
100
Reset
1 2
ON
IP=
MAC=00E0D8FF855E
RS232 Download
ETHERNET
UPS
data
Card Settings
66074
AL
NORM
34007558EN/AA
- Page 21
2. Installation
UPS with separate Normal and Bypass AC sources
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
N2
L2
2
1

wire first.
5 - Insert the Output cable to the load

through the Output cable gland,
6 - Connect the 3 wires to the output
terminal block,
7 - Insert the Bypass cable through the cable
gland,
8 - Connect the 3 wires to the Bypass AC
terminal block,
the cable glands,
the 3 screws.
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
L2
N2
7
4 6 8
3 5
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
N2
L2
9
9
10
10
100
Reset
1 2
ON
IP=
MAC=00E0D8FF855E
RS232 Download
ETHERNET
UPS
data
Card Settings
66074
Page 22 - 34007558EN/AA
AL
NORM

(4 screws),
2 - Remove the bridge connected between
L2 and L1,
cable gland,
terminal block,
2. Installation
Frequency converter
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
N2
L2
2
1

(4 screws),
2 - Remove the bridge connected between
L2 and L1,
cable gland,
terminal block,
wire first.
5 - Insert the Output cable suppling the load

through the Output cable gland,
6 - Connect the 3 wires to output terminal
block,
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
N2
L2

the cable glands,
the 3 screws.
4 6
Do not connect anything to the

Bypass AC terminal block,
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
3 5
AL
NORM
200/
Input Vac
ctifier
240
8/ Re/220/230/
L1
208
t 200/20
L1
Outpu 0/240 Vac
N1
220/23
L
N
200/ c
Va
s Input
Bypas 0/230/240
208/22
N2
L2
7
7
8
AL
NORM
10
100
Reset
1 2
ON
IP=
MAC=00E0D8FF855E
RS232 Download
ETHERNET
UPS
data
Card Settings
66074
34007558EN/AA
- Page 23
2. Installation
Connection of battery cables
4
29
28
1 - Check that the battery circuit breaker 12

is OFF ("0" position),
2 - Connect the battery power cable 28 to
the connectors 6 of the power and battery
modules,
3 - Connect the battery detection cable 29
to the connectors 4 of the power and
battery modules,
12
Connection of galvanic isolation transformer
INPUT
N
L
OUTPUT
N
L
Transformer Input
Transformer Output
Output cable cross-section (not provided): 10 mm2, solid or stranded wire (maximum 13 mm2 or AWG 6).
Input cable cross-section (not provided): 10 mm2, solid or stranded wire (maximum 13 mm2 or AWG 6).
Page 24 - 34007558EN/AA
2. Installation
Connection of CLA module
29
BATTERY
28
_
+
AC INPUT
N
L
To battery
AC Input
Connect the battery cable 28 (provided with the CLA module) between the power module and the CLA module.
Connect the cable 29 (provided with the CLA module) between the power module and the CLA module.
Connect the battery:
Cable cross-section (not provided): 10 mm2, solid or stranded wire (maximum 13 mm2 or AWG 6).
Use a circuit-breaker (curve B, 50 A) for cable protection.
Connect the input cable of the CLA module to the AC input:
AC input cable cross-section (not provided) : 2,5 mm2.
Use a circuit-breaker (curve C, 10 A) for cable protection.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 25
3. Operation
3.1 Initial start up
Check that the manual bypass switch 7 is on Normal position.
Set the normal AC source switch 9 to the "I" position.
Set the battery circuit breaker 12 to the "I" position.
15
The load is powered via the bypass AC source, but not protected
by the UPS.
Batteries are recharging, an eight-hour recharge period is
necessary to get full backup time.
LED 15 is ON.
PRESS ON
TO START UPS
OFF
ON
UPS personalisation
If specific settings are required, it is recommended to enter the UPS personnalisation mode at this stage.
It is possible to enter this mode through the front panel buttons or the Personal Solution-Pac software for Windows
included in the MGE UPS SYSTEMS Solution-Pac power management suite CD-ROM.
Accessing personalisation with front panel buttons

Press "scroll up" 19 and "scroll down" 20 function buttons together
for more than 3 seconds.
Press the function button 20 placed under the ENT word to enter the
set up mode and follow the LCD messages using the buttons now
defined as select keys.
UPS SET UP
EXIT
ENT
OFF
ON
19
20
Local settings
Factory setting
Function
Options
Language
English
French, Spanish, German, Italian.
Date / time format
International format
US format (MM-DD-YYYY/HH:MM AM/PM).
(DD-MM-YYYY/HH:MM)
Date / time change
Time in France
MM-DD-YYYY/HH:MM adjustable.
Audible alarm
Quick beeps
Slow beeps.
Output features
Factory setting
Function
Comments
Options
Output voltage
230 Volts AC
200/208/220/240/250
Frequency converter
Disabled
Enabled
Bypass AC source disabled.
Output frequency
Auto ranging
50/60 Hz
User selectable under frequency converter

mode.
Eco mode
Disabled
Enabled
See glossary.
Hot standby
Disabled
Enabled
Full redundancy
(See section 2.5 "Hot standby").
Operating mode
I/T Network
Industrial
(*)
Transfer on Bypass AC
If the Bypass AC source is
If the Bypass AC source is
(*)
source
inside tolerances
out of tolerances
Break time
10 ms
10 to 200 ms
Break time calibration during load transfer
(by steps of 10 ms)
on Bypass AC source out of tolerances.
Overload level
102%
50/70%
(*) : - Select "I/T Network" and "AC Bypass within tolerance" for computer loads.
- Select "Industrial" and "AC Bypass out of tolerance" in case of absolute need for service continuity (with potential
10 ms break).
Page 26 - 34007558EN/AA
3. Operation
ON/OFF features
Factory setting
Function
Options
Comments
Cold start
Disabled
Enabled
Start on battery.
Forced reboot
Enabled
Disabled
Enables automatic restart of the system even

if normal AC source is restored before the
end of the shutdown sequence.
Automatic restart
Enabled
Disabled
Sleep mode
Disabled
Enabled
UPS ON/OFF by software
Enabled
Disabled
UPS restarts automatically

when normal AC source is restored.
Automatic shudown on battery if output load
level < 10%.
Enables consideration of shutdown or restart
orders from software to be authorized.
Battery features
Function
Options
Factory setting
Battery test
Every week
No test / daily / monthly
Low battery signal
20%
0 to 100%
Run time choice
UPS reads # of battery
From 65 to 400 Ah
modules connected
Battery deep discharge
Enabled
1% increment.
Requires Comet EX RT CLA if using options
(see section 1.4 "Battery extensions").
Disabled
protection
Comments
If disabled, lost of
MGE UPS SYSTEMS warranty.
Use EXIT key when set up is completed.

These parameters are only adjustable if UPS is OFF.
Access to the personalisation through external software

Insert the Solution-Pac CD ROM in your CD drive.
At the first Navigator Screen, select "Installation" and follow the instructions to install Personal Solution-Pac for
Windows.
If nothing appears, launch startup.exe
Then go to "Advanced settings" and "UPS settings".
Please note that the Linux/Unix/MacOS versions of Personal Solution-Pac do not include this feature.
3.2 Final start up sequence
Press the ON button more than 3 seconds.

After UPS internal test sequence, the green LED 13 goes on.
During the restart, if the Bypass AC source is out of tolerance, the UPS will generate an output 10 ms calibrated
break.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 27
3. Operation
3.3 Operating modes
Normal (double conversion) mode
This is the standard operating mode, set by default in the factory.
Two possible choices.
13
1 - Normal AC source available:

LED 13 is ON.
The load is protected by the UPS.
LOAD LEVEL
4 kW / 5 kVA
OFF
ON
19
13
20
Scroll up 19 and scroll down 20 function buttons allow you to read

the UPS measurements (Normal AC source voltage, Bypass AC source
voltage, operating mode, battery capacity and UPS Serial Number).
21
2 - Normal AC source not available:

LED 13 flashes.
LED 14 is ON.
The audible alarm sounds intermittently.
14
The load is supplied by the UPS from battery power.

BACKUP TIME
10 minutes
OFF
Do not operate the manual Bypass switch 7 when the UPS is in

the normal mode.
ON
ECO mode
13
The main advantage of the Eco mode (see glossary) is that it reduces
the consumption of electrical power.
Three possible choices:
15
1 - Bypass AC source available:

LEDs 13 and 15 are ON.
The load is supplied in ECO mode.
ECO MODE
4 kW / 5 kVA
OFF
ON
13
2 - Bypass AC source not available:

LED 13 is ON.
The audio alarm sounds intermittently.
The load is automatically supplied in Normal mode via the Normal AC
input.
13
OFF
14
ON
3 - Both Normal and Bypass AC sources not available or out of

tolerance:
LED 13 is ON.
LED 14 is ON.
The audio alarm sounds intermittently.
OFF
Page 28 - 34007558EN/AA
ON
The load is supplied by the UPS from battery power.

The display indicates the battery remaining backup time.
3. Operation
3.4 Operation on battery power
The load continues to be protected by the UPS when the Normal AC source is not available. Power is supplied by the
battery.
Transfer to battery power

13
LED 13 is ON.
LED 14 is ON.
The audio alarm beeps every 10 seconds.
14
The load is supplied by the battery.

The display indicates the battery remaining backup time.
BACKUP TIME
10 minutes
OFF
ON
Threshold for the low-battery warning

13
LED 13 is ON.
LED 14 flashes.
The audio alarm beeps every 3 seconds.
14
Low battery warning on display. There is very little remaining battery

backup time. Close all applications because UPS automatic shutdown is
impending.
BACKUP TIME
2 minutes
OFF
ON
End of backup time

13
14
LED 13 and 14 are OFF.

The audio alarm is stopped.
15
The load is transferred to the Bypass AC source if available. In this

case, the LED 15 is ON.
STOP
END BACKUP TIME
OFF
ON
3.5 Return of Normal AC source

After an outage, the UPS restarts automatically when AC power is restored (unless this function has been disabled via UPS
personalisation).
34007558EN/AA
- Page 29
3. Operation
3.6 Shut down
1 - Press the OFF button 18 more than 3 seconds.
15
The load is no longer protected by the UPS. It is powered

via the bypass AC source. If the UPS is set in frequency
converter mode, the load will not be powered.
If the bypass AC source is out of tolerance, the UPS will
generate a 10 ms output calibrated break.
LOAD LEVEL
4 kW / 5 kVA
OFF
18
2 - Set the battery circuit breaker(s) 12 to the "0" position.

3 - Set the Normal AC source switch 9 to the "0" position.
4 - For a full shutdown of UPS and connected load, the upstream circuit
breaker (not included) should be set to the "0" position.
ON
12
NORMAL
BY
PASS
Page 30 - 34007558EN/AA
4. Maintenance
4.1 Troubleshooting
If any of LEDs 15 or 16 is on, there is an operating anomaly or an alarm.
Use "scroll up" or "scroll down" function button to reset the audible alarm.
Troubleshooting not requiring MGE UPS SYSTEMS after-sales support:

Correction
Signification
Indication
Led 15 is on,
AC source is not connected
the alphanumeric display shows:
to the correct terminals.
Rewire correctly the normal AC source.
BAD CONNECTION
REWIRE AC NORMAL
Load supplied by bypass AC source.
Led 15 is on,
Push the ON button for more than 3

seconds.

LOAD LEVEL
Xx kW / XX KVA
UPS overload.
Led 15 is on*,
Check the power drawn by the equipment

and disconnect any non-priority devices.

THERMAL OVERLOAD
1XX%
Short circuit conditions on output devices.
Led 16 is on,
Check if any device is shorted or failed.

CURRENT OVERLOAD
Led 13 is on,
180 degree phase shift between bypass and Check if bypass source is correctly wired (in
but the alphanumeric display shows:
normal AC source.
case of upstream transformer use).
Audible alarm is on,
Junction of Input/Output box
Check if the junction Input/Output box is
not correctly screwed.
correctly screwed (rear panel).
BYPASS REVERSE
REWIRE BYPASS
I/O BOX REMOVED
(*) : if bypass AC source available.
Troubleshooting requiring MGE UPS SYSTEMS after-sales support:

Signification
Indication
Correction
Leds 15 * and 16 are on
Internal fault
Follow the UPS replacement procedure (see
and audible alarm is on.
and transfer of load
section 4.3).
The alphanumeric display shows:
on bypass AC source.
Call the after sales support department.
Battery fault during the battery test.
Follow the battery replacement procedure
xxx FAULT
www.mgeups.com
Led 15 is on* and audible alarm is on.
(see section 4.3).
BATTERY FAULT
Led 15 is on,
Static switch failure.
Follow the UPS replacement procedure (see
section 4.3).
SHUTDOWN
STATIC SW FAILED
Audible alarm is on, and the alphanumeric
UPS out of warranty.
To extend warranty period or for UPS
display shows:
maintenance, call the local after sales
END OF WARRANTY
support: www.mgeups.com, "Contact Us"

section**.
www.mgeups.com
Audible alarm is on, and the alphanumeric
Batteries may have exceeded there rated life
Call the local after sales support:
display shows:
period. Battery capacity is severely reduced.
www.mgeups.com, "Contact Us" section**.
BATTERY CHECK
www.mgeups.com
(*): if bypass AC source is available.

(**): to reset this alarm permanently, press both function buttons 19 and 20 for more than 3 seconds and access the
LCM Setup menu.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 31
4. Maintenance
4.2 Hot-swapping the power module
This operation can be performed without interrupting the load.
Disconnecting the power module

Stop the UPS with the OFF button 18 (press more than 3 seconds).
Check if UPS is on bypass AC source:
led 15 is on (If led 15 is not on, do not turn the manual bypass and
call the after sales support department).
Turn the manual bypass switch 7 to the BYPASS position.
Switch the battery circuit breaker (s) 12 to the "0" position.
Switch the Normal AC source switch 9 to the "0" position and wait 30
seconds.
Remove the three fixing screws to free the junction Input/Output box.
Disconnect the battery cables 28 and 29 from the power module.
15
XXX FAULT
1CXXXXXXX
OFF
ON
The power module can be replaced.

The connected equipment is powered by the Bypass AC source.
18
Tower configuration
Card
IP= =00E0D8
MAC
FF85
5E
10
100
ings
Sett
UPS
data
32
RS2
Reset
1 2
ON
d
nloa
32 Dow
RS2
66074
ET
ERN
ETH
29
28
BY
PASS
12
Rack configuration
Page 32 - 34007558EN/AA
4. Maintenance
Reconnecting the power module
13
Secure the Input/Output junction box using the three screws.

Reconnect the battery cables 28 and 29 to the power module.
Switch the battery circuit breaker(s) 12 to the "I" position.
Switch the Normal AC source switch 9 to the "I" position.
Turn the manual bypass switch from the BYPASS to the NORMAL
position.
Check that the led 15 is on.
Follow initial start up sequence (see section 3.1) in order to personalize
the UPS.
Push the ON button 21 for more than 3 seconds.
15
LOAD LEVEL
4 kW / 5 kVA
OFF
ON
The green led 13 is on, and the connected equipment is now

protected by the UPS.
21
4.3 Hot-swapping the battery module

Disconnecting the battery module
29
29
28
Switch the battery circuit breaker(s) 12 to the "0" position.

Disconnect the battery cables 28 and 29 from the power module.
The battery module can be replaced. The connected equipment is

powered by the UPS.
It is also possible to replace battery trays instead of battery module.
Contact your nearest after sales support service.
To remove battery trays:
First, switch the battery circuit breaker(s) to the "0" position.
See section 2.3 and follow instructions to remove battery trays.
28
12
Reconnecting the battery module
Reconnect the battery cables 28 and 29 to the power module.

To reconnect battery trays:

See section 2.3 and follow the reverse instructions.
When battery module front panel is closed, connect the battery cables
28 and 29 to the power module.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 33
4. Maintenance
4.4 Training Center
To allow you to use MGE UPS SYSTEMS products effectively and carry out basic maintenance, we offer a complete range
of technical training courses in English and French.
50 Hz Training Center:
MGE UPS SYSTEMS
140, Avenue Jean Kuntzmann
Zirst - Montbonnot St Martin
38334 - St Ismier Cedex - FRANCE
Tel: (33) (0)4 76 18 34 14
Fax: (33) (0)4 76 18 45 21
Email: training@mgeups.com
Internet : www.mgepowerlearning.com
On-line catalogue and registration.
60 Hz Training Center:
MGE UPS SYSTEMS
1660, Scenic Avenue
Costa Mesa, CA 92626, USA
Tel: (1) 714 557 1637
Fax: (1) 714 437 9072
Email: dpaul-pierre.marchand@mgeups.com
Internet : www.mgepowerlearning.com
Page 34 - 34007558EN/AA
5. Appendices
5.1 Technical specifications
Electrical characteristics
I/T network and industrial operating modes
Industrial mode
I/T network mode
Same as I/T network mode, but the UPS does not
Overload, and Bypass
Load is transfered to Bypass AC source.
AC source in tolerance.
UPS returns to normal mode if overload released. return to normal mode if overload released.
Overload, and Bypass
The UPS shuts down and load is not transfered to Load is transfered to Bypass AC source with 10
AC source not in tolerance.
Bypass AC source.
Output short circuit and
The load remains powered by the UPS.
Load is transfered to Bypass AC source, the UPS
Bypass AC source in
The UPS shuts down after 3 minutes if the short
returns to normal mode if the short circuit is released
tolerance.
circuit remains.
by downstream circuit breaker action (see section 2.6).
Output short circuit and
The load remains powered by the UPS. The UPS The load is transfered to Bypass AC source with 10
Bypass AC source not in
shuts down after 3 minutes if the short circuit
milliseconds output break. The UPS does not return to
tolerance.
remains.
normal mode if the short circuit is released by
milliseconds output break. The UPS does not return to

normal mode if overload released.
downstream circuit breaker action (see section 2.6).
Selection of protection devices

UPS unit with common Normal and Bypass AC inputs
11
Upstream
circuit breaker
(not supplied)
Bypass AC
Normal AC
Input
fuse
Downstream
circuit breaker
(not supplied)
Output
fuse
10
8
Q1
UPS unit with separate Normal and Bypass AC inputs

Upstream
circuit breaker
(not supplied)
Bypass AC
11
Upstream
circuit breaker
(not supplied)
Normal AC
Input
fuse
Downstream
circuit breaker
(not supplied)
Output
fuse
10
8
Q1
When sizing the upstream circuit breakers, the parameters presented below must be taken into account:
Line current values
UPS
Continuous current
Continuous current
power rating
at 230/160 Volts and
at 160 Volts and overload
nominal load
= 110 % limited to 2
Input fuse rating
Output fuse rating
minutes
7 kVA
23/33 A
37 A
63 A
63 A
11 kVA
38/54 A
60 A
80 A
80 A
Discrimination of upstream/downstream protections mentioned in paragraph 2.6 is achieved for a 30 m cable length and
10 mm2 cross section.
Circuit breaker capacity must be selected according to the installation, length and cross section of cables.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 35
5. Appendices
Time/current curves for UPS input and output fuses
t (s)
104
104
103
103
102
102
10
10
10- 1
10- 1
-2
-2
10
10
10- 3
10- 3
10- 4
t (s)
I (A)
10
102
103
10- 4
104
I (A)
10
102
103
Comet EX 11 RT input and output fuses: 80 A
Comet EX 7 RT input and output fuses: 63 A
UPS Input / output characteristics

Source
Frequency
Voltage
Normal AC source
160 to 280 Volts AC
40 to 70 Hz
Bypass AC source
187 to 264 Volts AC*
48 to 52 Hz**
Load output
230 Volts AC (200/208/220/240/250 V are
50/60 Hz autoranging
possible values)
(or frequency converter)
(*): depends on output voltage setting, can be modified by software.

(**): set to +/- 4% by default, (1,2,4,8 are possible values), can be modified by software.
Power supplied as a function of input voltage

P/Pn
100%
70%
U
120V 160V
Page 36 - 34007558EN/AA
280V
104
5. Appendices
Permissible UPS overloads as a function of time
P/Pn
1.5
1.25
1.1
1.02
0.5s
t
30s
60s
120s
Short-circuit current provided by the UPS in Normal or Batterie mode
Comet EX 7 RT : 110 A for 80 ms.

Comet EX 11 RT : 190 A for 80 ms.
Comet EX Transformer
Nominal power
Nominal current
11 kVA
63 A
160-280 Volts AC
Input voltage
Voltage drop
Frequency
Isolation (EN 61558-1-2-4)
Operating temperature
Max. operating rel. humidity
Derating / altitude
Dimensions HxWxD (tower)
Dimensions HxWxD (rack 3U)
Weight
7 Volts at nominal load

50/60 Hz (+/-10%)
3.75 kV / 5 M ohms
From 0 to +40C
95%
Pn-10% > 1000 m
444 x 131 x 635 mm
131 x 444 x 635 mm
86.5 kg
Comet EX RT CLA module

AC input voltage: 160-280 Volts AC,
Input frequency: 40-70 Hz,
Battery charge current: 6 A DC,
Recharge time to recover 90% of the rated backup time after discharge at full load:
Comet EX 7 RT
Comet EX 11 RT
Configuration for
2 hours backup time
Configuration for
4 hours backup time
Configuration for
8 hours backup time
5 hours
7 hours
12 hours
15 hours
20 hours
24 hours
Thermal characteristics
The operating temperature is 0 to 40C (8 hours at 45C), however optimum operation is within the +20 to +25C range.
Battery backup time is adversely affected by high and low temperatures. It is significantly reduced at temperatures under
10C. Above 25C, battery service life is cut in half every 10C. Above 40C, battery manufacturers no longer guarantee
operation due to the risk of thermal runaway.
Air enters through the front and exits through the back.
34007558EN/AA
- Page 37
5. Appendices
5.2 Glossary
Backup time
Time that the connected loads can operate on battery power.
Bypass AC source
Source supplying the bypass line. The load can be transferred to the bypass line if an overload
occurs on the UPS output, for maintenance or in the event of a malfunction.
ECO mode
Operating mode by which the load is supplied directly by the AC source if it is within the
tolerances defined by the user. This mode reduces the consumption of electrical power.
Load
Devices or systems connected to the UPS output.
Manual bypass
Rotary switch controlled by the user, used to connect the loads directly to the AC source.
Transfer of the load to the manual bypass enables UPS maintenance without interrupting the
supply of power to the connected loads.
Normal (double conversion) mode

The normal UPS operating mode in which the AC source supplies the UPS which in turn
supplies the connected loads (after electronic double conversion).
Normal AC source
Normal source of power for the UPS.
Relay contacts
Contacts supplying information to the user in the form of signals.
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply.
5.3 Index
A
Automatic By-pass ......................................................... 16
LEDs ................................................................................ 7
Long backup time charger (CLA) module ........................ 9
B
Battery ................................................... 6, 9, 13-14, 29, 33
Buttons ............................................................................. 7
C
Cable cross-sections ...................................................... 20
Circuit-breakers
Battery ...................................................................... 6
Input ......................................................................... 6
Upstream, downstream .......................................... 20
Communication card ................................................ 11, 17
Communication ports ................................................. 6, 16
Connections
Access ...................................................................... 9
AC inputs, output ............................................... 21-23
Auxiliary wires ................................................... 16-17
Battery .................................................................... 24
Communication card .............................................. 12
Isolation transformer ............................................... 24
Long backup time charger ...................................... 25
D
Dimensions ...................................................................... 5
Display ....................................................................... 7, 31
E
Emergency remote power OFF ....................... 6, 10, 16-17
Environmental .................................................................. 2
M
Manual By-pass ................................................... 6, 32, 33
O
Outputs contacts ............................................................ 16
P
Provided cables ............................................................. 11
R
Rotate switch (by-pass) ................................................... 6
S
Standards ......................................................................... 2
T
Terminals
AC inputs .................................................................. 6
AC output ................................................................. 6
Auxiliaries informations ...................................... 6, 16
Communication .................................................. 6, 16
Telescopic rails ................................................... 11, 14-15
Tower stands ............................................................ 11-12
W
Weight .............................................................................. 5
I
Isolation transformer ....................................... 7, 18-19, 24
Page 38 - 34007558EN/AA

Rolls-Royce Icon (TM) Dynamic Positioning System Class 2 User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rolls-Royce Icon (TM) Dynamic Positioning System Class 2 User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Copyright 2007 Rolls-Royce plc

[THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

Target Groups ...........................................................................................1-3

Terms and Abbreviations ........................................................................1-4

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

This chapter specifies safety instructions to follow when

This chapter briefly describes the system components, the

This chapter specifies the delivered equipment.

This chapter contains technical specifications and

This chapter describes how to use the Icon system.

This chapter describes how to maintain the Icon system,

This chapter describes how to act when a malfunction occur

This chapter contains contact information for Rolls-Royce

10. Spare Parts

This chapter specifies recommended spare parts for the Icon

This chapter describes required and recommended tools for

12. Design Drawings

This chapter consists of design drawings that serve as an

14. Subsuppliers Manuals

This chapter contains documentation from other suppliers

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU

Copyright 2008 Rolls-Royce plc

4 Terms and Abbreviations

Alternating Current, Direct Current

Analogue Input, Analogue Output

Basic twisted pair

Controller Area Network Bus

Controllable Pitch Propeller

Cross Track Error

Differential Global Positioning System

Digital Input, Digital Output

DP Controller (Marine Controller used for DP calculations)

Estimated Time of Arrival

Factory Acceptance Test

Global Navigation Satellite System

Global Support Network

Graphical User Interface

Harbour Acceptance Test

Horizontal Dilution of Precision

Vertical motion of the entire ship

Integrated Bridge System

International Maritime Organization

I/O Controller (Marine Controller used for I/O calculations)

Local Area Network

Light Emitting Diode

Fibre-optic cable which allows multiple modes (light rays) to pass

National Marine Electronics Association

Doc. No.: CAA-021001-01MU

Power Management System

Revolutions Per Minute

Rolls-Royce Marine Controller

Rudder Steering Gear

Sea Acceptance Test

Braid and foil screened twisted pair

Straight Tip (a fibre-optic connector used with multimode fiber)

Shielded Twisted Pair

Vertical Reference Unit (also called VRS)

Cross Track Deviation

Rotation about the centre of selected rotation